SystemManager 6.7 User Guide

SystemManager
Release 6.7
User Guide
Revision B
Manual Part No. 28-0030
September 2017
Copyright © 2000–2017 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. Harmonic, the Harmonic logo, Omneon, the Omneon logo, [all other Harmonic products
mentioned] are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Harmonic Inc. in the United States and other countries. Dolby, Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby E are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Implementations of AAC and HE-AAC by Fraunhofer IIS. Other
company, product and service names mentioned herein may be trademarks or service marks of their respective owners. All product and application
features and specifications are subject to change at Harmonic's sole discretion at any time and without notice.
Disclaimer
Harmonic reserves the right to alter the product specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication
shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty. The information
contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute a binding offer for sale of the product described herein. Harmonic assumes
no responsibility or liability arising from the use of the products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic. The use and
purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic.
Nothing hereunder constitutes a representation or warranty that using any product in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third
parties.
®
Third-party product trademarks
Adobe After Effects , Photoshop , Flash Professional, Premiere
Avid Media Composer
Jünger Audio
Apple QuickTime
Microsoft Mediaroom
Microsoft PlayReady
DOCSIS 3.0
Start Over TV
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
™
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
Dolby is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Pulse, aacPlus, AC-3, and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Level Magic and Jünger are trademarks of Jünger Audio Studiotechnik GmbH.
MPEG Audio technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS http://www.iis.fraunhofer.de/amm/.
PitchBlue is a registered trademark of Vigor Systems.
QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., used under license therefrom.
®
®
Third-party copyright notes
Harmonic software uses version 3.15.4 of the FreeImage open source image library under FreeImage Public License (FIPL). See http://
freeimage.sourceforge.net for details. The product may include implementations of AAC and HE-AAC by Fraunhofer IIS; and MPEG Audio technology
licensed from Fraunhofer IIS.
The software described in this publication may use version 2.8 of FFmpeg open source package under Lesser General Public License (LGPL).
The software described in this publication is furnished under a nondisclosure agreement, or the License Agreement and Limited Warranty stated below,
and the end user license agreement (which is furnished with the software), which may have additional terms. The software may be used or copied only
in accordance with the terms of those agreements. By using the software, you acknowledge you have read the end user license agreement and the
License Agreement and Limited Warranty provision.
The product described in this publication maybe covered by one or more of U.S. Patents, their foreign counterparts and pending patent applications.
The product is distributed with certain other software that may require disclosure or distribution of licenses, copyright notices, conditions of use,
disclaimers and/or other matter. Use of this product or otherwise fulfilling their conditions constitutes your acceptance of it, as necessary. Copies of
such licenses, notices, conditions, disclaimers and/or other matter are available in any one of the following locations: the LEGAL NOTICES AND
LICENSES section of the documentation directory of the product, user guide, or by contacting us at support@harmonicinc.com.
Notice
Information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice or obligation. While every effort has been made to ensure that the
information is accurate as of the publication date, Harmonic Inc. assumes no liability for errors or omissions. In addition, Harmonic Inc.assumes no
responsibility for damages resulting from the use of this guide.
License agreement and limited warranty
1.
AGREEMENT: This is a legal agreement ("Agreement") between you ("you" or "your") and Harmonic, or its appropriate local affiliate ("Harmonic",
"we", "us" or "our"). Use of our product(s) and any updates thereto purchased or validly obtained by you (the "Products"), and/or the Software (as
defined below) (collectively, the "System"), constitutes your acceptance of this Agreement. "Use" includes opening or breaking the seal on the
2
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
packet containing this Agreement, installing or downloading the Software as defined below or using the Software preloaded or embedded in your
System. As used herein, the term "Software" means the Harmonic owned software and/or firmware used in or with the Products and embedded
into, provided with or loaded onto the Products in object code format, but does not include, and this Agreement does not address, any third-party
or free or open source software separately licensed to you ("Third Party Software"). If you do not agree to this Agreement, you shall promptly
return the System with a dated receipt to the seller for a full refund.
LICENSE: Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement (including payment), we hereby grant you a nonexclusive, nontransferable
license to use the object code version of the Software embedded into, provided solely for use with or loaded onto the Product, and the
accompanying documentation ("Documentation") for your internal business purposes. The Software and any authorized copies are owned by us
or our suppliers, and are protected by law, including without limitation the copyright laws and treaties of the U.S.A. and other countries. Evaluation
versions of the Software may be subject to a time-limited license key.
RESTRICTIONS: You (and your employees and contractors) shall not attempt to reverse engineer, disassemble, modify, translate, create
derivative works of, rent, lease (including use on a timesharing, applications service provider, service bureau or similar basis), loan, distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the System, in whole or part except to the extent otherwise permitted by law. The Software may be operated
on a network only if and as permitted by its Documentation. You may make one (1) back up copy of the object code of the Software for archival
purposes only. Evaluation Software will be run in a lab, nonproductive environment. Results of any benchmark or other performance tests may
not be disclosed to any third party without our prior written consent. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation, and all copyright,
patent, trade secret, trademark, and other intellectual property rights in the System, shall remain our or our licensors' property. You shall not
remove or alter any copyright or other proprietary rights notice on the System. We reserve all rights not expressly granted.
LIMITED WARRANTY: (a) Limited Warranty. We warrant to you that, commencing on your receipt of a Product and terminating 1 year thereafter,
the System will perform substantially in accordance with its then-current appropriate Documentation. The Product (including replacements) may
consist of new, used or previously-installed components. (b) Remedies. If the System fails to comply with such warranty during such period,
as your sole remedy, you must return the same in compliance with our product return policy, and we shall, at our option, repair or replace the
System, provide a workaround, or refund the fees you paid. Replacement Systems are warranted for the original System's remaining warranty
period. (c) Exclusions. EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS LICENSED ON AS-IS BASIS AND SUBJECT TO 4(d). We will have no obligation under
this limited warranty due to: (i) negligence, misuse or abuse of the System, such as unusual physical or electrical stress, misuse or accidents; (ii)
use of the System other than in accordance with the Documentation; (iii) modifications, alterations or repairs to the System made by a party other
than us or our representative; (iv) the combination, operation or use of the System with equipment, devices, software or data not supplied by
us; (v) any third party hardware or Third Party Software, whether or not provided by us; (vi) any failure other than by us to comply with handling,
operating, environmental, storage or maintenance requirements for the System in the Documentation, including, without limitation, temperature
or humidity ranges. (d) Disclaimers. We are not responsible for your software, firmware, information, or data contained in, stored on, or integrated
with any Product returned to us for repair or replacement. SUCH LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF, AND WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM,
ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
WE DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE SYSTEM WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. NO
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED FROM US OR ELSEWHERE, WILL CREATE ANY WARRANTY
NOT EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or limitations on how long
an implied warranty may last, so such exclusions may not apply to you. In that event, such implied warranties or limitations are limited to 60 days
from the date you purchased the System or the shortest period permitted by applicable law, if longer. This warranty gives you specific legal rights
and you may have other rights which vary from state to state or country to country.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: WE AND OUR AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, LICENSORS, OR SALES CHANNELS ("REPRESENTATIVES") SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST REVENUES, PROFITS OR SAVINGS, OR THE COST OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS, HOWEVER
CAUSED, UNDER CONTRACT, TORT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF WE WERE ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, WE AND
OUR REPRESENTATIVES' TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE SYSTEM SHALL
BE LIMITED TO THE TOTAL PAYMENTS TO US UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR THE SYSTEM. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL
NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY TO PERSONS OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY IN ANY JURISDICTION WHERE APPLICABLE
LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR BACKING UP YOUR DATA AND FILES, AND HEREBY
RELEASE US AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES FROM ANY LIABILITY OR DAMAGES DUE TO THE LOSS OF ANY SUCH DATA OR FILES.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
CONFIDENTIALITY: Information in the System and the associated media, as well as the structure, organization and code of the Software, are
proprietary to us and contain valuable trade secrets developed or acquired at great expense to us or our suppliers. You shall not disclose to
others or utilize any such information except as expressly provided herein, except for information (i) lawfully received by the user from a third
party which is not subject to confidentiality obligations; (ii) generally available to the public without breach of this Agreement; (iii) lawfully known to
the user prior to its receipt of the System; or (iv) required by law to be disclosed.
SUPPORT: Updates, upgrades, fixes, maintenance or support for the System (an "Upgrade") after the limited warranty period may be available
at separate terms and fees from us. Any Upgrades shall be subject to this Agreement, except for additional or inconsistent terms we specify.
Upgrades do not extend the limited warranty period.
TERM; TERMINATION: The term of this Agreement shall continue unless terminated in accordance with this Section. We may terminate this
Agreement at any time upon default by you of the license provisions of this Agreement, or any other material default by you of this Agreement not
cured with thirty (30) days after written notice thereof. You may terminate this Agreement any time by terminating use of the System. Except for
the first sentence of Section 2 ("License") and for Section 4(a) ("Limited Warranty"), all provisions of this Agreement shall survive termination of
this Agreement. Upon any such termination, you shall certify in writing such termination and non-use to us.
EXPORT CONTROL: You agree that the Products and Software will not be shipped, transferred, or exported into any country or used in any
manner prohibited by the United States Export Administration Act or any other export laws, restrictions, or regulations (the "Export Laws"). You
will indemnify, defend and hold us harmless from any and all claims arising therefrom or relating thereto. In addition, if the Products or Software
are identified as export controlled items under the Export Laws, you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen, or otherwise located within,
an embargoed nation (including without limitation Iran, Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise
prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the Software. All rights to the Products and Software are granted on condition that such rights
are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement.
3
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
10.
11.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS: The Software and the documentation which accompanies the Software are "Commercial Items," as that term is
defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of "Commercial Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms
are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through
227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S.
Government as end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms
and conditions herein. Harmonic, 4300 North First Street, San Jose, CA 95134, U.S.A.
GENERAL:You shall not assign, delegate or sublicense your rights or obligations under this Agreement, by operation of law or otherwise, without
our prior written consent, and any attempt without such consent shall be void. Subject to the preceding sentence, this Agreement binds and
benefits permitted successors and assigns. This Agreement is governed by California law, without regard to its conflicts of law principles. The
U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is disclaimed. If any claim arises out of this Agreement, the parties hereby
submit to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of the federal and state courts located in Santa Clara County, California. In addition to any other
rights or remedies, we shall be entitled to injunctive and other equitable relief, without posting bond or other security, to prevent any material
breach of this Agreement. We may change the terms, conditions and pricing relating to the future licensing of our Systems and other intellectual
property rights, including this Agreement, from time to time. No waiver will be implied from conduct or failure to enforce rights nor effective unless
in a writing signed on behalf of the party against whom the waiver is asserted. If any part of this Agreement is found unenforceable, the remaining
parts will be enforced to the maximum extent permitted. There are no third-party beneficiaries to this Agreement. We are not bound by additional
and/or conflicting provisions in any order, acceptance, or other correspondence unless we expressly agree in writing. This Agreement is the
complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties as to its subject matter and supersedes all proposals or prior agreements,
verbal or written, advertising, representations or communications concerning the System.
Every reasonable attempt has been made to comply with all licensing requirements for all components used in the system. Any oversight is
unintentional and will be remedied if brought to the attention of Harmonic at support@harmonicinc.com.
Documentation conventions
In Harmonic documents, special symbols and fonts call your attention to important information.
DANGER: The Danger symbol indicates information that, if ignored, can cause physical
harm to you.
CAUTION: The Caution symbol indicates information that, if ignored, can adversely affect
the performance of your Harmonic product, or that can make a procedure needlessly
difficult.
NOTE: The Note symbol indicates especially important information you need, or it may
provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances.
IMPORTANT: The Important symbol indicates information that should stand out when you
are reading product details and procedural information.
TIP: The Tip symbol indicates parenthetical information that is not necessary for
performing a given procedure, but which, if followed, makes the procedure easier,
smoother, or more efficient.
In addition to these symbols, this guide may use the following text conventions:
Convention
Explanation
Typed Command
Indicates the text that you type in at the keyboard prompt.
Ctrl, Ctrl + Shift
A key or key sequence to press.
http://www.harmonicinc.com
The italics in blue text to indicate Cross-references, and
hyperlinked cross-references in online documents.
Bold
Indicates a button to click, or a menu item to select.
Screen Output
Emphasis
The text that is displayed on a computer screen.
The italics text used for emphasis and document references.
4
Table of Contents
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 15
SystemManager documentation suite................................................................................................. 15
Terms............................................................................................................................................... 16
Abbreviations................................................................................................................................... 18
Part I: SystemManager..................................................................................................................... 20
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration..............................................................................21
Logging in to the SystemManager application..............................................................................22
About SystemManager functionality.............................................................................................22
About the SystemManager database and file details.................................................................... 23
Setting the Discovery Interval...................................................................................................... 24
Setting the database configuration.............................................................................................. 24
Setting the facility name............................................................................................................. 25
Monitoring hot spares................................................................................................................ 25
Setting the GUI refresh interval................................................................................................... 25
Controlling track tags on players................................................................................................ 26
Configuring the player resource check........................................................................................ 26
Configuring player case sensitivity.............................................................................................. 26
Configuring players to stop recording when the disk is full........................................................... 27
Configuring players to stop recording when an input error occurs.................................................27
Configuring players to use 704 up/down conversion by default....................................................28
Configuring players to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD...............................................................29
Changing the preferred primary Harmonic component to be monitored.........................................29
Changing firmware version source files....................................................................................... 30
Logging off the SystemManager..................................................................................................30
About environment variables...................................................................................................... 30
Adding custom Help and custom configuration notes....................................................................30
Viewing SystemManager software version information................................................................. 31
Accessing the SystemManager online help...................................................................................31
User management...................................................................................................................... 31
Viewing users...................................................................................................................... 31
Modifying users................................................................................................................... 32
Deleting users...................................................................................................................... 33
Adding users....................................................................................................................... 33
Diagnostics and troubleshooting..................................................................................................33
Viewing system status...........................................................................................................33
Viewing and/or clearing alarms...........................................................................................34
Filtering alarms.................................................................................................................... 35
Editing alarm thresholds....................................................................................................... 36
5
SystemManager
Setting email alarm notifications........................................................................................... 38
Connecting a device from a different IP network....................................................................39
Removing devices.................................................................................................................40
About the system log........................................................................................................... 40
SNMP configuration................................................................................................................... 41
About SNMP support........................................................................................................... 41
About setting up the Manager Proxy Agent...........................................................................42
About setting up Harmonic MediaGrid SNMP agents.............................................................42
Setting up alarm notification using SNMP traps..................................................................... 42
About SystemManager alarm status colors............................................................................ 43
About troubleshooting SNMP queries.................................................................................... 43
Monitoring Spectrum system components using SNMP........................................................... 43
Monitoring Harmonic MediaGrid components using SNMP.................................................... 45
About SystemManager proxy agent MIB content....................................................................45
Part II: Spectrum................................................................................................................................ 48
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration................................................................... 49
Viewing the components of a Spectrum system............................................................................ 50
About the System Diagram user interface.................................................................................... 50
Default names for Spectrum video servers............................................................................. 51
Viewing Spectrum video server properties................................................................................... 52
Spectrum server: Host Properties fields.................................................................................. 53
Spectrum server: General Properties fields.............................................................................56
Spectrum server: Public Ethernet Interfaces............................................................................ 58
Spectrum server: Environment............................................................................................... 64
Changing a Spectrum video server host name............................................................................. 66
Setting Ethernet interfaces on a MediaCenter 2200/2200A as public ports................................... 67
Configuring network settings.......................................................................................................67
About Ethernet failover and bandwidth................................................................................. 68
Planning your network settings............................................................................................. 68
Configuring your network settings.........................................................................................68
Examples of basic Ethernet interface configurations................................................................71
About Ethernet interface failover...........................................................................................72
Configuring Ethernet interfaces for failover............................................................................ 73
Configuring additional routes............................................................................................... 75
Changing the primary IP address......................................................................................... 76
Configuring watch folders...........................................................................................................77
About LXF support............................................................................................................... 79
Configuring Auto-export to Harmonic MediaGrid........................................................................ 80
Configuring Auto-Export for Proxy Files................................................................................ 82
Configuring SMPTE 2022-6........................................................................................................ 83
Enabling 2022-6 for the I/O module....................................................................................83
Configuring network settings for the 10 Gb I/O modules....................................................... 83
Configuring RouteTables....................................................................................................... 84
Configuring 2022-6 settings for a Spectrum X channel.......................................................... 86
Starting and stopping 2022-6 streams.................................................................................. 88
Configuring transport stream ingest.............................................................................................88
Previewing material from a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS............................................................89
Mounting a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system.................................................................. 89
6
Table of Contents
Configuring a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system mount............................................... 90
About the Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system path and the player "Default Clip
Directory"............................................................................................................................ 91
Changing a Spectrum video server description............................................................................ 92
Specifying character sets to use with certain protocols and QuickTime........................................... 93
Viewing character sets associated with Spectrum video servers..................................................... 94
Editing track tags....................................................................................................................... 95
About Track Tag files........................................................................................................... 95
Copying the track tag file to Spectrum video servers outside an EFS.............................................. 97
Changing the Spectrum video server time zone........................................................................... 97
Changing the Spectrum video server wink state........................................................................... 97
Rebooting the Spectrum video server...........................................................................................98
Powering down the Spectrum video server.................................................................................. 98
Viewing a snapshot of the Spectrum video server log...................................................................99
Upgrading the Spectrum video server license...............................................................................99
Viewing licensed features for a Spectrum video server................................................................100
About demo licenses.......................................................................................................... 100
Changing logging variable settings........................................................................................... 101
Configuring access control settings for video servers.................................................................. 102
Configuring access control settings for multiple video servers................................................ 102
Configuring access control settings for CIFS.........................................................................105
Configuring access control settings for a single video server................................................. 105
Installing a DDC file................................................................................................................. 108
Connecting to a Harmonic MediaGrid from the Spectrum video server........................................ 108
Changing network and file system performance settings............................................................. 109
About file types........................................................................................................................111
About file types used on a Spectrum video server................................................................ 111
About Support for MXF eVTR............................................................................................. 112
About Spectrum video server striping for files transferred over Ethernet................................. 113
About file handling for Final Cut Pro.................................................................................. 114
About changing the Ethernet file striping behavior............................................................... 114
Mapping suffixes for file types............................................................................................115
About file sharing cautions and limitations.......................................................................... 116
About source code availability............................................................................................117
About naming files and system elements............................................................................. 117
Editing the Filetypes.conf file.....................................................................................................118
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration.................................................................... 120
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and 2252/2251 file system configurations.......................... 121
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and MediaStore 5100 file system configurations.................. 121
Building a file system for a single MediaDirector 2252B/2251B or 2252/2251Series.................. 122
Building an EFS system for multiple MediaDirector 2252B/2251B or 2252/2251 Series...............123
Verifying Spectrum video servers in an EFS have common views of storage..................................124
About disk subsystem performance factors.................................................................................124
About the MediaCenter file system configuration........................................................................125
About the file system configuration for MediaCenter 2200B with the MediaStore 7200................. 125
About the MediaDeck 7000 file system configuration................................................................. 126
About the Spectrum X file system configuration..........................................................................126
Creating a RAID set................................................................................................................. 127
Deleting a RAID set..................................................................................................................127
Adding drives to a RAID set..................................................................................................... 128
7
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
SystemManager
Removing drives from a RAID set..............................................................................................129
Creating a file system...............................................................................................................130
Initializing a file system............................................................................................................ 130
Deleting a file system............................................................................................................... 131
Renaming a file system.............................................................................................................132
Extending a file system.............................................................................................................132
Adding a RAID set to a file system........................................................................................... 133
Removing a RAID set from a file system.................................................................................... 134
Changing a file system wink state............................................................................................. 134
Viewing a file system Unicode status......................................................................................... 135
Modifying the RAID set channel................................................................................................ 135
About making or clearing a hot spare...................................................................................... 136
Making a global hot spare drive........................................................................................ 137
Making a local hot spare drive.......................................................................................... 137
Clearing a global hot spare drive.......................................................................................138
Clearing a local hot spare drive......................................................................................... 138
Changing RAID set wink state...................................................................................................139
Using One-Click functions.........................................................................................................139
About One-Click functions.................................................................................................. 139
Viewing One-Click functions............................................................................................... 139
One-Click functions page options....................................................................................... 140
Creating and starting a file system..................................................................................... 141
Stopping all file systems..................................................................................................... 142
Starting all file systems.......................................................................................................142
Deleting all file systems...................................................................................................... 142
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance............................................... 143
Viewing Spectrum storage properties........................................................................................ 143
Storage properties............................................................................................................. 144
Changing the MediaStore name............................................................................................... 146
Winking all drives on a MediaStore..........................................................................................146
Winking one drive on a MediaStore......................................................................................... 146
Viewing drive properties...........................................................................................................147
Drive properties................................................................................................................. 147
About proactive drive removal..................................................................................................150
Viewing RAID set information................................................................................................... 150
RAID Utilities fields.............................................................................................................151
Viewing general file system information.................................................................................... 152
Assigning a virtual channel to a RAID set..................................................................................153
Navigating the Disk Utilities......................................................................................................153
Upgrading drive firmware........................................................................................................ 154
Failing a drive......................................................................................................................... 154
Unfailing a drive......................................................................................................................155
Replacing a failed drive........................................................................................................... 155
Renaming a RAID set............................................................................................................... 155
Stopping a RAID set rebuild in progress....................................................................................156
Restarting a RAID set rebuild.................................................................................................... 156
Starting the file system............................................................................................................. 157
Stopping the file system............................................................................................................159
8
Table of Contents
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration..................................................................161
About Spectrum X configurations.............................................................................................. 161
Viewing a Spectrum X in shared storage mode..........................................................................162
Viewing a Spectrum X in internal storage mode.................................................................. 163
Viewing I/O module properties................................................................................................ 163
I/O module properties....................................................................................................... 164
About GPIO Configuration................................................................................................. 166
I/O module environment properties.................................................................................... 167
Changing the channel mode.....................................................................................................168
About Enhanced Channel mode......................................................................................... 169
About UHD Channel mode.................................................................................................169
About Simulcast mode..............................................................................................................170
Enabling OP-47 subtitle conversion........................................................................................... 170
Configuring OP-47 subtitle conversion for the MediaPort 5000 series..........................................171
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers..................................................................................... 172
Creating GPIO triggers...................................................................................................... 172
Changing the I/O module name...............................................................................................173
Changing the I/O module description....................................................................................... 174
Changing the I/O module wink state........................................................................................ 174
Rebooting the I/O module........................................................................................................174
Upgrading I/O module firmware.............................................................................................. 175
About software licensing for Spectrum X................................................................................... 175
Upgrading the MediaPort or ChannelPort license....................................................................... 175
Viewing I/O module alarms and events.................................................................................... 176
Overview of configuring a MediaPort channel for Playlist Control............................................... 177
Spectrum X and ChannelPort system configuration overview....................................................... 177
Determining the Spectrum X and ChannelPort port number.........................................................178
About recording embedded and non-embedded audio...............................................................180
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration.................................................................181
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel.....................................................................181
Master Control Switcher Configuration................................................................................ 182
Effect Configuration............................................................................................................187
Event Configuration............................................................................................................192
EAS Configuration............................................................................................................. 197
Renaming the graphics directory folder..................................................................................... 199
Enabling and configuring Independent Branding........................................................................199
Enabling Independent Branding.......................................................................................... 200
Configuring Independent Branding......................................................................................200
Configuring audio profiles........................................................................................................ 203
About audio profiles and audio profile groups.................................................................... 204
About Dolby® E decode support........................................................................................ 204
Creating an audio profile group.........................................................................................206
Examples of audio profiles................................................................................................. 208
Importing an audio profile group....................................................................................... 213
Exporting an audio profile group....................................................................................... 214
Deleting an audio profile group......................................................................................... 214
Mapping audio profiles to a channel.................................................................................. 214
About audio processing of voice-overs................................................................................215
9
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
SystemManager
Configuring audio watermarking.............................................................................................. 215
Installing license files for audio watermarking......................................................................215
Configuring a Spectrum X channel for audio watermarking.................................................. 218
Configuring Dolby® E encode.................................................................................................. 220
Configuring a Spectrum X channel for Dolby E encode........................................................ 221
Chapter 7: Player configuration............................................................................................. 223
Creating a player.................................................................................................................... 224
Edit Player options............................................................................................................. 224
Configuring video tracks...........................................................................................................231
Configuring a DV track......................................................................................................231
Configuring a DVCPRO Player........................................................................................... 233
Creating a DVCPRO 50 Player...........................................................................................235
Creating a DVCPRO HD player.......................................................................................... 236
Creating a DV MPEG SD Player.........................................................................................237
Creating an MPEG SD Player.............................................................................................239
Creating an MPEG HD Play only Player..............................................................................243
Creating an MPEG HD Record only Player.......................................................................... 244
Creating an MPEG SD Player to Demux Transport Streams and VBI Data...............................245
Creating an MPEG HD Player to Demux Transport Streams.................................................. 246
Creating an Uncompressed (SD only) player....................................................................... 247
About Recording and Playing Back XDCAM HD Clips..........................................................247
Creating an XDCAM HD or XDCAM EX Player................................................................... 247
Creating an XDCAM-HD RDD9 Player................................................................................ 250
Creating a DNxHD/VC-3 player........................................................................................ 252
Creating a Data Player (DVB/ASI)......................................................................................253
Creating an AVC-Intra Player............................................................................................. 253
Creating an AVC-Intra UHD player.....................................................................................255
Creating an AVC-Long GOP player.................................................................................... 256
Creating a ProRes Player....................................................................................................257
Creating an AVC (H.264) Player........................................................................................ 258
Creating a Compressed Stream Player................................................................................ 260
Configuring subtitle insertion.............................................................................................. 261
Configuring closed caption insertion................................................................................... 265
Configuring open caption insertion..................................................................................... 267
Recording proxies.............................................................................................................. 269
Configuring audio tracks.......................................................................................................... 274
About selectable audio tracks............................................................................................. 275
About audio track combinations......................................................................................... 276
Configuring audio scrub...........................................................................................................276
About audio scrub............................................................................................................. 276
Configuring a MediaPort for audio scrub............................................................................ 277
Configuring a Player for Audio Scrub................................................................................. 278
Configuring track tag rules for an audio track........................................................................... 278
Track tag examples............................................................................................................ 279
Attaching devices and setting conversion options....................................................................... 281
Up/down conversion options for the MediaPort 7000 series, ChannelPort, and Spectrum X.... 284
Up/down conversion options for the MediaPort 5400 and 5500 series................................. 288
About SCTE-104 proxy insertion.........................................................................................289
Configuring SCTE-104 proxy insertion................................................................................ 290
About Native Mode........................................................................................................... 291
10
Table of Contents
About configuring for cross conversion............................................................................... 292
About up conversion or down conversion options................................................................ 292
About connecting external up/down converters to Spectrum MediaPorts................................293
Changing the player state........................................................................................................ 294
About activating and deactivating, enabling and disabling...................................................294
Activating and deactivating players.................................................................................... 294
Enabling and disabling players.......................................................................................... 295
Player to player dubbing..........................................................................................................295
Disconnecting Devices.............................................................................................................. 296
Using Auto Input Sense recording............................................................................................. 296
Deleting players....................................................................................................................... 297
Copying a Player..................................................................................................................... 297
Configuring GPIO settings for players....................................................................................... 298
Adjusting output timing............................................................................................................ 300
Creating multiple audio track players........................................................................................ 301
Moving players........................................................................................................................ 303
About allowing players to be enabled or disabled by automation............................................... 303
About the player utility............................................................................................................. 303
About VANC implementation in Spectrum................................................................................. 304
Equation for VANC-328M..................................................................................................305
Equation for VANC-436M..................................................................................................306
About AFD support.................................................................................................................. 306
About Harmonic timecode behavior.......................................................................................... 308
Comparing “From Clip” with “Locked to Player Timeline”..................................................... 309
About “Locked to Clip’s First Timecode”.............................................................................. 311
Comparing “Locked to Clip’s First Timecode” and “From Clip”..............................................312
About “Locked to Clip Position”.......................................................................................... 314
About Cue-to-Timecode with VDCP control................................................................................ 315
Examples of Cue-to-Timecode Enabled and Disabled........................................................... 315
About players created using Spectrum Management.................................................................. 316
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration............................................................................ 317
About playout channels............................................................................................................ 317
About Polaris Play: Playlist Control............................................................................................318
Configuring a playout channel..................................................................................................318
Channel.............................................................................................................................319
Location.............................................................................................................................321
Selecting controlled devices................................................................................................ 321
Player for Time Reference...................................................................................................322
Error Checking.................................................................................................................. 322
Graphic Fade Rates........................................................................................................... 323
Transitions..........................................................................................................................323
Channel Control.................................................................................................................325
Traffic Settings................................................................................................................... 331
Media Fetch configuration overview.......................................................................................... 331
About File System Management..........................................................................................331
Configuring Media Fetch for the video server...................................................................... 332
Configuring Media Fetch for a Playout Channel...................................................................334
Traffic and Billing.....................................................................................................................334
Enabling and configuring global Traffic and Billing Settings..................................................335
Configuring Traffic and Billing for a single playout channel.................................................. 336
11
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
SystemManager
Configuring SNMP critical error traps for Playlist Control........................................................... 338
Configuring Delay Service........................................................................................................ 338
Launching Delay Service from SystemManager.................................................................... 338
Logging in to Delay Service............................................................................................... 339
Configuration overview...................................................................................................... 340
SystemManager configuration for Delay Service.................................................................. 340
Setting up Delay Service.................................................................................................... 341
Creating a Delay Channel..................................................................................................345
Delay Service home page options.......................................................................................347
Running a Delay Channel.................................................................................................. 348
Viewing alarms..................................................................................................................350
Chapter 9: Spectrum client configuration............................................................................. 351
Setting IP addresses through vDHCP..........................................................................................351
About the Domain Name System setup..................................................................................... 354
Adding a new Spectrum video server....................................................................................... 355
About NetBIOS naming............................................................................................................356
About Spectrum video server network services........................................................................... 356
About the File Server setup.......................................................................................................357
About client setup.................................................................................................................... 357
Browsing the Spectrum video server file system from a client.......................................................357
Mapping a Spectrum video server file system to a Windows network drive.................................. 359
Connecting a Macintosh to the Spectrum server using SMB.........................................................360
Playing media files from a Spectrum video server on a Client PC................................................ 361
Copying files from a Spectrum video server to a Client PC......................................................... 362
Copying files from a Client PC to a Spectrum video server......................................................... 362
Part III: Harmonic MediaGrid....................................................................................................... 364
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration................................................................ 365
Gaining secure access to the Harmonic MediaGrid system......................................................... 366
About Harmonic MediaGrid authentication......................................................................... 366
About Harmonic MediaGrid licenses......................................................................................... 367
Installing a Harmonic MediaGrid license file on a cluster............................................................367
About clusters, volumes and groups.......................................................................................... 368
About mixing ContentServers and scheduled balancing.............................................................. 368
About checkpoints and scheduling checkpoints.......................................................................... 369
Configuring Harmonic MediaGrid.............................................................................................369
Creating or deleting a volume............................................................................................ 370
Creating or deleting groups................................................................................................370
Adding or removing ContentServers from a group...............................................................371
About ContentBridge discovery and cluster association.........................................................372
Adding or removing groups from a volume.........................................................................373
Creating or deleting file systems from a volume................................................................... 374
Setting or changing file system permissions......................................................................... 374
Setting replication factors for file systems............................................................................ 375
About file system replication factors.................................................................................... 375
About ContentServer and Cluster bandwidth measurements.................................................. 375
Restarting a Harmonic MediaGrid device.................................................................................. 376
12
Table of Contents
Powering down a Harmonic MediaGrid system......................................................................... 376
Powering down a single ContentDirector............................................................................. 377
Powering down a single ContentBridge............................................................................... 378
Powering down a single ContentServer............................................................................... 378
Powering down a single ContentStore................................................................................. 379
Powering on a Harmonic MediaGrid system..............................................................................379
Editing the slice size configuration file.......................................................................................380
Editing the ContentServer configuration file............................................................................... 381
ContentServer 1000/2000 series parameters...................................................................... 383
ContentServer 3000 and 4000 series parameters................................................................ 384
About Jumbo Frames support............................................................................................. 384
Editing the High Bandwidth ContentBridge configuration file....................................................... 385
Editing the ContentBridge configuration file............................................................................... 386
ContentBridge configuration file parameters........................................................................ 388
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing.......................................................................... 391
Enabling and configuring log forwarding.................................................................................. 392
Log forwarding configuration values................................................................................... 393
Possible log forwarding errors............................................................................................394
Balancing the ContentServer controllers..................................................................................... 395
Upgrading Harmonic MediaGrid firmware................................................................................ 395
Changing the Harmonic MediaGrid wink state.......................................................................... 397
Enabling and configuring checkpoint schedules..........................................................................398
Changing the descriptions for Harmonic MediaGrid components................................................ 399
Chapter 11: Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance......................400
Supported RAID configurations................................................................................................. 400
RAID configurations for the ContentServer 3000 and ContentStore 3160............................... 401
RAID configurations for the ContentServer 4000 and ContentStore 4240............................... 401
RAID configurations for the ContentStore 5840....................................................................402
Creating a RAID set................................................................................................................. 402
Creating a RAID set with Auto Create....................................................................................... 403
Destroying a RAID set.............................................................................................................. 404
Failing a drive......................................................................................................................... 405
Unfailing a drive......................................................................................................................405
Changing RAID set wink state...................................................................................................405
Stopping a RAID set rebuild in progress....................................................................................406
Restarting a RAID set rebuild.................................................................................................... 406
Making a hot spare................................................................................................................. 406
Clearing a hot spare................................................................................................................407
Drive capacity expansion in a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system............................................... 407
About shelf evacuation....................................................................................................... 407
About write bandwidth during shelf evacuation................................................................... 408
Reviewing available space..................................................................................................408
About setting shelves to read-only mode............................................................................. 409
Expanding drive capacity................................................................................................... 410
Possible errors during shelf evacuation................................................................................412
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting................................ 413
Viewing all Harmonic MediaGrid clusters and components.........................................................413
Properties for all clusters.................................................................................................... 413
13
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
SystemManager
Properties for all ContentDirectors....................................................................................... 414
Properties for all ContentServers and ContentStores............................................................. 415
Properties for all ContentBridges......................................................................................... 416
Properties for all High Bandwidth ContentBridges................................................................ 416
Properties for all network switches...................................................................................... 417
About re-replication (for ContentServer 1000 and 2000 Series only).....................................418
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components............................................418
Viewing properties for a single cluster................................................................................ 418
Viewing properties for a single volume............................................................................... 424
Viewing properties for a single group.................................................................................427
Viewing properties for a ContentServer 1000 and 2000 series............................................. 430
Viewing properties for a single ContentServer 3000 or 4000 series...................................... 433
Viewing properties for a ContentStore 3160 or 4240.......................................................... 437
Viewing properties for ContentStores 5840/5840A............................................................. 441
Viewing properties for a ContentDirector.............................................................................441
Viewing properties for a ContentBridge or High Bandwidth ContentBridge............................. 445
Viewing properties for a network switch..............................................................................447
Viewing statistics for clients in Clusters................................................................................ 449
Viewing drive properties...........................................................................................................450
Properties for a drive......................................................................................................... 451
Viewing RAID set information................................................................................................... 453
RAID Utilities fields.............................................................................................................454
Viewing Harmonic MediaGrid performance statistics..................................................................455
Performance statistics user interface.................................................................................... 456
Performance statistics for clusters........................................................................................ 457
Performance statistics for ContentDirectors........................................................................... 458
Performance statistics for ContentServers............................................................................. 459
Performance statistics for ContentBridges............................................................................. 460
Performance statistics for disk drives................................................................................... 461
Viewing and clearing alarms and events for Harmonic MediaGrid components............................ 462
Performing management and troubleshooting on a Harmonic MediaGrid.................................... 463
Accessing the Dell OpenManage utility............................................................................... 463
Accessing the network switch utility.....................................................................................464
Part IV: Media Application Server............................................................................................... 466
Chapter 13: Media Application Server configuration........................................................ 467
Viewing all MAS clusters and servers in a system...................................................................... 467
Properties for all MAS clusters and servers..........................................................................468
Viewing properties for a single MAS cluster.............................................................................. 469
Viewing properties for a single MAS server...............................................................................470
Properties for a MAS server............................................................................................... 471
Opening the MAS portal..........................................................................................................473
Viewing MAS log files..............................................................................................................473
About management and troubleshooting on MAS systems.......................................................... 474
Accessing Dell OpenManage....................................................................................................474
Appendix A: Harmonic Technical Assistance Center contact information.............................. 476
Harmonic corporate contact information.......................................................................................... 477
14
Introduction
The SystemManager application provides management capabilities for the Spectrum , Harmonic
MediaGrid, and Media Application Server (MAS) systems.
™
The SystemManager acts as the administrative hub of an Spectrum media server installation. Its
streamlined and intuitive browser-based user interface allows users to make rapid adjustments to system
configurations, integrate additional components and identify fault conditions.
The SystemManager's fault reporting and alerting capabilities can head off issues before they become
critical. It provides both facility wide control, as well as active monitoring and alerting.
SystemManager documentation suite
SystemManager documentation and software updates are available from the Harmonic website.
Contact Harmonic technical support for login information.
Documents are available in .pdf, and are packaged in the SystemManager-v<version#>Documentation.exe file.
Adobe Acrobat* is needed to view the product documentation. Download this for free from
http://www.adobe.com
This document...
Provides this information...
SystemManager User Guide and
Online Help System
•
•
system configuration procedures
system operation procedures
SystemManager Installation Guide
•
platform and software installation, and
upgrade details
SystemManager Release Notes
•
new features in the SystemManager
release
last minute information regarding a
product release
•
IMPORTANT: To find instructions for configuring legacy Spectrum video servers including
MediaDirector 2100 and 2200 series, ProXchange, ProBrowse, and using ClipTool, refer to
the 6.4 version of the SystemManager User Guide.
15
Terms
Harmonic uses a range of terms to describe product components and the functionality of product
solutions.
Audio Profile
A set of audio down-mix and voice-over parameters that can be mapped to a
Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel source
Audio Profile Group
A group of eight audio profiles.
Balancing
The process of distributing disk space evenly across ContentServers in a
cluster.
ChannelPort
A channel playout platform that provides integrated clip playback, branding,
master control switching, and support for Emergency Alert Systems
Cluster
In the context of Harmonic MediaGrid, refers to a collection of one or
more volumes and groups, and their associated ContentDirectors and
ContentServers within Harmonic MediaGrid.
ContentBridge
An optional server that provides standard interfaces to the Harmonic MediaGrid
for clients that do not have the OCL File System Drive (FSD) installed or an
FSD is not available. The interfaces provided are CIFS and FTP.
ContentDirector
The device that manages operation on the Harmonic MediaGrid, including
load balancing. It is the primary point of contact for clients and determines the
ContentServer availability.
ContentServer
An intelligent storage system that actively monitors the slices stored on it.
ContentServers present content (data) to clients and manage the actual data on
hard drives.
DV
Refers to Digital Video, a compressed digital video format for sound and picture.
Embedded
Refers to two different concepts in this guide:
•
•
The first usage is the embedding of audio data in SDI video streams. The
Spectrum system can input and output audio data either separately (on AES/
EBU connections), or embedded within the SDI video stream.
The second usage pertains to the recording of VBI data. The Spectrum
system gives the option of embedding VBI data within an MPEG file, or
recording the VBI data in a separate file
Enhanced Channel
mode
A licensed feature that combines the resources of two Spectrum X or
ChannelPort channels into one channel.
UHD mode
A licensed feature that uses both SDI cards on the Spectrum X to play out one
channel of Ultra HD video.
16
Terms
Frame or Chassis
Both refer to the specific hardware component of an Spectrum device such as a
Spectrum X or MediaDeck 7000.
Group
In the context of Harmonic MediaGrid, refers to a collection of one or more
ContentServers and ContentDirectors in a Harmonic MediaGrid system.
Hot Swappable
Refers to an electronics board or component (such as a fan or disk drive) that
can be removed from or installed in a chassis while system power is on.
Independent
Branding
A licensed feature for the ChannelPort and Spectrum X, which allows you to
brand a channels Primary and Secondary outputs independently.
Input
Refers to an audio or video signal that is connected to a Spectrum I/O module.
Input also refers to the physical input connectors on the I/O module or SDI I/O
card.
Interleaved
Refers to audio that is recorded within the DV (video) file itself.
MediaPort
Refers to an interface adapter for video, audio, timecode and control. In this
documentation, use of the term MediaPort refers to the I/O module installed in
the MediaDeck 7000.
Mount Point
For Harmonic MediaGrid, this refers to the physical location in the directory
structure where a computer puts the files in a File System.
Output
Refers to an audio or video signal that is connected from a Spectrum I/O
module to a destination digital device. Output also refers to the physical output
connectors on the Spectrum I/O module or SDI I/O card..
Playout Channel
A process that runs on a Spectrum video server, which provides control for
players and graphics, and allows to preview graphics.
Polaris Play: Playlist An optional, licensed Spectrum system feature that provides unattended playout
Control (Polaris Play: of clips and graphics driven by a channel's traffic schedule.
Playlist Control)
SDI
Refers to Serial Digital Interface, a system whereby uncompressed digital
component video signals are distributed using coaxial cable. An SDI signal can
include embedded audio.
SDTI
Refers to a protocol for transporting data at high bit rates (up to 270 Mbps) over
a serial transmission line. The protocol is defined in the SMPTE 305.2M-200
specification. SDTI may carry different types of data, including various forms of
compressed video.
SDTI-CP
Refers to a Sony variation of SDTI for carrying IMX MPEG video at 50 Mbps
Source
Refers to an audio/video device whose output signals are connected to one or
more Spectrum X, ChannelPort, or MediaPort inputs.
System
Refers to an entire Spectrum system and all of its components.
VC-3
A video format defined by the SMPTE 2019-1 standard.
17
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
VANC
Refers to the Vertical Ancillary data in the active portions of lines in the vertical
interval.
Volume
In the context of a Harmonic MediaGrid, this refers to a collection of one or
more groups and their associated ContentServers and ContentDirectors in a
Harmonic MediaGrid.
Abbreviations
Find abbreviations used to identify components of the product solution.
ACE
Access Control Entry (Harmonic MediaGrid)
ACL
Access Control List (Harmonic MediaGrid)
A-D
Analog-to-Digital
AES
Audio Engineering Society
AP
Application Process
AUX
Auxiliary
CBR
Constant Bit Rate
CG
Character Generator
CIFS
Common Internet File System
D-A
Digital-to-Analog
DAT
Digital Audio Tape
DDR
Digital Disk Recorder
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNS
Domain Name System
DV
Digital Video
DVTR
Digital Video Tape Recorder
EAS
Emergency Alert System
E-E
Electronics to Electronics
EFS
Extended File System
FC-AL
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop
FCP
Apple Final Cut Pro
GOP
Group of Pictures
bps
Megabits per second
MCP
Media Control Processor
MCS
Master Control Switcher
MIP
MediaPort
18
Abbreviations
MPEG
Motion Picture Experts Group
MXF
Media eXchange Format
NAS
Network Attached Storage
NLE
Non Linear Editor
RU
Rack Unit
SAN
Storage Area Network
SDI
Serial Digital Interface
SDTI
Serial Data Transport Interface
SMB
Server Message Block
SNMP
Server Message Block
VBI
Vertical Blanking Interval
VDCP
Video Disk Control Protocol
VTR
Video Tape Recorder
VCR
Video Cassette Recorder
19
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Part I
SystemManager
SystemManager
•
SystemManager configuration
20
Chapter 1
SystemManager configuration
SystemManager configuration settings affect the entire system managed by the SystemManager
application.
NOTE: The procedures outlined in this section are written for qualified technical personnel,
skilled at advanced networking procedures. If you have any questions, please consult with
your facility’s Information Service staff or contact Harmonic technical support.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Logging in to the SystemManager application
About SystemManager functionality
About the SystemManager database and file details
Setting the Discovery Interval
Setting the database configuration
Setting the facility name
Monitoring hot spares
Setting the GUI refresh interval
Controlling track tags on players
Configuring the player resource check
Configuring player case sensitivity
Configuring players to stop recording when the disk is full
Configuring players to stop recording when an input error occurs
Configuring players to use 704 up/down conversion by default
Configuring players to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD
Changing the preferred primary Harmonic component to be monitored
Changing firmware version source files
Logging off the SystemManager
About environment variables
Adding custom Help and custom configuration notes
Viewing SystemManager software version information
Accessing the SystemManager online help
User management
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
SNMP configuration
21
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
Logging in to the SystemManager application
Log on to SystemManager using the Internet Explorer browser to control Harmonic devices from both
local and remote computers.
Before you begin
A valid license is required to operate the SystemManager application on either a SystemManager
Platform or a customer-supplied PC. Refer to “Obtaining and Installing a SystemManager License File” in
the SystemManager Installation Guide for detailed instructions on obtaining and installing a license file for
use on the SystemManager hardware. You should have already installed the license file before logging on
to the SystemManager application.
The SystemManager application does not have to be installed on the local or remote PC in order to log
on.
1. From your SystemManager Platform or client PC, double click the Internet Explorer icon to launch
Internet Explorer.
2. If the SystemManager Login dialog does not appear automatically, there are two different ways to
log in, depending upon the computer’s location:
•
•
For the SystemManager Platform or client-PC itself, in the address bar, type: http://localhost/, and
then press Enter.
For any other PC, in the address bar type the name (or IP address) of the SystemManager
Platform, and then press Enter. This name (or address) can be obtained from your system
administrator. For example, http://Managerpc/
3. Press Enter to display the SystemManager Log In window.
4. From the Log In window, click Log In to display the Enter Network Password dialog.
a. Enter the user name: Administrator
b. Enter the password (case sensitive): omneon
5. Click OK to display the Configuration tab. The Spectrum - System Diagram page is displayed by
default.).
Result:
If a valid SystemManager License file is not installed and available for the SystemManager, the following
message appears, “License not available. Please go to the Home > Options page, and update the
license server information.” Refer to “Obtaining and Installing a SystemManager License File” and
“Configuring FLEXlm License Server Data” in the SystemManager Installation Guide for instructions.
About SystemManager functionality
The SystemManager application provides a user interface for monitoring and configuring Harmonic
components, including Spectrum, Harmonic MediaGrid, and Media Application Server (MAS) system
components.
The SystemManager consists of a service (Manager service) which launches when the SystemManager
Platform boots up. This service includes a web server and integrated libraries which communicate with
the Spectrum and ProBrowse components using TCP/IP and UDP/IP over Ethernet.
22
About the SystemManager database and file details
The SystemManager also provides a library which integrates into the Microsoft SNMP Agent (SNMP
Service). This library serves as a proxy SNMP agent, allowing other network management system
products to access a subset of information about the Harmonic equipment from enterprise or workgroup
management products (for example, HP OpenView).
The SystemManager application is the system’s Network Management Server. The SystemManager runs
as a web server that communicates with MediaDirectors over Ethernet.
Using the SystemManager, the capabilities and performance of each SystemManager tool can be
configured, monitored or updated as follows:
•
•
Configuration management deals with network topology, the “state” of the network, device names,
“Player” configuration, end-to-end connections, bandwidth and other related network configuration
tasks.
Fault management handles detection and correction of network problems through error detection
processes and diagnostic testing.
Note the following important SystemManager navigation caveats:
•
•
The application contains many hyperlinks. Internet Explorer allows you to right-click on a hyperlink
and select “Open Link In New Window” or “Open In New Window” (depending upon the type of link)
from the pop up menu. This, however, results in an error message. Thus, the recommended method to
open a new browser window is to click File > New > Window, or simply to press CTRL + N.
Within the application, the browser’s Back button functions erratically. The recommended method is to
use the navigation icons in SystemManager.
Related information
Viewing the components of a Spectrum system on page 50
SNMP configuration on page 41
About the SystemManager database and file details
Find information about SystemManager database parameters.
The SystemManager’s database is saved by default every two minutes to the D:\Omneon\manager\omdb
directory. The database filename is manager.oda. The user can change the filename by editing the D:
\Omneon\apache\conf\httpd.conf configuration file and changing:
OmneonManagerDatabasePath “D:\Omneon/manager/omdb/manager”
Note that the line includes the filename but without any extension. The SystemManager will automatically
add “.oda” to the filename.
The database is backed up by default every 20 minutes to the D:\BackupOmdb directory. The backup
filename is always the same as the original saved database. The user can change the backup directory
by editing the D:\Omneon\apache\conf\httpd.conf configuration file, and changing:
OmneonManagerDatabaseBackupPath “D:/ Backupomdb/manager”
This line contains the directory name and the filename, without any extension.
An additional line in the configuration file can be modified by the user:
OmneonManagerUpgradesPath “D:/Upgrades”
23
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
This line specifies where the SystemManager looks to find firmware upgrade files.
When making changes to the httpd.conf file, the user should shut down the SystemManager before
editing the file. The SystemManager will use the new settings when it starts the next time.
NOTE: Harmonic recommends that you leave the settings for the “Save” directory
and filename, and the “Upgrade” directory as they are. However, if you have a central
server which your Information Systems department archives on a regular basis,
Harmonic recommends that you mount a shared drive from your central server on the
SystemManager platform, and then modify the SystemManager’s “Backup” directory path
to point to the mounted share. This ensures that the database is archived on a regular
basis.
Setting the Discovery Interval
The Discovery Interval determines how often the SystemManager sends out an Ethernet broadcast to
find newly connected Harmonic devices. You may change this interval as needed.
Disabling device discovery will prevent the SystemManager from finding Harmonic devices. This may
be of benefit in some circumstances (for example, when running multiple SystemManagers). Note that
when device discovery is disabled, SystemManager will still discover Harmonic MediaGrid clusters and
Spectrum extended file systems (EFS).
NOTE: Leaving auto-discovery enabled on shared networks may result in slowed network
access. To reduce packet traffic on your Ethernet network, you may wish to completely
disable device discovery by setting the interval to 0.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under Device Auto-Discovery Configuration, click in the Discovery Interval field, and then enter
the desired value (in seconds). Values include 0 (discovery off) or between 3 and 86400 (24 hours).
The default value is 30 seconds.
3. Click Update at the bottom of the page to accept the new value.
NOTE: If the SystemManager is having trouble discovering or connecting to
devices and the devices seem to be working correctly otherwise, try closing the
Internet Explorer window and starting a new one. If the problem continues, stop the
SystemManager in the Services window, then restart it.
Setting the database configuration
You may configure how often the SystemManager saves the database, and how often the database is
backed up.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. To change the database save interval, under Database Configuration, click in the Save Interval field
and enter the desired value (in minutes). Values range from 2 minutes to 1440 minutes (24 hours).
3. To change the database backup interval, under Database Configuration, click in the Backup
Interval field and enter the desired value (from 2 to 1440).
4. Click Update at the bottom of the page to accept the new values.
24
Setting the facility name
Setting the facility name
You may set the facility name that appears at the top headers of the SystemManager pages, and also
identifies the system when being accessed remotely for Harmonic technical support functions.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the heading Miscellaneous Parameters click in the text box following the label Facility Name.
3. Type in your desired facility name.
4. Click Update at the bottom of the page. In order to view the new facility name setting, you must log off
of the SystemManager and then log back in.
Monitoring hot spares
SystemManager monitors hot spare drives in Spectrum RAID sets and sends an alarm when a hot spare
is lost.
For Spectrum RAID sets that don’t include hot spares, you may disable hot spare monitoring.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Scroll down to the Monitor Hotspare field and configure as follows:
◦
◦
Enable Select to specify that an alarm is reported when a RAID set first loses a hot spare.
Disable Select if you do not have hot spares for RAID sets.
IMPORTANT: Harmonic strongly recommends you upgrade to systems with hot
spares. Contact Harmonic technical support for upgrade information.
3. Click Update to accept the new setting.
Note the following important points:
•
•
When upgrading to a new version of the SystemManager application software, Monitor Hotspare is
disabled by default if a SystemManager database (Manager.oda) is detected on system startup.
If the SystemManager database (Manager.oda) is renamed, or for all new systems, Monitor
Hotspare is enabled by default.
Setting the GUI refresh interval
You may specify how frequently the GUI is refreshed with new information.
Setting a longer refresh interval is useful for slow network connections when the default interval of 30
seconds is too short.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. In the Miscellaneous Parameters section, scroll to GUI Refresh Interval and enter a value in
seconds from 10 to 86400 (24 hours).
3. Click Update to save the new setting.
25
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
Controlling track tags on players
By default, track tags are allowed for any Player. You may disable or enable this setting.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the Player Parameters heading, locate the Player Track Tagging field and configure as
follows:
◦
◦
Enable Select to allow track tags on Players.
Disable Select to disallow track tags on Players. Track tag configuration controls no longer appear
on the Edit Player page, however, you can still edit the Track Tag file from the Edit Player Track
Tags page.
3. Click Update at the bottom of the page to accept the new setting.
Configuring the player resource check
The player resource check makes sure that there is sufficient bandwidth available whenever a player is
activated. This check is enabled by default but can be disabled.
CAUTION: The steps in this section should only be performed if you are setting up
automation control of players. If you wish to configure your system for automation control of
players, contact Harmonic technical support for assistance.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the Player Parameters heading, locate the Player Resource Safety Checking field and
configure as follows:
◦
◦
Enable Select to enable player resource checking (default state).
Disable Select to disable player resource checking. If Disable is selected, a warning message
appears.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Update at the bottom of the page to accept the new setting.
Configuring player case sensitivity
You can enable or disable player case sensitivity as needed.
Player case sensitivity is disabled by default, which means that when you attempt to play a clip with an
extension in either lower case (for example, .mov or .mxf) or upper case (for example, MOV or .MXF), the
player will be able to find and open the clip.
If player case sensitivity is enabled, a player will ONLY be able to find clips with lower case extensions
(for example, .mov or .mxf).
IMPORTANT: Harmonic recommends that you leave the default setting.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
26
Configuring players to stop recording when the disk is full
2. Under the Player Parameters heading, locate the Player Case Sensitivity field and configure as
follows:
◦
◦
Enable Select to enable player case sensitivity.
Disable Select to disable player case sensitivity (default).
The change will take affect once the affected player is activated. If the player is already activated, it
must be deactivated and then activated again.
Configuring players to stop recording when the disk is full
You can configure Spectrum to stop recording when there is no available disk space.
By default, the players in a Spectrum system will continue to record regardless of whether there is
available disk space. You may change the default behavior so that players stop recording when there is
no available disk space.
NOTE: For players created prior to SystemManager 5.23 and Spectrum 6.4.2, use the
Stop recording when disk is ful1 check box on the Edit Player page.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the Player Parameters heading, locate the Stop recording when disk is full field and
configure as follows:
◦
◦
Enable Select if you wish players to stop recording when there is no disk space.
Disable Select to allow players to continue recording even when there is no disk space (default).
The change will take affect once the affected player is activated. If the player is already activated, it
must be deactivated and then activated again.
Configuring players to stop recording when an input error occurs
You can configure Spectrum to stop recording when an input error occurs.
By default, Spectrum players continue to record regardless of errors with the input SDI video signal (for
example, if an SDI cable is disconnected). You may change the default behavior so that players stop
recording when there is an SDI video input error.
NOTE: For players created prior to SystemManager 5.23 and Spectrum 6.4.2, use the
Stop recording when Input error occurs check box on the Edit Player page.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the Player Parameters heading, locate the Stop recording when input error occurs field
and configure as follows:
◦
◦
Enable Select if you wish players to stop recording when there is an input error.
Disable Select to allow players to continue recording even when an input error occurs (default).
The change will take affect once the affected player is activated. If the player is already activated, it
must be deactivated and then activated again.
27
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
Configuring players to use 704 up/down conversion by default
You can configure Spectrum to use 704 up/down conversion by default.
By default, the Spectrum down-converter scales 576i video to an output width of 720 samples. You may
change the default setting for new players so they are configured to up-convert or down-convert video to
704 samples wide.
The following diagram shows conversion setting and that Spectrum supports 8 black samples on each
side of the screen, resulting in a picture width of 704 samples. Note that this option applies only to video
with a frame rate of 25 Hz, and only to players attached to the MediaPort 7000 series, ChannelPort or
Spectrum X.
Figure 1-1: Up-convert and down-convert options
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the Player Parameters heading, locate the Use 704 Up/Down Conversion field and configure
as follows:
◦
◦
Enable When selected, the Edit Player page for any new player that is configured to Play Only or
Play and Record, configured to 25 Hz, and is attached to an I/O module that supports up/down
conversion will display a selected check box for Use 704 Up/Down Conversion.
Disable When selected, players will continue to use the default of 720 samples for up/down
conversion (default). For players that meet the conditions described in the previous bullet, the Edit
Player page will display the Use 704 Up/Down Conversion check box, but it will be s default.
28
Configuring players to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD
3. On the Edit Player page, make sure Mode is set to Play Only or Play and Record. Make sure the
Frame Rate is set to 25 Hz. And make sure the player is attached to an I/O module that supports up/
down conversion.
4. The Use 704 Up/Down Conversion check box on the Edit Player page will be selected by default.
NOTE: The change will take affect once the affected player is activated and enabled. If
the player is already activated, it must be deactivated and then activated again.
Configuring players to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD
You can configure players to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD.
In some cases, you may want your Spectrum system to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD values
resulting from recorded chroma noise. You may change the default setting for new players attached to an
I/O module so that RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD values are ignored.
Note that this setting does not ignore the AFD bits that come from data packets elsewhere in the file.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the Player Parameters heading, locate the Ignore clip RP-186 AFD field and configure as
follows:
◦
◦
Enable When selected, the Edit Player page for any new player that is configured to Play Only or
Play and Record will display a selected check box for Ignore clip RP-186 AFD.
Disable When selected, players will continue to play RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD values. For Play
Only or Play and Record players, the Edit Player page will display the Ignore clip RP-186 AFD
check box, but it will be cleared by default.
3. On the Edit Player page, make sure Mode is set to Play Only or Play and Record.
4. The Ignore clip RP-186 AFD field check box on the Edit Player page will be selected by default.
Changing the preferred primary Harmonic component to be
monitored
You may configure which component view will appear in the main window when you first open the
application. The default view is Spectrum.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Under the Preferred Primary Harmonic Component to be Monitored heading, select one the
following components:
•
•
•
•
•
Spectrum
Harmonic MediaGrid
ProBrowse
ProXchange
MAS
3. Click Update for the changes to take effect.
29
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
Changing firmware version source files
You can select a particular directory from which Spectrum firmware upgrade (source) files will be
selected.
The selection does not perform the upgrade — that function is performed on a device’s individual
Properties page or on the global Upgrade Firmware page.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Click the Firmware Selection icon in the left-hand column to display the Firmware Version Selection
page.
3. Click the radio button for the desired firmware version. The red check mark indicates the selected
version.
4. When the confirmation dialog appears, click OK to accept.
5. Perform the upgrades on the global Upgrade Firmware page. For Spectrum devices, you can also
use the Upgrade Firmware button on the device’s Properties page.
Refer to “Upgrading Spectrum Firmware” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide for instructions.
Logging off the SystemManager
Use the Log Off button to log off from any SystemManager page.
1. Click the Log Off button at the top of the application window to display the Log Off Confirmation
page. A dialog appears, asking you to confirm closing the browser window.
2. Click Yes to log off and close the browser window.
NOTE: If you do not click Yes, the browser window remains open and you will still be
logged on to the SystemManager.
About environment variables
SystemManager provides some advanced settings, which can be used by Harmonic technical support for
diagnostic purposes.
IMPORTANT: The settings on the Environment Variables page are for Harmonic technical
support only. Do not modify these settings unless directed by Harmonic technical support.
To access the Environment Variables page, from the Home tab, under Advanced, click Environment
Variables.
Adding custom Help and custom configuration notes
You can add a custom help file to the Help tab.
These files may be useful for documenting a facility’s local Harmonic system configuration.
30
Viewing SystemManager software version information
1. Click the Help tab to display the Help page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Custom hyperlink (or icon) to display the Custom page. After
SystemManager installation, this page displays information on how to modify its content.
3. Using your preferred HTML editor or word processor, create an HTML file that contains system
configuration information, such as rack layouts, Fibre Channel wiring, IEEE 1394 wiring, device
names, etc.
4. Save the file with the name “index.htm.”
5. Copy this file onto the SystemManager platform. Place it in the following directory:
D:\Omneon\Apache\htdocs\local\
6. To verify that the file has been properly placed, click the Help tab and then the Custom Hyperlink (or
icon). Your customized file should replace the Custom page.
7. You can add or change this information simply by editing the “index.htm” file as required.
Viewing SystemManager software version information
From the Help tab, click the Version Information icon in the left-hand column to display information
about the SystemManager version and supported web browsers.
Accessing the SystemManager online help
To access the SystemManager Online Help System, click the Help tab, and then, in the left-hand column,
click the link for Launch Online Help.
The Help system opens in a separate browser window, and allows you to select topics from a table of
contents or perform a search of help topics.
This chapter provides configuration instructions for managing SystemManager users.
User management
The Security tab in SystemManager allows you to manage system users.
Viewing users
Open the View/Edit/Delete Users page to see a list of all current system users, including the
Administrator.
•
Click the Security tab to display the View/Edit/Delete Users page.
31
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
Figure 1-2: View/Edit/Delete Users
Modifying users
You can edit a system user’s individual e-mail address, user group, and password the View/Edit/Delete
Users page.
1. Click the Security tab to display the View/Edit/Delete Users page.
2. Click Modify adjacent to the user (or Administrator) name that you wish to modify. The Modify User
Setting page appears.
3. To change the user’s User Group, click the User Group drop-down box and select either
Administrator or User.
4. To change (or enter) the user’s e-mail address, type the desired e-mail address in the Email Address
field. Click the Update button in the top section to accept the new address. You will now be notified of
selected alarms, if e-mail notification is properly set up on the Options page, and the desired alarm
filters are set.
5. To change a user’s password, enter the old password in the Old Password field, type the new
password in the New Password field, then confirm in the Confirm Password field. Click the Update
button in the bottom section to complete the procedure. If the new password is accepted, you will
be prompted to login again with the new password (only if you are changing the current user’s
password).
NOTE: The password used on the page is for accessing SystemManager via the
SystemManager Login.
Related information
Diagnostics and troubleshooting on page 33
32
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Deleting users
From the View/Edit/Delete Users page, you can delete a user from the system.
IMPORTANT: Harmonic recommends that you do not delete the Administrator as it is
an essential user to have on a Harmonic system, most notably to send SNMP traps,
if enabled. The Administrator's settings configured on the Edit Filter page control the
forwarding of alarms using e-mail as well as the sending of SNMP Traps as alarms.
1. Click the Security tab to display the View/Edit/Delete Users page and the view the current users.
2. Click Delete adjacent to the user that you wish to delete. The Delete Confirmation dialog box
appears.
3. Click OK to delete the user, or Cancel to cancel the procedure safely, without deleting.
Adding users
Use the Add User feature to create a new user for the SystemManager application.
Note that the alarm filter settings in SystemManager apply only to the user that sets them. If you add a
new user, make sure that the new user logs in to SystemManager and sets the desired alarm filters.
NOTE: If a user does not set an appropriate alarm filter level or if the filter level is off, and
the Send email notifications to all users? setting on the Options page is set to yes, the
user will receive email notifications for ALL alarms.
1. Click the Security tab to display the View/Edit/Delete Users page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Add User icon to display the Add User page.
3. In the User Name field, type the name of the new user.
4. In the Security Group drop-down box, choose User or Administrator.
5. In the Password field, enter the new password. Confirm the password in the Confirm Password
field.
6. Click Create. The system returns to the View/Edit/Delete Users page, with the new user listed.
NOTE: The “users” created on the Add User page are for the SystemManager
application only.
Related information
Setting email alarm notifications on page 38
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
The Diagnostics tab in SystemManager provides system diagnostics and tools for troubleshooting.
Viewing system status
On the System Status page you can view system status data that is used for SystemManager
troubleshooting.
NOTE: This page is intended for use by Harmonic technical support only.
33
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
On the Diagnostics Tab, click the View System Status Icon in the left-hand column to display the View
System Status page.
Viewing and/or clearing alarms
You can check the nature and source of any alarm that appears in the upper-right corner of the user
interface.
Note that you can also click the Alarm icon from any SystemManager page to access the View Alarms
page.
Alarms are color coded for display as follows:
•
•
•
•
Red indicates a critical error condition requiring immediate attention.
Orange indicates a failed component requiring attention.
Yellow indicates a warning requiring action to avert additional error situation.
Blue alarms are informational in nature and usually do not require any action to be taken.
Alarms are raised when the disk space in an EFS system falls below threshold values as follows:
•
•
•
When space available is less than one percent, a critical alarm (red) is raised.
When space available is between one and five percent, an error alarm (orange) is raised.
When space available returns to more than five percent, a new informational alarm (blue) is raised
1. Click the Diagnostics tab to display the Diagnostics page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the View Alarms icon to display the View Alarms page. This page lists
specific alarm events as detected by the SystemManager. The list is displayed in reverse order, with
the most recent alarm at the top. Columns are provided for the alarm Level, Time, Device (alarm
source), Event, Info, and for Clear (check mark icon) and Delete (garbage icon) buttons as well.
NOTE: You can also access View Alarms page by clicking on the flashing Alarms icon
in the upper right-hand corner. The flashing Alarms icon appears any time there are
alarms, which have not been cleared.
Figure 1-3: View Alarms
3. In the Device column, use the hyperlink to access each device’s Properties page.
4. If desired, click Turn Filter On to apply the alarm filter, which is defined by using the Edit Filter check
box. Once clicked, the filter is applied and the button changes to Turn Filter Off.
34
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
5. Events are shown from the most recent alarms to the earliest alarms. A maximum of 100 alarms are
shown at any given time using the page navigation buttons. If desired, you can perform the following
actions:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Click the "end" icon to see the last 100 alarms.
Click the "next" icon to see the next 100 alarms.
Click the "previous" icon to the previous 100 alarms.
Click the "beginning" icon to the first 100 alarms.
Click Clear All to clear all alarms in the list, but retain the individual events. This action also clears
the Alarm icon from the upper right corner of the user interface.
Click Delete All to remove all alarms from the list and clear the Alarm icon.
Click Clear to clear an individual event alarm and retain the event in the list. This action clears the
Alarm icon for that event, but the icon may continue to blink if other alarms are active.
Click Delete to delete the event from the list and clear that event’s Alarm icon. The icon may
continue to blink if other alarms are active.
Filtering alarms
The View Alarms page allows you to filter the alarms that are displayed by using the Edit Filter check
box.
Note that alarm filter settings apply only to the user that sets them. To set alarm filters for multiple users,
each user must log in to SystemManager and set the alarm filters as desired.
NOTE: If a user does not set an appropriate alarm filter level or if the filter level is off, and
the Send email notifications to all users? setting on the Options page is set to yes, the
user will receive email notifications for ALL alarms.
1. From the Diagnostics tab, in the left-hand column, click the View Alarms icon to display the View
Alarms page.
2. Click the Filter button to open the Filter menu options, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 1-4: Edit filter
3. Click By Severity to filter the alarms according to alarm level, or click By Type to filter the alarms
according to alarm type.
35
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
◦
If you click By Severity, select from the following alarm levels: Information, Warning, Failure, or
Critical.
◦
◦
◦
If you click By Type, select the type(s) of alarms you wish to view. To select multiple alarm
types, you can either press the CTRL key and click one type at a time, or press the SHIFT key
and use the scroll bar to click and select a group of types. Note the following points:
After upgrading to newer versions of the SystemManager application software, review the
available alarms and select or deselect as appropriate; in some releases, new alarms will be
available. Harmonic recommends that you enable all new alarms unless you are sure you do
not want these new alarms.
Some events listed in the View Alarms page are prefaced with the word, [deprecated].
Although listed and selectable here, these events will never appear in the Events column of the
View Alarms page. However, for each “deprecated” event, other comparable events can be
selected for monitoring and notification on the View Alarms page.
4. Once you have selected the options for the alarm filter, click Save. You must click Save to enable the
new settings.
NOTE: While the Filter On check box is checked, SystemManager does not autorefresh. Once you click Save, auto-refresh restarts.
5. If you wish to receive e-mail notifications of alarms that pass your indicated filter, you can configure
SystemManager to send such notifications. From the Home tab, click Options icon to open the
Options page, and then use the Send email notifications to all users? drop-down box to indicate,
by selecting Yes or No, whether or not you wish to receive e-mail notifications of alarms.
Result:
E-mails will be sent to the e-mail address that is specified on the Modify User Setting page. You will only
be notified of selected alarms when e-mail notification is properly set up on the Options page and your
individual e-mail address is setup on the Modify User Setting page.
NOTE: SystemManager sends e-mail notifications to the specified mail server using the
standard SMTP port - Port 25.
Related information
Setting email alarm notifications on page 38
Modifying users on page 32
Editing alarm thresholds
The Edit Thresholds page allows you to modify the threshold limits for various SystemManager alarms.
This would allow you, for example, to lower the percentage of file system utilization required to generate
an alarm.
1. Click the Diagnostics tab to display the Diagnostics page.
2. In the Diagnostics column, click the Edit Thresholds icon to display the Edit Thresholds page.
36
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Figure 1-5: Edit Thresholds
3. For Harmonic MediaGrid systems, you can view or modify the threshold limit for the following:
•
The percentage of Storage Utilization in a Cluster. The limit for Critical or Error alarms can be
modified.
37
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
•
•
•
The average Cluster Bandwidth Utilization per ContentServer. The limit for Critical or Error
alarms can be modified.
The percentage of Storage Utilization in a ContentServer. The limit for Critical or Error alarms
can be modified.
The number of Bad Slices in a ContentServer. The limit for Threshold or Delta alarms can be
modified.
For a Local File System, which may include a customer-supplied system, you can view or modify the
threshold limit for the percentage of Storage Utilization. The limit for Critical or Error alarms can be
modified.
For a Spectrum system, you can view or modify the threshold limit for the percentage of storage
utilization. The limit for Critical or Error alarms can be modified.
NOTE: Editing thresholds for MediaDeck alarms is not supported.
4. Change the value shown in the Limit column.
5. Click the Submit button at the bottom of the page. The changes take effect automatically.
To return to the default values shown in the Default Value column, click the Reset button at the
bottom of the page.
Setting email alarm notifications
Set up alarm notifications via email for users that request it.
Before you begin
It is recommended that you consult with your System Administrator for details on IP addresses and SMTP
servers and authentication.
Note that the alarm filter settings in SystemManager apply only to the user that sets them. If you add a
new user, make sure that the new user logs in to SystemManager and sets the desired alarm filters from
the View Alarms page.
NOTE: If a user does not set an appropriate alarm filter level or if the filter level is off, and
the Send email notifications to all users? setting on the Options page is set to yes, the
user will receive email notifications for ALL alarms.
1. From the Home tab, click the Options icon to display the Options page.
2. Scroll to the Email Notification of Alarms section of the page.
3. In the Send email notifications to all users? drop-down box, select Yes.
4. In the SMTP Server field, enter the IP address or server name of your facility’s mail server.
5. In the Reply Address field, enter the user name which the SystemManager should place in the from
field of any e-mail notification.
6. If your facility does not require SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) authentication, continue to the
next step. If it does, consult with your System Administrator for SMTP details, and do the following:
a. In the Use SMTP server Authentication? drop-down box, select Yes, and then click Update at
the bottom of the page.
38
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
b. A new group of SMTP Authentication fields appears. In the SMTP User field, enter a user
name given to you by your System Administrator. This user name is the account that the
SystemManager will use when sending e-mail notification.
c. In the Password field, enter the associated password for the account, and then confirm the
password in the Confirm Password field.
d. Click Update to save your settings.
7. Click the Security tab, click the Modify button adjacent to your user name, and then set up your
individual e-mail address on the Modify User Settings page.
8. Click the Diagnostics tab, and then click the View Alarms con in the left hand column to access the
View Alarms page, and set up the type of e-mail notification that you want.
9. Click the Home tab to display the Options page.
10. Click the Send Test Email/Trap button at the bottom of the page to send a test message to the e-mail
address of the currently logged in user. If an e-mail message is not received within a few minutes,
check the settings that you have entered in the previous steps.
Note the following:
◦
◦
You must provide a valid SMTP server value and a Reply Address in the form “abc@wxy.zzz as in
mgrReplies@domain.com
Before sending test e-mails, you must first designate the destination email address for one or more
users using the Modify button on the View/Edit/Delete Users page under the Security tab.
11. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for each user.
Result:
The SystemManager now has the appropriate information to send e-mails, if the proper settings are
entered on the View/Edit/Delete Users and View Alarms pages. The e-mail setup procedure only needs
to be performed once. If new users are added, perform steps 7 and 8 for those users.
Related information
Modifying users on page 32
Filtering alarms on page 35
Connecting a device from a different IP network
The Connect Device feature allows you to connect to a Harmonic device that is not in the same IP
network as your Harmonic system.
Before you begin
Before connecting a device to SystemManager, make sure that device monitoring is on. To check
device monitoring, click the Home tab to open the Options page, and view the “Current state of Device
Monitoring” field at the top of the page. If the “Current state of Device Monitoring” field displays NOT
monitoring, then click Start Monitoring and wait for the state to change to monitoring before continuing
to connect the device. This may take a few minutes depending on the number of devices in your system.
Also, note the status of devices may show Not Responding for a brief interval after monitoring has been
turned on
1. From the Diagnostics tab, click the Connect Device icon in the left-hand column. The Connect
Harmonic Device page appears, as shown in the following figure.
39
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
2. Enter the device IP address or device name in the associated field, and then click Connect.
Figure 1-6: Connect to a Harmonic device
Removing devices
You may remove a device that is no longer part of your Harmonic system:
1. Click the Diagnostics tab to display the Diagnostics page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Remove Device icon to display the Remove Devices page.
3. Click Stop Monitoring to stop device monitoring. Once the “Current state of Device Monitoring” field
displays NOT monitoring, continue to the next step. Note this may take a few minutes depending on
the number of devices in your system.
4. Select one or more devices from one of the menus on the page.
5. Click the Remove button at the bottom of the menu, and then click OK to confirm. After a brief pause,
a message appears indicating that the device has been removed (it has also been removed from the
System Diagram).
6. Click Start Monitoring to resume device monitoring. Make sure the “Current state of Device
Monitoring” field changes to monitoring.
NOTE: Device status may show Not Responding for a brief interval after monitoring
has been turned back on.
About the system log
SystemManager provides an application system log, which shows a record of the SystemManager’s
operation.
This log requires Harmonic technical support to view and interpret. For assistance, contact Harmonic
Harmonic technical support.
This section describes SNMP settings that allow you to monitor Spectrum and Harmonic MediaGrid
components.
40
SNMP configuration
SNMP configuration
SystemManager provides support for SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) management of
Spectrum or Harmonic MediaGrid components.
NOTE: The procedures outlined in this section are written for qualified technical personnel,
skilled at advanced networking procedures. If you have any questions, please consult with
your facility’s Information Service staff or contact Harmonic technical support.
About SNMP support
SNMP support allows you to monitor components in a Spectrum System and components in a Harmonic
MediaGrid system using third-party SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) managers.
Harmonic SNMP support consists of:
•
•
•
•
•
SNMP Agents on Harmonic MediaGrid and Network Switches
SystemManager Proxy Agent
SNMP integration into enterprise/workgroup SNMP Managers
SNMP Trap notification for SystemManager Alarms
SNMP MIBs for monitoring of SNMP Agents
Manager Proxy
Agent
In a Spectrum System, MediaDirectors and MediaPorts do not run SNMP
agents. Instead, the SNMP Service on the SystemManager acts as an SNMP
proxy agent for the rest of the Spectrum system, summarizing and distilling key
information about the network. The proxy agent is a subagent of the Microsoft
SNMP agent.
Harmonic MediaGrid
SNMP Agents
The Harmonic MediaGrid SNMP agents are based on the open source
package NET-SNMP (http://www.net-snmp.org). The SNMP agent also
utilizes Dell OpenManage Server Assistant, which works with NET-SNMP to
provide additional management features (http://www.dell.com). OpenManage
provides the ability to monitor the power supplies and RAID arrays on the
ContentDirectors using the SystemManager application.
SNMP Integration
into Enterprise/
Workgroup SNMP
Managers
These features also enable the use of enterprise/workgroup network
management products to monitor additional aspects of Harmonic equipment.
Harmonic MIBs
If you have HP OpenView or a similar product, you can load MIBs (omneon.mib
and omneon-trap.mib) to enable OpenView's discovery to distinguish the
Generators from other systems in the network. The SystemManager appears
as a Windows PC but can be modified in OpenView so it can be distinguished
from other PCs (see Registration section of omneon.mib). By loading MIBs,
you can also view SystemManager alarms through OpenView's Event Browser.
The SystemManager monitors the state of Harmonic equipment by
communicating on a regular basis with each video server. As the
SystemManager detects changes and items of interest, it posts alarms to
internal queues. The Alarm List UI feature allows active monitoring of such
alarms with options for filtering. In addition, the SystemManager allows you to
send alarm notifications to e-mail addresses to send alarms as SNMP traps to
enterprise/workgroup SNMP managers.
41
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
The Trap MIB includes hooks to help OpenView display the traps concisely with
SNMP varbinds decoded.
Harmonic MediaGrid
MIBs
The NET-SNMP and Dell OpenManage MIBs can also be loaded into third-party
managers and used for monitoring system, network, and storage components.
Omneon-mds.mib and omneon-ss.mib show the Harmonic SNMP extensions
for the ContentDirector (MDS) and ContentServer (SS). Queries for MIB data in
the ContentDirector MIB should be sent to ContentDirectors only (similarly for
the ContentServer MIB data).
Related information
About setting up the Manager Proxy Agent on page 42
About setting up Harmonic MediaGrid SNMP agents on page 42
About setting up the Manager Proxy Agent
When you install the SystemManager application, SNMP and Manager services are installed and set to
start automatically on reboot of the SystemManager Platform for Spectrum Systems, and the Harmonic
MediaGrid.
In a Spectrum System, by default, the SNMP community string for reading information is “public” and can
be changed using the Control Panel. Typically with a Microsoft SNMP agent, no write community string is
configured. Refer to Windows 2000 documentation for more information on community strings.
In Harmonic MediaGrid Systems, the SNMP community string for reading information is “omneon”. A
read/write community string is not configured on these systems.
About setting up Harmonic MediaGrid SNMP agents
The NET-SNMP agent is configured to start automatically on ContentServers and ContentDirectors.
The agents are configured with the string “omneon” as the read only community string. A read/write
community string is not enabled on Harmonic MediaGrid systems.
The SystemManager automatically registers its own IP address as a trap destination for SNMP traps
sent by Harmonic MediaGrid SNMP agents. This allows the SystemManager to integrate such traps into
the Manager Alarm list. As an extension of the Alarm notification feature, Manager alarms for important
Harmonic MediaGrid traps can then be sent to enterprise/workgroup managers in the form of SNMP
traps, as well as in the form of e-mails to system administrators.
NOTE: Traps sent to the SystemManager by Harmonic MediaGrid are converted into
alarms that display as warning alarms (yellow), rather than informational alarms (blue). By
default, warning alarms display in the Manager Alarm list; informational alarms do not.
Setting up alarm notification using SNMP traps
SystemManager alarms can be sent to enterprise/workgroup managers to enable the use of NMS
platform tools for analyzing alarms.
1. Load omneon.mib and omneon-trap.mib into the NMS software. For HP OpenView, this option is the
Load/Unload MIBs menu item. Load omneon.mib first, followed by omneon-trap.mib. These MIB files
and others are found in the D:\Omneon\manager\mibs directory on the SystemManager Platform.
2. Enable trap sending for Manager alarms and place the IP address of the enterprise/workgroup
manager PC in the trap destination list on the Options page.
42
SNMP configuration
a. Use the Send Test Email/Trap button to send out a test trap (and e-mail if so configured).
b. Then verify the trap was received on the third party NMS system. For HP OpenView, use the
Event Browser application, and search for the most recently received traps. HP OpenView
decodes the SNMP trap into text that looks similar to the Manager Alarm list.
About SystemManager alarm status colors
Note the colors for alarm status messages.
SystemManager alarms sometimes use a single alarm type for both bad news and good news. In the
SystemManager Alarm List, the default level will cause it to display as warning (yellow), error (orange),
or critical (red) for the bad news occurrence of the alarm. A non-default severity will be used to display
it as informational (blue) for good news (the resolution of an issue). Alarms which use this model do not
display with the good new (blue) color in HP OpenView. To deal with this issue, the varbinds include the
actual severity, and this is displayed in the Event Browser. So, while the bad news occurrence might
display as orange with the string FAIL (for example), the good news occurrence still displays as orange
but with the string INFO to show the issue has resolved.
About troubleshooting SNMP queries
If SNMP queries fail, refer to the checklist for basic troubleshooting guidance.
•
•
•
•
Verify that the correct read community string is being used, and that the right IP Address is being used.
For the Manager Proxy Agent (SystemManager Platform), the read community string is “public”. For
the ProBrowse SNMP agents, the community string is “omneon”.
Verify (using a tool like PING) that the SystemManager Platform is reachable on the network.
On the SystemManager Platform:
◦
◦
◦
◦
Verify (from Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services or using the “net start”
command) that the SNMP Service is running.
Be sure that it is the SNMP Service that is running, not the SNMP Trap Service.
Verify that the SystemManager service is running.
Look for any unexpected SNMP messages in the Event Viewer. When the SNMP Service is started
(for example when you boot up), the following message is added to the System Event Log: “The
SNMP Service has started successfully.”
Monitoring Spectrum system components using SNMP
Monitor Spectrum components using SNMP.
NOTE: Many third-party SNMP monitoring tools are available. Please refer to your
individual tool’s documentation for specific instructions.
1. Import and compile the Harmonic MIB (Management Information Block) file into your third-party
SNMP monitoring tool.
On the SystemManager Platform, this file may be found in the directory D:\Omneon\manager\mibs.
Note the following:
◦
◦
Harmonic MIB objects are located in the overall tree of MIB definitions, at 1.3.6.1.4.1.11141, where
11141 is the enterprise number for Harmonic products as shown in the figure below.
A MIB is an object or set of objects that represent various types of information about a device,
used by Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to manage the device. Harmonic MIB
43
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
objects are not configurable and do not send SNMP traps (messages) to SNMP managers. See
the example in the following figure.
Figure 1-7: MIB browser window
2. Enter the SystemManager’s IP address in your third-party SNMP monitoring tool. This allows you to
monitor the SystemManager’s status.
3. Within the SystemManager’s MIB, the status of devices, enclosures (MediaStore s), and Players is
carried as MIB values and displayed in tabular format.
Note the following:
◦
By setting up individual values in your monitoring tool (based on the Harmonic MIB), you can
monitor the status of devices, enclosures (MediaStore s), and Players. Refer to your monitoring
tool documentation for more information.
44
SNMP configuration
◦
◦
◦
Information on all devices and players is proxied through the SystemManager, so use the
SystemManager Platform’s IP address (not those of any MediaDirector host). Thus, you can
configure the SNMP monitoring tool such that when a state change occurs for an active enclosure
(MediaStore) for example, an alarm is generated.
Each host of a MediaDirector shows up as a separate device in third party NMS products. Since
they do not implement SNMP agents, third party products find them using PING (ICMP) and do not
get information to show they are part of the same system.
Keep in mind that this feature provides monitoring capabilities only. It does not allow control.
NOTE: For Network Management Services integration purposes, Harmonic provides a
Harmonic logo file in.bmp format. This can be found at D:\Omneon\manager\icons.
Related information
About SystemManager proxy agent MIB content on page 45
Monitoring Harmonic MediaGrid components using SNMP
Monitor Harmonic MediaGrid components using SNMP.
NOTE: Many third-party SNMP monitoring tools are available; please refer to your
individual tool’s documentation for specific instructions.
1. Navigate to: D:\Omneon\manager\mibs and import and compile the following Management
Information Blocks (MIBs) and associated files:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
omneon.mib
omneon-trap.mib
net-snmp-mibs
omsa-mibs
omneon-mds.mib
omneon-ss.mib
procurve-mibs
2. In your third-party SNMP monitoring tool, enter the SystemManager’s IP address of each of the
Harmonic MediaGrid components you wish to monitor.
Refer to your SNMP monitoring tools documentation for additional information.
About SystemManager proxy agent MIB content
MIB content is displayed in tables for SystemManager Platforms monitoring MediaDirector s, MediaStore
s, I/O modules, and Players (within MediaDirector s) in a Spectrum system.
In addition, OmManagerAvailable MIB Object provides information on SystemManager Platform
availability. This scalar MIB object can be used to find out if the Manager service is running. If not then the
three tables that follow will be reported as empty.
The following tables display data for SystemManager Platforms monitoring ContentServers and
ContentDirectors in a Harmonic MediaGrid:
•
•
OmSliceServerTable
OmMetadataServerTable
Consult your SNMP Monitoring tool documentation for information on how to access the MIB tables.
45
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 1: SystemManager configuration
Example: OmDeviceTable
The following figure is an example of an OmDeviceTable showing the devices (MediaDirectors and
MediaPort s) registered with the SystemManager.
Figure 1-8: OmDeviceTable
Example: OmPlayerTable
The following figure is an example of an OmPlayerTable showing the Players registered with the
SystemManager.
Figure 1-9: OmPlayer table
46
SNMP configuration
Example: OmEnclosureTable
The following figure is an example of an OmEnclosureTable showing the Enclosures (MediaStore s)
registered with the SystemManager.
Figure 1-10: OmEnclosure table
Example: OmManagerAvailable MIB Object
The following figure an example of the OmManagerAvailable object reporting that the Manager service is
running and providing management information through the Manager Proxy Agent. If the Manager service
is not running, this scalar MIB object will report the value notAvailable(0).
Figure 1-11: OmManagerAvailable MIB object
47
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Part II
Spectrum
Spectrum
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Spectrum video server configuration
Spectrum file system configuration
Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
Spectrum I/O module configuration
Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Player configuration
Playout channel configuration
Spectrum client configuration
48
Chapter 2
Spectrum video server configuration
Find configuration instructions for Spectrum video servers in a Spectrum system.
IMPORTANT: The procedures outlined in this section are written for qualified technical
personnel, skilled at advanced networking procedures. If you have any questions, please
consult with your facility's Information Service staff or contact Technical Support.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Viewing the components of a Spectrum system
About the System Diagram user interface
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
Changing a Spectrum video server host name
Setting Ethernet interfaces on a MediaCenter 2200/2200A as public ports
Configuring network settings
Configuring watch folders
Configuring Auto-export to Harmonic MediaGrid
Configuring SMPTE 2022-6
Configuring transport stream ingest
Previewing material from a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS
Mounting a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system
Changing a Spectrum video server description
Specifying character sets to use with certain protocols and QuickTime
Viewing character sets associated with Spectrum video servers
Editing track tags
Copying the track tag file to Spectrum video servers outside an EFS
Changing the Spectrum video server time zone
Changing the Spectrum video server wink state
Rebooting the Spectrum video server
Powering down the Spectrum video server
Viewing a snapshot of the Spectrum video server log
Upgrading the Spectrum video server license
Viewing licensed features for a Spectrum video server
Changing logging variable settings
Configuring access control settings for video servers
Installing a DDC file
Connecting to a Harmonic MediaGrid from the Spectrum video server
Changing network and file system performance settings
49
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
•
•
About file types
Editing the Filetypes.conf file
Viewing the components of a Spectrum system
Use the System Diagram page in SystemManager to see a visual overview of the components in a
Spectrum System.
1. Click the Configuration tab, and then click the System Diagram icon in the left-hand column to
display the System Diagram —essentially a “tree” of each Spectrum System device.
2. In the upper-right corner of the System Diagram page, click the Click here for list of devices by
type link to display the Video Area Network page.
The System Diagram is sorted by video servers and hosts. Each video server is shown to the left and
above, with individual hosts directly below (second level).
About the System Diagram user interface
The System Diagram page provides current device status and other important component information.
Devices are arranged in categories such as video servers, I/O modules and “Other Devices.”
NOTE: SystemManager must poll for device status, which results in some delay based on
the configured discovery interval.
Each heading and icon is a hyperlink that takes you to a different location where the devices can be
monitored and configured. Note the following:
•
•
•
•
Each video server is displayed as an icon. This icon is a hyperlink that takes you to the Properties
page for that video server.
Under each server, specific device connections are shown — devices that are physically attached
to that server (such as MediaPort s, third-party devices, and other MediaDirectors in dubbing
configurations).
A red question mark will be shown for unrecognized devices.
The legend at the top of the data section indicates two types of warning boxes (or highlights) that can
appear behind a MediaDirector or I/O module icon:
◦
◦
•
•
Amber = indicates a warning alarm, or if the device is configuring.
Red = indicates if the devices has an error, a critical alarm, or if the device is not responding.
In both cases, you can click the icon to see the alarms for that specific device.
For a single host device, such as the MediaDeck 7000, the host can be named, and it has its own
individual IP address and attached devices. On the System diagram, the naming convention for the
overall Spectrum video server is a single host name.
For multiple host devices, such as the MediaDirectors 2101, 2102, and 2102B, special conventions
are used for each host on the System diagram. Each host can be named separately, and each has its
own individual IP address and attached devices.
◦
The naming convention for the overall MediaDirector 2101 (including both hosts) is both host
names separated by a slash (e.g., DIR101/DIR102).
50
About the System Diagram user interface
◦
•
•
•
•
•
•
The naming convention for the overall MediaDirector 2102 or 2102B is all host names separated by
a slash (e.g., DIR101/DIR102/DIR103/DIR104).
Each MediaPort is listed by the label MIP followed by a 5-digit Unit ID, which electronically identifies
the MediaPort. This ID is coded at the factory.
NOTE: A Spectrum X will appear differently in the System Diagram view depending on
whether it is in internal storage mode or shared storage mode.
Each MediaDeck Module for the MediaDeck is listed by the label MDM followed by a 5-digit Unit ID,
which electronically identifies the MediaDeck Module. This ID is coded at the factory.
Hosts and devices can be renamed using the SystemManager, thus your diagram can be customized
according to your system configuration. The MediaDirector name is generated automatically, based on
the combination of the host names.
The device labels on the System diagram are designed as placeholders initially, with the assumption
that the user will change them to something more meaningful (for example, names that reflect the
actual use of the devices).
NOTE: The Unit IDs cannot be changed, but the labels can be changed on the
Properties pages for the individual MediaDirector, MediaPort s, and Third-party
Devices.
I/O module names are used only within the SystemManager, while Spectrum video server names can
also be used from Windows machines for other purposes, as described in System Configuration.
In the upper-right corner of the System Diagram page, click the Click here for list of devices by type
link to display the Video Area Network page. The Video Area Network page is a scrolling list of all
components that comprise your network, including Spectrum servers and I/O modules.
◦
◦
◦
Click a Spectrum server icon to go to the Physical Configuration page for that device.
Click an I/O module icon to go to the Properties page for that device.
Click a Third-party Device icon to go to the Device Properties page.
Related information
Setting the Discovery Interval on page 24
About Spectrum X configurations on page 161
Default names for Spectrum video servers
By default, Spectrum servers appear with a numerical identifier in the System Diagram.
•
The default name for the MediaDirector 2102 or 2102B is D4_nnnnnHm, where:
◦
•
The first 5 n’s are the MediaDirector ’s 5-digit unit ID, which electronically identifies the unit. This ID
is coded at the factory.
◦ Hm = Host 0 -3
The default name for the MediaDeck is D7_nnnnnHn, where:
◦
•
The first 5 n’s are the MediaDeck ’s 5-digit unit ID, which electronically identifies the unit. This ID is
coded at the factory.
◦ Hn = Host 0 or 1
The default name for the MediaDirector 2202 or 2201 is D8_nnnnn, where:
◦
•
The first 5 n’s are the MediaDirector ’s 5-digit unit ID, which electronically identifies the unit. This ID
is coded at the factory.
The default name for the MediaCenter is D9_nnnnn, where:
51
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
◦
•
The first 5 n’s are the MediaCenter ’s 5-digit unit ID, which electronically identifies the unit. This ID
is coded at the factory.
The default name for the MediaDeck 7000 is D11_nnnnn, where:
◦
•
The first 5 n’s are the MediaDeck ’s 5-digit unit ID, which electronically identifies the unit. This ID is
coded at the factory.
The default name for the MediaDirector 2252 or 2251 is D12_nnnnn, where:
◦
•
The first 5 n’s are the MediaDirector ’s 5-digit unit ID, which electronically identifies the unit. This ID
is coded at the factory.
The default name for the Spectrum X is D13_nnnnn, where:
◦
The first 5 n’s make up the 5-digit unit ID, which electronically identifies the unit. This ID is coded at
the factory.
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
The Properties page for your Spectrum video server allows you to check the system properties and
properties of devices that are connected to the Spectrum video server.
1. From the System Diagram, click any Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to reach the Physical
Configuration page.
Figure 2-1: Spectrum video server physical configuration
This page displays the selected Spectrum video server along with the name, GUID, model type,
environmental status, Fibre Channel loops, number of drives, and RAID sets in each MediaStore that
is connected to the Spectrum video server. Several MediaStores may be shown depending upon your
configuration. From this page, you can click the MediaStore icon to open the MediaStore properties
page or click the links for each RAID set to open the RAID utilities page.
NOTE: An MSC MediaStore cannot be combined with an MS or MSS MediaStore on
the same Spectrum system. A warning message appears in SystemManager if you
attempt an unsupported configuration such as this.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
52
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
Related information
Viewing Spectrum storage properties on page 143
Viewing RAID set information on page 150
Spectrum server: Host Properties fields
The Host Properties section at the top of the Spectrum Server Properties page varies according to the
number of hosts supported by video server model.
Note that the Spectrum X, MediaDeck 7000, MediaCenter, and MediaDirector 2202/2201, 2252/2251, and
2252B/2251B are all single host devices and the Properties page provides the same list of properties as
those shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-2: Spectrum video server single host properties
Host Name
This field lists the Spectrum video server’s user-assigned host name, which
appears in the System Diagram, page titles and other Spectrum video serverrelated fields.
When you first start the SystemManager, it queries the name from the
MediaDirector. The name defaults to the DNS name, but if that name is
unavailable, the MediaDirector creates a name for itself using its serial number.
If you change the MediaDirector host name and there is a DNS name available,
the new name will not match the DNS name. However, the MediaDirector
will use the new host name in preference to the DNS name. Note that having
53
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
different names (internal vs. DNS) may cause confusion when trying to access
the MediaDirector from a PC.
NOTE: If you are using DNS to name Spectrum video servers,
do not change the host name using the Name button.
Host Status
Describes the Spectrum video server’s current status, such as “Connected,”
“Configuring,” “Rebooting,” “Not Responding,” etc. This label also appears
adjacent to the Spectrum video server’s name in the System diagram. Note that
it may take up to 30 seconds for the SystemManager application to reflect new
status — for example, when a connection is lost or regained.
Host IP Address(es)
Lists the MediaDirector host’s IP address. For single host Spectrum video
servers, this shows the IP addresses of the Public Ethernet Interfaces.
Filesystem Low
Shows the File System low priority bandwidth limit for File System reads and
Priority Bandwidth
writes of clips.
Limits (per Spectrum
NOTE: At this time, Harmonic does not recommend changing
Server)
this value from the default setting.
Harmonic MediaGrid
Accounts
Shows the ContentDirector, User name, and Domain of all the Harmonic
MediaGrid s connected to this video server.
Last Message
Displays the last message received that deals with the indicated Spectrum
video server host.
Network Settings
Click to access the Network Settings page, which allows you to configure
Ethernet settings for your Spectrum video server including IP addresses, DNS
and NTP settings, and for some models, Ethernet Failover settings.
Low Priority
Bandwidth Settings
Click to access the Change Spectrum Server Network/Filesystem
Performance Settings page for the Spectrum video server where you can
configure or change the low priority bandwidth limit for FTP, Samba, and AFP.
Harmonic MediaGrid
Accounts
Click to access the Harmonic MediaGrid Accounts page where you can enter
Harmonic MediaGrid account information to connect to one or more Harmonic
MediaGrid systems.
Access Control
Settings
Click to display the Access Control Settings page for the selected host and
configure authentication settings for your video server, which can be used to
connect to a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server or a SAMBA
domain.
Edit Filetypes.conf
Click to display the Edit Filetypes.conf page for the selected host. Continuing
down the page, the same General Properties type information appears for all
Spectrum video server models.
Configure Watch
Folder
Click to open the Harmonic Watch Folder page, where you can configure a
watch folder for H.264 decode.
Update Logging
variables
Use only if instructed by Harmonic technical support. Click to access the
Change Logging Variable Settings page where you can specify logging
settings for Spectrum.
Configure Audio
Profiles
Click to open the Audio Profiles page where you can create, import, or export
audio profiles for use with the Spectrum X or ChannelPort.
54
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
Configure DDC File
Click to access the Install DDC file page, which can be used to install a
Harmonic-supplied drive that is newer than your current Spectrum firmware.
Configure Auto
Export to Grid
Click to open the Auto-Export Watch Folders page, which you can use to
automatically transfer files recorded directly to the Spectrum video server to one
or more destination folders on your Harmonic MediaGrid or to another location
via FTP.
Edit Traffic and
Billing Service
Click to open the Edit Traffic And Billing Services page. From here you can
enable and configure Traffic and Billing settings for all the playout channels on
the Spectrum video server.
Configure SNMP
Traps
Click to open the Configure SNMP Critical Error Traps for Playlist Control page.
From here, you can configure Spectrum to send trap messages to one or more
client systems via SNMP when a critical error occurs on a Playlist Control
channel.
Launch Delay
Service
Click to open the Spectrum Management login page in a new browser window.
Once you log in, click the Delay Service icon to start using Delay Service.
Configure
RouteTables
Click to configure RouteTables to be used with Transport Stream Ingest or
SMPTE-2022-6.
Mount NAS/Grid File
System
Click to configure a NAS or Harmonic MediaGrid mount for this Spectrum video
server.
Related information
Configuring network settings on page 67
Configuring access control settings for video servers on page 102
Editing the Filetypes.conf file on page 118
Configuring watch folders on page 77
Changing logging variable settings on page 101
About audio profiles and audio profile groups on page 204
Installing a DDC file on page 108
Configuring Auto-export to Harmonic MediaGrid on page 80
Enabling and configuring global Traffic and Billing Settings on page 335
Configuring SNMP critical error traps for Playlist Control on page 338
Configuring Delay Service
Configuring RouteTables on page 84
Mounting a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system on page 89
55
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Spectrum server: General Properties fields
The General Properties section of the Spectrum Server page varies according to video server model.
Figure 2-3: General properties for the Spectrum video server
Model Number
Lists the Spectrum video server’s product model number.
Licensed features
Click View Licensed features to open the Licensed Features page for this
video server, which lists all the licenses installed on the video server.
Serial Number
Lists the Spectrum video server’s serial number.
Boot Summary
Displays the reason why the last reboot of the Spectrum video server occurred.
Last Reboot
Displays the date and time of the last reboot of the Spectrum video server.
Time Difference
Shows the time difference in seconds between the SystemManager clock
and the Spectrum video server clock. This is useful when comparing
SystemManager logs and monitor logs on a File System.
Firmware Version
Lists the current version of firmware that resides in the Spectrum video server’s
flash memory. Refer to “Upgrading MediaDirector and MediaCenter Firmware”
in the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
Currently Selected
Firmware Version
Lists the firmware version that is selected on the Firmware Version Selection
page.
Status Current at
Lists the most recent date and time that the page was refreshed. Note that the
page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds, unless configured otherwise.
Spectrum Server
Description
Displays a scrollable multi-line description of the Spectrum video server. This
field is useful for entering data that clarifies the specific Spectrum video server’s
role in your system, particularly when multiple Spectrum video servers are in
use.
•
Wink State
Change Desc Click to change the Spectrum video server’s description.
Describes the wink state of the Spectrum video server’s light bar, either On or
Off.
56
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
Primary File System
GUID
Lists the File System’s GUID (Globally Unique Identifier), as used by the
SystemManager platform for network identification purposes.
File System
Displays a link to the Filesystem Utilities page and shows the status of the file
system.
File System free
space
Lists the space available on the File System in bytes, followed by the same
value as a percentage of the total. The abbreviation GB stands for gigabytes (1
billion bytes); the abbreviation TB stands for terabytes (1 trillion bytes). Values
that appear are the actual value, or the label “Unknown” appears if the File
System has not been started.
File System total
space
Describes the total amount of space available (in bytes) on the File System.
Note that if there is more than one File System on the Spectrum video server,
the additional File Systems can be viewed on the Disk Utilities page.
EFS shared with
Displays the name of the host (if any) with which the selected host shares a File
System.
Active-clip deletion
protection
Click to prevent any clips that have been loaded to a timeline (cued, idle,
playing or recording) from being deleted or renamed. If this setting is checked
on one video server in an EFS configuration, the setting will be applied to all
video servers in the EFS.
Time Zone
Click the drop-down arrow to select the international time zone in which your
facility is located. This ensures that the “date” stamp on recorded clips is
correct, and also provides assistance for Harmonic technical support for remote
troubleshooting.
Record SPS/PPS in
every frame of AVCI
clips that use MXF
wrapper
Check if you will be recording MXF-wrapped AVC-Intra video content and wish
to record SPS (Sequence Parameter Set) and PPS (Picture Parameters Set)
data in each frame.
Local Disk Storage
For each file system on the Spectrum video server, the following are displayed:
Name, Total Space (in KB), Used Space (in KB), Available Space (in KB), and
percent used.
NOTE: The information shown in this section applies only to the
local file systems on the video server, not the file systems on
networked MediaStore s.
Process Monitoring
Displays the status of each process running on the Spectrum video server. This
section is provided for troubleshooting purposes only.
Wink On/Off
Click to change the wink state of the Spectrum video server’s light bar.
Reboot
Click to reboot the Spectrum video server, as described in “Rebooting the
Spectrum video server.”
Shutdown
FileSystem
Click to shut down the Spectrum video server file system
Shutdown Spectrum
Server
Click to shut down the video server. This automatically shuts down the file
system and the Spectrum video server.
Log Snapshot
Click to display a snapshot of the Spectrum video server’s log, in a separate
static window within the Browser. This function is designed for Technical
57
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Support personnel only. Note that this button only appears if you have clicked a
single host name (or icon) on the System diagram.
Edit Track Tags
Click to add or edit the Track Tag File associated with the Spectrum video
server.
Upgrade Firmware
Click to upgrade the Spectrum video server’s firmware. Refer to “Upgrading
Spectrum video server firmware" in the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
Upgrade License
Click to upgrade the Spectrum video server’s license.
Done
Click to return to the system diagram.
Related information
Changing a Spectrum video server description on page 92
Changing the Spectrum video server wink state on page 97
Rebooting the Spectrum video server on page 98
Creating an AVC-Intra Player on page 253
Upgrading the Spectrum video server license on page 99
Editing track tags on page 95
Spectrum server: Public Ethernet Interfaces
The Public Ethernet Interfaces section of the Spectrum Server Properties page displays connection
information for the public Ethernet interfaces on a Spectrum video server, which are not part of the
MediaPort Ethernet array.
This section also displays connection information for Ethernet interfaces on any of the optional expansion
cards.
NOTE: This section applies only to MediaDirectors 2252/2251 and 2202/2201,
MediaCenter s, and Spectrum MediaDecks 7000.
MediaDirectors 2202/2201, 2252/2251, and 2252B/2251B Public Ethernet
Interface fields
The Public Ethernet Interface section of the Spectrum Server Properties page includes details for the
public Ethernet ports.
Interface Name
Displays the internal name for the Ethernet port.
Cabling
This displays the connection status of the Ethernet port.
DHCP
Displays whether DHCP is enabled.
IP Address
The IP address assigned to the Ethernet port
MAC Address
The MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask for the Ethernet port.
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway assigned to the Ethernet port
MTU
The maximum size of Ethernet packets.
In the Public Ethernet Pair Failover Settings section:
58
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
Interface Pair
This field shows the failover pairs for each of the public Ethernet interfaces. For
details about Ethernet failover on the MediaDirector 2202/2201, 2252/2251, and
2252B/2251B, refer to “Configuring Network Settings”.
Status
Displays whether failover is configured for each failover pair, and if not, what
condition may be preventing failover selection.
For instructions on configuring the Ethernet Interface settings for your
MediaDirector 2202/2201, 2252/2251, and 2252B/2251B, refer to “Configuring
Network Settings.”
Related information
Configuring network settings on page 67
MediaCenter Public Ethernet Interfaces fields
The Public Ethernet Interface section of the Spectrum Server Properties page includes details for the
public Ethernet ports.
Note that Interface 3 is named bmc (Baseboard Management Console). The BMC interface shares
the same physical port as ETH0 and can be used by Harmonic technical support for troubleshooting
purposes.
Set (4/2) Public Ports (for the MediaCenter 2200 only) Click Set 4 Public Ports to configure the
(button)
MIP4 and MIP5 Ethernet ports on the rear panel of the MediaCenter as public
networking ports. You must restart the MediaCenter in order for the change to
take effect. Once configured, the two Ethernet ports will appear as eth2 and
eth3. Once MIP4 and MIP5 are configured as public networking ports, you
can click Set 2 Public Ports to reconfigure them for MediaPort connectivity.
For detailed instructions, refer to “Configuring Ethernet Interfaces on the
MediaCenter.”
CAUTION: Do not connect the MIP4 and MIP5 interfaces
to your public network unless you have followed the steps
in “Configuring Ethernet Interfaces on the MediaCenter.”
to configure them for public networking. Connecting these
interfaces to your network before you configure them properly
may result in network problems.
Interface Name
Displays the internal name for the Ethernet port. Note that the BMC interface
shares the same physical port as ETH0.
Cabling
This displays the connection status of the Ethernet port.
DHCP
Displays whether DHCP is enabled.
IP Address
The IP address assigned to the Ethernet port
MAC Address
The MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask for the Ethernet port.
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway assigned to the Ethernet port
MTU
The maximum size of Ethernet packets.
In the Public Ethernet Pair Failover Settings section:
59
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Interface Pair
This field shows the failover pairs for each of the public Ethernet interfaces.
Status
Displays whether failover is configured for each failover pair, and if not, what
condition may be preventing failover selection.
Related information
Setting Ethernet interfaces on a MediaCenter 2200/2200A as public ports on page 67
Configuring network settings on page 67
Spectrum MediaDeck 7000 Public Ethernet Interfaces fields
The Public Ethernet Interface section of the Spectrum Server Properties page includes details for the
public Ethernet ports.
Note that Interface 3 is named bmc (Baseboard Management Console). The BMC interface shares
the same physical port as ETH0 and can be used by Harmonic technical support for troubleshooting
purposes.
Interface Name
Displays the internal name for the Ethernet port. eth0 corresponds to the
Ethernet port on Module A (on the left-hand side of chassis when facing the rear
panel) and eth1 corresponds to the Ethernet port on Module B (on the right).
Cabling
This displays the connection status of the Ethernet port.
DHCP
Displays whether DHCP is enabled.
IP Address
The IP address assigned to the Ethernet port
MAC Address
The MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask for the Ethernet port.
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway assigned to the Ethernet port
MTU
The maximum size of Ethernet packets.
In the Public Ethernet Pair Failover Settings section:
Interface Pair
This field shows the failover pairs for each of the public Ethernet interfaces. For
details about Ethernet failover on the MediaDeck 7000, refer to “Configuring
Network Settings.”
Related information
Configuring network settings on page 67
Spectrum X Public Ethernet Interfaces fields
The Public Ethernet Interface section of the Spectrum Server Properties page includes details for the
public Ethernet ports.
Interface Name
Displays the internal name for the Ethernet port. eth0 corresponds to the lefthand port when facing the rear panel, and eth1 corresponds to the right-hand
port when facing the rear panel.
Cabling
This displays the connection status of the Ethernet port.
DHCP
Displays whether DHCP is enabled.
60
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
IP Address
The IP address assigned to the Ethernet port
MAC Address
The MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask for the Ethernet port.
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway assigned to the Ethernet port
MTU
The maximum size of Ethernet packets.
In the Public Ethernet Pair Failover Settings section:
Interface Pair
This field shows the failover pairs for each of the public Ethernet interfaces. For
details about Ethernet failover on Spectrum X, refer to “Configuring Network
Settings.”
Related information
Configuring network settings on page 67
Connected I/O Modules (for the Spectrum X and MediaDeck 7000)
NOTE: For the Spectrum X, this section refers to installed SDI I/O cards.
The Connected MediaPort Modules section displays the name and status of the I/O modules installed in a
Spectrum X or MediaDeck 7000.
Name
The name of each MediaPort module installed on the MediaDeck 7000, or the
name of the SDI I/O card installed on the Spectrum X. Click the link to open the
Properties page for the corresponding I/O module.
Status
The network status for the displayed MediaPort Module or SDI I/O card.
Private Ethernet Interfaces fields
Find connection information for the MediaPort Ethernet array on the MediaDirector s 2252B/2251B,
2252/2251 and 2202/2201, and MediaCenter.
NOTE: This section applies only to MediaDirectors 2252B/2251B, 2252/2251 and
2202/2201, and MediaCenter s.
Figure 2-4: Private Ethernet Interfaces for MediaDirector 2252 or 2202
61
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
The MediaDirector 2252 and 2202 both have 16 private Ethernet ports, the MediaDirector
2251 and 2201 have 8 private Ethernet ports, and the MediaCenter has up to 10.
Ethernet Port
Number
The number of the Ethernet interface on the MediaPort Ethernet
array, which corresponds to the number indicated on the rear
panel of the Spectrum video server.
Ethernet Port Label
Internal private Ethernet interface name.
Ethernet Port IP
Address
IP address assigned to the Ethernet port.
Connected
MediaPort Name
Name of the MediaPort attached to that Ethernet port.
Connected
MediaPort Status
Connection status of the MediaPort.
Fibre Channel Interfaces
Find descriptions of the fibre channel interfaces section of the video server properties page.
This section applies to the MediaDirectors 2100, 2101, 2102 and 2102B, and MediaDirectors 2202/2201.
Figure 2-5: Fibre channel interfaces
Current State
Interface
Shows the Fibre Channel (FC) interfaces available on the selected
MediaDirector.
NOTE: The number of interfaces displayed depends on the
MediaDirector model. MediaDirector 2100 shows two interfaces,
MediaDirector 2101 shows three interfaces, MediaDirector 2102
62
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
2102B show six interfaces, and MediaDirector 2202/2201 shows
eight interfaces.
GUID
Lists the GUIDs of the MediaDirector ’s FC interfaces.
StatusLoop
Shows the connection status for the fibre channel loop on the selected
interface.
Status
Port A (and B) lists the status of Ports A and B on each of the FC interfaces on
the MediaDirector.
Speed
Lists the loop speed of the indicated FC loops (1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps, or
Unknown, depending on MediaDirector model).
Mode
Lists the loop status of the indicated FC loops.
Statistics
Interface
Shows the Fibre Channel interfaces available on the selected MediaDirector.
GUID
Lists the GUIDs of the MediaDirector ’s FC interfaces.
Requests Executed
Displays the number of read/write requests issued per loop. This may be useful
for FC loop troubleshooting purposes.
Loop Up
Displays a number relating to the FC operational state. This may be useful for
FC loop troubleshooting purposes.
Loop Down
Displays a number relating to the FC operational state. This may be useful for
FC loop troubleshooting purposes.
Async Events
Displays the number of disruptive FC events on the loop. This may be useful for
FC loop troubleshooting purposes.
LIPs Initiated
Displays a number relating to Loop Initialization Protocol initiations. This may be
useful for FC loop troubleshooting purposes.
LIPs Received
Displays a number relating to Loop Initialization Protocol instances received on
the loop. This may be useful for FC loop troubleshooting purposes.
Link error count
Displays the number of transmission errors on the loop. This may be useful for
FC loop troubleshooting purposes.
Set FC Loop Speed
The loop speed shown on this button will vary according to the MediaDirector
to (1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or and to what is already configured. Click to change the FC loop speed for all
4 Gbps) button
loops. Reboot the MediaDirector for the change to take place.
NOTE: The FC Loop Speed setting must match the physical
DIP switch setting on the attached MediaStore s. If you need
to reset the settings, you must power cycle the MediaStore(s)
before the new settings take effect.
For information on supported loop speeds, and configuring loop speeds, refer to
the Getting Started Guide and Hardware Orientation Guide from the Spectrum
6.4 documentation suite.
63
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Spectrum server: Environment
The Environment section of the Spectrum Server page displays environmental statistics for the Spectrum
video server.
These fields will vary depending on the type of Spectrum video server you are viewing.
Power Supplies:
PS 0, PS 1
Describes the state of the indicated power supply.
•
•
•
RTC Battery
Describes the state of the Clock Battery.
•
•
RAM Battery
NORMAL = the battery is OK.
BAD-Malfunctioning = the battery is dead or absent.
Describes the state of the RAM battery.
•
•
•
1394 PHY
NORMAL = the power supply is OK
FAILED-Absent/Unpowered = the power supply is not delivering power, or
is not plugged in.
BAD = the power supply has a hardware fault and is broken.
NORMAL = the battery is OK.
CHARGING = the battery is charging
BAD-Malfunctioning = the battery is dead or absent.
Describes the state of the power supply for the 1394 buses
•
•
NORMAL = the power supply is OK.
BAD = there is a supply failure, or the system is unable to read supply
status.
Voltage Levels:
NOTE: The values in this section are displayed in volts. The
valid ranges are also displayed. Note that these ranges are not
user configurable.
1.5V Line through
Fan1 Voltage
(For MediaDirectors 2100, 2101, 2102, and 2102B only) Displays the combined
voltages present on the outputs of the power supply.
Comm 1.0V through
FC1 12V
(For MediaDirector 2202 only) Displays the values of the various voltage rails
present on the MediaDirector.
BB +12.0V through
BB +2.2V Vbat
(For MediaCenter s, MediaDirector 2252B/2251B, and Spectrum X only)
Displays the values of the various voltage rails present on the motherboard.
MB CPU Vcore
through MB VBAT
Displays the values of the various voltage rails present on the MediaCenter
motherboard.
MRAM 1.2V through
MRAM 12V
Displays the values of the various voltage rails present on the Harmonic MRAM
expansion card.
Mid 1.0V through Mid ((For MediaDeck 7000 only) Displays the values of the various voltage rails
12.0V
present on the MediaDeck 7000.
Temperatures: note the actual list will varies according to your Spectrum video
server.
64
Viewing Spectrum video server properties
NOTE: The values in this section are always displayed in
degrees centigrade. The valid range is also displayed. Note that
this range is not user configurable.
Mainboard Int
Displays the incoming or ambient temperature for the mainboard section of the
chassis.
Power Supply Int
Displays the incoming or ambient temperature for the power supply section of
the chassis.
Mainboard Ext
Displays the outgoing or exhaust temperature for the mainboard section of the
chassis.
Power Supply Ext
Displays the outgoing or exhaust temperature for the power supply section of
the chassis.
Front Panel
Displays the incoming or ambient temperature for the front panel section of the
chassis.
BB P1 VR Temp
through BB Rt Rear
Temp
display the internal temperatures of the motherboard, including the processors
(P1, P2), BMC, and left and right sides.
SSB Temp
Displays the internal temperature near the southbridge chip.
LAN NIC Temp
Displays internal temperature of the onboard NICs.
Riser 1 Temp
through Riser 3
Temp
Displays the internal temperature near each of the riser boards.
Exit Air Temp
Displays the outgoing air temperature.
HSBP Temp
Displays the internal temperature of the hot-swap backplane, which connects to
the drives.
Comm Out
Displays the outgoing air temperature over the mainboard of the system.
FC0 In
Displays the internal air temperature over the Fibre Channel 0 board of the
system.
FC0 Out
Displays the outgoing air temperature over the Fibre Channel 0 board of the
system.
FC1 In
Displays the internal air temperature over the Fibre Channel 1 board of the
system.
FC1 Out
Displays the outgoing air temperature over the Fibre Channel 1 board of the
system.
Env In
Displays the incoming air temperature over the environmental board section
temperature over the Fibre Channel 1 section of the chassis.
Server Cores
Displays the aggregate air temperature over the CPU section of the system.
MRAM In, MRAM Out Display the incoming and outgoing air temperatures over the MRAM board
respectively.
MB Temp2, MB In
Display the temperatures of various sensors on the motherboard.
MRAM In, MRAM Out Display the incoming and outgoing air temperatures over the MRAM board
respectively.
65
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Power Supply 0
through Power
Supply 1, or PS1
through PS2
Displays the temperature of the sensor for respective power supply.
Mid CPU 0 through
Mid CPU 1, or CPU 1
through CPU 2
Displays the temperature of the sensor for the respective CPU.
Mid Board HM
Displays the temperature of the sensor for the midplane.
Mid Enet IC
Displays the temperature of the sensor for Ethernet device.
Mid Slot0 Intake
Displays the incoming air temperature for I/O module slot 0.
Mid Slot1 Intake
Displays the incoming air temperature for I/O module slot 1.
Slot 0
Displays the aggregate air temperature for I/O module slot 0.
Slot 1
Displays the aggregate air temperature for I/O module slot 1.
Fan Controllers: (for MediaDeck 7000) This section provides the control value
to be used to set the fan speed for each I/O module slot.
Fans: This section lists the speed (in RPM) of each of the Spectrum video
server fans. The valid range is also displayed. Note that this range is not user
configurable.
Changing a Spectrum video server host name
Renaming a Spectrum video server may help you locate a particular video server host throughout the
SystemManager application.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click an individual host icon (not the dual host icon) to display the Physical Configuration page for
the selected Spectrum video server host.
3. Click the Spectrum video server picture to display the host’s Properties page.
4. In the Host Name field, click Change to display the Change MediaDirector/MediaCenter Name
page.
5. Type the new name in the text box. Refer to “About Naming Files and System Elements” for proper
naming conventions.
6. Click Save to return to the Properties page.
The new host name now appears in the System diagram, in various page titles and in other video
server-related fields throughout the application.
Related information
About naming files and system elements on page 117
66
Setting Ethernet interfaces on a MediaCenter 2200/2200A as public ports
Setting Ethernet interfaces on a MediaCenter 2200/2200A as
public ports
The MediaCenter 2200/2200A allows you to configure the MIP4 and MIP5 Ethernet ports for public
networking, and reconfigure them at any time.
By default, the MIP4 and MIP5 Ethernet ports on the rear panel of the MediaCenter are configured for I/O
module connectivity.
CAUTION: Do not connect the MIP4 and MIP5 interfaces to your public network unless
you have followed the steps in this section to configure them for public networking.
Connecting these interfaces to your network before you configure them properly may result
in network problems.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click an individual host MediaCenter icon to display the MediaCenter Physical Configuration page
for the selected MediaCenter host.
3. Click the MediaCenter icon to display the MediaCenter Properties page.
4. Scroll to the Public Ethernet Interfaces section. If the MIP4 and MIP5 ports have not been
configured for public networking yet, the button will read Set 4 Public Ports.
5. Click Set 4 Public Ports.
6. A confirmation appears indicating that a reboot is required in order for the changes to take effect.
Click OK.
7. Restart the MediaCenter by clicking the Reboot button in the General Properties section of the page.
8. Once the MediaCenter has restarted, verify that eth2 and eth3 interfaces appear in the Public
Ethernet Interfaces section of the MediaCenter Properties page.
The button under Public Ethernet Ports will now read Set 2 Public Ports. If you wish to reconfigure
MIP4 and MIP5 for MediaPort connectivity, you can click this button and restart the MediaCenter for
the changes to take effect.
Configuring network settings
Configure network settings for your Spectrum video server.
This section applies to the following Spectrum video servers:
•
•
•
•
Spectrum X
MediaDirector 2252B/2251B, 2252/2251, and 2202/2201
MediaCenter 2200B and 2200 series
MediaDeck 7000
CAUTION: Consult your network administrator before modifying the Ethernet settings on
your Spectrum video server. If you incorrectly configure any of the Ethernet settings on your
Spectrum video server, you risk losing communication with that device. This may require
that you contact Harmonic technical support.
67
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
About Ethernet failover and bandwidth
Spectrum video servers allow you to configure your Ethernet interfaces in failover pairs to provide added
reliability in the event of a hardware failure.
When a pair of Ethernet interfaces are configured in failover mode and one of the interfaces experiences
a failure, the remaining interface takes over the Ethernet traffic of the failed interface in addition to its own
packets. Take note of the following:
•
•
If both interfaces in a failover pair are up, you will get two interfaces worth of incoming and outgoing
bandwidth.
Once a failover has occurred, the total bandwidth (both the incoming and outgoing bandwidth) is
limited to one interface worth of packets.
Planning your network settings
Plan your network settings before configuring.
IMPORTANT: Please read the following section before configuring your Ethernet network.
When planning an Ethernet network, consider the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Spectrum video servers do not ship with Ethernet interfaces configured for failover. Interface failover
must be configured using SystemManager.
You can assign multiple Ethernet interfaces on your Spectrum video server to the same IP subnet. To
a great extent, you can use those interfaces independently and the maximum bandwidth will be limited
by the number of interfaces.
To maximize bandwidth, you must connect to the Spectrum video server in such a way that each client
PC points to a different interface on the Spectrum video server. If multiple client PCs are connected to
all the different Ethernet interfaces on the Spectrum video server, then bandwidth can be distributed
across the different interfaces. Whereas, if the client PCs are all connected to one interface, bandwidth
is limited by that one interface. Therefore, distributing the network traffic is your responsibility when
setting up the network.
If you initiate a file transfer from a given Ethernet interface on a client PC to a specific interface on
the Spectrum video server, it will always use the same interface to return packets, and will send them
directly to the same interface on the client PC that initiated the transfer.
For the MediaDeck 7000, both MediaPort Modules must be installed in order to enable failover.
Configuring your network settings
Configure network settings for your Spectrum video server.
1. From the System Diagram, click any Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to reach the Physical
Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. In the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings filed, click Network Settings.
The Network Settings page for your Spectrum video server appears.
The DNS/NTP Settings section allows you to enter information about your DNS and NTP servers.
68
Configuring network settings
Figure 2-6: DNS/NTP Settings
IMPORTANT: You must designate a fully-functioning and properly-configured NTP
server for the Spectrum video server. Failure to do so will result in video disruption.
4. To configure DNS or NTP Settings, in the DNS/NTP Settings section of the page, enter the
appropriate IP addresses for the following DNS or NTP servers:
•
•
•
•
DNS Server 0
DNS Server 1
NTP Server 0
NTP Server 1
NOTE: If you enter DNS information, make sure that you also define the name and
IP address of the Spectrum video server in the DNS server. Failure to do so will
result in CIFS connection delays of up to 30 seconds or more.
5. The DNS Search Settings section, shown below, allows you to enter up to four static DNS search
domain names, to be used by DNS when resolving network domain names in more complicated
networks.
Figure 2-7: DNS Search Settings
To configure DNS Search Settings, enter the DNS Search Domain name(s) (for example,
acme.local), and then click Save DNS Search Domains.
6. The I/O Module IP Address Range Settings section displays the default IP address range that the
video server uses for assigning IP addresses to the connected MediaPort s. The IP addresses of
those MediaPorts are shown in the Private Ethernet Interfaces section of the Properties page.
IMPORTANT: Do not modify this field unless instructed by Technical Support.
NOTE: This feature does not apply to the Spectrum X or MediaDeck 7000.
If, for some reason, you need to change this default IP address range, enter the new IP address
range in the I/O Module IP Base Address field, and then click Save I/O Module Base Address.
Once the new range is set, you must restart both the Spectrum video server and all the attached
MediaPorts in order for the new IP addresses to take effect.
69
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
7. The Ethernet Interface Settings section, shown below, allows you to configure network settings for
each Ethernet Interface.
Figure 2-8: Ethernet Interface Settings
Configure the following fields as necessary:
◦
MTU: This field may be used to change the maximum size of Ethernet packets.
◦
◦
NOTE: At this time, Harmonic does not recommend changing the default packet
size of 1500 bytes.
DHCP: Select or clear to enable or disable DHCP.
IP Address: When DHCP is disabled, this field may be used to enter a static IP address.
IMPORTANT: Changing the primary IP address for the Spectrum video server will
cause SystemManager to lose connection with it. If you wish to change the primary IP
address, follow the instructions in “Changing the Primary IP Address.” Note that the
primary IP address is displayed next to the name of the Spectrum video server host on
the System Diagram page.
◦
◦
Subnet Mask: When DHCP is disabled, this field may be used to enter a subnet
mask.
Default Gateway: When DHCP is disabled, this field may be used to enter a default
gateway.
8. Click Save Interface Settings to save the current settings. If you wish restore the default settings at
any time, click Restore Default Settings.
NOTE: Once you have configured the Ethernet interfaces on your Spectrum video
server, Harmonic recommends that you ping each interface to verify that it is configured
properly.
9. Modify the Configure Additional Routes section if necessary. This section allows you to specify
routing configurations for individual Ethernet interfaces other than the default route. This is only
necessary for more complex network configurations.
10. Modify the Ethernet Interface Failover Settings section if necessary. This section allows you to
configure failover settings for the Ethernet interfaces.
11. Once you have finished configuring your network settings, click Done to save your settings.
70
Configuring network settings
Related information
Changing the primary IP address on page 76
Configuring additional routes on page 75
Configuring Ethernet interfaces for failover on page 73
Examples of basic Ethernet interface configurations
See examples of some standard network configurations of Spectrum video server.
Example: Static IP address
In this example, only one Ethernet interface, eth0, is connected. This interface is configured with a static
IP address. No expansion cards are installed in this example.
Figure 2-9: Example of one interface, static IP
Example: DHCP
In this example, only one Ethernet interface, eth0, is connected. This interface is configured for DHCP. No
expansion cards are installed in this example.
Figure 2-10: Example of one Interface, DHCP
71
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Example: Static IP address and DHCP with expansion card
In this example, a 10 Gb dual port expansion card is installed in the MediaDirector 2202/2201, and three
interfaces are connected. Two are configured with static IP addresses, and one is configured for DHCP.
Figure 2-11: Example of three interfaces using static IP addresses and DHCP
Note that in this example, each interface provides access to a separate subnet.
Example: Static IP addresses with expansion card
In this example, a 1 Gb quad port expansion card is installed in the MediaDirector 2202/2201, and
five interfaces are connected. One interface on the main board is configured for DHCP, while all four
interfaces on the expansion card are configured with static IP addresses
Figure 2-12: Example of five interfaces: one DHCP and four static IP addresses
Note that in this example, bandwidth for FTP transfers can be maximized by connecting a separate
client PC to each of the different Ethernet interfaces to distribute the load. This network distribution is the
responsibility of the user when setting up the network.
About Ethernet interface failover
Note some important points regarding Ethernet interface failover.
For the MediaDirector 2252B/2251B, 2252/2251 and 2202/2201, failover may be configured only between
the following pairs of Ethernet interfaces:
•
•
•
eth0 and eth1 (the main public Ethernet interfaces on the MediaDirector 2202/2201)
ixeth0 and ixeth1 (For the MediaDirector 2252/2251 and 2202/2201, these include the interfaces
on the dual port expansion card. For the MediaDirector 2252B/2251B, these are the ports for system
management)
eth2 and eth3 (interfaces on the quad port expansion card)
72
Configuring network settings
•
eth4 and eth5 (interfaces on the quad port expansion card)
For the MediaCenter 2200 and 2200B series, failover may be configured between the following pairs of
Ethernet interfaces:
•
•
•
eth0 and eth1 (the main public Ethernet interfaces on the MediaCenter)
eth2 and eth3 (only available on the MediaCenter 2200 series if you have configured the MIP 4 and
MIP 5 interfaces for public networking. See “Configuring Ethernet interfaces on the MediaCenter ” for
details.)
xeth0 and ixeth1(Only available on the MediaCenter 2200B series. These are the ports for system
management.)
For the Spectrum X and MediaDeck 7000, failover may be configured between the following pair of
Ethernet interfaces:
•
eth0 and eth1 (for the MediaDeck 7000, these are the interfaces on the installed MediaPort Modules)
TIP: The interface names in the above lists are found in the Interface Name field of the
Ethernet Settings page.
For all Spectrum servers:
•
•
•
Failover pairs must be cabled and assigned to the same IP subnet.
IP addresses for failover pairs must be statically assigned (that is, DHCP should be disabled).
There can be one or more failover pairs per IP subnet.
Related information
Setting Ethernet interfaces on a MediaCenter 2200/2200A as public ports on page 67
Configuring Ethernet interfaces for failover
Configure Ethernet interfaces on a Spectrum server for failover.
1. From the System Diagram, click any Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to reach the Physical
Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. In the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings filed, click Network Settings.
The Network Settings page for your Spectrum video server appears.
4. Scroll to the Ethernet Interface Settings section of the page.
5. Make sure that each pair of interfaces you are configuring for failover are configured with static IP and
are on the same subnet.
6. If you have made changes in the Ethernet Interface Settings section of the page, save your settings
by clicking Save Settings.
7. In the Ethernet Interface Failover Settings section of the page, select the interface pair(s) for which
you want to enable failover mode, and then click Enable Failover Mode.
8. Verify that the text in the Status column changes to Failover Enabled.
73
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Examples of failover configurations
Find some examples of possible failover configurations.
Example: One failover pair
In this example, a 1 Gb quad port expansion card is installed in the MediaDirector 2202/2201, and
three interfaces are connected. The eth2 and eth3 interfaces are configured for failover. Note that these
interfaces are configured with static IP addresses and are assigned to the same IP subnet.
Figure 2-13: Example of one failover pair
74
Configuring network settings
Example: Multiple failover pairs
In this example, a 1 Gb quad port expansion card is installed in the MediaDirector 2202/2201, all six
interfaces are connected, and every failover pair is configured for failover. Note that every interface is
configured with static IP addresses, and that each failover pair is assigned to the same IP subnet.
Figure 2-14: Example of three failover pairs
Configuring additional routes
In the unusual circumstance that you need to configure a network route in addition to the route specified
for a given interface in the Ethernet Interface Settings section of the Network Settings page, you may use
the Configure Additional Routes feature to add a route.
CAUTION: The procedure in this section is intended for qualified technical personnel,
skilled at advanced networking procedures. If you are unsure of any steps, consult with
your network administrator or contact Harmonic technical support before proceeding.
The following figure shows an example of an additional route.
75
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Figure 2-15: Example of additional route
1. In the Configure Additional Routes section, select an interface from the Select Interface drop-down
menu. Note that you may only select interfaces which are connected. Configure the following fields as
necessary:
•
•
•
Subnet Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
2. In the Add Route column, click Add.
Once the new route has been added, the details of that route appear in the Existing Routes section.
Note that for each interface, you may add as many additional routes as you wish.
Once you have configured an additional route, a Delete Route column will appear in the Existing
Routes section. To delete an existing route, click the Delete button for the route you wish to delete.
Changing the primary IP address
If instructed by Harmonic technical support, you can change the primary IP address of a video server.
CAUTION: The procedure in this section is intended for qualified technical personnel,
skilled at advanced networking procedures. If you are unsure of any steps, consult with
your network administrator or contact Harmonic technical support before proceeding.
The primary IP address is the first Spectrum video server IP address that is discovered by the
SystemManager, and is used to communicate with SystemManager. If you wish to change this IP
address, follow the procedure below.
IMPORTANT: Changing the primary IP address for the Spectrum video server will cause
SystemManager to lose connection with it. Note that the primary IP address is displayed
next to the name of the Spectrum video server host on the System Diagram page.
76
Configuring watch folders
1. Navigate to the Network Settings page, and then scroll to the Ethernet Interfaces section of the
page.
2. Identify the Ethernet Interface used for the primary IP address.
3. For the Ethernet Interface, which uses the primary IP address, make sure DHCP is not selected, enter
the new values in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway fields, and then click Done.
This will cause SystemManager to lose connection with the Spectrum video server.
4. Remove the Spectrum video server from SystemManager using the Remove Devices feature. Refer
to the instructions in “Removing devices” to select the Spectrum video server that contains the
primary IP address you wish to change, and remove it.
5. Use the Connect Harmonic Device feature to connect to the new primary IP address. Refer to the
instructions in “Connecting a device from a different IP network” and use the new primary IP address
in the field for Enter device IP address or device name.
6. Once you have connected to the new primary IP address, view the System Diagram on the
Configuration tab to verify that you are connected to the Spectrum video server.
Related information
Removing devices on page 40
Connecting a device from a different IP network on page 39
Configuring watch folders
®
With the Watch Folder feature, you can configure Spectrum to demultiplex PitchBlue transport stream
files or MPEG-2 program stream files, or re-wrap LXF files that are transferred via FTP or Samba to a
specified “watch folder” on your Spectrum video server.
Spectrum outputs the resulting files to a specified destination folder on your video server. For
demultiplexed transport stream files, the resulting AVC/H.264 files can be played out with a Spectrum I/
O module licensed for AVC/H.264. For MPEG-2 program streams, the resulting files will have the same
video format as the original, and compressed audio will be decoded to the PCM format.
NOTE: Spectrum does not support native playout of MPEG-2 program streams.
IMPORTANT: When using the Watch Folder feature to re-wrap LXF files, SystemManager
automatically changes the bandwidth limits on your video server to improve the LXF rewrap performance. If you wish to restore the default bandwidth limits, see “Changing
network and file system performance settings” for details.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the Physical
Configuration page, and then click the icon of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties
page.
2. From the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure Watch
Folder to open the Harmonic Watch Folder page for your Spectrum video server.
77
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
3. Click Add Watch Folder, and configure as follows:
◦
◦
Source Ext: Spectrum supports the .ts, .ps, and LXF formats. Select one of the following:
◦ ts
◦ ps
◦ lxf. Note that this option may be used for LXF files with or without an extension.
Source folder: Enter the complete path of the folder on your Spectrum video server that you wish
to specify as your watch folder. The source folder must exist before you configure it as a watch
folder.
IMPORTANT:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Harmonic recommends that you never configure clip.dir, or any folder that
experiences high traffic, as your Source watch folder.
Multiple Watch Folder entries cannot use the same Source Folder. Make sure to
enter a unique Source Folder for each Watch Folder entry.
Destination Folder: Enter the complete path of the directory to which the demultiplexed or rewrapped files will be written.
Destination Media Format: Select the desired wrapper type for the destination media.
Max Transfers: Select the maximum number of files that may be transferred at one time.
Rewrap Speed: This option allows you to change the maximum speed of the file re-wrap
in relation to real-time. For example, 2x would be up to twice as fast as real-time. Harmonic
recommends that you leave the default value for your source format unless instructed otherwise by
Harmonic technical support.
NOTE: For PitchBlue .ts or MPEG-2 .ps entries, Spectrum supports a re-wrap
speed no higher than 3x.
track re-stacking: This option allows you to re-order the tracks in the destination file. Enter the
track numbers, separated by commas, in the order you want them to appear in the destination file.
track matching: This option allows you to match the tracks in the destination file with track tags
specified in the TrackKeyValueDefs.txt configuration file on the Spectrum server.
◦
◦
◦
Make sure you have edited the track tags as needed. See "Editing track tags" for details.
Click Add Track Tag, and then select a tag from the drop-down list. The selected tag will
override any source tags for that track once the clip is transferred to the destination file.
◦ To delete a track tag, click the adjacent X.
Delete Original Clip: Select whether you want the original files to be deleted after they are
demulitplexed or re-wrapped. Note that the source file will only be deleted upon success of the
operation.
78
Configuring watch folders
Example: Note that the track matching and track re-stacking options work together so that the tags
indicated in the track matching column apply to the re-ordered tracks in the destination folder. The
following table shows how the re-ordered tracks would correspond to the tags in the destination folder.
Table 2-1:
Track
Tag
0
No tag, video source
2
Spanish
3
Chinese
4
French
3
Chinese
4. Add additional watch folders as needed. At this time, Spectrum supports two watch folders per
Spectrum video server. These watch folders may use different source types (.ts, .ps, or LXF) or two of
the same source type.
5. Once you have configured the watch folder, click Apply to apply your changes, and then click Done.
If you wish to delete a watch folder, select the Delete check box, click Delete selected rows, and
then click Apply
Result:
NOTE: For watch folder configuration guidelines specific to your Spectrum video server
type, refer to the configuration guidelines section of the Spectrum release notes.
Related information
Changing network and file system performance settings on page 109
Creating an AVC (H.264) Player on page 258
Editing track tags on page 95
About LXF support
Note the default settings for LXF support.
When you add an LXF watch folder, SystemManager automatically configures the Network/File System
Performance settings to improve performance.
79
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Performance settings are changed as follows:
•
MediaDirector 2252B/2251B, 2252/2251, 2202/2201
◦
◦
•
For 50 Mbps material, Spectrum supports two LXF imports with a re-wrap speed no higher than 3x.
For 100 Mbps or 150 Mbps LXF material, the re-wrap speed must be set no higher than 1x.
MediaCenter 2200B and 2200
◦
◦
•
Low Priority Bandwidth Limit (FTP & SAMBA): 300 MB/s
Low+ Priority Bandwidth Limit (AFP): 200 MB/s
Low Priority Bandwidth Limit (FTP & SAMBA): Default setting (185 MB/s)
Low+ Priority Bandwidth Limit (AFP): 200 MB/s
For 50 Mbps material, Spectrum supports two LXF imports with a re-wrap speed no higher than 3x.
For 100 Mbps or 150 Mbps LXF material, the re-wrap speed must be set no higher than 1x.
Spectrum X and MediaDeck 7000
◦
◦
Low Priority Bandwidth Limit (FTP & SAMBA): Default setting (100 MB/s)
Low+ Priority Bandwidth Limit (AFP): 100 MB/s
For 50 Mbps material, Spectrum supports one LXF import with a re-wrap speed no higher than 3x. For
100 Mbps or 150 Mbps LXF material, the re-wrap speed must be set no higher than 1x.
Configuring Auto-export to Harmonic MediaGrid
With the auto-export license, you can configure Spectrum to record directly to a directory on the Spectrum
video server, and then automatically transfer the files to one or more destination folders on your Harmonic
MediaGrid or to another location via FTP.
IMPORTANT: Auto-Export watch folders are intended specifically for use with content that
is recorded directly from a player to the watch folder. Harmonic does not support manually
copying files into the watch folder.
For guidelines regarding active transfers on your Spectrum video server, refer to the “Configuration
Guidelines” section for your video server in the Spectrum Release Notes.
Although the simplest configuration of the of the Auto-Export to Harmonic MediaGrid feature is to
configure one watch folder on your Spectrum system, you may wish to create multiple folders for use
with different content. For example, you may create one watch folder entry for SD content and another
watch folder entry for HD content and configure these to transfer to separate locations on your Harmonic
MediaGrid file system. In this case, note that you must configure your SD and HD Record players to save
to the SD and HD watch folders respectively.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the Physical
Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. In the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure Auto
Export to Grid. The Watch Folder page appears.
4. Click Add Watch Folder and configure as follows:
◦
Source Path: Enter the path of the source folder on the Spectrum file system. For example:
/fs0/watch/
80
Configuring Auto-export to Harmonic MediaGrid
CAUTION: Harmonic recommends that you never configure clip.dir, or any folder that
experiences high traffic, as your Source watch folder.
◦
Destination URL: Enter the URL or path of the destination folder on the Harmonic MediaGrid or
other location. Use one of the following formats:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
For a folder on the Harmonic MediaGrid , use the following: mgfs://<IP address or network
name of Harmonic MediaGrid system>/<file system path>. For example: mgfs://my_mediagrid/
fs/dropbox/
If you used a Harmonic MediaGrid IP address on the “Harmonic MediaGrid Accounts” page
for your Spectrum video server in SystemManager, you must enter that IP address in the
Destination URL field. Likewise, if you used a Harmonic MediaGrid network name on the
Harmonic MediaGrid Accounts page, you must enter that network name in the Destination URL
field. For details on configuring Harmonic MediaGrid accounts, see “Connecting to a Harmonic
MediaGrid from the Spectrum Video Server.”
For a location via FTP, use one of the following:
◦ ftp://<IP address of networked device>/file system path/
◦ ftp://username:password@<IP address>/file system path/
Max Transfers: Enter the number of files that may be exported from this watch folder at one time.
Delete Original Clip: If yes, the file being exported will be deleted from the source folder once it is
successfully transferred. If, for some reason, the transfer fails, the file will not be deleted.
Replace file on destination: If yes, the file being exported will overwrite any existing file with the
same name in the destination folder.
Rewrap: If yes, Spectrum will rewrap the file using the wrapper format selected from the Rewrap
Style drop-down menu.
Rewrap Style: Select the wrapper format to be used for the file being exported.
NOTE: For FTP transfers, Harmonic supports transfers of the following low latency
formats only: MXF OP1a (Standard, Low Latency), MXF OP1a (Internal-EVTR, Low
Latency), and MXF OP1a (SMPTE RDD9).
IMPORTANT: Multiple Watch Folder entries cannot use the same Source Folder. Make
sure to enter a unique Source Folder for each Watch Folder entry.
The following images show two examples of watch folders, one (on the left) that exports to a
Harmonic MediaGrid system, and one (on the right) that exports to a location via FTP.
Figure 2-16: Auto-export examples
5. Once you have configured the watch folder, click Save to apply your changes, and then click Done.
6. Configure additional watch folders as needed.
81
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
7. Make sure to configure your Record player(s) to save directly to the watch folder by modifying the
Default Clip Directory field for the player accordingly.
Related information
Connecting to a Harmonic MediaGrid from the Spectrum video server on page 108
Configuring Auto-Export for Proxy Files
Note the procedure to configure auto-export for proxy content.
1. Follow steps 1-5 of “Configuring Auto-export to Harmonic MediaGrid” to create a watch folder for your
high-resolution content.
2. Create a second watch folder, which includes the source path of the original watch folder modified to
add a proxy.dir sub folder for your proxy content. When a player is configured to record proxies, it will
simultaneously write a proxy file to the proxy.dir directory.
For example, if the source path of the original watch folder is /fs0/MyDir, the source path of the
second watch folder for proxy files would be /fs0/MyDir/proxy.dir.
The following figure shows a watch folder for proxy files, which uses the source path of the first watch
folder for high resolution content.
Figure 2-17: Example of auto-export folder for proxy
3. Make sure to configure your Record player(s) to save directly to the first watch folder by modifying the
Default Clip Directory field for the player accordingly.
Related information
Edit Player options on page 224
82
Configuring SMPTE 2022-6
Configuring SMPTE 2022-6
Follow the procedures in order to enable and configure your system for SMPTE 2022-6.
Before configuring your system, make sure your Spectrum X is connected to a SMPTE 2022-6 network
according to the instructions in "Connecting Spectrum X to your SMPTE 2022-6 network" in the Spectrum
System Installation Guide. Also make sure your system is licensed for SMPTE 2022-6.
The following is an overview of SMPTE 2022-6 configuration procedures.
1. Verify that a SMPTE 2022-6 license is installed on your system.
2. Enable SMPTE 2022-6 for the I/O module. Note that enabling or disabling SMPTE 2022-6 requires a
restart of the Spectrum X.
3. Configure network settings for the 10 Gb I/O module Ethernet interfaces. If you are using PTP for
reference, enable PTP for the 10 Gb I/O module Ethernet Interfaces.
4. (Optional) Configure RouteTables for your system, which include parameters such as source IP
address and port number.
5. Configure the Spectrum X channel settings for 2022-6 and map the 2022-6 inputs and outputs to the
Spectrum X I/O to start the 2022-6 streams.
Related information
Viewing licensed features for a Spectrum video server on page 100
Enabling 2022-6 for the I/O module
Before configuring 2022-6 settings on your Spectrum X, it must be enabled on the system.
1. Navigate to the I/O Module Properties page for a Spectrum X SDI I/O card, and select IP Transport
Protocol: SMPTE 2022-6.
NOTE: Enabling or disabling SMPTE 2022-6 requires a restart of the Spectrum
X. Note that SMPTE 2022-6 options on the Master Control Switcher section of the
Channel Properties page are only available when SMPTE 2022-6 is enabled.
2. A confirmation message appears. Click OK to proceed and restart the Spectrum X.
Configuring network settings for the 10 Gb I/O modules
The 10 Gb I/O module on the Spectrum X is required in order to use SMPTE 2022-6. Configure the
network settings for your 10 Gb Ethernet interfaces.
When configuring the 10 Gb I/O module, you can open the properties page for either SDI card in the
Spectrum X. The network settings for the 10 Gb NIC apply to the entire Spectrum X. Once you have
configured the network settings, they will be visible from the properties page for either SDI card.
1. Navigate to the I/O Module Properties page for a Spectrum X SDI I/O card, and scroll to the NIC
Configuration section.
Select the Edit NIC Configuration check box and note the confirmation message.
NOTE: If you want to change network settings for a 10 Gb NIC after 2022-6 has
already been configured, make sure to first stop any 2022-6 streams on the Spectrum
83
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
X. To do this, from the Channel Properties page, in the I/O Mapping section, under
Stream Type, change all selections to SDI.
To continue, click OK.
IMPORTANT: The orientation of the interfaces on the rear panel differs between the
optical and copper 10 Gb I/O modules:
◦
◦
For the optical 10 Gb I/O module: when facing the rear panel, ixeth0 is the interface
on the right-hand side and ixeth1 is the interface on the left-hand side.
For the copper 10 Gb I/O module: when facing the rear panel, ixeth0 is the interface
on the left-hand side and ixeth1 is the interface on the right-hand side.
2. In the IP Address fields, enter the static IP address for each interface. Modify the remaining fields as
needed
3. If you wish to use PTP for reference, in the PTP section for that NIC, click Enable, and then enter the
Domain Number specified by your PTP grandmaster clock.
4. Click Save Interface Settings.
Configuring RouteTables
With SystemManager 6.7 and later, you can configure RouteTables which contain parameters for your
SMPTE 2022-6 or transport stream network(s).
Once you have configured a RouteTable, you can map Spectrum X channel inputs and outputs to it
from the Channel Properties page, or use it to configure a compressed stream player. You can configure
multiple RouteTables for one Spectrum X.
Once you have created a RouteTable, you can export it as an .XML file to a location on your
SystemManager client. You can also import a RouteTable from your SystemManager client to your
Spectrum server.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the Physical
Configuration page, and then click the icon of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties
page.
2. From the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click RouteTables to
open the RouteTables page for your Spectrum video server.
3. Under RouteTables List, click Create New RouteTable to open the Configure RouteTable New
page.
84
Configuring SMPTE 2022-6
4. In the RouteTable Name section, type a name for the RouteTable. The name should start with an
alphnumeric character, can include letters, numbers, and spaces, and can include the following
special characters:
-^'@{}[],$=!()+~_
5. Click Add New Feed/Stream.
6. Configure the following parameters.
Label
Enter a label for the feed/stream.
Feed/Stream Type
Select either 2022-6 or TS/IP for transport stream ingest.
Source IP
Enter the source IP addres for the stream or feed.
Multicast IP
Enter the multicast address to be used for the 2022-6 Input/Output or the
transport stream.
Port
Enter the UDP port number to be used for the 2022-6 Input/Output or the
transport stream. Note that, for 2022-6, the value should be greater than or
equal to 2000.
Program Number
(For transport stream ingest) Enter the program number (not PID) that
identifies the program within the compressed stream.
7. Add or remove Feed(s)/Stream(s) as needed, and then click Save to save the RouteTable.
8. Click Done to return to the RouteTable page. The new RouteTable will appear under RouteTables
List.
If you wish to export the RouteTable as an .XML file, click the Select check box for the RouteTable,
and then click Export RouteTable to download the .XML file to your SystemManager client.
If you wish to import an .XML file RouteTable, under Import RouteTable heading, click Choose File,
navigate to the RouteTable file, and select it. Once it's selected. click Import RouteTable.
The imported RouteTable will appear in the RouteTables List
.
NOTE: SystemManager can import a RouteTable with up to 1000 feeds.
85
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Configuring 2022-6 settings for a Spectrum X channel
Configure your Spectrum X channel to use 2022-6.
1. Navigate to the I/O Module Properties page for your Spectrum X by clicking its link or icon in the
System Diagram, and then click the Configure Channel A or Configure Channel B button to open
the properties page for that channel.
2. Under Master Control Switcher Configuration > Default Source Type, for the I/O to be used with
2022-6, click the drop-down menu, and select SMPTE 2022-6.
3. In the SMPTE 2022-6 Configuration section, configure the following settings.
86
Configuring SMPTE 2022-6
a. For Change RouteTable:
Select RouteTable
If you have configured a RouteTable for your 2022-6 network, select it
from the drop-down menu.
b. For Inputs and Outputs, click Add Input/Output, and configure as follows:
NOTE: Changing Input and Output settings from this page does not change the
RouteTable settings.
Local Interface
Select the 10 Gb Ethernet interface to be used. If no 10 Gb NICs are
configured, the drop-down menu will be empty.
Feed
Select a feed from the drop-down menu. Note that the remaining fields
will be populated with the settings specified in the RouteTable entry for
that feed.
Name
Enter a name for the Input/Output.
IP address
If using a different address than the one specified in the RouteTable,
enter the multicast address to be used for the 2022-6 Input/Output.
Port
If using a different port than the one specified in the RouteTable, enter
the port to be used for the 2022-6 Input/Output.
c. For I/O Mapping, map the channel I/O to 2022-6 streams as needed.
IMPORTANT: Mapping an I/O to a 2022-6 stream and applying the configuration
automatically starts the 2022-6 stream. Mapping the I/O back to SDI stops the
stream.
Stream Type
Select SDI or 2022-6.
Config ID
Select the name of the 2022-6 feed.
d. For Reference Source, select from the following.
87
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Analog Black-Burst
The default selection.
PTP-AutoSelect
Available when PTP is enabled. When selected, Spectrum automatically
selects a NIC for PTP reference. In the event one NIC fails, Spectrum
switches to the second NIC.
PTP-Eth0, PTP-Eth1
Available when PTP is enabled. Spectrum will use the PTP reference
from the selected NIC.
4. In the Graphcis and MCS section, select Enable SMPTE 2022-6 to enable 2022-6 for the channel.
5. Click Apply to save the settings and start any 2022-6 streams that are mapped.
Starting and stopping 2022-6 streams
Mapping a Spectrum X I/O to a 2022-6 input or output using either SystemManager or FXTool starts the
2022-6 stream. Mapping that I/O back to SDI stops the 2022-6 stream.
•
•
To start a 2022-6 stream using SystemManager, from the I/O Mapping section of Channel Properties
page, in the Stream menu, select 2022-6 for the Spectrum X channel I/O. To stop the 2022-6 stream
for that I/O, select SDI. Click Apply for the change to take effect.
If you are using FXTool with Spectrum X, and have configured 2022-6 Inputs and Outputs for a
Spectrum X channel in SystemManager, you can configure FXTool to use 2022-6 sources for that
channel. For details on mapping I/O using FXTool, see "Configuring FXTool to Use 2022-6 Sources" in
the Spectrum Tools User Guide.
Configuring transport stream ingest
Configure your system for transport stream ingest.
The following is an overview of transport stream ingest configuration procedures.
1. Review the "Spectrum X Configuration Guidelines" section of the Spectrum System Release Notes
before configuring your system for transport stream ingest.
2. Verify that the transport stream ingest license is installed on your system.
3. Configure the network settings for any Ethernet port that you plan on connecting to your transport
stream network. For the Spectrum X, the eth2, eth3, eth4, and eth5 interfaces can be used for
transport stream ingest.
88
Previewing material from a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS
4. Connect the Ethernet interfaces from your Spectrum video server to a VLAN or switch dedicated to
transport streams, as described in "Connecting to your transport stream network" in the Spectrum
System Installation Guide.
5. (Optional) Configure one or more RouteTables to specify the parameters for your transport stream
network and program.
6. Configure a Compressed Stream Player to record a selected program from a network transport
stream.
Related information
Viewing licensed features for a Spectrum video server on page 100
Configuring network settings on page 67
Configuring RouteTables on page 84
Creating a Compressed Stream Player on page 260
Previewing material from a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS
With Spectrum 8.3, and later, a Spectrum X can be used to Preview content for Automation by mounting
an external Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system and directly accessing clips.
Configure your system as follows:
1. Make sure your Spectrum X is set to "diskless" mode as described in "Setting the Spectrum X to
'diskless' mode" in the Spectrum System Installation Guide, and inlcudes the NAS-MOUNT and FWMIP-9000-MDM (MediaDeck Mode) licenses.
2. Mount the Spectrum X to a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system as described in "Configuring a
Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system mount."
3. Configure a Player for playout as described in "Creating a player." Make sure to specify the Harmonic
MediaGrid or NAS file system in the default clip directory as specified in "About the Harmonic
MediaGrid or NAS file system path and the player 'Default Clip Directory.'"
IMPORTANT: Players configured to Preview material from a Harmonic MediaGrid or
NAS are intended for Preview only and are not for on-air usage.
Related information
Mounting a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system on page 89
Creating a player on page 224
Mounting a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system
With Spectrum 8.3, and later, and the NAS-MOUNT license, Spectrum X can mount to a Harmonic
MediaGrid or NAS file system.
A Spectrum X can be used to Preview content for Automation by mounting an external Harmonic
MediaGrid or NAS file system and directly accessing clips. The Spectrum X must be in "diskless" mode
and inlcude the NAS-MOUNT and FW-MIP-9000-MDM (MediaDeck Mode) licenses. For instructions
on setting diskless mode, see "Setting the Spectrum X to 'diskless' mode" in the Spectrum System
Installation Guide.
89
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
A Spectrum X in internal storage mode, and mounted to Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS, can use Delay
Service to record material to the Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS and playback with a specified delay. Note
that Delay Service mounts the Spectrum X to Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS automatically when Delay
Service is set up for "grid" or "grid mirrored mode." See "Configuring Delay Service" for details.
Related information
Configuring Delay Service on page 338
Configuring a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system mount
Configure the mount parameters.
Before you begin
For the external file system that you plan on mounting (either Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS), the Spectrum
server must be able to create subfolders on the file system. Make sure permissions on the Harmonic
MediaGrid or NAS allow for the Spectrum server to create the necessary subfolders.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the Physical
Configuration page, and then click the icon of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties
page.
2. From the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Mount NAS/Grid
File System to open the NAS/Grid Filesystem mount page for your Spectrum video server.
3. Click Add OMFS/CIFS Mount.
4. Configure the mount parameters as follows.
Mount Type
◦
◦
omfs: Select if your Harmonic MediaGrid system does not include a
ContentBridge.
cifs: Select if your Harmonic MediaGrid system includes a
ContentBridge.
Server Address
Enter the IP address of your ContentDirector.
Path
Enter the file system path for your mount. This value must include the name
of the root file system, and may include subfolders separated with a forward
slash, as in, <root fs>/<subfolder>. For details on how the file system path
relates to the default clip directory, see About the Harmonic MediaGrid or
NAS file system path and the player "Default Clip Directory" on page 91.
User Name
Type the user name for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
Password
Type the password for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
Options: mode
(For omfs mount type only)
◦
Minimal: Optimized for use with Delay Service.
90
Mounting a Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system
◦
◦
◦
Write: Optimized for use with Transport Stream Ingest.
Linear: Optimized for previewing clips.
Random: Not optimized. Can be used for scrubbing.
5. Add any additional mounts as needed, and then click Apply to save the changes.
6. Restart the Spectrum X for the changes to take effect. Note that adding or removing a mount requires
a restart of the Spectrum X.
About the Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS file system path and the player
"Default Clip Directory"
When configuring a player to preview from Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS, it's important to note the
relationship between the file system path specified on the Configure OMFS/CIFS Mount page and the
Default Clip Directory field on the Edit Player page for the player you use to preview.
The Path field on the Configure OMFS/CIFS Mount page specifies the file system path for your mount.
This value must include the name of the root file system, and may include subfolders.
When configuring the preview player, in the Default Clip Directory field, you must specify the name of
the clip directory that exists within the path you specified for your mount, and enter it as follows:
•
•
for omfs mounts: file:///mnt/nas/omfs/<clip directory>
for cifs mounts: file:///mnt/nas/cifs/<clip directory>
Depending on the path you specify for your mount, you may specify a subfolder in the Default Clip
Directory as well as the clip directory.
Example: Mounting to the root file system on Harmonic MediaGrid
In this example, the root file system for your Harmonic MediaGrid is "mg0." To mount to the root file
system:
•
On the Configure OMFS/CIFS Mount page, in the Path field: enter mg0.
To preview clips from a clip directory named "clip.dir" on the root file system:
•
On the Edit Player page for your preview player, in the Default Clip Directory field, enter: file:///mnt/
nas/omfs/clip.dir
The player will preview from /mg0/clip.dir.
91
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Example: Mounting to a subfolder on Harmonic MediaGrid
In this example, there is a subfolder named "joe." To mount to /mg0/joe:
•
On the Configure OMFS/CIFS Mount page, in the Path field: enter mg0/joe.
To preview clips from a clip directory named "clip.dir" that exists in the "joe" subfolder:
•
On the Edit Player page for your preview player, in the Default Clip Directory field, enter: file:///mnt/
nas/omfs/clip.dir
Alternatively, you could specify only the root file system path in the mount parameters, and then specify
the "joe" subfolder in the player parameters. In that case:
•
•
On the Configure OMFS/CIFS Mount page, in the Path field: enter mg0
On the Edit Player page for your preview player, in the Default Clip Directory field, enter: file:///mnt/
nas/omfs/joe/clip.dir
In both cases, the player will preview from /mg0/joe/clip.dir.
Example: Mounting to a subfolder on a NAS system
For a NAS system, the relationship between the mount path and the player clip directory works the same
way. However, you must indicate that it is a cifs mount type. In this example, the NAS root file system is
named nas0, and it contains a subfolder named "joe." To mount to /nas0/joe:
•
On the Configure OMFS/CIFS Mount page, in the Path field: enter nas0/joe.
To preview clips from a clip directory named "clip.dir" that exists in the "joe" subfolder:
•
On the Edit Player page for your preview player, in the Default Clip Directory field, enter: file:///mnt/
nas/cifs/clip.dir
Alternatively, you could specify only the root file system path in the mount parameters, and then specify
the "joe" subfolder in the player parameters. In that case:
•
•
On the Configure OMFS/CIFS Mount page, in the Path field: enter nas0
On the Edit Player page for your preview player, in the Default Clip Directory field, enter: file:///mnt/
nas/cifs/joe/clip.dir
In both cases, the player will preview from /nas0/joe/clip.dir.
Changing a Spectrum video server description
The Spectrum video server description is useful in clarifying a particular Spectrum video server’s (or
host’s) role in your Spectrum System.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click a dual host or individual host’s Spectrum video server icon to display the Physical
Configuration page for the selected Spectrum video server or host.
3. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
4. Scroll down to the Spectrum Server Description field.
5. Click Change Desc to display the Change Spectrum Server Description page.
6. Type the new description in the text box.
92
Specifying character sets to use with certain protocols and QuickTime
7. Click Save to save the description and return to the Properties page. The new description appears in
the Spectrum Server Description field.
Specifying character sets to use with certain protocols and
QuickTime
Although Unicode is supported on a Spectrum System, certain protocols and QuickTime, which are
supported by a Harmonic system, do not directly support Unicode.
For FTP, BVW, VDCP protocols or the QuickTime file wrapper format, in the situations specified in the
following table, you must specify which character set to use.
Table 2-2: Specific Protocol and QuickTime Character Set
When using this
protocol/wrapper...
You need to specify the character set because/if...
FTP
the FTP (archive system, windows) application being used
does not support UTF8 filenames.
BVW/VDCP
the automation system using one of these protocols may not
be able to specify or read strings in the UTF8 format.
QuickTime
The QuickTime .mov file contains strings specifying the
location of media files. Currently QuickTime does not support
the Unicode format. This means that the format of the string
is dependent on the language and OS that the clip was
generated on. The MediaDirector must be told in advance
what format is being used in the mov file.
Instances when the Character Set must be specified include:
•
•
•
Clips created or modified by applications such as NLE’s
will store a particular character set in the mov file. The
MediaDirector needs to know the format of the string in
order to find the associated media files.
Clips accessed directly over the network or copied off
of the MediaDirector may be imported into third party
applications. The MediaDirector needs to know in advance
what format to use so third party application will be able to
read the strings in the mov file.
Clips with foreign names created with previous versions
of the MediaDirector will use the format used by the
application driving the server. The MediaDirector needs
to know how to read the strings in order to find the media
files.
1. With a legacy File System updated, launch the SystemManager application.
2. From the Home tab, click the Character Set icon to open the Character Set page. Check the box(es)
in the Select column to identify the Spectrum servers to which you want to apply a new character set.
93
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
3. Using the previous table as a reference, check the appropriate protocol(s) and/or wrapper format
check box(es) as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-18: Specifying the Character Set
4. From the Standard drop down list, select the general standard to use. A subset of standards within
the selected standard appears as shown in part in the previous figure.
5. Select the standard subset to apply. The Change to button in the Spectrum Servers section reflects
the subset chosen.
6. Click Change to <new character set> to apply the character set to the selected Spectrum servers.
Viewing character sets associated with Spectrum video servers
View the character sets associated with a Spectrum video server.
1. Click the Home tab to display the Home page.
2. Click the Character Set icon in the left-hand column to display the Set Character Sets page.
This page displays the currently selected character sets associated with a Spectrum video server and
according to protocol and file format.
94
Editing track tags
Editing track tags
On the Spectrum Server Properties page, the Edit Track Tags function allows you to edit the contents
of a Track Tag File for a Spectrum video server.
A Track Tag File contains the language labels used in your facility for track tagging. By using a consistent
set of labels throughout your facility, a Spectrum video server can read the labels and automatically route
the audio to the appropriate channels. The TrackTool application (which allows you to add and rearrange
tracks in a clip as well as tag them with language labels), refers to the Track Tag File to ensure that the
tracks attached to media clips are the same ones used in the configuration of Spectrum video server
players.
Refer to the TrackTool User’s Guide or the TrackTool help system for more detailed information about the
TrackTool application.
By default, the Track Tag File (TrackKeyValueDefs.txt.) is located on the Spectrum video server’s file
system at: fs\config\TrackKeyValueDefs.txt. where fs is the actual File System name.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click a Spectrum video server icon to display the Physical Configuration page for the selected
Spectrum video server.
3. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
4. Scroll down and click Edit Track Tags.
The Edit Player Track Tags page appears.
5. Edit the contents of the Track Tag File as necessary.
6. Click Save File to save the file to the Spectrum video server’s file system.
The edited file is now available for reference when, or if, you wish to configure Players using the
SystemManager application, or, if you wish to configure clips using the TrackTool application.
NOTE: Once you create a Player and start to configure an audio track, verify that all
tags created in the Track Tag File are acceptable by clicking on the down arrow in the
language tag section and checking that all tags are available for selection. If a tag is
unavailable, review the rules in step 5 to identify any syntax errors with the tag.
Refer to the TrackTool User’s Guide or the TrackTool help system for information on how to configure
clips using TrackTool.
Related information
Configuring track tag rules for an audio track on page 278
About Track Tag files
Note some important points when editing track tag files.
Each file can include these items on separate lines:
•
Optional comment line(s), which start with a hash character # followed by any comment text. For
example:
# This is a comment and will be ignored.
95
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
•
A mandatory key code line indicating the key being configured. This item must be included once in
the file, just before the track tag code mentioned below. The line starts with the letter K followed by a
colon, followed by the key code. For track tags, the key code is “ovn_trackmatch”. For example:
K:ovn_trackmatch
•
Optional track code line(s). The line starts with the letter A followed by a colon, followed by the
language code, which may be any US-ASCII character sequence. For example:
A:French
In addition:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tag names must not exceed twenty characters in length and must not include a comma, slash, or
ampersand (&). A tag name with an ampersand will be saved but will not be selectable.
Adding silence1 through silence8 inserts 1-8 channels of silence on the next channel(s.) Choose the
number of “silence” tags required by your facility, up to a maximum of eight.
Adding tracknum0 through tracknum7 causes play of the audio track whose position in the clip’s track
stack matches the number specified in the tag. Choose the required number of “tracknum” tags, up
to a maximum of eight. Note that since the numbering scheme for tracknum tags starts with zero,
tracknum0 would match the first audio track in the clip’s track stack.
The strings “NONE” and “None” are reserved. Do not use in this file.
“silence” and “tracknum” tags should not be assigned to tracks in TrackTool.
Track tagging rules are applied to non-tagged clips if the rules contain any “tracknum” tags.
An example of a complete file is as follows:
# Harmonic clip and player track-tagging file.
#
# Comment lines start with #
# The first non-comment line should always be 'K:ovn_trackmatch'
# Remaining lines start with A: followed by the name of the language tag.
# Tag names must not exceed 20 characters, and must not contain comma or slash.
# 'silence<n>' inserts <n> channels of silence.
# 'tracknum<n>' selects numbered track to be played on the next channel(s).
K:ovn_trackmatch
A:English
A:Spanish
A:French
A:Chinese
A:silence1
A:silence2
A:silence3
A:silence4
A:silence5
A:silence6
A:silence7
A:silence8
A:tracknum0
A:tracknum1
A:tracknum2
A:tracknum3
A:tracknum4
A:tracknum5
A:tracknum6
A:tracknum7
96
Copying the track tag file to Spectrum video servers outside an EFS
Copying the track tag file to Spectrum video servers outside an
EFS
You can use the Track Tag File with Spectrum video servers outside an Extended File System.
1. In your Windows Explorer User Interface, navigate to the Track Tag File on video server A.
By default, the Track Tag File (TrackKeyValueDefs.txt.) is located on the Spectrum video server’s
file system at: fs\config\TrackKeyValueDefs.txt. where fs is the actual File System name.
2. Right-click and select Copy file.
3. Open a window for the video server B and paste the file in an appropriate folder.
The Track Tag File is now available for track tagging from video server B.
Changing the Spectrum video server time zone
You can select the international time zone in which your facility is located.
This ensures that the “date” stamp on recorded clips is correct, and provides assistance for Harmonic
technical support for remote troubleshooting.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click a Spectrum video server icon to display the Physical Configuration page for the selected
Spectrum video server.
3. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
4. Scroll down to the Time Zone line.
5. Using the drop-down box, select the time zone in which the Spectrum video server is located.
Changing the Spectrum video server wink state
You can change the wink state for a video server.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click a Spectrum video server icon to display the Physical Configuration page for the selected
Spectrum video server.
3. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the page, and check the Wink State line.
5. Change the Spectrum video server’s wink state as desired:
•
•
If On, click Wink Off to stop winking the blue light bar on the front panel.
If Off, click Wink On to start winking the blue light bar on the front panel.
97
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Rebooting the Spectrum video server
On the Properties page, the “reboot” function is a local function that is not associated with the firmware
upgrade process.
Reboot the Spectrum video server when it is experiencing problems, or if you do not want to reboot the
Spectrum video server immediately after a firmware upgrade.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click a Spectrum video server icon to display the Physical Configuration page for the selected
Spectrum video server.
3. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the General Properties section of the page and click Reboot.
5. When the Confirmation dialog appears, click OK. The Spectrum video server’s status changes
to Rebooting, then Not Connected, then Configuring, and finally to Connected. The complete
process takes approximately two minutes though it may take longer for SystemManager to display the
status once the unit is up and running.
NOTE: You can also reboot one or more Spectrum video servers on the Upgrade
Firmware page. Refer to “Upgrading MediaDirector and MediaCenter Firmware” in the
Spectrum System Installation Guide for details.
Powering down the Spectrum video server
Power down a Spectrum video server:
NOTE:
In certain circumstances, powering down one MediaDirector in an EFS configuration may cause video
disruption to channels on other MediaDirector s.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click a Spectrum video server icon to display the Physical Configurationpage for the selected video
server.
3. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the General Properties section and click Shutdown Spectrum Server.
5. When the Confirmation dialog appears, click OK.
6. Verify that Spectrum video server’s status changes to Not Responding.
For instructions on powering down your entire Spectrum system or for power up instructions, refer to
the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
98
Viewing a snapshot of the Spectrum video server log
Viewing a snapshot of the Spectrum video server log
You can view a snapshot of the Spectrum video server’s log. The function is used for diagnostic purposes
only.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click a Spectrum video server icon to display the Physical Configuration page for the selected
Spectrum video server.
3. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Log Snapshot to display the View Device Log page.
Contact Harmonic technical support for additional assistance.
Upgrading the Spectrum video server license
Every Spectrum video server includes a license file. If you have purchased a new license file from
Harmonic, upgrade your Spectrum video server license using SystemManager.
If you have purchased a new license, Harmonic will provide you a license file. The format of the license
file will vary depending on your system.
IMPORTANT: For systems with Spectrum X, the license file must include the full serial
number of the Spectrum video server (with no dashes), and have a .txt extension in order
for SystemManager to recognize it. Otherwise the Upgrade License button will not be
available.
For other Spectrum systems, the file name may have a .hex extension. Also, note that the file name of the
license file will typically include serial number information for the Spectrum product.
NOTE: Spectrum systems may include a mix of .hex and .txt license files.
1. Locate the Spectrum video server license file provided to you by Harmonic.
2. Copy the license file to the SystemManager hard drive under <install drive>:\Licenses.
NOTE: The drive letter for <install drive> depends on which drive was selected when
installing SystemManager.
3. From the Configuration tab in SystemManager, navigate to the Properties page for the Spectrum
video server that you are upgrading. Once SystemManager identifies the new license file, the
Upgrade License button will be available. Click Upgrade License.
Note that the status displayed in the Host Status field on the Properties page will change to "upgrade
queued," "upgrading," and then "needs reboot."
4. Reboot the Spectrum video server by clicking the Reboot button.
Related information
Rebooting the Spectrum video server on page 98
Viewing licensed features for a Spectrum video server on page 100
99
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Viewing licensed features for a Spectrum video server
With Spectrum 8.2 and later, licensed features for Spectrum systems with Spectrum X are installed on the
Spectrum video server. Open the Licensed Features page to view all installed licenses.
NOTE: For MediaPorts and ChannelPort s, licenses are installed on the I/O module and
will not be displayed on the Licensed Features page.
NOTE: With SystemManager 6.7 and later, license enforcement is enabled at all times.
•
From the Spectrum Server Properties page, under General Properties, click View Licensed
features to open the Licensed Features page.
NOTE: If a "demo" license is installed, SystemManager displays the expiration date for
the demo license.
NOTE: "BASIC-GFX" refers to four graphic layers. "MAX-GFX" refers to eight graphic
layers.
Features of
Spectrum Server
This section includes details on general licenses that are not associated with
a channel.
Features of I/O
Module
This section includes details on channel-based licenses. The "Owners
Detail" section includes the names of I/O modules and players that are using
the licenses.
Features
This column displays the license name
Number of licenses
installed
This column displays the number of licenses installed on the server.
Number of licenses
in use
This column displays the number of licenses that are currently being used.
Owner's Detail
When a license is being used by an I/O module, this column displays the
name of the I/O module using the license.
Expires on Date
Related information
Upgrading the Spectrum video server license on page 99
About demo licenses
If a demo license is installed on the Spectrum video server and license enforcement is enabled,
SystemManager will display a message in red on the Licensed Features page to indicate that the demo
license is present and to show the license expiration date.
NOTE: When a demo license is installed, SystemManager will generate one alarm per day
to indicate when the license expires.
100
Changing logging variable settings
Changing logging variable settings
Logging, or “debug,” variables determine which information is included in the Spectrum log file and enable
Harmonic technical support to troubleshoot issues on a Spectrum system.
IMPORTANT: Do not change the settings on this page unless directed by Harmonic
technical support.
The Change Logging Variable Settings page allows you to specify new information to be added to the
Spectrum log file. If you encounter problems with your Spectrum system, Harmonic technical support may
ask you to configure this page to help them identify the cause of the issue.
1. Navigate to the Properties page for your Spectrum video server.
2. From the Change Settings section, click Update Logging variables. The Change Logging
Variable Settings page appears.
Figure 2-19: Change Logging Variable Settings
3. Click Query From Host to query the logging settings from the host. Once the page refreshes, the
current host settings will appear.
4. Modify the following logging settings as instructed by Harmonic technical support:
Under Player Debug settings:
101
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
◦
◦
◦
player commands: Select On to log all player activity.
player status: Select On to log all queries or responses regarding player status.
cliploading: Select On to log all instances of clips being loaded or ejected.
◦
Under settings for VDCP logging:
vdcp commands: Select ON to log all VDCP commands.
5. Click Send to Host to send the new settings to the host.
6. Click Query From Host and verify that the new settings appear.
You may click Reset at any time to clear the settings on the SystemManager page and query the
settings from the host.
7. If instructed by Harmonic technical support, you may select an option under Common Debug
Variable. These options may vary. If you are directed to select a variable, Harmonic technical support
will provide the value to enter in the corresponding field.
8. Click Send to Host to send the new settings to the host.
Configuring access control settings for video servers
The Spectrum Access Control Settings feature in SystemManager allows you to configure authentication
settings for your video server, which can be used to connect to a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) server or a SAMBA domain.
IMPORTANT: Consult your network administrator before modifying the settings on the
Access Control Settings page.
NOTE: The following instructions apply only to the MediaDirector 2252B/2251B,
2252/2251, and 2202/2201, MediaCenter 2200 and 2200B, Spectrum X, and MediaDeck
7000.
Access control settings can be configured on a system-wide level, saved as a template, and applied to
specific Spectrum video servers in your Spectrum system. These settings can be configured separately
for each Spectrum video server and apply to the root level of the Spectrum video server file system.
NOTE: LDAP is an industry standard protocol. For information on LDAP terminology and
concepts used in this section, you can refer to several online resources including Wikipedia
or the Microsoft Windows Support website.
Configuring access control settings for multiple video servers
You can configure access control settings for multiple video servers.
1. From the Configuration tab, in the left-hand column, under Spectrum, click the Access Control icon.
The Access Control Settings for Spectrum Devices page appears, as shown in the following
figure.
2. Under Local User Settings, type the password for your video server. The default password is: user
3. In the field for Authentication Type, select from the following:
◦
◦
LDAP: select if you are connecting to an LDAP server.
Local: select if the only authentication required is the user name and password. If you select this
option, the fields for LDAP Settings and SAMBA Settings will be grayed out.
102
Configuring access control settings for video servers
◦
User-defined: this option is provided for diagnostics purposes only.
4. In the field for Guest Allowed, select from the following:
◦
◦
Yes: if selected then no password is required to access the Spectrum video server file system.
No: if selected then a password is required to access the Spectrum video server file system.
5. Under LDAP Settings, enter the LDAP settings that apply to your network. Refer to Figure 9–5 for an
example.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
LDAP Schema: select from ActiveDirectory for Windows-based LDAP or OpenLDAP for the open
source version of LDAP.
LDAP Server: the DNS name of the server.
LDAP Base: the string passed to the server to perform a search.
LDAP Base Pw: the string passed to the server to search for users.
LDAP Bind Dn: the string that identifies the user performing the search.
LDAP Bind Pw: the password required for the search.
6. Under SAMBA Settings, enter the SAMBA settings that apply to your network.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
SMB Security: Select from Domain or Non-domain. If you select Non-domain, then only the local
user name and password are required.
Domain Server: name of the domain server.
SMB WorkGroup: name of the SMB workgroup.
SMB Username: user name required to join the SMB domain. Note that this setting is not saved
as part of a template. It is only used when joining the SMB domain.
SMB Password: password required to join the SMB domain. Note that this setting is not saved as
part of a template. It is only used when joining the SMB domain.
SMB Address: the DNS name of the domain controller.
103
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Figure 2-20: Access Control Settings
7. Once you have entered all the necessary settings, click Save as Template to save the settings as a
template.
8. In the Access Control Configurable Devices section, select the video servers to which you want to
apply the template.
◦
◦
Select All: click to select all the Spectrum video servers listed.
Clear: click to clear the check boxes.
9. To apply the settings to the selected Spectrum video servers, click Deploy Settings.
104
Configuring access control settings for video servers
NOTE: The Deploy Settings button also saves the current settings as a template.
10. If you have entered SAMBA domain information, click Join SAMBA Domain to apply the SAMBA
settings and join the SAMBA domain.
Configuring access control settings for CIFS
For Harmonic applications that mount the Spectrum video server file system (such as MAS), enter CIFS
authentication credentials.
If LDAP authentication is selected for your Spectrum video server and the file system is password
protected (with guest access set to No), then the user name and password in the CIFS Authentication
section of the Access Control Settings page can be used to access the file system.
1. From the Configuration tab, in the left-hand column, under Spectrum, click the Access Control icon
to open the Access Control Settings for Spectrum Devices page.
2. Scroll down to the CIFS Authentication section (see the following figure).
Figure 2-21: Configuring CIFS authentication
3. Enter your CIFS domain information as follows:
◦
◦
◦
Username: Specify a user name in this field.
Password: Specify a password in this field.
Domain: This field displays the domain name.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to select a user name and password, which do not expire,
unlike passwords for some directory services.
4. Click Save CIFS Settings to save the settings. The authentication settings are saved locally on the
SystemManager.
Configuring access control settings for a single video server
Configure access control settings for an individual Spectrum video server.
1. From the Configuration tab, on the System Diagram page, click the icon or heading for the
Spectrum video server for which you want to configure access control settings. The Physical
Configuration page appears.
2. Click the icon of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. Under Host Properties, in the Change Settings field, click the Access Control Settings button. The
Access Control Settings page for that Spectrum video server appears.
4. Under Local User Settings, type the password for your Spectrum video server. The default password
is: user
5. In the field for Authentication Type, select from the following:
105
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
◦
◦
◦
LDAP: select if you are connecting to an LDAP server.
Local: select if the only authentication required is the user name and password. If you select this
option, the fields for LDAP settings and SAMBA Settings will be grayed out.
User-defined: this option is provided for diagnostics purposes only.
6. In the field for Guest Allowed, select from the following:
◦
◦
Yes: if selected then no password is required to access the Spectrum video server file system.
No: if selected then a password is required to access the Spectrum video server file system.
7. Under LDAP Settings, enter the LDAP settings that apply to your network. Refer to the following
figure for an example.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
LDAP Schema: select from ActiveDirectory for Windows-based LDAP or OpenLDAP for the open
source version of LDAP.
LDAP Server: the DNS name of the server.
LDAP Base: the string passed to the server to perform a search.
LDAP Base Pw: the string passed to the server to search for users.
LDAP Bind Dn: the string that identifies the user performing the search.
LDAP Bind Pw: the password required for the search.
8. Under SAMBA Settings, enter the SAMBA settings that apply to your network.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
SMB Security: Select from Domain or Non-domain. If you select Non-domain, then only the local
user name and password are required.
Domain Server: name of the domain server.
SMB WorkGroup: name of the SMB workgroup.
SMB Username: user name required to join the SMB domain. Note that this setting is not saved
as part of a template. It is only used when joining the SMB domain.
SMB Password: password required to join the SMB domain. Note that this setting is not saved as
part of a template. It is only used when joining the SMB domain.
SMB Address: the DNS name of the domain controller.
106
Configuring access control settings for video servers
Figure 2-22: Access Control Settings for a single Spectrum video server
9. Once you have entered all the necessary settings, you can perform the following operations:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Save as Template: Click this button to save the settings as a template. Once the settings are
saved as a template, they can be applied to other Spectrum video servers in your network. Refer
to step 8 in “Configuring Access Control Settings for Multiple Video Servers” for instructions on
applying a template to other Spectrum video servers.
Deploy Template: Click this button to apply the saved template to the Spectrum video server.
Deploy Settings: Click this button to apply the settings to the Spectrum video server.
Join Samba Domain: Click this button to apply the SAMBA settings and join the SAMBA domain.
Done: Click this button to revert to the saved settings and return to the Properties page.
Related information
Configuring access control settings for multiple video servers on page 102
107
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Installing a DDC file
With Spectrum 7.7 and later, if you wish to install a Harmonic-supplied drive that is newer than your
current Spectrum firmware, you may use SystemManager to install a “DDC” configuration file to your
video server, which enables you to install and use the new drive.
Once you receive the new drive from Harmonic, contact Harmonic technical support to request the DDC
file and save it to a location on your SystemManager platform or client computer. Then use the “Install
DDC File” page in SystemManager to install the DDC file to your video server. Note that if you install the
DDC file on a video server in an EFS configuration, the file will automatically be installed on all the video
servers in the EFS.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the Physical
Configuration page.
2. Click the image of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. In the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure DDC File.
The Configure DDC File page for your Spectrum video server appears.
4. Make sure to leave Use default credentials selected.
If you believe the credentials for your video server operating system have changed, you may clear
this option and then enter the user name and password, or contact Harmonic technical support for
assistance.
5. Click Browse to browse to the DDC file on your SystemManager platform or client computer. If you
have not received a DDC file from Harmonic, contact Harmonic technical support to request one, and
then save it to your SystemManager.
6. Click Apply. The Status field will show the status of the installation.
7. Verify that the Status field displays “Successfully configured DDC. Done”
8. If SystemManager does not successfully install the DDC file, contact Harmonic technical support for
assistance.
Connecting to a Harmonic MediaGrid from the Spectrum video
server
Using SystemManager, you can connect a Spectrum video server to one or more Harmonic MediaGrid
systems.
NOTE: This section applies to the MediaDirector 2252B/2251B, 2252/2251, 2202/2201,
MediaCenter 2200B and 2200, Spectrum X, and MediaDeck 7000
1. Navigate to the Properties page for your Spectrum video server.
2. Click the Harmonic MediaGrid Accounts button to display the Harmonic MediaGrid Accounts
page as shown in the following figure.
108
Changing network and file system performance settings
Figure 2-23: Harmonic MediaGrid Accounts page
3. In the New Account Information section of the page, enter the following information:
◦
◦
◦
◦
ContentDirector: IP address or DNS name of the ContentDirector
Username: Harmonic MediaGrid username.
Password: Harmonic MediaGrid password.
Domain: domain of the Harmonic MediaGrid
4. Click Create. The new account appears in the Harmonic MediaGrid Accounts section of the page.
5. Verify that the Status of the new account shows Valid.
6. To connect to another Harmonic MediaGrid, repeat steps 1-5 entering the appropriate information for
the second Harmonic MediaGrid.
7. To validate a Harmonic MediaGrid account at any time, click Validate. The Status of the account will
show Valid or Invalid.
8. To delete a Harmonic MediaGrid account at any time, click Delete.
Changing network and file system performance settings
If instructed by Harmonic technical support, you can change performance settings for your Spectrum
video server.
IMPORTANT: Do not change the settings on this page unless directed by Harmonic
technical support.
This section applies to the following Spectrum video servers:
•
•
•
•
MediaDirector 2202/2201, 2252/2251, and 2252B/2251B
MediaCenter
Spectrum X
MediaDeck 7000
1. On the Properties page for your Spectrum video server, click Low Priority Bandwidth Settings to
display the Change Spectrum Server Network/File System Performance page.
109
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Figure 2-24: Change Spectrum Server Network/File System Performance settings
2. You can edit the following settings:
Low Priority
Bandwidth Limit
(FTP & SAMBA)
Configures the low priority bandwidth limit for File System reads and writes
of clips over FTP and SAMBA.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
For the MediaDirector 2252/2252B, the default is 560 MB/sec. and the
total valid range is 0-600.
For the MediaDirector 2251/2251B, the default is 280 MB/sec. and the
total valid range is 0-600.
For the MediaDirector 2202, the default is 560 MB/sec. and the total
valid range is 0-600.
For the MediaDirector 2201, the default is 260 MB/sec. and the total
valid range is 1-299.
For the MediaCenter/MediaCenter 2200B, the default is 185 MB/sec.
and the total valid range is 0-225.
For the MediaDeck 7000, the default is 100 MB/sec and the total valid
range is 0-140.
For the Spectrum X, the default is 100 MB/sec and the total valid range
is 0-140.
IMPORTANT: For the MediaDeck 7000, Harmonic
recommends that you leave the default setting. Changing
this setting may affect performance.
Low+ Priority
Bandwidth Limit
(AFP)
Configures the low priority bandwidth limit for File System reads and writes
of clips over AFP.
◦
◦
◦
◦
For the MediaDirector 2252/2252B, the default is 40 MB/sec. and the
total valid range is 0-600.
For the MediaDirector 2251, the default is 40 MB/sec. and the total valid
range is 0-600.
For the MediaDirector 2202, the default is 40 MB/sec. and the total valid
range is 0-600.
For the MediaDirector 2201,the default is 40 MB/sec. and the total valid
range is 1-299.
110
About file types
◦
◦
◦
For the MediaCenter/MediaCenter 2200B, the default is 40 MB/sec. and
the total valid range is 0-225.
For the MediaDeck 7000, the default is 40 MB/sec and the total valid
range is 0-140.
For the Spectrum X, the default is 40 MB/sec and the total valid range is
0-140.
IMPORTANT: For the MediaDeck 7000, Harmonic
recommends that you leave the default setting. Changing
this setting may affect performance.
For the MediaDirector 2201, note the following restrictions when configuring
the performance settings:
◦
◦
◦
The total networking bandwidth, the sum of the Low Priority Bandwidth
Limit and the Low + Priority Bandwidth Limit, is limited to 300 MB/s and
cannot be increased.
Neither the Low Priority Bandwidth Limit nor the Low + Priority
Bandwidth Limit can be disabled entirely by setting the value to zero.
The minimum for both settings is 1 MB/ sec.
Any values outside the valid range will not be accepted.
For the MediaCenter and MediaDeck 7000, neither the Low Priority
Bandwidth Limit nor the Low + Priority Bandwidth Limit can be disabled
entirely by setting the value to zero. The minimum for both settings is 1
MB/ sec.
3. Click Save Settings to save the changes.
4. To return to the default settings at any time, click Return to Factory Defaults.
About file types
Note how Spectrum handles different file types.
About file types used on a Spectrum video server
Note the file extensions recognized by the Spectrum system.
Clips recorded by Spectrum video server “Players” are (by default) stored in a folder called clip.dir
with the clip files (or “headers”) having the .mov (QuickTime movie) type. The corresponding media
files are stored in clip.dir/media.dir. When copying (or creating) media files from a PC to a Spectrum
video server, it is important to have the correct file extensions. The Spectrum video server uses known
file extensions to determine how to store files efficiently for playback. The following table lists the file
extensions recognized by the Spectrum video server with the corresponding file types. These files are
handled “in a special manner” by the Spectrum video server.
Table 2-3: File Extensions Supported by Spectrum video servers
Extensions
Corresponding File Types
.mov
Clips that can be loaded into Players
.dv
Digital Video media file
111
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Extensions
Corresponding File Types
.601
10-bit SDI media file
.aiff
Audio Interchange File Format media file
.hdcam
Sony HDCAM media file
.vbi
Vertical Blanking Interval media file
.mpg
MPEG-2 elementary stream file (includes MXF files)
.mpeg
Alternate MPEG formats
.au, .aud, .aif, .wav
Alternate audio formats
.avi
Audio Video Interleaved
.rm
Real Media Format
.wmv, .wma, .asf
Windows Media File Formats
.dif
Alternate Digital Video file format (Pinnacle purple.)
.data
Data file, typically containing DVB/ASI transport streams
Review the following important points regarding the listed file formats:
Only .mov files referenced in the following table can be played successfully by the Spectrum video server.
Table 2-4: File Types Referencing .mov Files Supported by Spectrum video servers
.dv
.mpg
.vbi
.aiff
.data
.wav
.601
.hdcam
.dif
Of these file types, the only ones that can typically be generated (or read) by a PC or Macintosh are DV
25 (stored in .dv files), .aiff and .wav. While some of these other extensions may be used for media files
on the PC or Macintosh, in general their codecs are not compatible with Harmonic codecs.
Files with media types not listed in the table can still be copied to the Spectrum video server (using CIFS,
AFP or FTP). They will however be stored in a format optimized for small files, and cannot be played back
through MediaPort s.
NOTE: No locking or security functions are performed in the current release.
About Support for MXF eVTR
Note some important points regarding the implementation of MXF eVTR for Spectrum.
NOTE: Spectrum supports many variations of MXF. For detailed information about
supported track and wrapper formats, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats
included in the Spectrum documentation suite.
Note the following:
•
MXF eVTR currently supports IMX 30, 40 and 50 4:2:2 accompanied by 8 channels of 24-bit AES3
audio. Note that the SystemManager application will allow you to create an IMX 30, 40, and 50-only
112
About file types
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
recorder (i.e. without audio), but you will not be able to record with a video only Player. Be sure to
specify IMX 30, 40, or 50 and 8 channels of 24-bit AES3 audio for MXF eVTR recorders.
MXF eVTR clips recorded on a Spectrum System and transferred to an eVTR will lose structural and
descriptive metadata not recognized by the E-VTR. Examples of lost metadata include default in and
out points, language labels for audio tracks, and other descriptive tags set with the Player API. This is
not an issue unless you plan on transferring the clip back to the Spectrum System.
MXF eVTR clips recorded on a Spectrum System and transferred to an eVTR will have all dark
metadata quietly dropped by the eVTR. This is not an issue unless you plan on transferring the clip
back to the Spectrum System since the dark metadata is not preserved by the eVTR.
MXF eVTR and QuickTime clip names are distinguished by extension (.mxf vs. .mov), however,
applications that access clips using the Player API, or VDCP protocol cannot see these extensions.
Therefore, mixing clips of the same name but different extensions (e.g.foo.mxf and foo.mov) in the
same directory will lead to unpredictable results.
QuickTime Players cannot playback 24-bit AES3 MXF audio. If you intend to operate your system
using both QT and MXF eVTR files, you should change all Players to MXF eVTR including playback
Players. MXF eVTR playback Players allow the playback of both MXF eVTR and QuickTime audio.
Windows ClipTool version 3.1 and later versions support MXF eVTR. Previous versions of this
application do not recognize MXF eVTR.
When using the MXF eVTR format, you must configure a video and an audio track.
The current implementation of MXF eVTR does not support HD output
Refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats included in the Spectrum documentation suite for
detailed information about supported track and media wrapper formats.
About Spectrum video server striping for files transferred over Ethernet
Spectrum uses different file striping schemes for performance reasons.
Many files, including “.mov” files, are recorded as “nostripe” files to save space, but nostripe files cannot
contain media for real time playback. The Spectrum server records video files as “largestripe” and audio
files as “smallstripe”, based on the file extension (.dv, .aif, .601, etc.) assigned internally by the Spectrum
video server’s recording software. Please note:
•
•
•
Nostripe files are files that are stored compactly on disk, but are not intended to contain real time
media. The File System cannot retrieve these files quickly enough for real time playback purposes. On
the Harmonic system, most .mov files and any other files that do not contain any actual media fall into
this category.
Smallstripe files are those that contain media of relatively low bit rates, for real-time playout. They use
a larger block size on disk and consume a medium amount of Spectrum video server resources. On
the Harmonic system, .aiff and .wav audio files fall into this “smallstripe” category.
Largestripe files are those that contain high bit rate real-time media. They use the largest block size on
disk and consume a large amount of Spectrum video server resources. On the Harmonic system, all
video files (including .dv, .601, .mpg, etc.) fall into this “largestripe” category.
All of these striping schemes are applied automatically when files are recorded by the Spectrum video
server through MediaPort s. When files are recorded using Ethernet, however, these rules do not
automatically apply. Instead, rules specified in a special file called “filetypes.conf” are used. This file is
setup by default to handle files saved by Apple® Final Cut Pro®, and to handle standard Harmonic media
file types. To add new rules for file type handling as required, the user may edit the filetypes.conf file.
NOTE: Remember that a MediaDirector 2100 has a single host and MediaDirector s 2101,
2102, and 2102B have multiple hosts. Each host in turn has its own filetypes.conf file.
113
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
CAUTION: Only qualified support personnel should change the Spectrum video server
striping method.
Related information
Editing the Filetypes.conf file on page 118
About file handling for Final Cut Pro
Files recorded by Apple Final Cut Pro (FCP) do not follow Harmonic’s file naming schemes, so the server
has to be given special rules in order to write FCP’s output such that edited clips will play out correctly
using Spectrum I/O modules.
These special rules are required because most FCP files often contain real-time media. Harmonic ships
Spectrum video servers pre-configured with the following rules (pertaining to FCP):
•
•
•
Anything saved in or below an “FCP” directory and ending with “.mov” will be recorded as largestripe.
Harmonic recommends that the FCP user create an “FCP” directory on the Spectrum video server
under the appropriate host. Use this directory to store FCP’s files.
Anything recorded in or below the “Render Files” or “Capture Scratch” directories will be largestripe.
These directories are automatically created by FCP (on the Spectrum video server).
Anything recorded in or below the “Audio Render Files” or “Audio Capture Scratch” directories will be
smallstripe. These directories are also automatically created by FCP (on the Spectrum video server).
These rules should suffice for most FCP users as long as all Final Cut Pro movies are exported to the
“FCP” directory on the Spectrum File System with the “.mov” extension. For the files to be playable by the
Spectrum video server, they must end with “.mov” in order to appear as Harmonic clips.
About changing the Ethernet file striping behavior
The filetypes.conf file can be edited in order to change the striping behavior.
The file is plain text and contains rules using “regular expressions” compliant with POSIX 1003.2 (aka
Unix egrep, etc.) except that the expressions are case-insensitive.
Note the following usage in POSIX expressions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(#) Lines beginning with a pound sign are comments and will not be processed.
(.) matches any single character.
(*) Indicates that the preceding item will be matched zero or more times.
(+) Indicates that the preceding item will be matched one or more times.
(.*) Acts as a wildcard. It matches all characters.
($) Means match the string at the end of the line. For example, “mov$” matches strings that end with
“.mov”.
Regarding ([ ]) square brackets:
◦
◦
◦
A pair of square brackets matches a selection of characters specified within the square brackets.
For example, [Hh]ello matches lines containing “Hello” and “hello”. And [.] matches a line containing
a dot.
The square brackets can be used to search for non-matches. This is done by putting a carat (^)
as the first character inside the square brackets. So, if the list within the([ ]) begins with a carat (^),
it matches any single character not from the list. For example, clip [^123456789]+ matches clipA,
clipQ, and clipz, but not clip0, clip5, and clip8.
(|) A vertical line is used to separate alternatives. For example, dv|dif|m2v matches “dv”, or “dif”, or
“m2v”.
114
About file types
◦
A pair of parentheses ( ) or round brackets is required to enclose sub expressions. For example,
dv|dif|m2v must be enclosed within a pair of parenthesis in order to be a valid sub expression as in
(dv|dif| m2v)
Make changes as desired using standard editing procedures. When changes are completed, click on
Save File to preserve your edits or Cancel to abort changes.
CAUTION: If these instructions are beyond your capabilities, do not attempt to edit the
filetypes.conf file. Only qualified support personnel should change the Spectrum video
server striping method.
The default rules assume that you will create a directory named FCP on the Spectrum File System
and use that directory for all FCP output. Other directory names can be used for FCP output, but the
filetypes.conf must be edited accordingly. For example, if FCP movies will be exported directly to the
default clip.dir directory for use by automation applications, you will want to add the following rule into the
filetypes.conf files:
large
/clip[.]dir/.*[.]mov$
This is performed so that all .mov files written using Ethernet into the clip.dir directory will be recorded as
largestripe. You would put this new rule just before or after the line:
large
/FCP/.*[.]mov$
or, you would replace this old rule with the new one if you do not want to use an “FCP” directory at all.
Note that Final Cut Pro will create some or all of the following subdirectories in any directory that it is told
to use for a “scratch disk”:
•
•
•
•
Audio Render Files
Capture Scratch
Render Files
Audio Capture Scratch
The default rules account for these subdirectories automatically. All you have to change (if you want to
change anything) is the directory or directories within which Harmonic will enforce the “record .mov as
largestripe” rule.
NOTE: The rules in filetypes.conf only apply to files written by external applications like
Final Cut Pro. Files recorded using MediaPorts are always written with the correct striping
regardless of the rules in the file, so you will not “break” the server’s basic operations by
changing the file.
Refer to “Mapping Suffixes for File Types” for information regarding alternate file suffixes for the same file
type.
Related information
Mapping suffixes for file types on page 115
Mapping suffixes for file types
You can use the “filetypes.conf” file to map one file suffix to another.
Some third party applications recognize different file suffixes for the same file type. For example, one
application may recognize .dif as a valid suffix for the DV file format and not .dv. To ensure compatibility,
add an expression to the “filetypes.conf” file to map one file suffix to another.
115
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
1. From the Edit “filetypes.conf” page, in the scrolling text box, enter the following expression:
“media_map suffix1 suffix2” (Where suffix1 stands for the suffix you want to replace and suffix2 is the
replacement.)
The following table lists the suffixes which can be substituted for each supported file type with multiple
suffix options.
Table 2-5: Mapping suffixes for file types
File type
DV
Recognized suffixes
.dv
.dif
AIFF
.aiff
.aifc
.aif
WAVE
.wav
.wave
MPEG-2
.m2v
.mpg
2. Click Save File to preserve your edits or Cancel to abort changes.
All new recordings now generate a file with the new suffix (suffix2) as specified above.
About file sharing cautions and limitations
Note some important file sharing cautions and limitations.
•
•
•
•
•
•
255 characters is the maximum length for file names (for files created through the SMB interface). The
maximum length for path names (as supported by the Spectrum video server) including the file name
and all directories is 4095 characters. However, Windows clients generally do not allow path lengths
greater than 255 characters.
File creation and modification times for files and directories are maintained, but not always exactly
in the same way as Windows NT servers. That is, if you copy a file from a client to the Spectrum
video server, the modification time is reset to the time that the file copy was completed (instead of the
modification time on the original file).
Access time information is not supported.
Per-file and per-directory permissions are not supported in the Spectrum video server release. The
SMB File Server allows complete access to all users. Please ignore information or controls in the
“Security” tabs of all “Properties” dialogs.
All locking operations are allowed without checking for the existence of multiple users. This improves
performance, but means that applications that depend on file locking for coordination should not be
used.
The Spectrum video server cannot be used as a Network Print Server, LDAP server, Master Browser
(Local or Domain) or WINS server.
116
About file types
About source code availability
Source code for the Harmonic CIFS Server or Harmonic AFP Server is available on different web sites.
The Harmonic CIFS Server is based on Samba, which is open source software with a GNU General
Public License. Per the terms of this license Harmonic provides the Samba source code, including
Harmonic modifications that make it work with the Harmonic Server System. Please contact Harmonic for
details regarding the Samba source code, or visit the Samba web site at http://www.samba.org.
The Harmonic AFP Server is based on Netatalk which is open source software with a GNU General
Public License. Per the terms of this license Harmonic provides the Netatalk source code, including
Harmonic modifications that make it work with the Harmonic Server System. Please contact Harmonic for
details regarding the Netatalk source code, or visit the Netatalk web site at http://netatalk.sourceforge.net.
About naming files and system elements
Fine important notes about the naming of files, devices, hosts, Players, RAID sets, and File Systems on a
Harmonic network.
Table 2-6: File naming conventions and elements
Element
Filename
Clip Name
Notes
Naming conventions follow Windows32™ rules. In general,
names can be quite long. Standard alpha-numeric characters
are allowed: a-z, A-Z, 0-9.
Most characters, including spaces, are valid except:
/ \ : * ? < > | and the double quote character (“).
Device Name
Maximum name length is fifteen characters.
Host Name
Standard alpha-numeric characters are allowed: a-z, A-Z, 0-9
also _ (underscore) and -(dash).
9 special characters are allowed for Device or Host names:
!^(){}-_~
No spaces are allowed.
Player Name
Maximum name length is thirty characters.
RAID Set Name
Standard alphanumerics are allowed: a-z, A-Z, 0-9 also _
(underscore) and -(dash).
9 special characters are allowed for Player or RAID Set Names:
!^(){}-_~
No spaces are allowed.
117
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 2: Spectrum video server configuration
Element
File System Name
Notes
Maximum name length is eight characters.
Standard alphanumerics are allowed: a-z, A-Z, 0-9 also _
(underscore) and -(dash).
9 special characters are allowed:
! ^ ( ) { } - _~
No spaces are allowed.
Keep in mind the following additional points:
•
For a Harmonic system with an Omnibus automation system, clip names are usually generated on the
Omnibus side. To create clips for use on an Omnibus system, follow these guidelines:
◦
•
•
Avoid creating long Harmonic clip names that only differ in the last few characters as long
Harmonic clip names are truncated to 25 characters when Omnibus clip names are generated.
◦ Avoid creating clipnames that differ only in upperCase/lowerCase iteration. Omnibus preserves the
case of clip names but internally uses case insensitive searching.
When using AFP, the maximum file name length should be 26 characters.
Clips with file names longer than 26 characters cannot be imported into Final Cut Pro There is a
known incompatibility issue with long file names between Final Cut Pro and OSX.
Editing the Filetypes.conf file
The Edit “filetypes.conf” File page allows qualified users to modify the “filetypes.conf” file for the
associated Spectrum video server host. This file specifies the rules by which striping schemes are applied
to all media files recorded over Ethernet.
Harmonic uses three different file striping schemes for performance reasons: Nostripe, Smallstripe and
Largestripe.
For applications that recognize different file suffixes for the same file type, you can edit “filetypes.conf” so
that one file suffix is mapped to another. Refer to “Mapping Suffixes for File Types” for more information.
The filetypes.conf file can be edited with a simple text editor or from the SystemManager application.
1. Start the SystemManager application.
2. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
3. In the System diagram, click a Spectrum video server host icon to display the Physical
Configuration page.
4. Click the Spectrum video server’s picture to display the Properties page.
5. Click on the Edit “filetypes.conf” button that appears below each host’s Unique Properties. This
takes you to the Edit “filetypes.conf” page as shown.
118
Editing the Filetypes.conf file
Figure 2-25: Editing the Filetypes.conf File
6. Edit the file following the rules and recommendations from Harmonic.
Related information
About changing the Ethernet file striping behavior on page 114
Mapping suffixes for file types on page 115
119
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3
Spectrum file system configuration
Find configuration instructions for Spectrum file systems.
IMPORTANT: The procedures outlined in this chapter are written for qualified technical
personnel, skilled at advanced networking procedures. If you have any questions, please
consult with your facility’s Information Service staff or contact Technical Support.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and 2252/2251 file system configurations
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and MediaStore 5100 file system configurations
Building a file system for a single MediaDirector 2252B/2251B or 2252/2251Series
Building an EFS system for multiple MediaDirector 2252B/2251B or 2252/2251 Series
Verifying Spectrum video servers in an EFS have common views of storage
About disk subsystem performance factors
About the MediaCenter file system configuration
About the file system configuration for MediaCenter 2200B with the MediaStore 7200
About the MediaDeck 7000 file system configuration
About the Spectrum X file system configuration
Creating a RAID set
Deleting a RAID set
Adding drives to a RAID set
Removing drives from a RAID set
Creating a file system
Initializing a file system
Deleting a file system
Renaming a file system
Extending a file system
Adding a RAID set to a file system
Removing a RAID set from a file system
Changing a file system wink state
Viewing a file system Unicode status
Modifying the RAID set channel
About making or clearing a hot spare
Changing RAID set wink state
Using One-Click functions
120
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and 2252/2251 file system configurations
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and 2252/2251 file system
configurations
The MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and MediaDirector 2252/2251 connect to the MediaStore 5000 series to
provide a number of file system configurations based on different drive sizes.
The following tables describe the different file system configurations.
Table 3-1: File system configurations with MSS-5000 series a
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive Raw Storage
Capacity
16
2 x (6+2)
300 GB
3.49 TB
24
3 x (6+2)
300 GB
5.23 TB
Table 3-2: File system configurations with MSS-5000 series b
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive Raw Storage
Capacity
16
2 x (6+2)
600 GB
6.98 TB
24
3 x (6+2)
600 GB
10.46 TB
Table 3-3: File system configurations with MSS-5000 series c
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive Raw Storage
Capacity
16
2 x (6+2)
900 GB
10.47 TB
24
3 x (6+2)
900 GB
15.71 TB
Table 3-4: File system configurations with MSS-5000 series d
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive Raw Storage
Capacity
16
2 x (6+2)
1.2 TB
13.97 TB
24
3 x (6+2)
1.2 TB
20.95 TB
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and MediaStore 5100 file
system configurations
The MediaDirector 2252B/2251B series connects to the MediaStore 5100 series to provide a number of
file system configurations based on different drive sizes.
The following tables describe the different file system configurations.
121
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
Table 3-5: File system configurations with the MediaStore 5100 series
Drives
RAID set
Capacity per Drive
Raw Storage
Capacity
24
3 (6+2)
300 GB
5.23 TB
24
3 (6+2)
600 GB
10.46 TB
24
3 (6+2)
1.2 TB
20.95 TB
Building a file system for a single MediaDirector 2252B/2251B
or 2252/2251Series
Build a File System for a single MediaDirector, using a MediaDirector 225xB or 225x series.
A variety of system configurations are supported; please consult with your Harmonic representative for
assistance in designing your particular system.
1. Ensure that your serial attached SCSI (SAS) connections are properly connected. Connect up to four
MediaStore 5000/5100 series per MediaDirector 225xB/225x series. Refer to the Spectrum System
Installation Guide for detailed connection instructions.
2. Ensure that the MediaStore ’s configuration is correct.
3. Harmonic recommends that you set the Unit ID number on each MediaStore with a unique number,
starting with 1. For instructions on setting Unit ID number, refer to “Setting the Unit ID Number” in the
Spectrum System Installation Guide .
4. Check the MediaStore ’s drive status on the Disk Utilities page:
a. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
b. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available MediaDirectors will be shown.
c. Click the icon for the MediaDirector that you want to check. Its Disk Utilities page appears. Verify
that the correct number of drives appears, and that each drive’s status is "alive.";
d. Click each drive’s Disk icon, and on the Drive Properties page, verify the disk size (in GB) is as
expected.
e. All drives are shipped already formatted from the Harmonic factory. If a drive is not “alive” or if
an incorrect capacity (in GB) or block size appears, contact Harmonic technical support. Before
continuing with the next step, all drives should be alive, formatted and not part of a RAID set.
5. Use the “One-Click” functions to create and initialize the File System.
At this point, the File System is ready for use.
IMPORTANT: This system can expand to EFS (Extended File Sharing) with two
MediaDirector s. If you wish to use two MediaDirector s, you should start with 24 drives
in the first MediaStore.
Related information
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and 2252/2251 file system configurations on page 121
Using One-Click functions on page 139
122
Building an EFS system for multiple MediaDirector 2252B/2251B or 2252/2251 Series
Building an EFS system for multiple MediaDirector 2252B/2251B
or 2252/2251 Series
Build an EFS shared across multiple MediaDirector s, using the MediaDirector 2252B/2251B or
2252/2251 series.
A number of system configurations are supported; please consult with your Harmonic representative for
assistance in designing your particular system.
Note the following important points:
•
•
•
The EFS (Extended File Sharing) feature requires the Extended File Sharing License. Contact your
Harmonic representative for more information.
For each system, the attached MediaStores must all use the same capacity drives. However, you may
connect MediaStores which have different numbers of RAID sets (for example, one with a 2 x (6+2)
configuration and one with a 3 x (6+2) configuration).
You may only connect a MediaDirector 2252 to another MediaDirector 2252 in an EFS. Likewise, you
may only connect a MediaDirector 2251 to another MediaDirector 2251.
IMPORTANT: Changing from a single Spectrum System to a multiple Spectrum Systems
requires shutting down the single system, re-wiring the system to accommodate the new
MediaDirector(s), and then starting the File System on each new MediaDirector. Files that
already resided on the single system are protected. Contact Harmonic technical support for
additional assistance.
1. Ensure that your serial attached SCSI (SAS) connections are properly connected. Connect up to 4
MediaStore 5000/5100 series. Refer to “Connecting MediaDirectors and MediaStores Using SAS” in
the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
2. Ensure that the MediaDirector EFS Ethernet connections are properly connected. Refer to
“Connecting Two MediaDirectors in an EFS Configuration” or “Connecting Two MediaDirectors in an
EFS Configuration” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
3. Harmonic recommends that you set the Unit ID number on each MediaStore in your system with a
unique number, starting with 1. For instructions on setting Unit ID number, refer to “Setting the Unit ID
Number” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide .
4. Ensure that all MediaDirectors are running the same version of firmware before creating the EFS
system.
Refer to “Upgrading MediaDirector Firmware” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide for details.
5. Create a File System on MediaDirector 1 according to the steps in the “Creating a File System”
procedure. At the conclusion of the process, your Disk Utilities page will only show one
MediaDirector and one File System.
6. Once the File System is working on MediaDirector 1, start the File System on MediaDirector 2. Note
that this step is only required the first time an EFS system is brought up. On subsequent start-ups, the
File System starts automatically.
7. For MediaDirector 2, go to the Disk Utilities page and verify that the same File System and RAID
sets as MediaDirector 1 appear on MediaDirector 2’s Disk Utilities page.
At this point, the File System will be running on both MediaDirectors. If you are adding a third or fourth
MediaDirector, repeat steps 6 and 7 for the third MediaDirector, and then for the fourth.
123
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
Related information
About MediaDirector 2252B/2251B and 2252/2251 file system configurations on page 121
Creating a file system on page 130
Starting the file system on page 157
Verifying Spectrum video servers in an EFS have common views
of storage
Prior to taking any action on a disk drive, RAID set, File System, or MediaStore it is important to verify
that all Spectrum video server in an Extended File System (EFS) have a common view of disks, RAID
sets and MediaStore s.
IMPORTANT: Under certain error conditions, taking action without this check may result in
an aborted or damaged File System.
1. Open a SystemManager application page for each Spectrum video server in the EFS.
2. Navigate to the Disk Utilities page for the each Spectrum video server.
3. Compare the data on the Disk Utilities pages.
•
•
If the system is not in a transient state, the view from all Spectrum video server should be identical
with respect to all elements on the page. If they are, further actions or operations may proceed.
If the view between Spectrum video servers is not consistent, and circumstances allow a reboot
of all Spectrum video servers, do this and go to step 1. If not, or if this reboot is performed but an
inconsistent state persists, call Harmonic technical support.
About disk subsystem performance factors
If you are creating a file system manually, note some important points about disk subsystem performance.
If you are using the One-Click File System function, the system will automatically make decisions (as
described below) for you.
When configuring disk storage for a MediaDirector or multiple MediaDirector s, the number of virtual RAID
channels is paramount in determining the potential bandwidth of the disk subsystem:
The impact of adding virtual RAID channels is not obvious because their function may not be clear. When
recording, data can be written in parallel to RAID sets that have different virtual channel settings, but data
cannot be written to RAID sets that have the same virtual channel settings. In addition, the record process
determines the limits of the playback process.
The net effect is that with more virtual channel settings, more disks can be driven to read and/or write
data simultaneously, thereby improving the disk subsystem’s potential bandwidth.
Suppose a system has two RAID sets. If both RAID sets are assigned to virtual channel A, data will be
recorded to the first RAID set until it is full, and then to the second RAID set. On the other hand, if one
RAID set is assigned to channel A and one to channel B, then “writes” are alternated between the two
RAID sets as data is recorded, filling both more or less equally throughout the recording process. Since
the disks in both RAID sets are active at any one time, this approach has significantly more potential disk
bandwidth than the first approach.
124
About the MediaCenter file system configuration
Given the discussion above, is there any good reason not to maximize the number of virtual channels
used in any configuration. Unfortunately, the answer is yes. When expanding storage, the minimum RAID
set increment is the number of virtual channels in the system. Thus, if a system is configured with four
RAID virtual channels, expanding storage must be accomplished in increments of four RAID sets. There
is, therefore, good reason to keep the total number of virtual RAID channels to the minimum necessary to
meet your performance needs.
Related information
Modifying the RAID set channel on page 135
About the MediaCenter file system configuration
Find available file system configurations for the MediaCenter 2200B and 2200/2200A.
Table 3-6: MediaCenter 2200B File System Configuration
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive
Raw Storage Capacity
12 SAS
2 x (4+2)
6 TB
48 TB
12 SAS
2 x (4+2)
4 TB
32 TB
12 SAS
2 x (4+2)
2 TB
16 TB
Table 3-7: MediaCenter 2200 and 2200A File System Configuration
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive
Raw Storage Capacity
12 SAS
2 x (4+2)
4 TB
32 TB
12 SATA
2 x (4+2)
2 TB
16 TB
12 SSD
2 x (5+1)
480 GB
4.8 TB
6 SSD
1 x (5+1)
480 GB
2.4 TB
Use the “One-Click” functions to create the file system and RAID set, and initialize the file system.
Related information
Using One-Click functions on page 139
About the file system configuration for MediaCenter 2200B with
the MediaStore 7200
Find available file system configurations for the MediaCenter 2200B with a MediaStore 7200
Table 3-8: MediaCenter 2200B (12 drives) with the MediaStore 7224 (24 drives)
# Drives
36
RAID Set
6 x (4+2)
Capacity per Drive
6 TB
Raw Storage Capacity
144 TB
125
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive
Raw Storage Capacity
36
6 x (4+2)
4 TB
96 TB
36
6 x (4+2)
2 TB
48 TB
Table 3-9: MediaCenter 2200B (12 drives) with the MediaStore 7212 (12 drives)
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per Drive
Raw Storage Capacity
24
4 x (4+2)
6 TB
96 TB
24
4 x (4+2)
4 TB
64 TB
24
4 x (4+2)
2 TB
24 TB
About the MediaDeck 7000 file system configuration
Find the file system configuration for a single Spectrum MediaDeck 7000.
Table 3-10: MediaDeck 7000 File System Configuration
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per
Drive
Raw Storage
Capacity
4 SATA
3+1
4 TB
12 TB
4 SATA
3+1
2 TB
6 TB
4 SSD
3+1
480 GB
1.406 TB (1440
GB)
Use the “One-Click” functions to create the file system and RAID set, and initialize the file system.
Related information
Using One-Click functions on page 139
About the Spectrum X file system configuration
Find the file system configuration for a single Spectrum X in internal storage mode.
Table 3-11: Spectrum X File System Configuration
# Drives
RAID Set
Capacity per
Drive
Raw Storage
Capacity
4 SAS
3+1
6 TB
18 TB
4 SAS
3+1
4 TB
12 TB
4 SAS
3+1
2 GB
6 TB
Use the “One-Click” functions to create the file system and RAID set, and initialize the file system.
126
Creating a RAID set
Related information
Using One-Click functions on page 139
Creating a RAID set
You can manually create a RAID set.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
Use this procedure to create an empty RAID set, to which drives can then be attached. A RAID set can
contain from four (minimum) to nine (maximum) drives.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers appears.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which you want to create a RAID set. Its Disk Utilities page
appears.
4. Click Create RAID Set to access the Create RAID Set page.
5. Type name of the RAID set in the Name field, and select a type:
•
•
Select Un-protected to create a RAID set with no parity drive.
Select Protected to create a RAID set with a parity drive that stores redundancy information. This
is the default selection.
6. Click Create RAID to return to the Disk Utilities page. The new RAID set appears without any drives
attached.
Deleting a RAID set
You can manually delete a RAID set.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
Use this procedure to delete a RAID set, typically, when the wrong drives have been attached. This
procedure is preferable to removing drives from a RAID set.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which you want to delete a RAID set. Its Disk Utilities page
appears.
4. Verify that the RAID set is not attached to a File System. If it is, remove the RAID set from the File
System.
When the RAID set is not attached to a File System, the Delete button appears next to the RAID Set
icon.
127
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
5. Click the Delete button to delete the RAID set. In the Confirmation dialog, click OK. The RAID set
disappears from the Disk Utilities page. As required, create a new RAID set.
Using One-Click functions
Related information
Removing a RAID set from a file system on page 134
Creating a RAID set on page 127
Adding drives to a RAID set
You can manually add drives to a RAID set.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
CAUTION: Proceed with caution through this procedure as it is possible to add drives to a
RAID set from a different MediaStore than the one intended.
Use this procedure to add drives to a RAID set. A RAID set can contain from four (minimum) to nine
(maximum) drives.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which the new RAID set resides — the one for which you
want to add drives. The Disk Utilities page appears.
4. Click the RAID Set icon to display the RAID Set Utilities page.
5. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the Add/Remove Drives button to access the Add/Remove
Drives page. The Add/Remove Drives page lists the status of the RAID set, and lists all available
drives and hot spares connected to your Spectrum server.
6. In the Available Drives section, make a note of the drive slot numbers and MediaStore names. Note
the Check Box adjacent to all available drives.
7. Check the drives that you wish to attach to the RAID set. Continue until all desired drives are
checked, and then click the Add Selected Drives button. The selected drives are now removed from
the Available Drives section and added to the Current Drives section.
NOTE: Keep in mind that when adding a drive to an existing RAID set, the drive with
the smallest capacity in the RAID set dictates the capacity of the other drives within that
RAID set.
If a Hot Spare is to be assigned to this RAID set, that step may be done now.
8. The RAID set’s Virtual Channel may also be changed at this time.
9. Click Done to return to the RAID Set Utilities page. The drives that you selected will now be listed in
the drive list.
10. If desired, verify that the correct drives have been assigned to the RAID set by clicking Wink On.
Clicking Wink Off may then disable the wink function.
128
Removing drives from a RAID set
11. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Using One-Click functions
Related information
About making or clearing a hot spare on page 136
Modifying the RAID set channel on page 135
Removing drives from a RAID set
You can manually remove drives from a RAID set.
This procedure is used to remove drives from a RAID set. However, when you perform the procedure, a
“hole” is left in the RAID set that cannot be filled. If you have added the wrong drives to a RAID set, it is
recommended that you delete the RAID set and start again.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
CAUTION: Removing a disk drive from a running MediaStore may generate fibre channel
noise which will disrupt playback or recording of video for a few moments. In order to avoid
disruption, disk drives should be bypassed before removing them from the MediaStore.
Once a disk drive has been bypassed, it cannot be used again. Only bypassed disks that
have failed can be returned to Harmonic.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which the RAID set resides — the one from which you want
to remove drives. The Disk Utilities page appears.
NOTE: In an EFS environment, you must remove the “dead” drive from each of the
MediaDirectors in the system.
4. Click the RAID Set icon to display the RAID Set Utilities page.
5. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the Add/Remove Drives button to access the Add/Remove
Drives page. The Add/Remove Drives page lists the status of the RAID set, and lists all available
drives and hot spares connected to your Spectrum server.
6. Click the Remove button adjacent to the drive that you wish to remove from the RAID set. Continue
until all desired drives are removed from the RAID set. Once removed, the drive jumps down to the
Available Drives section.
7. When all desired drives are removed, click Done to return to the RAID Set Utilities page. In the table,
the labels Unknown and Removed will appear for each removed drive.
8. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Using One-Click functions
129
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
Creating a file system
You can manually create a file system.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature. Refer to for more information.
Use this procedure to create an empty File System to which RAID sets can be attached. The procedure is
performed when you are installing a new Spectrum System.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which you want to create a new File System. The Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. Click the Create File System button to display the Create File System page.
5. Enter a name for the new File System, with a maximum of eight characters. Refer to “About Naming
Files and System Elements” for proper naming conventions.
6. Click Create File System.
The system automatically returns to the Disk Utilities page. Verify that a new folder appears with
name of the new File System adjacent to it.
Related information
Using One-Click functions on page 139
About naming files and system elements on page 117
Initializing a file system
You can manually initialize a file system.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature for MediaDirector s.
This procedure initializes and starts an existing File System. Use this procedure to complete the creation
phase of the File System. Perform this procedure the very first time that you want to use the File System.
Afterwards, the next time the File System needs to be started, use the Start FS procedure. It must not be
initialized again.
IMPORTANT: All content on all RAID sets that are attached to the File System will be
erased.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers appears.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum servers on which you want to initialize a File System. The Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. Verify that the File System has been created, and that at least one RAID set is attached to it.
130
Deleting a file system
5. Click the File System Hyperlink to display the File System Utilities page.
6. Reboot the system.
7. At the bottom of the page, click the Initialize FS button to display the Initialize File System page.
This button only appears when the File System is stopped.
8. Select the desired File System options: NVRAM Journaling, Read-only, Use Previous Start, and
Save Options.
NOTE: In most cases, you should not need to change the options away from the
default selections.
9. Click Initialize to accept the selected options and initialize (and start) the File System. The system
automatically returns to the File System Utilities page.
10. Verify that the File System’s status has changed to Started.
11. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
NOTE: If the File System does not start automatically, attempt to start the File System
manually using the SystemManager. The File System must be started manually when a
new Spectrum server is connected to a pre-existing File System.
Related information
Using One-Click functions on page 139
Starting the file system on page 157
Deleting a file system
You can manually delete a file system.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
Use this procedure to delete a File System, for example, when it is no longer needed or when a File
System has been created accidentally.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which you want to delete an existing File System. The Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. Verify that there are no RAID sets attached to the File System. If there are, follow the procedures for
removing a RAID set from a File System.
5. With all RAID sets removed, click the Delete button adjacent to the File System hyperlink. When the
confirmation dialog appears, click OK to accept.
6. Verify that the File System is no longer present on the Disk Utilities page.
NOTE: If a file system belonging to a Spectrum system is deleted and then recreated
with a new name, both versions of the file system will appear as available in Windows*
Explorer. To resolve this issue, restart the MediaDirector after deleting the file system.
131
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
Related information
Using One-Click functions on page 139
Removing a RAID set from a file system on page 134
Renaming a file system
Rename a file system if needed.
1. Stop the File System.
NOTE: In an Extended File System configuration, this must be done on each
MediaDirector.
2. Click the Change File System Name button on the File System Utilities page.
3. Enter the new File System name.
4. Click the Change button.
5. Reboot all Spectrum servers connected to the File System.
6. Verify that the File System restarts on each Spectrum video server.
The new File System name should be reflected in the Disk Utilities page on the SystemManager,
and under IP connection under CIFS.
Extending a file system
Use the extend file system operation when you are expanding a file system to include new RAID sets (for
example, when adding a new storage enclosure to your Spectrum system).
This operation is supported on a MediaCenter 2200B, and a MediaDirector 2252/2251, 2252B/2251B,
and 2252B-DS.
1. Make sure any new storage enclosure is attached according to the instructions in the Spectrum
System Installation Guide. The enclosure must have a complete set of drives. Otherwise, the extend
file system operation will not work.
2. Make sure there are no compromised RAID sets in your system. Otherwise, the extend file system
operation will not work.
a. From the Configuration tab, click the Disk Utilities icon to view the Disk Utilities page for your
entire system.
b. Verify that your Spectrum video server shows "RAIDs: Normal."
3. Stop the file system. Navigate to the File System Utilities page for your video server and stop the file
system as follows.
a. From the Spectrum Disk Utilities page, click the icon for your Spectrum video server to open the
Disk Utilities page for that server.
b. From the Disk Utilities page, click the file system hyperlink, as shown in the following figure, to
display the Filesystem Utilities page.
132
Adding a RAID set to a file system
c. From Filesystem Utilities, click the Stop FS button at the bottom of the page.
4. Verify that the file system status changes to stopped, and that the Extend FS button is available, and
then click Extend FS.
At this point, Spectrum creates new RAID sets and adds them to the file system. Depending on the
size of your Spectrum system, it may take several minutes for the operation to complete and for
SystemManager to display the new RAID sets in your file system.
5. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page for your server.
6. From the Disk Utilities page, do the following:
◦
◦
In the Physical View column, verify that the new drives are part of a RAID set.
In the Logical View column, verify that the new RAID sets are part of the file system.
Adding a RAID set to a file system
You can manually add a RAID set to a file system.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
Use this procedure to attach a RAID set to a File System. Perform the procedure when you are creating a
new File System, or when you are adding new storage to an existing File System.
The RAID set that is to be added must have the correct number of disk drives, typically either 5 or 8.
Verify this fact on the RAID Set Utilities page before proceeding.
IMPORTANT: Before attaching new RAID Sets to a pre-existing File System, make sure
the File System has been stopped on all MediaDirector s. Failure to do this could cause the
other MediaDirectors sharing the File System to automatically stop the File System.
133
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which you want to add a RAID set to an existing File
System. The Disk Utilities page appears.
4. Click on the File System hyperlink to display the File System Utilities page.
5. The RAID set that you want to attach will be listed in the Unattached section. Click the Add button
adjacent to the RAID set. This action causes the RAID set to move up into the list of attached RAID
sets.
6. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Removing a RAID set from a file system
You can manually remove a RAID set from a file system.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
Use this procedure to remove a RAID set from a File System for purposes of deleting the RAID set, and/
or the File System itself. This procedure is required if you have made a mistake with the RAID set, or if
you are reconfiguring your disk drives.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum server on which you want to remove a RAID set from a File System.
The Disk Utilities page appears.
4. Click the File System icon that contains the target RAID set, to display the File System Utilities
page.
5. Ensure that the File System is stopped. If it is not, click Stop FS. When the confirmation dialog
appears, click OK to accept. A Detach button appears if the File System is stopped.
6. Click Detach. When the confirmation dialog appears, click OK to accept. The File System now
displays a “Removed” message in the previous RAID set’s location.
7. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Using One-Click functions
Changing a file system wink state
You can change the wink state of a file system at any time.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
134
Viewing a file system Unicode status
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to wink the File System. The Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. Click the File System hyperlink to display the File System Utilities page.
5. Check the File System Drives Wink State line.
6. Change the File System’s wink state as desired:
•
•
If currently On, click Wink Off to stop winking all drives in the File System.
If currently Off, click Wink On to start winking all drives in the File System.
NOTE: Winking drives utilizes a small amount of Fibre Channel bandwidth. For
optimum system operation, do not leave drives in the wink state when unnecessary.
Viewing a file system Unicode status
You can view a File System’s Unicode status by determining whether a file necessary for Unicode
conversions is loaded on a File System.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to check the File System. The Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. Click the File System hyperlink to display the File System Utilities page.
5. Check the Character Set DB Loaded line:
•
•
If the status is Yes, the file needed for Unicode conversion is available to the File System.
If the status is No, the file needed for Unicode is missing and no conversion can take place.
6. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Modifying the RAID set channel
You can manually modify the RAID set channel.
NOTE: This procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System
feature.
Use this procedure to change the RAID set’s virtual channel assignment, in order to optimize the system’s
bandwidth. Use this procedure in systems with more than one Fibre Channel loop.
IMPORTANT: File System is next started or initialized. Changing the channel on a RAID
set that already has media recorded onto it may cause the media to become inaccessible.
Harmonic recommends that you initialize the File System (hence erasing all media) after
changing any RAID set’s channel.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum servers will be shown.
135
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
3. Click the icon for the MediaDirector on which you want to modify the RAID set channel. The Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. Click a RAID Set hyperlink to display the RAID Set Utilities page.
5. Scroll to the bottom and click Set Channel to display the Modify Channel page.
6. Select the desired virtual channel by clicking one of the Channel Selection Buttons, A through H.
This action selects the channel and automatically returns to the RAID Set Utilities page.
7. At the top of the RAID Set Utilities page, verify that the Channel field displays the selected virtual
channel.
8. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Using One-Click functions
Related information
About disk subsystem performance factors on page 124
About making or clearing a hot spare
Harmonic recommends that you always have at least one hot spare available for each RAID set.
If a drive failure occurs and a hot spare is available, the system will automatically utilize a hot spare to
rebuild a protected RAID set with no interruption to video playback.
A system can have multiple hot spares. There are two types of hot spares.
•
•
A “Global” hot spare is a drive that will be used by the Spectrum server to fulfill hot spare
requirements for any RAID set in any MediaStore in which the hot spare resides. A “Global” hot spare
does not fulfill hot spare requirements in different enclosures.
A “Local” hot spare is a drive that is associated with a particular RAID set. The Spectrum server will
use this drive only to fulfill hot spare requirements for that particular RAID set. .
NOTE: If you enable Monitor Hotspares (from the Options page on the Home tab),
the SystemManager will raise an alarm (and send notification by e-mail and/or trap is so
configured) when a RAID set is no longer protected with an available hot spare.
You can clear a Hot Spare, for example, if you accidentally created a Hot Spare or if you wanted to use
the selected drive as a normal part of a RAID set.
Related information
Making a global hot spare drive on page 137
Clearing a global hot spare drive on page 138
136
About making or clearing a hot spare
Making a global hot spare drive
You can make a global hot spare for your Spectrum system.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have purchased the Hot Spare Option. Contact your Harmonic representative for
details.
1. Insert the hot spare drive into the MediaStore, into any open slot. There is no limit on the number of
hot spares that can be created, however, you should not need more than one hot spare per RAID set.
NOTE: Not all MediaStore versions can support a hot spare. Check with Harmonic
technical support for details.
2. Verify the hot spare drive’s condition. On the Disk Utilities page, the drive should appear as “Alive”
and “Unraided.” If the drive does not appear this way, contact Harmonic technical support.
3. Verify the drive’s firmware. If the firmware revision level does not match the other drives, upgrade the
drive’s firmware.
Refer to Upgrading Disk Drive Firmware in the Spectrum System Getting Started Guide. You can
use this procedure to both check the firmware revision level and perform the upgrade if required.
4. Once the drive’s firmware matches the other drives, on the Disk Utilities page, click the Disk Drive
icon to display the Drive Properties page (for the selected drive).
5. At the bottom of the Drive Properties page, click Make Hot Spare. The button’s label changes to
Clear Hot Spare, the drive’s status changes immediately to “Alive, Hot Spare,” and the drive is ready
for use as a global hot spare.
Making a local hot spare drive
You can make a local hot spare for your Spectrum system.
Before you begin
NOTE: This procedure is used when creating a File System manually. Note that the
procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System feature.
Ensure that you have purchased the Hot Spare Option. Contact your Harmonic representative for
details.
1. Insert the hot spare drive into the MediaStore, into any open slot. There is no limit on the number of
hot spares that can be created, however, you should not need more than one hot spare per RAID set.
NOTE: Not all MediaStore versions can support a hot spare. Check with Harmonic
technical support for details.
2. Verify the hot spare drive’s condition. On the Disk Utilities page, the drive should appear as “Alive”
and “Unraided.” If the drive does not appear this way, contact Harmonic technical support.
3. Verify the drive’s firmware. If the firmware revision level does not match the other drives, upgrade the
drive’s firmware.
Refer to Upgrading Disk Drive Firmware in the Spectrum System Getting Started Guide. You can
use this procedure to both check the firmware revision level and perform the upgrade if required.
137
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
4. Once the drive’s firmware matches the other drives, on the Disk Utilities page, click the RAID Set
icon to display the RAID Utilities page.
5. At the bottom of the RAID Utilities page, click Add/Remove Drives to display the Add/Remove
Drives page.
6. Scroll down to the “Available Drives” section, where each drive will have an adjacent Hot Spare
button.
7. Locate the drive that you just inserted, and click its Hot Spare button. The drive will be removed from
the “Available Drives” section and will appear in the “Hot Spares” section.
8. Click Done to complete the procedure and return to the RAID Utilities page.
Using One-Click functions
Clearing a global hot spare drive
You can clear a global Hot Spare, for example, if you accidentally created a Hot Spare or if you wanted to
use the selected drive as a normal part of a RAID set.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page.
3. Click the icon for the MediaDirector on which you want to clear a hot spare. The MediaDirector ’s Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. In the drive list, locate the desired Hot Spare and click its Disk Drive icon to display the Drive
Properties page (for the selected drive).
5. At the bottom of the Drive Properties page, click Clear Hot Spare. The button’s label changes to
Make Hot Spare, the drive’s status changes immediately to “Alive,” and the drive is ready for use as
normal drive.
Clearing a local hot spare drive
You can clear a local Hot Spare, for example, if you accidentally created a Hot Spare or if you wanted to
use the selected drive as a normal part of a RAID set.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page.
3. Click the icon for the MediaDirector on which you want to clear a hot spare. The MediaDirector ’s
Disk Utilities page appears.
4. Click the RAID Set icon to display the RAID Utilities page.
5. At the bottom of the RAID Utilities page, click Add/Remove Drives to display the Add/Remove
Drives page.
6. Scroll down to the “Hot Spares” section. Click the Remove button adjacent to the hot spare that you
wish to clear. The drive is removed from the “Hot Spares” section and appears in the “Available
Drives” section.
7. Click Done to complete the procedure and return to the RAID Utilities page.
138
Changing RAID set wink state
Changing RAID set wink state
You can change the wink state of a RAID set at any time.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to wink a RAID set. The Disk Utilities
page appears.
4. Click the RAID Set icon (or the RAID Set Hyperlink) to display the RAID Set Utilities page.
5. Check the RAID Set Drives Wink State line.
6. Change the RAID set’s wink state as desired:
•
•
If currently On, click Wink Off to stop winking the drives in the RAID set.
If currently Off, click Wink On to start winking the drives in the RAID set.
This chapter explains how to use One-Click Functions to perform File System operations for a
Spectrum video server.
Using One-Click functions
Use the One-Click functions to automatically create file systems on Spectrum video servers.
About One-Click functions
One-Click Functions allow you to quickly and automatically create File Systems on Spectrum video
servers that match one of the valid configurations described in “Spectrum File System Configuration.”
File Systems for configurations not described in these topics may need to be created manually.
Using a “One-Click Function” saves you from having to perform the following individual tasks in
sequence:
•
•
•
•
Create a RAID set.
Add disk drives to the RAID set.
Create a File System.
Add the RAID Set to the File System.
Related information
Spectrum file system configuration on page 120
Viewing One-Click functions
View the possible One-Click Functions for a Spectrum video server.
1. From the Disk Utilities page, click a Spectrum video server.
2. Click the One-Click Functions button to display the One-Click Functions page.
A sample One-Click Functions page is illustrated in the following figure. .
139
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
Figure 3-1: One-Click Functions
SystemManager will display one or more one-click button(s) that apply to your Spectrum video server.
One-Click functions page options
The One-Click Functions page is divided into sections.
•
•
•
RAID sets and File Systems that the Manager application discovers. The discovery process also
indicates the Minimum F/C Loop Speed: Unknown, 1 Gbps, or 2 Gbps, and the wiring configuration:
Non-redundant, Redundant or Invalid.
In the middle “Warning” section (if it appears), one or more messages will be shown if the system (as
discovered by the Manager application) does not match a valid wiring configuration. If the “Warning”
section does not appear, the system is valid and you may create a File System using “One-Click”
functions.
In the lower “One-Click Functions” section, the array of buttons changes depending on whether or not
a File System exists.
Following are descriptions of buttons in the One-Click Functions section. Remember that only selected
buttons appear, depending upon the File System state.
Start
When the Start button appears, it indicates that the File System has already
been created, and it is stopped. Click Start to start the File System on the
selected Spectrum video server, including as many RAID sets as defined. The
button disappears once the File System starts.
Stop
When the Stop button appears, it indicates that a File System is running. Click
Stop to stop all File Systems that are currently running. The button disappears
when the File System has stopped.
Delete
When the Delete button appears, it indicates that a File System has already
been created, and it is stopped. Click to delete all RAID sets and all File
Systems on the selected Spectrum video server. A “Warning” dialog appears
once clicked. After confirmation, the Delete button disappears and the Create
button appears.
Create
When the Create button appears, it indicates that there is no File System and
no RAID sets. Click to create a File System and RAID set(s) using all the drives
140
Using One-Click functions
discovered in all MediaStore(s) attached to the selected Spectrum video server
or located on the Spectrum video server itself.
For Spectrum video servers: two mutually exclusive radio buttons accompany
the Create button, allowing you to choose the type of RAID set desired:
•
•
6+1+1. Selects a RAID set with 6 data drives, 1 parity drive and 1 hot spare.
This is the default selection. For example:
◦ If the system sees 8 drives, a 6+1+1 RAID set is created.
◦ If the system sees 16 drives, two 6+1+1 RAID sets are created.
7+1. Selects a RAID set with 7 data drives and 1 parity drive. For example:
◦
◦
If the system sees 8 drives, a 7+1 RAID set is created.
If the system sees 16 drives, two 7+1 RAID sets are created.
Note the following important points:
There are no explicit hot spares created with the 7+1selection, but hot
spares can be added manually using the Disk Utilities page.
◦ A minimum of 8 drives is required to perform a “One-Click” function.
◦ If you have 9 drives in the MediaStore chassis and you pick 7+1, the
ninth drive becomes a hot spare automatically.
◦ Done Click to return to the Disk Utilities page.
For the Spectrum X and MediaDeck 7000, the 3+1 button allows you to
create a file system with a 3+1 RAID set.
◦
•
Related information
About making or clearing a hot spare on page 136
Creating and starting a file system
Use the one-click function to automatically create and initialize File Systems on a new Spectrum system.
Before you begin
There should be no RAID sets or File Systems present on your system. To remove RAID sets or File
System, refer to “Deleting all File Systems” for details.
1. On the Disk Utilities page, click the One-Click Functions button to display the One-Click
Functions page.
2. Choose your desired RAID set configuration. Click the 6+1+1, 7+1, or 3+1 radio button.
3. Enter the new File System’s name in the New File System Name field. See “About Naming Files and
System Elements” for proper naming conventions.
4. Click Create. This action creates and starts the File System with the selected RAID set configuration.
5. Click Done to complete the procedure and return to the Disk Utilities page.
NOTE: If the MediaDirector 's SMB interface displays an outdated view after creating,
renaming, or deleting a file system, reboot all MediaDirectors to update the view.
Related information
Deleting all file systems on page 142
141
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 3: Spectrum file system configuration
About naming files and system elements on page 117
Stopping all file systems
From the One-Click Functions page, you can stop all File Systems on the MediaDirector, in preparation
for system configuration changes or to transport the system.
1. On the Disk Utilities page, click the One-Click Functions button to display the One-Click
Functions page.
2. Click the Stop button. This action displays a warning dialog box.
3. In the dialog, click OK to continue. All File Systems on the MediaDirector are now stopped.
4. Click Done to complete the procedure. You may now restart the File System(s) or delete them.
Starting all file systems
From the One-Click Functions page, you can start all file systems.
1. On the Disk Utilities page, click the One-Click Functions button to display the One-Click
Functions page.
2. Click the Start button, then click Done to complete the procedure.
Deleting all file systems
From the One-Click Functions page, you can delete all Spectrum video server File Systems, in
preparation for creating a new File System.
1. On the Disk Utilities page, click the One-Click Functions button to display the One-Click
Functions page.
2. Ensure that all File Systems are stopped. This is indicated by the presence of the Delete and Start
buttons.
3. Click the Delete button. This action displays a warning dialog box.
4. Click OK to continue, then click Done to complete the procedure.
142
Chapter 4
Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
Find details on File System maintenance utilities.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Viewing Spectrum storage properties
Changing the MediaStore name
Winking all drives on a MediaStore
Winking one drive on a MediaStore
Viewing drive properties
About proactive drive removal
Viewing RAID set information
Viewing general file system information
Assigning a virtual channel to a RAID set
Navigating the Disk Utilities
Upgrading drive firmware
Failing a drive
Unfailing a drive
Replacing a failed drive
Renaming a RAID set
Stopping a RAID set rebuild in progress
Restarting a RAID set rebuild
Starting the file system
Stopping the file system
Viewing Spectrum storage properties
On the Storage Properties page you can view properties as well as perform tasks such as labeling the
selected storage enclosure and checking the status of the disks and other components in an enclosure
1. On the System Diagram, click any Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to reach the Physical
Configuration page.
2. Click the image of the “MediaStore ” to display the Storage Properties page.
143
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
Figure 4-1: Storage properties
Storage properties
You can view the properties for your Spectrum storage.
In the General Information section, view the following.
Name
Displays a user-definable name given to a physical enclosure.
Change Name
Click to rename a MediaStore.
Wink state for all
MediaStore drives
Click to change the wink state of all drives on the MediaStore. When on, all
drive LEDs wink on the front panel of the MediaStore.
NOTE: Drives that are winked will only wink for 30 seconds.
Type
Indicates the MediaStore model type. Current types are MS, MSC, and MSS
models.
NOTE: Spectrum systems do not support the intermixing of
MS, MSC, and MSS MediaStore models. All MediaStores on
any Spectrum system must be either MS, MSC, or MSS. In
addition, Hard Disk drives may not be swapped between these
three models of MediaStore. If you have multiple Spectrum
systems, with a mixture of MediaStore models, make sure
that replacement drives at your facility are all configured for
the correct operation. Contact Harmonic technical support for
details.
Model #
Indicates the MediaStore manufacturer’s model number.
Firmware Rev.
Lists the firmware level within the MediaStore ’s controller unit. This information
is used primarily for debugging purposes.
GUID
Displays the Global Unique Identifier for the MediaStore. This information is
primarily used for debugging purposes.
144
Viewing Spectrum storage properties
Spectrum Servers
Displays a list of Spectrum servers that are physically connected to the
MediaStore.
Last Message
This line displays the last message received that deals with the selected
MediaStore.
Status Current At
Indicates when the currently displayed MediaStore enclosure information and
status was last obtained.
NOTE: The environment section does not provide details for
the MediaStore 5000 series, MediaCenter, Spectrum X, or
MediaDeck 7000.
In the Disks section, view the following.
Slot
Displays the slot ID, which is the numeric identifier that represents the physical
position for each disk drive in the enclosure.
Model, Revision
Displays the manufacturer’s model number and firmware revision level for each
disk drive in the enclosure.
Serial #
Displays the manufacturer’s serial number for each disk drive in the enclosure.
Click the serial number hyperlink to access the Drive Properties page for the
selected drive.
GUID
Displays the Global Unique Identifier for a disk drive in a MediaStore. This
information is primarily used for debugging purposes.
Loop Master
(not shown for MediaStore 5000 series, MediaCenter, or MediaDeck 7000)
Displays whether a drive has been upgraded (converted) to the latest drive
technology available from Harmonic. The following text may appear in this field:
•
•
•
MSC only: Indicates the particular drive has not been upgraded. As
Spectrum Systems do not support intermixing drives with older drive
technology and the latest new technology, drives which are labeled as MSC
only should undergo the technology conversion process before being mixed
with drives which are built on newer technology (MS and MSS-4000 Series
MediaStore s).
MSC/MS/MSS: Indicates the drive has been upgraded to the newer drive
technology.
NOTE: Contact Harmonic technical support for details
on upgrading systems with existing MSC-4000 Series
MediaStores to newer disk technologies.
Status Displays the current operational status for each disk drive in the
enclosure. Click the Disk Drive icon to access the Drive Properties page
for the selected drive.
Related information
Changing the MediaStore name on page 146
Winking all drives on a MediaStore on page 146
145
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
Changing the MediaStore name
Renaming may help you more easily locate MediaStores and storage enclosures throughout the
SystemManager application.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. If there is more than one MediaDirector in your system, make a note of the MediaDirector to which the
specific MediaStore is attached. Next, click a single or dual host MediaDirector icon to display the
MediaDirector Physical Configuration page for the selected MediaDirector.
3. For the specific MediaStore that you want to change, click that MediaStore ’s picture (there may be
more than one) to display the Storage Properties page.
4. Click Change Name to display the Change MediaStore Name page.
5. Type the new name in the text box. Refer to “About Naming Files and System Elements” for naming
conventions.
6. Click Save to return to the Storage Properties page.
Related information
About naming files and system elements on page 117
Winking all drives on a MediaStore
You can wink all drives on a selected MediaStore.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. If there is more than one MediaDirector in your system, make a note of the MediaDirector to which the
specific MediaStore is attached. Next, click a single or dual host MediaDirector icon to display the
MediaDirector Physical Configuration page for the selected MediaDirector.
3. For the specific MediaStore that you want to change, click that MediaStore ’s picture (there may be
more than one) to display the Storage Properties page.
4. At the top of the page, check the Wink state for all MediaStore drives line.
5. Change the MediaStore ’s wink state (for all drives) as desired:
•
•
If currently On, click Wink Off to stop winking all drives on the MediaStore.
If currently Off, click Wink On to start winking all drives on the MediaStore.
Winking one drive on a MediaStore
You can wink a single drive on a selected MediaStore.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. If there is more than one MediaDirector in your system, make a note of the MediaDirector to which the
specific MediaStore is attached. Next, click a single or dual host MediaDirector icon to display the
MediaDirector Physical Configuration page for the selected MediaDirector.
146
Viewing drive properties
3. For the specific MediaStore whose drives you want to change, click that MediaStore ’s picture (there
may be more than one) to display the Storage Properties page.
4. Scroll down to the “Status” section and click the Serial Number Hyperlink or the Disk Drive icon for
the drive that you want to wink. The Drive Properties page appears.
5. Check the Individual Drive Wink State line.
6. Change the drive’s wink state as desired:
•
•
If currently On, click Wink Off to stop winking the individual drive.
If currently Off, click Wink On to start winking the individual drive.
NOTE: Drives that are winked will only wink for 30 seconds.
Viewing drive properties
On the Drive Properties page you can view general information about a specific drive as well as perform
drive-related tasks.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Spectrum Disk Utilities page.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server for which you want view drive properties. to clear a hot
spare. The Disk Utilities page for your Spectrum video server appears.
4. In the drive list, locate the desired disk drive and click its Disk Drive icon to display the Drive
Properties page (for the selected drive).
Drive properties
The Drive Properties page provides drive details and some administrative operations for each drive.
In the General Information section you can view the following settings.
Status
Lists the status of the drive: Alive, Dead, or Missing.
Last Message
This line displays the last error message (generated by SystemManager) that
deals with the selected drive.
Model
Lists the model number of the drive.
Manufacturer
Lists the name of the drive’s manufacturer.
Serial Number
Lists the serial number of the selected drive.
Firmware Rev. Level
Lists the firmware revision level of the selected drive. Note that drive firmware
can be updated from the application.
Disk GUID
Lists the specific GUID (Global Unique Identifier) of the selected drive.
MediaStore
Lists the MediaStore in which the selected drive is physically located. Click the
hyperlink to jump to the MediaStore’s “Properties” page.
147
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
MediaStore Slot
Number
Lists the slot number where the drive is located.
Loop Master
Displays whether a drive has been upgraded (converted) to the latest drive
technology available from Harmonic. The following text may appear in this field:
•
•
Enabled: Indicates the drive has been upgraded to the latest drive
technology.
Disabled: Indicates the particular drive has not been upgraded. As
Spectrum Systems do not support intermixing drives with older drive
technology and the latest new technology, drives which are labeled as MSC
only should undergo the technology conversion process before being mixed
with drives which are built on the new technology.
NOTE: Contact Harmonic technical support for details on
upgrading systems to the new disk technologies.
In the Disk Statistics section you can view the following.
Disk Size
Shows the disk size (in GB) of the selected drive.
Block Size
Displays the block size of the selected drive.
Blocks
Shows the number of blocks on the selected drive.
SMART Threshold
Errors
Shows the number of SMART warnings. This value is not affected by bad
block repairs or disk reformatting. If this value is greater than zero, system
management displays a Critical level alarm (red) and the drive should be
replaced as soon as possible.
Hardware Errors
Shows the number of hardware errors reported. This value is not affected
by bad block repairs or disk reformatting. If this value is greater than zero,
system management displays a Critical level alarm (red) and the drive should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Login Failures
Shows the persistent number of login failures detected. This value is not
affected by bad block repairs or disk reformatting. If this value is greater than
zero, system management displays a Failure level alarm (orange).
Bad Blocks
Shows the total number of bad blocks. This value increases whenever a new
bad block is detected and decreases when bad blocks are repaired. If this
value is greater than zero, system management displays a Failure level alarm
(orange).
Read Errors
Shows the total number of read errors that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks, but is reset by reformatting the
disk. If this value is greater than zero, system management displays a Failure
level alarm (orange).
Write Errors
Shows the total number of write errors that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks, but is reset by reformatting the
disk. If this value is greater than zero, system management displays a Failure
level alarm (orange).
Read Timeouts
Shows the total number of read timeouts that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks, but is reset by reformatting the
148
Viewing drive properties
disk. If this value is greater than zero, system management displays a Failure
level alarm (Orange).
Write Timeouts
Shows the total number of write timeouts that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks, but is reset by reformatting the
disk. If this value is greater than zero, system management displays a Failure
level alarm (orange).
Blocks Repaired
Shows the number of bad blocks that have been repaired. This number
increases when bad blocks are repaired, and is reset when the disk is
reformatted.
Aggregate Errors
Shows the number of errors represented by the current bad block list. This
number decreases if bad blocks are repaired, and is cleared if the disk is
reformatted.
SSD life expectancy
(For solid-state drives only) Displays the life expectancy of the solid-state drive
as a percentage. When the life expectancy reaches 1%, the drive should be
replaced. For replacement instructions, refer to the component replacement
guide for your device.
In the Miscellaneous section you can view the following.
Fibre Channel Loops Lists the individual Fibre Channel loops available.
RAID set
Click the RAID Set hyperlink to access the RAID Utilities page.
Position in RAID set
Lists the location of the selected drive in relation to the RAID set. If there were
eight drives in a RAID set, the first drive would be in position 0 (zero). The
positions of all drives in the RAID set are shown on the Disk Utilities page.
At the bottom of the page you can view the following buttons.
NOTE: Depending on the type of video server, some buttons may not appear.
Fail Drive
Click to fail the selected drive, and change its status to “Dead, Failed.” If you
suspect that a drive is faulty, you can fail it, remove it from the enclosure and
replace it with a new drive, whereupon “rebuild” begins automatically. When you
fail a drive, the Unfail Drive button appears. This allows you to return a failed
drive to service without performing a rebuild. The File System does not need be
stopped for either procedure.
CAUTION: Failing a drive is a drastic measure that should only
be performed by qualified service personnel. It is important to
note that sometimes you cannot unfail a failed drive.
Make Hot Spare
Click to change the status of the selected drive to “Alive, Hot Spare.” Note that
when you make a hot spare, a new Clear Hot Spare button appears.
Remove Drive
(not available for SSDs) When a drive is dead and has been removed from
the system, the drive’s information still remains on the Disk Utilities page and
in the database. Click Remove Drive to remove the drive from the associated
Spectrum video server and from both the Disk Utilities page and the database.
Note that this button only appears if the drive is dead.
NOTE: In an EFS setup, you must remove the “dead” drive from
each of the MediaDirectors in the system.
149
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
Bypass Drive
Click to bypass a disk drive before attempting to remove the drive. Once a
drive is bypassed it should then be removed promptly to maintain correct SES
functionality.
Refer to the Spectrum System Component Replacement Guide for detailed
instructions on how to safely replace a disk drive.
Wink On/Off
Click to change the wink state of the selected drive. When on, the LEDs for the
selected drive wink on the front panel of the MediaStore.
Done
Click to save any changes and return to the Disk Utilities page.
Related information
Failing a drive on page 154
About proactive drive removal
In Spectrum systems, drives which report SMART warnings, hardware errors, and some persistent login
failures are removed from the RAID set.
Note that the following conditions must exist:
•
•
•
The RAID set has a hot spare
No other drives in the RAID set have bad blocks.
The RAID set is not already compromised or in the process of rebuilding.
For additional information, see “Overview of proactive drive alarming and removal” in the Spectrum
System Installation Guide.
Viewing RAID set information
On the RAID Utilities page you can view general information about a particular RAID set and also
perform a variety of tasks including changing the RAID set’s name, adding and removing drives from the
RAID set, manually starting a “rebuild” and setting the RAID set’s channel.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers appears.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server whose RAID set information you want to view. The
Spectrum video server’s Disk Utilities page appears.
4. Click the RAID Set icon (or the RAID Set Hyperlink) for the RAID set about which you want
information.
150
Viewing RAID set information
Figure 4-2: RAID Set Icon
5. The RAID Utilities page appears.
RAID Utilities fields
The RAID Utilities page provide RAID set details and some administrative operations for each RAID set.
In the Information section you can view the following.
Name
Displays the name of the RAID set. Click to Change to rename a RAID set.
Status
Displays the current status of the selected RAID set.
Last Message
This line displays the last error message (generated by the SystemManager)
that deals with the selected RAID set.
Type
Lists whether or not the RAID set is protected or un-protected.
Channel
Lists the virtual channel that the RAID set is using.
File System
Click the File System hyperlink to access the File System Utilities page for
the selected RAID set.
Total Blocks
Lists the total number of blocks of all drives in the RAID set.
•
Rebuild Status: Displays whether or not a “rebuild” has been started.
151
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
•
•
•
•
•
Rebuild Blocks Completed: Lists the number of completed blocks in the
rebuild.
Rebuild Blocks To Do: Lists the number of blocks left to be rebuilt.
Rebuild Time Elapsed: Displays the running time of the rebuild process.
RAID set drives wink state: Click to change the wink state of all drives in
the RAID set. When on, the LEDs on each drive in the RAID set will wink.
GUID: Displays the GUID of the complete RAID set.
Drive ID List
Lists the MediaStore name in which the RAID set lives, and the position of each
drive in the MediaStore.
Drive Serial Number
Click to access the Drive Properties page for the selected drive.
NOTE: In the Actions section of the page, some of the
following buttons may not appear depending on the type of video
server.
Add/Remove Drives
Click to add or remove drives from the selected RAID set.
Set Channel
Click to access the Modify Channel page, which specifies the channel that
you wish to use for the selected RAID set. As detailed above, the channel
designation gives the MediaDirector information on how to map RAID sets to
Fibre Channel loops.
Start Rebuild
Click to manually start a “rebuild” after a drive failure has occurred, or after a
drive has been replaced.
Suspend Rebuild
Click to manually suspend a “rebuild” after the rebuild process has been started.
Continue Rebuild
Click to manually continue a “rebuild” after the rebuild process has been
suspended.
Abort Rebuild
Click to manually abort a “rebuild” after the rebuild process has been started.
Done
Click to save any changes on the RAID Utilities page and return to the Disk
Utilities page.
Related information
Renaming a RAID set on page 155
Creating a file system on page 130
About disk subsystem performance factors on page 124
Viewing general file system information
On the File System Utilities page you can view general information about a Spectrum video server’s File
System as well as perform a variety of tasks including starting and stopping the File System.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers appears.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server for which you want to view a File System. The Disk
Utilities page for that Spectrum video server is displayed.
152
Assigning a virtual channel to a RAID set
4. Click the File System Hyperlink to display the File System Utilities page.
Assigning a virtual channel to a RAID set
On the Modify Channel page you can select a virtual channel to use on a specific RAID set.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available MediaDirectors will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the MediaDirector on which you want to “unfail” a drive. The Drive Utilities page
appears.
4. Click the RAID set link to display the RAID Utilities page.
5. With the File System stopped, click the Set Channel button at the bottom of the page to display the
Modify Channel for RAID page as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-3: Modify channel for RAID
6. Under Choose a new channel, click a letter to assign a virtual channel to a physical RAID set loop,
thereby optimizing bandwidth with regard to the new RAID set in the File System. When a new RAID
set is added to a MediaStore, and a new Fibre Channel loop is also connected, the RAID set must
be assigned a different virtual channel than the original (or existing) RAID sets in order to increase
bandwidth along with the increased storage capacity.
Creating a file system
Navigating the Disk Utilities
Open the Disk Utilities page (and all associated linked pages) for a particular Spectrum video server to
view disk information.
1. Click the Configuration tab.
153
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
2. Click the Disk Utilities icon in the left-hand column to display the System Disk Utilities page. This
page provides a list of all Spectrum video servers attached to the SystemManager.
3. Click a Spectrum video server icon to show the Disk Utilities page for that Spectrum video server
alone. Note that this page applies to all hosts on a server, because disks are shared between hosts.
Figure 4-4: Disk utilities
Upgrading drive firmware
Refer to Upgrading Disk Drive Firmware in the Spectrum System Getting Started Guide for complete
instructions on upgrading the disk drive firmware.
Failing a drive
Use this procedure to remove a drive from a RAID set, when the drive is experiencing a loss of data.
This step is performed as a prerequisite to removing the drive from the chassis and then replacing it with
a new drive, at which time the RAID set “rebuild” occurs automatically (provided that the new drive is
formatted).
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to fail a drive. The Disk Utilities page
for that Spectrum video server appears.
154
Unfailing a drive
4. Click the Disk Drive icon (or the Disk Drive hyperlink) to display the Drive Properties page (for the
selected drive).
5. At the bottom of the page, click Fail Drive.
6. When the confirmation dialog appears, click OK to accept.
The drive status now appears as “Dead” on the Disk Utilities page. Continue the procedure by
replacing the drive.
Refer to the Spectrum System Component Replacement Guide for instructions.
Unfailing a drive
Use the “unfail” procedure if you accidentally fail the wrong drive.
The procedure “might” work to restore the drive to service. Perform this process only on drives that have
been manually failed. Drives that have been declared “Dead” by the Spectrum video server, however,
cannot be un-failed.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to “unfail” a drive. The Disk Utilities
page for that Spectrum video server appears.
4. Click the Disk Drive icon (or the Disk Drive Hyperlink) to display the Drive Properties page (for the
selected drive).
5. At the bottom of the page, click Unfail Drive.
On the Disk Utilities page, the drive’s status should now appear as “Alive.” If it does not (if the
status remains “Dead”), contact Harmonic technical support or replace the failed drive. Refer to the
Spectrum component replacement guide for your device for instructions.
Replacing a failed drive
In the event of a disk drive failure, replacement disk drives are available from Harmonic.
Before you attempt to remove a failed drive, refer to the Spectrum component replacement guide for your
device and follow the drive replacement instructions.
Renaming a RAID set
Use this feature to rename a RAID set.
This process makes it easier to identify a selected RAID set, especially in Harmonic systems that use
multiple MediaStores or multiple loops.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
155
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to rename a RAID set. The Disk
Utilities page for that Spectrum video server appears.
4. Click the RAID Set icon (or the RAID Set Hyperlink) to display the RAID Set Utilities page.
5. At the top of the page, click Change to display the Change RAID Set Name page.
6. Enter the new RAID set name and click Update. The system returns to the RAID Set Utilities page.
7. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page, where the new RAID set name appears.
Stopping a RAID set rebuild in progress
Use this procedure to stop a RAID set “rebuild” in progress.
Note that when the rebuild stops, the RAID set is left in a compromised state. In this state, the RAID set
can still be used, but there is no protection. If another drive is lost, your content will also be lost.
The rebuild might be manually stopped, for example, if you noted that the rebuild was occurring to
the wrong Hot Spare. More likely, you might stop the rebuild if it was taking away bandwidth from an
important on-air operation. Once stopped, the rebuild can be started again successfully.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to stop the rebuild. The Disk Utilities
page for that Spectrum video server appears.
4. Click the RAID Set icon (or the RAID Set Hyperlink) for the RAID set that is currently rebuilding. The
RAID Set Utilities page will be displayed.
5. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Abort Rebuild.
6. Verify that the Rebuild status field reads “Aborted.” Note that the button’s name changes to Start
Rebuild.
The rebuild has now been stopped, but it can be started again successfully.
Restarting a RAID set rebuild
Restarting a RAID set rebuild
Normally, the rebuilding of a RAID set occurs automatically when a drive fails and a Hot Spare is
available. The rebuild can also occur when a failed drive is replaced.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
156
Starting the file system
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to restart the RAID set “rebuild”
process. The Disk Utilities page for that Spectrum video server appears.
4. Click the RAID Set icon (or the RAID Set Hyperlink) for the RAID set that has stopped rebuilding.
The RAID Set Utilities page will be displayed.
5. Scroll to the bottom and click Start Rebuild. The status field changes to “Rebuilding.”
6. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Starting the file system
Use this procedure to start an existing File System that has been previously initialized.
NOTE: This procedure is used when starting a File System manually. Note that this
procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System feature.
The procedure is typically used after performing maintenance on the File System, or when starting a File
System in a multi-MediaDirector configuration. To start (and initialize) a File System for the first time,
immediately after the File System has been created, use the File System initialization procedure. .
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for the Spectrum video server on which you want to start a File System. The Disk
Utilities page appears.
4. Under the Logical View, click the File System hyperlink (see the following figure) to display the File
System Utilities page.
157
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
Figure 4-5: File System hyperlink
5. At the bottom of the File System Utilities page, click the Start FS button to display the Start File
System page. This button only appears when the File System is stopped.
CAUTION: Do not click “Initialize FS.” This will wipe out the entire file system.
6. Select the desired File System options: NVRAM Journaling, Read-only, Use Previous Start, and
Save Options.
NOTE: In most cases, you should not need to change the options from the default
selections.
7. Click Start to accept the selected options and start the File System. The system automatically returns
to the File System Utilities page.
8. Verify that the File System’s status has changed to Started.
9. Click Done to return to the Disk Utilities page.
Related information
Initializing a file system on page 130
158
Stopping the file system
Stopping the file system
This procedure stops the File System(s) on the selected Spectrum video server.
Follow this procedure before powering down the Spectrum video server. If this procedure is not
performed, a small amount of disk space will be lost each time the Spectrum video server is powered
down improperly. You may also use this procedure when you want to perform maintenance on the File
System, for example, to delete it or to remove a RAID set.
NOTE: This procedure is used when stopping a File System manually. Note that the
procedure is automatically performed as part of the “One-Click” File System feature.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. In the left-hand column, click the Disk Utilities icon to display the Disk Utilities page. A list of
available Spectrum video servers will be shown.
3. Click the icon for your Spectrum video server. The Disk Utilities page for that Spectrum video server
appears.
4. Click the file system hyperlink, as shown in the following figure, to display the Filesystem Utilities
page.
Figure 4-6: File System hyperlink
159
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 4: Spectrum storage and file system maintenance
5. At the bottom of the Filesystem Utilities page, click the Stop FS button. This button only appears
when the file system is started.
6. Click the Disk Utilities icon in the left-hand column and verify that the file system status for the
Spectrum video server is Stopped.
The Spectrum video server can now be powered down.
160
Chapter 5
Spectrum I/O module configuration
This chapter provides configuration and operation instructions for Spectrum I/O modules including
MediaPort s, ChannelPort s, and the Spectrum X.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
About Spectrum X configurations
Viewing a Spectrum X in shared storage mode
Viewing I/O module properties
Changing the channel mode
About Simulcast mode
Enabling OP-47 subtitle conversion
Configuring OP-47 subtitle conversion for the MediaPort 5000 series
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers
Changing the I/O module name
Changing the I/O module description
Changing the I/O module wink state
Rebooting the I/O module
Upgrading I/O module firmware
About software licensing for Spectrum X
Upgrading the MediaPort or ChannelPort license
Viewing I/O module alarms and events
Overview of configuring a MediaPort channel for Playlist Control
Spectrum X and ChannelPort system configuration overview
Determining the Spectrum X and ChannelPort port number
About recording embedded and non-embedded audio
About Spectrum X configurations
The Spectrum X can operate in either internal storage mode or shared storage mode.
In internal storage mode, the Spectrum X provides four hot-swappable drives and up to 12 TB of usable
storage. In shared storage mode, the Spectrum X can be connected to a MediaDirector 2252/2251B or a
MediaCenter 2200B.
In the System Diagram view, Spectrum X in internal storage mode appears as a typical Spectrum video
server. In the following diagram, D13_0009 is a Spectrum X in internal storage mode. Each MIP-9xxx is
an installed SD I/O card.
161
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
Figure 5-1: System diagram: internal storage mode
In Internal storage mode the Spectrum X is configured like other Spectrum video servers.
In the System Diagram view, Spectrum X in shared storage mode appears as a MediaPort attached to
a Spectrum video server. In the following diagram, D12_00308 is a MediaDirector and D13_00017 is an
attached Spectrum X in shared storage mode. Each MIP-9xxx shown in the diagram is an installed SDI I/
O card.
Figure 5-2: System diagram: shared storage mode
Viewing a Spectrum X in shared storage mode
View the details of a Spectrum X in shared storage mode.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Spectrum- System Diagram page.
2. Click the icon or text for your Spectrum X to open the Physical Chassis Properties page, as shown
in the following diagram.
Figure 5-3: Spectrum X Physical Chassis Properties
In the Connected MediaPort s section, you can view details of the installed SDI I/O cards. For each
SDI I/O card, you can click the link to view its respective properties pages. .
162
Viewing I/O module properties
The following buttons are available:
Upgrade Firmware
Click to upgrade the Spectrum X firmware. For details, see “Upgrading
Spectrum video server firmware” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
Wink on/off
Click to change the wink state of the Spectrum video server’s light bar.
Reboot
Click to reboot the Spectrum video server.
Done
Click to return to the system diagram.
In the Environment section, you can view environmental statistics for the
Spectrum X.
Related information
Spectrum server: Environment on page 64
Viewing I/O module properties
Viewing a Spectrum X in internal storage mode
View the details of a Spectrum X in internal storage mode.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Spectrum- System Diagram page.
2. Click the icon or text for your Spectrum X to open the Physical Configuration page.
3. Click the Spectrum X icon or name to display its Properties page.
Related information
Viewing Spectrum video server properties on page 52
Viewing I/O module properties
Open the I/O module properties page for your MediaPort, ChannelPort, or Spectrum X SDI I/O card to
view information such as model number, GPIO configuration, and environmental data.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the heading or icon for your I/O module to open the Properties page.
163
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
Figure 5-4: MediaPort Properties—General Information
For a Spectrum X with the 10 Gb I/O module installed, the Edit NIC Configuration section will appear
on the I/O Module Properties page. For details on configuring the 10 Gb interfaces, see Configuring
network settings for the 10 Gb I/O modules on page 83.
I/O module properties
The I/O Module Properties page provides details for your MediaPort, ChannelPort, or Spectrum X SDI
card. Note the fields will vary depending on the device type.
In the General Information section you can view the following.
Name
Displays the user-defined name given to this I/O module. By default, this field
displays the model number and serial number of the I/O module.
Slot
(for Spectrum X only) Displays the position of the I/O module in the chassis.
When facing the rear panel of the Spectrum X, slot 1 is the left-hand module
and slot 2 is the right-hand module.
Change Name
Click to rename the selected I/O module.
Status
Displays the current network status for the selected I/O module. This field is
used primarily for diagnostic troubleshooting.
Model Number
Lists the I/O module product model number.
Additional Licensed
features
Lists additional licensed features for this I/O module.
164
Viewing I/O module properties
NOTE: Spectrum licenses are installed only on the Spectrum
video server and not on the Spectrum X if it is running in shared
storage mode. For details on I/O module features and licenses,
see the “Specifications” section for the I/O module in the
Spectrum System Installation Guide.
Serial Number
Displays the I/O module serial number as set at the factory.
Boot Summary
Displays the reason why the last reboot of the I/O module occurred.
Last Reboot
Displays the date and time of the last reboot of the I/O module.
Firmware Version
Lists the current version of firmware that resides in the flash memory of the I/O
module.
Currently Selected
Firmware Version
Lists the firmware version that is selected on the Firmware Version Selection
page.
Status current at
Lists the most recent date and time that the page was refreshed. Note that the
page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds, unless configured otherwise.
I/O Module
Description
Displays a scroll-able multi-line description of the selected MediaPort. This field
is useful for entering data that clarifies the specific MediaPort ’s role in your
system.
Change Desc
Click to change the I/O module description.
Last Message
This line displays the last error message received that deals with File System
operation problems, or problems during the periodic File System check.
Wink State
Describes the wink state of the light bar, either On or Off. Refer to the Wink On/
Off description that follows for details.
Proxy Record Mode
versus Audio Scrub
Play Mode
(for the MediaPort and MediaDeck Modules 5320, 5220, and 5600 series only)
Displays either Proxy Record mode enabled or Audio Scrub mode enabled.
They cannot both be enabled at the same time. Depending on the current
mode, the button will show either Set Proxy Record Mode or Set Audio Scrub
Mode. Click the button to change the status. You must reboot in order for the
changes to take affect.
OP-47 subtitle to/
from SD
(for the MediaPort 5400, 5500 and 7000 series only):
•
•
For the MediaPort 7000, this field allows you to enable or disable, upconversion or down-conversion of subtitles to OP-47.
For the MediaPort 5400 and 5500 series, this field provides configuration
options for subtitles which use the OP-47 standard.
Simulcast or NonSimulcast Mode
(for the MediaPort 5500 series only) Displays either Simulcast mode or NonSimulcast mode enabled. Click the button to change the status.
Assignable LTC
Output
(for the MediaPort 5320 and 5220 series only) Select the channel you wish to
use for LTC output, Channel A, Channel B, or Loop Through.
Channel
Configuration
(for Spectrum X and ChannelPort) Depending on your I/O module and installed
licenses, the following check boxes may be available.
IMPORTANT: If you change the channel configuration, you
must restart the Spectrum X or ChannelPort for the changes to
165
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
take effect. Note that when switching to UHD mode (Ultra), the
restart may take up to 15 minutes due to the system changes.
•
•
•
Standard: (default) Select to enable Standard Channel mode.
Enhanced: Select to enable Enhanced Channel mode.
Ultra: Select to enable UHD mode.
NOTE: When the Spectrum X is in UHD mode, the Configure
Channel B button will be disabled. This is because both SDI I/O
cards are used for one channel of UHD.
IP Transport Protocol (For Spectrum X) Select to enable SMPTE-2022-6.
NOTE: Enabling or disabling SMPTE 2022-6 requires a restart
of the Spectrum X. Note that SMPTE 2022-6 options on the
Master Control Switcher section of the Channel Properties page
are only available when SMPTE 2022-6 is enabled.
Soft Video Filter
(For Spectrum X) Select to apply a soft video filter to all players attached to the
I/O module.
Wink On/Off
(button) Click to change the wink state of the light bar.
Reboot
(button) Click to reboot the device. This function is typically performed after
loading new firmware. .
Configure Channel A (button) Click to configure Channel A of the I/O module.
Configure Channel B (button) Click to configure Channel B of the I/O module.
Upgrade Firmware
(button) click to upgrade the I/O module firmware.
Upgrade License
(button, if available) click to upgrade the I/O module license.
Related information
About recording proxies with the MediaPort 5000 series on page 270
Configuring audio scrub on page 276
Enabling OP-47 subtitle conversion on page 170
Configuring OP-47 subtitle conversion for the MediaPort 5000 series on page 171
About Simulcast mode on page 170
Changing the I/O module wink state on page 174
Rebooting the I/O module on page 174
Spectrum I/O channel configuration on page 181
Upgrading I/O module firmware on page 175
Upgrading the MediaPort or ChannelPort license on page 175
Enabling Enhanced Channel mode
Changing the I/O module name on page 173
Changing the I/O module description on page 174
About GPIO Configuration
The GPIO connector on the MediaPort 7000 series can be configured to provide player control. For
ChannelPort, or Spectrum X, GPIO can be configured to provide control for players, graphics, or an
Emergency Alert System (EAS). In order to use GPIO to control players, you must first configure the
166
Viewing I/O module properties
GPIO settings on the I/O Module Properties page to create GPIO triggers, and then configure the GPIO
settings for the attached players on their respective Player Properties pages to map the GPIO triggers to
each player.
For ChannelPort or Spectrum X, you can map the triggers to a graphics template or EAS system by using
the Channel Properties page.
For detailed instructions on configuring GPIO, refer to “Overview of configuring GPIO triggers.”
Figure 5-5: GPIO Configuration
Related information
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers on page 172
Spectrum I/O channel configuration on page 181
Configuring GPIO settings for players on page 298
I/O module environment properties
The Environment section of the Properties page provides environmental details.
NOTE: The fields in the Environment section will vary depending on the I/O module you
are viewing.
Figure 5-6: Environment
For MediaPort modules installed on a MediaDeck 7000, refer to the Environment section of
the MediaDeck Properties page for information on power supplies and fans.
167
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
Power Supplies
Shows the status of the I/O module’s power supplies. This
information is used primarily for diagnostic troubleshooting. The
number of power supplies varies with I/O modules.
Voltage Levels
Lists the current voltages of the power supplies and other
components. This information is used primarily for diagnostic
troubleshooting. The valid ranges are also displayed. Note that
these ranges are not configurable.
Temperatures
Displays the current temperature (in Centigrade) of this I/
O module. This information is used primarily for diagnostic
troubleshooting. The valid ranges are also displayed. Note that
these ranges are not configurable.
Fans
Displays the speed (in RPM) of all fans in this I/O module. This
information is used primarily for diagnostic troubleshooting. The
valid ranges are also displayed. Note that these ranges are not
configurable.
•
Other Counts
◦
◦
◦
Cache Parity Errors: (MediaPorts only) This field appears
if any cache parity error has occurred on this MediaPort.
The value shown in this field indicates the number of cache
parity errors that have occurred on this MediaPort.
Reference: This field indicates whether reference for this I/
O module is Locked, Unlocked, or Unknown.
Recording input check (chan A) or (chan B)
(MediaPorts only) This field appears if any black frames
are present in the video being recorded by this MediaPort
channel, and indicates the number of black frames that are
recorded.
Changing the channel mode
For a Spectrum X or ChannelPort I/O module, to take advantage of an Enhanced Channel or UHD
license, you must first change the channel configuration or "mode" for your I/O module.
If you have a purchased a license for Enhanced Channel or one for UHD, Channel Configuration
options will be available on the I/O Module Properties page.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Under General Information, in the Channel Configuration field, select the check box for the
channel configuration or "mode" you want to apply.
3. Read the confirmation message that appears. Note any channel or player settings that you may want
to record if you are restarting your system. Click OK.
NOTE: Enabling or disabling the Ultra channel configuration requires a restart of the
Spectrum X. Due to the system changes, the restart may take up to 15 minutes. In
addition, changing the channel configuration may require that you change EAS, Mixer
Transitions, and other graphics settings for the channel.
168
Changing the channel mode
NOTE: Enabling or disabling the Enhanced channel configuration requires a restart
of the I/O module. Once the I/O module has restarted, some options on the Channel
Properties page, including Mixer Transitions and the Master Control Switcher
Configuration options, will change.
4. If necessary, restart the I/O module by clicking Reboot.
Related information
I/O configurations on page 184
About Enhanced Channel mode
Enhanced Channel is a licensed option for Spectrum X and ChannelPort that combines resources from
both channels of an I/O module into a single channel with additional capabilities.
These include:
•
•
•
•
External key/fill support (available when inputs are not in use for live video). The input format must
match the video format of the primary output and must be referenced aligned.
Two live SDI inputs (available when SDI inputs are not being used for external key/fill). Each live SDI
input must match the video format of the Primary SDI output and must be reference-aligned.
Two DVE engines on a single channel.
Two clip players for a single channel.
These additional features allow you to:
•
•
•
Mix video from any combination of two clip players or two live SDI input sources.
Use two DVE engines on a single channel, allowing squeeze-backs between player/SDI input
combinations.
Use an external device to generate key/fill graphics, and overlay that onto the output video of the
Spectrum I/O module along with graphics generated by the Spectrum I/O module.
Note that when the I/O module is in Enhanced Channel mode, the functionality of some connectors will
change based on your I/O or Connector Configuration selection when configuring the channel properties.
About UHD Channel mode
With Spectrum 8.3 and later, Spectrum X supports UHD playout and record for AVC-Intra players with the
MXF OP1a wrapper.
Note that both SDI cards on the Spectrum X are used to play one channel of UHD.
UHD playout includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Agile timeline file playback: Spectrum supports a mixed timeline, which can include UHD, HD, and 3G
HD video formats.
Simulcast out: UHD down-convert with Independent Branding, Clean, or Mirrored for secondary
output.
Dual live inputs with auto up-convert: Unlike the standard or enhanced channel modes, with UHD
channel, you can have two Spectrum X inputs with different video formats, and Spectrum will
automatically up-convert to play out UHD.
Support for branding with multiple layers, animation, DVE, and dynamic data.
Support for Polaris Play: Playlist Control automation.
169
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
In order to configure a UHD player, the Channel Configuration or "mode" for the I/O module must be set
to "Ultra."
NOTE: Changing the Spectrum X channel configuration requires a restart. Due to the
system changes, the restart may take up to 15 minutes. In addition, changing the channel
configuration may require that you reset EAS and graphics configurations for the channel.
Once UHD is enabled on the Spectrum X, you can configure an AVC-Intra player for UHD. Refer to
"Creating an AVC-Intra UHD player" for details.
Related information
Creating an AVC-Intra UHD player on page 255
About Simulcast mode
The MediaPort 7000 series is able to play out in simulcast mode, which means it can up-convert and
down-convert any mix of SD and HD material to play out simultaneous SD and HD content on a single
channel.
In simulcast mode, SD video is up-converted to HD SDI video and HD SDI video is down-converted to SD
video.
The MediaPort 7000 series operates in both simulcast mode and non-simulcast mode.
NOTE: When operating in on a In simulcast mode, the number of playout channels on a
MediaPort 7000 is reduced from four to two.
In non-simulcast mode, the MediaPort up-converts or down-converts but does not play out simultaneous
SD and HD content on a single channel.
Enabling OP-47 subtitle conversion
Up converting or down converting subtitles or teletext that use the OP-47 standard is a MediaPort-wide
setting, which affects all players attached to that MediaPort.
Note the following points regarding subtitle conversion:
•
•
The subtitle conversion setting only applies to players with the PAL type of frame rate (for example, 25
Hz or 50 Hz).
Because the subtitle conversion setting is MediaPort-wide, once it is configured, it will affect all active
players attached to that MediaPort.
To enable OP-47 subtitle conversion, From the I/O Module Properties page, in the OP-47 subtitle
to/from SD drop-down menu, select Enable.
If you select Disable, Spectrum will not convert OP-47 packets regardless of how your player is
configured.
Related information
Configuring subtitle insertion on page 261
170
Configuring OP-47 subtitle conversion for the MediaPort 5000 series
Configuring OP-47 subtitle conversion for the MediaPort 5000
series
Up converting or down converting subtitles or teletext that use the OP-47 standard is a MediaPort-wide
setting, which affects all players attached to that MediaPort.
Note the following points regarding subtitle conversion:
•
•
•
Of the MediaPort 5000 series, subtitle conversion is only available on the MediaPort 5400 and 5500,
which are licensed for up or down conversion.
The subtitle conversion setting only applies to players with the PAL type of frame rate (for example, 25
Hz or 50 Hz). However, it does apply to all video formats.
Because the subtitle conversion setting is MediaPort-wide, once it is configured, it will affect all active
players attached to that MediaPort.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the icon for the MediaPort that you want to configure. Its Properties page appears.
3. In the OP-47 subtitle to/from SD drop down menu, select from the following:
◦
Default. If selected, Spectrum will up convert the SD version of the subtitles. Any OP-47 packets
in HD clips are down-converted to SD on the lines specified in the packets.
NOTE: If using the MediaPort/MediaDeck Module 5500 series, and your video
source is IMX, the subtitles or teletext must be present on VBI line 21 in order for the
conversion to work. If Default is selected, the Always output OP47 Packets check
box appears and is unchecked by default. Note the following:
If Always output OP-47 Packets is left unchecked, Spectrum will only output
OP-47 packets on fields where subtitles are present in the SD clip.
◦ If Always output OP-47 Packets is checked, Spectrum will output OP-47
packets regardless of whether subtitles are present in the SD clip. If there are no
SD subtitles, Spectrum will output empty OP-47 packets.
Disable. If selected, Spectrum will not convert OP-47 packets.
SD Subtitle line. If selected, you will be able to select from a drop-down menu which VBI line
(from 7-23) Spectrum will use to convert OP-47 packets.
◦
◦
◦
NOTE: If using the MediaPort/MediaDeck Module 5500 series MediaPort or
MediaDeck Module, and your video source is IMX, the subtitles or teletext must
be present on VBI line 21 in order for the conversion to work. If SD Subtitle line is
selected, the Always output OP-47 Packets check box appears and is unchecked
by default. Note the following:
◦
◦
If Always output OP-47 Packets is left unchecked, Spectrum will only output
OP-47 packets on fields where subtitles are present in the SD clip.
If Always output OP-47 Packets is checked, Spectrum will output OP-47
packets regardless of whether subtitles are present in the SD clip. If there are no
SD subtitles, Spectrum will output empty OP-47 packets.
Once the MediaPort has been configured and you have attached a player with a PAL type of frame
rate (25 or 50 Hz), the player properties page will display a field indicating that subtitle conversion is
configured, and showing which VBI line has been selected. See the following figure.
171
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
Figure 5-7: Configuring subtitle conversion—Player Properties page
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers
Spectrum I/O modules provide a GPIO connector, which allows you to use an external device to control
players, graphics, or an EAS.
In order to use GPIO to control players, first follow the procedure to create GPIO triggers, and then do
one of the following:
•
•
•
Map GPIO triggers to player functionality. Configure the GPIO settings for the attached players from
their respective Player Properties pages.
Map GPIO triggers to defined events or an EAS. Configure the GPIO settings on the Channel
Properties page for your Spectrum X or ChannelPort.
Map GPIO triggers to Playlist operations using Polaris Play: Playlist Control. Configure the Channel
Control settings on the Playout Channel properties page.
Related information
Configuring GPIO settings for players on page 298
Spectrum I/O channel configuration on page 181
Configuring a playout channel on page 318
Creating GPIO triggers
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the icon for the I/O module that you want to configure. Its Properties page appears.
3. Click the Edit GPIO Configuration check box to enable the GPIO Configuration section.
Figure 5-8: Configuring GPIO from the Properties page
4. In the GPIO Configuration section, the GPIO column indicates which GPI lines are configurable.
For a description of where these pins are physically located on the connector, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide for your I/O module. Identify which GPI line you wish to configure.
172
Changing the I/O module name
5. In the Input/Output column, select Input or Output depending on how the GPI line will be used. If
◦
◦
Input: If selected, a signal from the control device will generate the trigger.
Output: If selected, the player activity configured on the Change GPI Player Configuration page
for the attached player will drive the signal.
6. In the Active State column, select Open or Closed to associate GPI line behavior with the active
signal state. For outputs, this controls an internal switch to ground. For inputs, this senses the state of
an external switch to ground.
•
•
Open: Active signal state = open switch
Closed: Active signal state = closed switch
7. In the Trigger On column select one of the following:
◦
◦
◦
◦
None: If selected, incoming signal changes do not affect the trigger. If you are configuring the GPI
line for Output, select this option.
Activating: If selected, when the signal transitions to an active state, it generates the trigger.
Select this state or Deactivating if you have configured the GPI line for Input and are configuring
the trigger to perform one of the following: “Play Pause/Continue,” “Record Start/Stop,” or “Play
Take Next.”
Deactivating: If selected, when the signal transitions to an inactive state, it generates the trigger.
Select this state or Activating if you have configured the GPI line for Input and are configuring the
trigger to perform one of the following: “Play Pause/Continue,” “Record Start/Stop,” or “Play Take
Next.”
Active: If selected, the trigger is generated and remains valid while the signal is in the active state.
Select this option if you have configured the GPI line for Input and are configuring the trigger to
perform a “Crash Record.” Otherwise, the crash record will not work properly.
8. In the Name column, a default GPIO trigger name is provided. If you wish to change this name, type a
new GPIO trigger name in the field.
IMPORTANT: GPIO trigger names are global across a Spectrum video server.
Therefore, Harmonic highly recommends that you use unique names for all triggers on
all I/O modules connected to a single video server.
9. Repeat steps four through nine for any additional GPI lines you wish to add.
10. Click Apply to save your changes.
11. To configure GPIO triggers for player control, you must configure the GPIO settings for the attached
players from their respective Player Properties pages.
Related information
Configuring GPIO settings for players on page 298
Changing the I/O module name
Renaming may help you locate I/O modules throughout the SystemManager application.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the icon for the I/O module that you want to rename. Its Properties page appears.
3. Click Change Name to display the Change I/O module name page.
173
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
4. Type the new name in the text box. Refer to “About Naming Files and System Elements” for proper
naming conventions.
5. Click Save to return to the I/O Module Properties page.
The new name now appears in the System diagram, in various page titles and in other I/O modulerelated fields throughout the application.
Related information
About naming files and system elements on page 117
Changing the I/O module description
The I/O module description is useful in clarifying a particular I/O module’s role in your Spectrum System.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the icon for the I/O module whose description you want to change. Its Properties page appears.
3. Click Change Desc to display the Change I/O Module Description page.
4. Type the new description in the text box.
5. Click Save to save the description and return to the Properties page. The new description appears in
the I/O Module Description field.
Changing the I/O module wink state
Change the wink state for the light bar associated with the I/O module.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the icon for the I/O module whose wink state you want to change. Its Properties page appears.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the page, and check the Wink State line.
4. Change the I/O module’s wink state, as desired:
•
•
If currently On, click Wink Off to stop winking the I/O module’s blue light bar.
If currently Off, click Wink On to start winking the I/O module’s blue light bar.
Rebooting the I/O module
Located on the Properties page, the reboot function is a local function that is not associated with the
firmware upgrade process. Reboot the I/O module when it is experiencing problems, or if you do not want
to reboot the I/O module immediately after a firmware upgrade.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the icon for the I/O module that you want to reboot. Its Properties page appears.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Reboot.
174
Upgrading I/O module firmware
4. When the Confirmation dialog appears, click OK. The I/O module’s status changes to “Rebooting,”
then “Not Connected,” then “Configuring,” and finally to “Connected.” The complete process takes
approximately two minutes.
You can also reboot one or more I/O modules on the Upgrade Firmware page. Refer to “Upgrading
Spectrum Firmware” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
Upgrading I/O module firmware
Refer to “Upgrading Spectrum Firmware” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide for firmware upgrade
instructions.
About software licensing for Spectrum X
In Spectrum 8.0 and later, software licenses are installed only on the Spectrum video servers.
This means if you are operating Spectrum X in internal storage configuration, the licenses are installed
directly on the Spectrum X. However, if you are operating it in a shared storage configuration, licenses
are not installed on the Spectrum X. If your system includes MediaPort or ChannelPort s, licenses will
continue to be installed directly on those devices.
Upgrading the MediaPort or ChannelPort license
Upgrade the license for your MediaPort or ChannelPort.
Every Spectrum MediaPort or ChannelPort includes a license file. For some, upgrading the license file
also changes the model number and enables additional features and functionality. Note that the three
letter-identifier changes (for example, 7100-DVS may be upgraded to 7100-DVH). If you have purchased
a new license file from Harmonic, you may upgrade your license using SystemManager.
1. Locate the license file provided to you by Harmonic. Note that the file name will have the MediaPort
or ChannelPort serial number embedded in it. For example, the license file name for a MediaPort with
serial number D25 could be t4_520x_D25.hex.
2. Copy the license file to the SystemManager hard drive under <install drive>:\Licenses.
NOTE: The drive letter for <install drive> depends on which drive was selected when
installing SystemManager.
3. From the Configuration tab in SystemManager, navigate to the Properties page for the MediaPort
or ChannelPort that you wish to upgrade. Once the new license file is found, an Upgrade License
button will appear, as shown in the following image.
175
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
4. Click Upgrade License.
5. Reboot the MediaPort or ChannelPort.
NOTE: After restarting, either the three-letter identifier at the end of the model number
will change or new identifiers will appear in the Additional Features field. For example,
a CPT-8100-DMH may be upgraded to CPT-8100-DMH-VC3P.
Viewing I/O module alarms and events
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click any I/O module heading (or icon) to reach the I/O Module Properties page.
3. Scroll down to the bottom of the page to view any alarms or events associated with the selected I/O
module as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-9: Alarms and Events
176
Overview of configuring a MediaPort channel for Playlist Control
Overview of configuring a MediaPort channel for Playlist Control
Review the configuration overview before configuring a MediaPort channel for Playlist Control.
1. In SystemManager, create the player you wish to use for Playlist Control and configure it to use
“Harmonic Playout” for Control.
2. In SystemManager, attach the player to the MediaPort and then activate it.
3. In SystemManager, enable the Traffic and Billing service for the corresponding video server.
4. In SystemManager, configure the Playout Channel for the corresponding video server for Playlist
Control by selecting “Playout” for the Channel Type on the Playout Channel Properties page.
Configure other Playout Channel settings as needed.
5. If you are using the Media Fetch service, enable Media Fetch on the Playout Channel Properties page
and then configure the Media Fetch settings.
6. Refer to the Polaris Play: Playlist User Guide for information about creating and monitoring playlists
with Polaris Play: Scheduler and Polaris Play: Playlist.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Changing the player state on page 294
Enabling and configuring global Traffic and Billing Settings on page 335
Configuring a playout channel on page 318
Media Fetch configuration overview on page 331
Spectrum X and ChannelPort system configuration overview
If you are using the branding and graphics features of the Spectrum X or ChannelPort, configure your
system in the order described in this section.
1. System: If you wish to enable Enhanced Channel mode on your Spectrum X or ChannelPort, do so
before configuring your channels. Otherwise, it will operate in Standard Channel mode. See “Enabling
Enhanced Channel Mode.” in the SystemManager User Guide.
2. Channel: Configure the basic parameters for your Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel, including
master control switcher settings, audio profiles, independent branding, or serial port settings required
for automation. See “Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort Channel” and “Configuring an Audio
Profile” in the SystemManager User Guide for more information.
3. Player: See “Player Configuration” in the SystemManager User Guide for help with configuring a
player. Note that if you wish to use Playlist Control for player control, configure your player to use
“Harmonic Playout” for control.
4. Graphics: Make sure your graphic templates follow Harmonic guidelines so they can be played on
the Spectrum X or ChannelPort. Configure FXTool if you plan to use it. See the Spectrum X and
ChannelPort Template Authoring Guide.
5. Playlist Control: Configure any Polaris Play: Playlist Control features and tools that you wish to use.
For help with configuring the Playout Channel, Traffic and Billing, or Polaris Play: Media Fetch, see
“Video Server Services Configuration” in the Harmonic SystemManager User Guide. For information
on creating and monitoring playlists with Polaris Play: Scheduler and Polaris Play: Playlist Control,
177
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
see the Polaris Play: Playlist User Guide. For information on configuring PreviewTool, refer to the
Spectrum Tools User Guide.
6. GPIO: If using GPIO, configure the Spectrum X or ChannelPort GPIO triggers and then map them
to channel events or Playout Channel events. See the “Configuring GPIO Triggers” section for the
Spectrum X or ChannelPort in the SystemManager User Guide.
7. EAS: If using an EAS, make sure the Spectrum X or ChannelPort is connected to the EAS as
described in the installation instructions, and then configure the EAS settings. See “Configuring a
Spectrum X or ChannelPort Channel” in the SystemManager User Guide.
Related information
Enabling Enhanced Channel mode
Spectrum I/O channel configuration on page 181
Player configuration on page 223
Playout channel configuration on page 317
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers on page 172
Determining the Spectrum X and ChannelPort port number
If you are using a Spectrum X or ChannelPort to preview graphics with FXTool or using it with an
automation system, you will need to identify the port number for theSpectrum X or ChannelPort channel
you wish to use.
Note that FXTool and most automation systems use different protocols—FXTool uses “Network
Automation” and most automation systems use “Serial Automation.” However, automation that uses Oxtel
over Ethernet is considered "Network Automation."
When a ChannelPort module is installed in a MediaDeck 7000, the module on the left (when facing the
rear panel) is com0, and the module on the right is com1. In a Spectrum X, the left-hand SDI I/O card is
com0 and right-hand SDI I/O card is com1. If only one SDI I/O card is installed, that card is always com 0.
For a Spectrum X in shared storage mode, navigate to the Properties page for your video server in
SystemManager, and then scroll down to the Private Ethernet Interfaces section to view the “com” label
for the associated Ethernet port.
Each Spectrum X SDI I/O card and each ChannelPort module supports two channels (A and B). Once
you know the module or SDI I/O card and channel you will be using for FXTool or automation, you may
use the following table to identify the correct port number to use.
Table 5-1: Port numbers
Spectrum X or
Spectrum X or
Port number for
ChannelPort Module ChannelPort channel network automation
IP
(FXTool)
Port number for
serial automation
com 0
A
9100
9000
com 0
B
9101
9001
com 1
A
9102
9002
com 1
B
9103
9003
com 2
A
9104
9104
178
Determining the Spectrum X and ChannelPort port number
Spectrum X or
Spectrum X or
Port number for
ChannelPort Module ChannelPort channel network automation
IP
(FXTool)
Port number for
serial automation
com 2
B
9105
9105
com 3
A
9106
9106
com 3
B
9107
9107
com 4
A
9108
9108
com 4
B
9109
9109
com 5
A
9110
9110
com 5
B
9111
9111
com 6
A
9112
9112
com 6
B
9113
9113
com 7
A
9114
9114
com 7
B
9115
9115
com 8
A
9116
9116
com 8
B
9117
9117
com 9
A
9118
9118
com 9
B
9119
9119
com 10
A
9120
9120
com 10
B
9121
9121
com 11
A
9122
9122
com 11
B
9123
9123
com 12
A
9124
9124
com 12
B
9125
9125
com 13
A
9126
9126
com 13
B
9127
9127
com 14
A
9128
9128
com 14
B
9129
9129
com 15
A
9130
9130
com 15
B
9131
9131
179
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 5: Spectrum I/O module configuration
About recording embedded and non-embedded audio
SDI embedded audio functions (per SMPTE 272M) on Spectrum I/O modules eliminate the need for
external embedders and de-embedders.
NOTE: Audio is interleaved in a DV frame when recording in SD and not when recording in
HD.
MediaPorts and Spectrum X can play back embedded audio in SDI format. By default, embedded audio is
turned on for all AES outputs. Full system audio storage options are available as follows.
TIP: In the following discussions and diagrams, DV refers to DV (25 Mbps), DVCPRO (25
Mbps), DVCPRO 50, or DVCPRO HD formats.
Example: Recording SDI with embedded audio as DV with separate AES/EBU audio
In the following figure, SDI with embedded audio is the MediaPort ’s input. DV with both interleaved audio
and separate AES/EBU audio is recorded. Two files are recorded on the MediaStore:.dv and .aiff.
To accomplish this, create a Player with one DV track and one AES/EBU track on the Edit Player page.
To use SDI with embedded audio on the input stream, select Embedded or Limited Embedded on the
Attach Devices page.
Example: Recording SDI with separate AES/EBU Audio as DV with separate AES/EBU audio
In the following figure, both SDI and separate AES/EBU audio are the MediaPort ’s inputs. DV with
both interleaved audio and separate AES/EBU audio is recorded. Two files are recorded on the
MediaStore: .dv and .aiff.
To accomplish this, create a Player with one DV track and one AES/EBU 8 Channel track on the Edit
Player page. To use separate audio on the input, select Non Embedded on the Attach Devices page.
180
Chapter 6
Spectrum I/O channel configuration
This chapter provides configuration instructions for configuring a channel for a Spectrum X SDI I/O card
or ChannelPort module in a Spectrum system.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Renaming the graphics directory folder
Enabling and configuring Independent Branding
Configuring audio profiles
Configuring audio watermarking
Configuring Dolby® E encode
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Configure a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel.
IMPORTANT: In order to apply any channel changes to an active player, you must first
deactivate and then re-activate the player.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the link or icon for your Spectrum X or ChannelPort to open its Properties page.
3. Click the Configure Channel A or Configure Channel B button to open the properties page for that
channel.
4. Configure the settings in each section in order.
5. Click Apply to apply the channel settings.
To revert to default settings, click Cancel.
Related information
Master Control Switcher Configuration on page 182
Effect Configuration on page 187
Event Configuration on page 192
EAS Configuration on page 197
181
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Master Control Switcher Configuration
In the Master Control Switcher Configuration section, you can configure settings for secondary video and
audio, audio profiles, and depending on your Spectrum X or ChannelPort model and its I/O configuration.
182
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Figure 6-1: Master Control Switcher Configuration
Master Control Switcher Configuration options include the following:
Enable audio with
secondary video
When selected, any audio present in a loaded template (such as a .flv or .mp4
file) will be mixed in with the output audio.
NOTE: Harmonic recommends that you only enable this setting
if you explicitly intend to play audio with your secondary event
video.
Secondary Output
Mode
This option determines how the secondary output on your Spectrum X or
ChannelPort will behave. Select from the following modes:
•
•
•
I/O Configuration
Clean: If selected, the secondary output will play out clean without branding
or any other modifications.
Independent Branding: If selected, the secondary output will play out
independent branding graphics as configured in the Effects section.
Mirror: If selected, the secondary output will mirror the primary output.
Select the desired configuration for the I/O module connectors.
IMPORTANT:
For Spectrum X or ChannelPort in Standard or Enhanced
Channel mode, when playing live output, the format of the
External Input must match the video format of the Primary
Output and must be referenced aligned.
183
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
For Spectrum X in UHD mode, the format of the External Inputs
do not need to match the Primary Output format. However, the
External SDI input must be referenced aligned.
For details on configuring SMPTE 2022-6 settings, see Configuring SMPTE 2022-6 on page 83
For details on configuring Audio Processing Settings, see Configuring a Spectrum X channel for audio
watermarking on page 218 or Configuring Dolby® E encode on page 220.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
I/O configurations
Find the configurations for Spectrum I/O connectors.
NOTE: In the following tables, "Clean Primary/Secondary" refers to video output with no
graphics or overlays.
Table 6-1: Standard Channel configuration 1 (SC1)
Connector
Description
Connector
Description
I/O 1
Ext In 1 (Channel A)
I/O 5
Ext In 1 (Channel B)
I/O 2
Out, Primary (Channel A)
I/O 6
Out, Primary (Channel B)
I/O 3
Out, Secondary (Channel A)
I/O 7
Out, Secondary (Channel B)
I/O 4
Out, Primary (Channel A)
I/O 8
Out, Primary (Channel B)
Table 6-2: Standard Channel configuration 2 (SC2)
Connector
Description
Connector
Channel B
I/O 1
Ext In 1 (Channel A)
I/O 5
Ext In 1 (Channel B)
I/O 2
Ext In 2 (Channel A)
I/O 6
Ext In 2 (Channel B)
I/O 3
Out, Secondary (Channel A)
I/O 7
Out, Secondary (Channel B)
I/O 4
Out, Primary (Channel A)
I/O 8
Out, Primary (Channel B)
Table 6-3: Enhanced Channel configuration 1 (EC1)
Connector
Description
Connector
Description
I/O 1
Ext In 1/Key 1
I/O 5
Ext In 4/Key 2
I/O 2
Ext In 2/Fill 1
I/O 6
Ext In 5/Fill 2
I/O 3
Out, Secondary
I/O 7
Ext In 6
I/O 4
Out, Primary
I/O 8
Out, Clean Primary
184
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Table 6-4: Enhanced Channel configuration 2 (EC2)
Connector
Description
Connector
Description
I/O 1
Ext In 1/Key 1
I/O 5
Ext In 4/Key 2
I/O 2
Ext In 2/Fill 1
I/O 6
Ext In 5/Fill 2
I/O 3
Out, Secondary
I/O 7
Out, Clean Secondary
I/O 4
Out, Primary
I/O 8
Out, Clean Primary
Table 6-5: Enhanced Channel configuration 3 (EC3)
Connector
Description
Connector
Description
I/O 1
Ext In 1/Key 1
I/O 5
Ext In 4/Key 2
I/O 2
Ext In 2/Fill 1
I/O 6
Ext In 5/Fill 2
I/O 3
Ext In 3
I/O 7
Ext In 6
I/O 4
Out, Primary
I/O 8
Out, Secondary
UHD configuration
NOTE: In UHD mode, both SDI cards on the Spectrum X are used for one channel of
UHD. SDI card 1 refers to the card on the left-hand side when facing the rear panel. SDI
card 2 refers to the card on the right-hand side when facing the rear panel.
Table 6-6: UHD configuration (UC1)
Connector,
SDI card 1
Description
Connector,
SDI card 2
Description
I/O 1
External input 1
I/O 1
External input 2
I/O 2
External input 1
I/O 2
External input 2
I/O 3
Out, Primary
I/O 3
Out, Secondary
I/O 4
Out, Primary
I/O 4
Out, Secondary
I/O 5
External input 1
I/O 5
External input 2
I/O 6
External input 1
I/O 6
External input 2
I/O 7
Out, Primary
I/O 7
Out, Secondary
I/O 8
Out, Primary
I/O 8
Out, Secondary
Monitor Out
The Monitor Out feature allows you to display active player and mixer information for your channel
superimposed over your primary output while playing a clean output to air over the secondary output.
Monitor Out information can include details such as mixer state, player state, clip name (for loaded and
cued clips), time until next clip, player name, looping state, transport status (PLAY, REW, FF, PAUS,
IDLE), and timecode.
185
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
The Monitor Out information displayed over your primary output is configured in your Monitor Out
graphics template. Before configuring SystemManager or , first create your own custom Monitor Out
template and save it to your graphics directory (/fs0/gfx.dir). To create and configure your template, see
“Creating a Monitor Out Template” in the Spectrum Template User Guide .
Once your Monitor Out template is saved to the graphics directory, make sure that the Secondary Output
Mode for your channel is set to Clean. This way, the secondary output will display a clean output that can
be played to air.
Enable
Click to enable Monitor Out.
Monitor Template
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for Monitor Out.
Layer
Select a graphics layer between 1 and 8.
Audio Profile Group
The options in this section allow you to apply an Audio Profile Group to this channel. Once you have
applied an Audio Profile Group, you can map the channel sources to individual Audio Profiles using the
menus in the Audio Profile Mapping section.
Show Audio
Configuration
Click to open any Audio Profile Group that is applied to this channel. If no group
is applied, a default Audio Profile Group will appear.
Change Audio Profile Click to open the Select Audio Profile Group menu. From this drop-down
Group
menu, select an Audio Profile Group that you wish to apply to this channel.
IMPORTANT: If you modify an Audio Profile Group after it has
been applied to a channel, you must re-apply that group for the
changes to take effect.
View All Audio
Profile Groups
Click to open the Audio Profile Group page for the attached video server.
Audio Profile Mapping
Use this section to map Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel sources to audio profiles from the selected
Audio Profile Group.
For each source, you may select an Audio Profile from the drop-down menu. If the default 0 is selected,
no profile will be applied.
IMPORTANT: When mapping audio profiles, be aware that Spectrum supports a total of
four Dolby® E decodes per ChannelPort or Spectrum X. Applying more than four decodes
to your channel sources will result in all Dolby E decodes failing.
Graphics and MCS
For Spectrum X, if you have purchased licenses for four or eight graphics layers, MCS, DVE, and/or
2022-6, you can enable or disable those features.
IMPORTANT: If you apply licensed feature changes to a channel (including graphics
layer count, MCS, DVE, or 2022-6) with an active player attached to it, if the player is also
connected to tools such as FXTool, PreviewTool, Playlist, or Scheduler, those tools will not
reflect the new channel state until the player is deactivated and then activated again. For
details on changing the player state, see “Changing the player state.”
186
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Graphics Layer
Count
Select the number of graphics layers that will be available for this channel.
Enable MCS
Select to enable master control switching for this channel.
Enable DVE
Select to enable branding with DVE for this channel.
Enable SMPTE
2022-6
Select to enable 2022-6 for this chanel.
Related information
Changing the player state on page 294
Effect Configuration
If you are using an automation system that connects to the Spectrum X or ChannelPort via serial port,
configure the settings in the Effect Configuration section.
Figure 6-2: Effect Configuration
187
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Primary Effects:
Folder
This field shows the location of the graphics directory on your video server
file system. If you have named the graphics directory on your video server file
system something other than /fs0/gfx.dir, you must enter the new name in the
Primary Effects Folder field.
Effect Organization
The options in this section will only be activated if you have selected Secondary Output Mode
Independent Branding in the Master Control Switcher Configuration section of the page.
Organize
Independent
Branding Effects by
Select Folder or Extension to determine how Spectrum will look for graphics
on the video server file system.
Primary Effects:
Folder
This field shows the location of the graphics directory on your video server file
system. To modify, edit the Primary Effect field shown above.
Primary Effects:
Extension
This field is used to configure graphics for Independent Branding by Extension.
If you have selected “Organize Independent Branding Effects by Extension” and
have named your SD and HD graphics with separate extensions, make sure
to enter the name of your HD extensions in the Extension column for Primary
Effects.
Primary Effects:
Independent
Branding Effects
Required
Select if primary/HD graphics are required.
Secondary Effects:
Folder
This field is used to configure graphics for Independent Branding by Folder. If
you have selected “Organize Independent Branding Effects by Folder” and have
created a sub-folder for your SD graphics, make sure to enter the name of the
SD sub-folder in the Folder column for Secondary Effects.
Secondary Effects:
Extension
This field is used to configure graphics for Independent Branding by Extension.
If you have selected “Organize Independent Branding Effects by Extension” and
have named your SD and HD graphics with separate extensions, make sure to
enter the name of your SD extensions in the Extension column for Secondary
Effects.
Secondary Effects:
Independent
Branding Effects
Required
Select if secondary/SD graphics are required.
NOTE: When the check box is checked, a graphic must be
present in the folder in order to be loaded.
NOTE: When the check box is checked, a graphic must be
present in the folder in order to be loaded.
Related information
Configuring Independent Branding on page 200
Independent Branding Primary to Secondary Scale Mode
The Independent Branding Primary to Secondary Scale feature allows you to down-scale HD graphics for
use on the Independent Branding SD secondary output. This allows you to make HD graphics available
for use on SD-branded channels.
To use the scale mode feature, make sure that the “Independent Branding Effects Required” checkbox is
de-selected for Secondary Effects.
188
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Layer Number
Indicates the graphic layer number.
Mode
Select one of the following scaling options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clean Specifies that the HD template will not be displayed on the secondary
output.
None Specifies that no down scaling will occur. When selected, all HD
graphics except External Key/Fill (.ekf) content will be placed in the upperleft hand corner of the screen without any down-scaling. External Key/Fill
content will not be displayed on the secondary output.
Anamorphic Specifies that frames will be scaled down horizontally and
vertically to fit a SD 4:3 aspect ratio.
Crop Specifies that frames are scaled horizontally to a 14:9 aspect ratio and
centered in the active area.
Full Specifies that frames are scaled vertically to fill the SD active height and
then centered in the active area.
Letter Specifies that frames are scaled horizontally to fill the SD active width
and then centered in the active area.
NOTE: Down-scaling only occurs if the secondary SD output
is configured for 4x3 in the player properties. If the secondary
output is configured for 16x9, the output will look the same.
Related information
Configuring Independent Branding on page 200
Serial Port
In the Serial Port section configure the following serial port settings.
Port Name
From the drop-down menu, select the Serial Port that you are using to connect
to an automation system. For GPIO/RS-422 connector signal assignments on
a ChannelPort, refer to the Spectrum ChannelPort Module Quick Reference
Guide. For signal assignments on the DSUB 60 connector on a Spectrum
X, see “High Density DSUB 60 Connector Pinout” in the Spectrum System
Installation Guide for version 8.0 or later.
Baud Rate
From the drop-down menu, select the required Baud Rate for your automation
system. Refer to the documentation for your automation system for details.
Template End Behavior
In the Template End Behavior (for non-.swf content) section, you can configure the “end behavior” for
non-.swf content that you load onto Spectrum X or ChannelPort layers, which is the behavior when the
graphic reaches the last frame.
This section applies only to non-.swf content that you can play on the Spectrum X or ChannelPort,
including the following file types:
•
•
•
•
.flv (Flash Video)
.mp4 (MPEG-4)
.png (Portable Network Graphic)
.jpg (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
189
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
•
•
•
•
.tga (Targa Graphic)
.gif (Graphical Interchange Format)
.bmp (Bitmap Image)
.tif (Tagged Image File)
NOTE: PEG file compression and planar formats within .tif files are not supported by
Spectrum X or ChannelPort.
For instructions on configuring Flash Videos and MPEG-4 files to be played on a Spectrum X or
ChannelPort, refer to “Creating Flash Videos and MPEG-4 Files” in the Spectrum Template User Guide .
NOTE: When you load a graphic onto the Spectrum X or ChannelPort, it is positioned on
a layer above the main video source. Layer 1 is the bottom-most layer, while layer 8 is the
top-most layer.
Layer Number
Select a layer between 1 and 8.
End Behavior
This setting describes what happens when the graphic on the
selected reaches its last frame, and the graphic is still playing.
For each layer, select from the following list of behaviors:
•
•
•
Still: The last frame of the graphic on this layer will be still.
Loop: The graphic on this layer will loop continuously.
Disappear: The graphic on this layer will disappear.
If a still image (for example, .jpg or .gif file) is loaded on the
layer and Disappear is selected as the End Behavior, the
image will appear for one frame and then disappear.
Remove
Click to select the layer you wish to remove.
Add End Behavior
(button) Click to add an effect layer. You may add up to 8 layers.
Remove selected
rows
(button) Click to remove any rows selected in the Remove
column.
Graphics Anchor
For Spectrum X in UHD mode, use the graphics anchor setting to anchor your graphic templates to one of
nine pre-defined anchor points on the video output.
Note that you can specify one anchor point per graphic layer.
NOTE: Anchor points can be also defined directly in the graphic template. Note that any
anchor settings defined in the template, itself, will override the Graphics Anchor setting in
SystemManager. For details, see "Applying the anchor override widget" in the Spectrum
Template User Guide.
Note that you can specify one anchor point per graphic layer.
NOTE: Anchor points can be also defined directly in the graphic template. Note that any
anchor settings defined in the template, itself, will override the Graphics Anchor setting in
SystemManager. For details, see "Applying the anchor override widget" in the Spectrum
Template User Guide.
Click Add Anchor to add a graphics anchor. You can add up to eight anchors, one for each layer.
Layer number
Select a layer between 1 and 8.
190
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
NOTE: When you load a graphic onto the Spectrum X or
ChannelPort, it is positioned on a layer above the main video
source. Layer 1 is the bottom layer, while layer 8 is the top layer.
Anchor
Select a pre-defined anchor point from the drop-down menu.
Remove selected
rows
(button) Click to remove any rows selected in the Remove column.
About template anchor points
Anchor points enable you to create templates that are smaller than the raster size. This can improve
performance by reducing the number of transparent pixels that must be rendered.
Anchor points can be used across all supported raster sizes, but are particularly important in UHD
workflows. You can configure anchor points per graphic layer in SystemManager or Spectrum
Management. When authoring templates in Flash Professional, you can apply a Harmonic Anchor
Override widget, which overrides the pre-configured layer anchor point.
In the following image, the anchor points are represented by the red squares. The blue squares are an
example of how a small template will be placed when loaded on a layer with the corresponding anchor
point.
NOTE: If a small template is loaded onto a graphic layer and no anchor point is configured,
the template is positioned in the upper left corner by default.
Figure 6-3: Anchor points
Auto Load
The Auto Load feature allows you to select a graphic template that you wish to be automatically loaded to
the Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel.
You can also lock the layer so that the graphic cannot be overridden except by clearing the "Lock" setting
in SystemManager.
Click Add Auto Load to configure Auto Load.
Layer Number
Select a layer between 1 and 8.
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for Auto Load.
191
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Permanent Lock
Select to lock this graphics layer. When selected, this graphics layer cannot be
overridden except by clearing this setting.
Remove
Click to select the layer you wish to remove.
Add Auto Load
(button) Click to add an Auto Load layer. You may add up to 8 layers.
Remove selected
rows
(button) Click to remove any rows selected in the Remove column.
Event Configuration
In the Event Configuration section, you can configure GPIO events that correspond to graphics
templates to be played out on the Spectrum X or ChannelPort.
For each event, you can select the graphics layer that it appears over the video output and set the fade
duration.
NOTE: When you load a graphic template, or .swf file, onto the Spectrum X or
ChannelPort, it is positioned on a layer above the main video source. Layer 1 is the bottommost layer, while layer 8 is the top-most layer.
You can also configure events that correspond to Trouble Slate, Mixer Transitions, and ARC control.
192
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Figure 6-4: Event configuration
Related information
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers on page 172
Fade Layer
In the Fade Layer section, configure fade layer events.
Event Name
From the drop-down menu, select the GPIO trigger to be used for this event.
Layer Number
From the drop-down menu, select the layer associated with this event (between
1-8).
Fade Duration
(fields)
Enter the fade duration (in fields) to be applied to this event.
Remove
Click to select an event that you wish to remove.
193
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Add Fade Layer
Click to add a new event. Note that you must configure the layer settings before
clicking Apply or an error message will appear.
Remove selected
rows
Click to remove a selected event.
Toggle Graphics
GPIO triggers can be used to toggle graphics on or off.
Toggle all graphics
on event
From the drop-down menu, select a GPIO trigger, which will be used to toggle
all graphics on or off.
Toggle graphics on
event
If you have configured an Auto Load graphic, use this setting to toggle all
graphics except the Auto Load graphic. From the drop-down menu, select a
GPIO trigger, which will be used to toggle graphics on or off
Trouble Slate
The Trouble slate feature allows you to configure an event that will mute audio and video and load a
specified graphic template when directed by an operator.
This feature may be used if there is a video failure and the channel goes to black.
NOTE: In order to configure Trouble Slate, you must have a GPIO trigger configured to
Trigger On = Active.
Event Name
From the drop-down menu, select the GPIO trigger to be used for this event.
Layer
From the drop-down menu, select the layer associated with this event (between
1-8). Harmonic recommends choosing a layer not used for any other purpose in
the overall branding look.
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for Trouble Slate. Note that
the name must not include the path. Spectrum assumes the template exists in
the graphics directory.
Mixer Transitions
The Mixer Transitions feature allows you to configure a GPIO trigger to transition the mixer to a specified
mixer input when the trigger is asserted.
When de-asserted, the mixer will return to its previous input. The Mixer Source options in this section vary
depending on the model of Spectrum X or ChannelPort and whether it is in Enhanced Channel mode or
Standard Channel mode.
Event Name
From the drop-down menu, select the GPIO trigger to be used for this event.
Mixer Source
From the drop-down menu, select the mixer source to be used for the transition.
The available sources will vary according to Spectrum X or ChannelPort model
and mode. See the following table for a list of available sources.
194
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
Model
Spectrum X or
ChannelPort
8200
ChannelPort
8100
Standard Channel
Mode
Available mixer
sources:
•
•
•
•
Available mixer
sources:
•
•
•
Transitions
Player
External In 1
External In 2
Color Generator
Player
External In
Color Generator
Enhanced Channel Mode
Available mixer sources
(may vary according to
BNC configuration):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Player A
Player B
External In 1
External In 2
External In 3
External In 4
External In 5
External In 6
Color Generator
Available mixer sources:
•
•
•
•
•
Player A
Player B
External In 1
External In 2
Color Generator
Select from the following transition options:
•
•
•
Cut: If selected, the GPIO event causes the mixer to transition from the
current source to the selected mixer source immediately without any fade.
VFade: If selected, the GPIO event causes the mixer to fade down the
current source by the number of frames specified in the Down Duration
field, and then fade up the selected mixer source by the number of frames
specified in the Up Duration field.
XFade: If selected, the GPIO event causes the mixer to fade down the
current source by the number of frames specified in the Down Duration field
while simultaneously fading up the selected mixer source by the number of
frames specified in the Up Duration field.
Down Duration
Enter the number of fields/frames to be used for the fade down during the
transition.
Up Duration
Enter the number of fields/frames to be used for the fade up during the
transition.
Remove
Click to select a transition that you wish to remove.
Add Mixer Transition (button) Click to add a mixer transition.
Remove selected
rows
(button) Click to remove any rows selected in the Remove column.
Related information
Enabling Enhanced Channel mode
195
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Mixer ARC Control
The Mixer ARC Control feature allows you to configure an event to temporarily change the channel
aspect ratio.
Once the GIPO event is asserted, the aspect ratio change lasts the duration of the current clip, and then,
at the next primary transition in the schedule, the previous aspect ratio resumes. The event automatically
toggles to the “off” state at that transition point.
Event Name
From the drop-down menu, select the GPIO trigger to be used for this event.
ARC Mode Type
From the drop-down menu, select the desired aspect ratio to be used for ARC
control. Note that the “default” selection applies whatever aspect ratio was
present on the channel before the latest ARC Control event.
NOTE: Once the GPIO event for Mixer ARC Control is asserted,
there will be a slight delay before the ARC change takes effect.
Remove
Click to select an event that you wish to remove.
Add ARC
Configuration
(button) Click to add an ARC Configuration.
Remove selected
rows
(button) Click to remove any rows selected in the Remove column.
196
Configuring a Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel
EAS Configuration
If you have purchased a license for EAS support for your Spectrum X or ChannelPort, the EAS
Configuration section will be enabled.
Figure 6-5: Channel Properties—EAS Configuration
General Properties
Find settings to enable EAS support and configure general properties.
Enable
Click to enable EAS support.
Remove Captions
If selected, closed captions will be turned off.
Auto Forward Alert
Click if you wish to automatically forward alerts once they are available. Note
that this setting overrides the “Send Alert” input from automation.
Decoder model
Select the decoder from the drop-down menu. At this time, the Spectrum X
and ChannelPort support the Sage* Digital ENDEC, TFT* EAS 911T, and the
Monroe DASDEC, which can be set to emulate a Sage Digital ENDEC or TFT
EAS 911T.
Serial port
In the Serial Port section, configure settings for your serial connection.
Port Name
From the drop-down menu, select the Serial Port that you are using to connect
to the EAS or select none. The connection instructions described in the
Spectrum System Installation Guide indicate Serial 0. For GPIO/RS-422
197
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
connector signal assignments on the ChannelPort, and for signal assignments
for the DSUB 60 connector on the Spectrum X, refer to the respective hardware
reference sections in the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
Baud Rate
From the drop-down menu, select the required Baud Rate for your EAS system.
Refer to the documentation for your EAS decoder for details.
GPIO Triggers
In the GPIO Triggers section, configure the GPIO triggers you wish to use for the EAS decoder and
automation.
EAS Decoder
•
•
•
Automation
•
•
Alert Pending: (for Sage only) From the drop-down menu, select a trigger.
This signal indicates to the Spectrum X or ChannelPort that an alert has
been received by the EAS system.
Alert Hold-off: (for Sage only) From the drop-down menu, select a trigger.
This signal prevents an alert from being sent automatically.
Alert active: From the drop-down menu, select a trigger. This signal
indicates that the EAS is playing an alert on air.
Alert Pending: (To automation or operator) From the drop-down menu,
select a trigger. This signal indicates an alert is available to be sent to
automation.
Send Alert: (From automation or operator) From the drop-down menu,
select a trigger. This signal indicates that an alert can go to air.
Templates
The Template fields allow you to select graphic templates to be used for EAS alerts.
High Priority
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for high priority alerts. The
file extension is not required.
Medium Priority
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for medium priority alerts.
The file extension is not required.
Low Priority
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for low priority alerts. The
file extension is not required.
EAS slaves
You can click Add EAS Slaves to add and configure separate channels to be controlled by the same EAS
system.
By adding EAS slaves, you can add multiple Spectrum X or ChannelPort channels to be controlled by
the same EAS system. Note that to connect multiple Spectrum Xs or ChannelPort s, they must all be
connected to the same Spectrum video server. For instructions on connecting multiple ChannelPort
channels to the same EAS system, see “Connecting Multiple Spectrum X or ChannelPort Channels to the
Same EAS” in the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
ChannelPort Name
Select the Spectrum X SDI I/O card or ChannelPort module to be controlled by
the EAS.
Channel
Select the channel to be used.
198
Renaming the graphics directory folder
High Priority
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for high priority alerts. The
file extension is not required.
Medium Priority
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for medium priority alerts.
The file extension is not required.
Low Priority
Template Name
Enter the name of the graphics template to be used for low priority alerts. The
file extension is not required.
Renaming the graphics directory folder
If you wish to name the graphics directory something other than /fs0/gfx.dir, you must modify the
properties page for each Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel to direct it to the new location for your
graphic templates.
1. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
2. Click the link or icon for your Spectrum X SDI card or ChannelPort to open its Properties page.
3. Click the Configure Channel A or Configure Channel B button to open the properties page for that
channel.
4. In the Effect Configuration area, in the Primary Effects: Folder field, type the new name of the
graphics directory.
5. Click Apply, and then click Done.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for the remaining channel.
Enabling and configuring Independent Branding
Independent Branding is a licensed feature for Spectrum X and ChannelPort, which allows you to brand a
channel’s Primary and Secondary outputs independently.
Unlike the ChannelPort, Spectrum X can play HD content from both the primary and secondary outputs.
As a result, different configurations are supported on the Spectrum X and ChannelPort.
Spectrum X supports the following configurations:
•
•
•
Primary (HD) and Secondary (SD)
Primary (HD) and Secondary (HD)
Primary (SD) and Secondary (SD)
ChannelPort supports the following configuration:
•
Primary (HD) and Secondary (SD)
Independent Branding can be used in Standard Channel or Enhanced Channel mode and supports
all graphic template types, including DVEs. This feature requires that you create separate version of a
template, and that you organize the two versions either in separate folders (for example, /SD and /HD, or /
HD1 and /HD2) within the graphics directory, or with different file extensions (for example, “SD” and “HD”,
or “HD1” and “HD2”). Follow the instructions in this section to enable Independent Branding, organize
your templates, and configure how the primary and secondary versions of your graphic templates will be
199
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
loaded. For instructions on creating graphic templates, refer to the Spectrum X and ChannelPort Template
Authoring Guide.
Enabling Independent Branding
Enable Independent Branding.
1. Navigate to the Channel properties page for your Spectrum X or ChannelPort.
a. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
b. Click any Spectrum X or ChannelPort (name or icon) to open its Properties page.
c. Click the Configure Channel A or Configure Channel B button to open the properties page for
that channel.
2. In the Master Control Switcher Configuration section, from the Secondary Output Mode dropdown menu, select Independent Branding.
3. Click Apply.
Configuring Independent Branding
You can configure Independent Branding to use one of two methods for naming assets: by folder or by
extension.
Before you begin
Since it is not possible to notify a device (such as an automation system) controlling a Spectrum X or
ChannelPort that Independent Branding is enabled, both versions of your templates must be saved
to the graphics directory (gfx.dir by default) on your video server and must follow one of two specific
naming conventions. The naming convention you choose depends on the settings you configure in
SystemManager.
Organizing Independent Branding effects by folder
Organizing Independent Branding effects by extension
Organizing Independent Branding effects by folder
If you are organizing your Independent Branding Effects by Folder, your templates must be organized so
that the primary and secondary versions of the templates are named identically but located in separate
folders on your video server.
1. Create a separate folder in the /fs0/gfx.dir graphics directory for secondary templates.
2. Name the primary and secondary versions of your templates identically
3. Save the primary versions of your templates (in this case, HD) to /fs0/gfx.dir on your video server, and
the secondary versions (in this case, SD) to the sub-folder in /fs0/gfx.dir. See the following example:
/fs0/gfx.dir/
a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/SD/
a.swf
4. From the Channel Properties page in SystemManager, scroll to the Effect Configuration section,
and then, from the Organize Independent Branding Effects by drop-down menu, select Folder.
200
Enabling and configuring Independent Branding
5. In the Independent Branding Effects Required column, select the Primary Effects and/or
Secondary Effects check boxes to determine if the templates will be required in order to be loaded
on the primary and/or secondary channel.
NOTE: When the check box is selected, the template must be present in the
associated folder in order to be loaded.
6. In the Folder column, you may modify the name of the graphics folders for your Primary and
Secondary Effects on your video server depending on how you have organized your templates, or
leave the default settings.
Result:
The following shows a typical directory structure organized by folder:
/fs0/gfx.dir/
a.swf
b.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/SD/
a.swf
c.swf
The following table shows how the Independent Branding check boxes in SystemManager affect the
visibility and functionality of the templates shown in the directory above.
Table 6-7: Example of Independent Branding effects organized by folder
Primary
Effects
Required
Secondary
Effects
Required
checked
checked
a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/a.swf
fs0/gfx.dir/SD/a.swf
checked
unchecked
a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/SD/a.swf
b.swf
•
•
a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/a.swf
unchecked
checked
Files Visible
Loads on Primary
to Automation graphic channel
/fs0/gfx.dir/a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/b.swf
c.swf
unchecked
unchecked
Loads on Secondary
graphic channel
•
•
a.swf
•
•
b.swf
c.swf
201
/fs0/gfx.dir/a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/b.swf
•
•
/fs0/gfx.dir/
SD/a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/
SD/c.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/
SD/a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/
SD/c.swf
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Organizing Independent Branding effects by extension
If you are organizing Independent Branding effects by Extension, your primary and secondary templates
must be located in the same folder but contain a base-name extension to identify them as primary and
secondary templates (for example, either “HD” and “SD,” or “HD1” and “HD2”).
1. Name the primary and secondary versions of your templates with separate base-name extensions
respectively. You will need to specify these extensions in SystemManager.
2. Save both versions of your templates to the /fs0/gfx.dir directory on your video server. See the
following example:
/fs0/gfx.dir/aHD.swf
aSD.swf
bHD.swf
cSD.swf
3. From the Channel Properties page in SystemManager, scroll to the Effect Configuration section,
and then, from the Organize Independent Branding Effects by drop-down menu, select Extension.
4. In the Independent Branding Effects Required column select the Primary Effects or Secondary
Effects check boxes to determine if the templates will be required in order to be loaded on the
primary or secondary channel.
NOTE: When the check box is selected, the template must be present in the graphics
directory in order to be loaded.
5. In the Extension column, you may modify the extensions of your Primary and Secondary Effects
depending on how you have named your templates, or leave the default settings.
202
Configuring audio profiles
Result:
The following shows a typical directory structure organized by extension:
/fs0/gfx.dir/aHD.swf
aSD.swf
bHD.swf
cSD.swf
The following table shows how the Independent Branding check boxes in SystemManager affect the
visibility and functionality of the templates shown in the directory above.
Table 6-8: Example of Independent Branding effects organized by extension
Primary
Effects
Required
Secondary
Effects
Required
Files
Visible to
Automation*
checked
checked
a.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/aHD.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/aSD.swf
checked
unchecked
a.swf
•
/fs0/gfx.dir/aSD.swf
b.swf
unchecked
checked
Loads on Primary
graphic channel
•
a.swf
/fs0/
gfx.dir/aHD.swf
/fs0/
gfx.dir/bHD.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/aHD.swf
•
•
/fs0/gfx.dir/aSD.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/cSD.swf
•
•
•
/fs0/gfx.dir/aSD.swf
/fs0/gfx.dir/cSD.swf
c.swf
unchecked
unchecked
a.swf
b.swf
•
c.swf
Loads on Secondary
graphic channel
/fs0/
gfx.dir/aHD.swf
/fs0/
gfx.dir/bHD.swf
*When automation queries for available files, the extension (SD or HD, for example) will not be present in
the file name.
Configuring audio profiles
With the audio profile feature, you can create profiles, which contain down-mix and voice over
parameters for audio on the primary and the secondary outputs of a Spectrum X or ChannelPort.
1. Follow the instructions in "Creating an Audio Profile Group" to create one or more audio profile groups
and save them to the video server.
2. Follow the instructions in "Mapping audio profiles to a channel" to select an audio profile group for the
Spectrum X or ChannelPort channel, and then map audio profiles from that group to channel sources.
203
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
About audio profiles and audio profile groups
Find details on the contents and functionality of an audio profile.
Once you have created a group of profiles you can map the profiles to your Spectrum I/O module channel
sources, such as a player, graphic, or external input. Once a channel source is mapped to an audio profile
group, the channel will continue to use those audio profiles by default.
You may configure up to eight profiles in an audio profile group. You may have as many groups as
you wish on a Spectrum video server, and may import or export audio profile groups to and from video
servers. However, a Spectrum I/O module channel may only map to the profiles from one audio profile
group.
An audio profile may contain:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Specifications for how to down-mix PCM audio from 5.1 surround to stereo or mono, from 7.1 surround
to stereo or mono, or from stereo to mono. Note that the LFE input is dropped when down-mixing.
Spectrum provides a licensed option for decoding and down-mixing Dolby® E audio. Down-mix options
include 5.1 surround to stereo or mono, 7.1 surround to stereo or mono, and stereo to mono.
Mute tracks.
Duplicate tracks.
Ability to “shuffle” the audio by placing a given track (from the original source or the result of a downmix) where specified.
Voice over and duck settings, which are only used for voice-over operations.
For primary events, such as clips, you can control audio profiles via the Player API or an automation
system. If using VDCP automation, you must create a secondary event for audio profile selection so that
an Oxtel command can be used to set the profile.
About Dolby® E decode support
The Dolby E decode license option allows you to do four decodes of Dolby E on one Spectrum X SDI I/O
card.
To decode Dolby E, create an audio profile group, and then select a Dolby E source pair from the Source
Type menu in the Edit Mix dialog box.
When configuring a profile, note that you start with a maximum of 16 input channels, which you may
assign to a maximum 16 output channels. However, when you select a Dolby E source pair from the
Source Type menu, note that the Dolby E pair expands into 8 channels, which you may assign to your
output channels, as shown in the following figure.
204
Configuring audio profiles
The limit of four decodes means that only four unique Dolby E stereo pairs can be decoded by a
Spectrum X SDI I/O card at one time. For example, the following set of mixes within a profile would be
valid because it includes only three unique Dolby E pairs:
Valid profile:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Type: Dolby E 1&2, Mix: 5.1:2
Type: Dolby E 1&2, Mix: 5.1:1
Type: Dolby E 3&4, Mix: 5.1:2
Type: Dolby E 3&4, Mix: 5.1:1
Type: Dolby E 5&6, Mix: 5.1:2
Type: Dolby E 5&6, Mix: 5.1:1
If you attempted to add two more Dolby E pairs to this profile, Spectrum would prevent it and indicate that
you are exceeding the limit.
Make sure to consider the limit when mapping the profiles to your Spectrum X sources. For example, if
you have these profiles:
•
•
Profile 1: Type: Dolby E 1&2, Mix: 5.1:2
Profile 2: Type: Dolby E 1&2, Mix: 5.1:2; Type: Dolby E 3&4, Mix: 5.1:2
205
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Then the following mapping would be valid because it maps one Dolby E stereo pair to four different
channel sources, resulting in four decodes:
•
•
•
•
Player A: profile 1
Player B: profile 1
External In 1: profile 1
External In 2: profile 1
But the following mapping would be invalid because the extra Dolby E stereo pair in profile 2 mapped to
Player A would result in five decodes.
•
•
•
•
Player A: profile 2
Player B: profile 1
External In 1: profile 1
External In 2: profile 1
IMPORTANT: Spectrum does not provide a warning if you exceed the four decode limit
when mapping profiles to your channel sources. If you attempt to apply more than four
Dolby E decodes to a Spectrum X, all the decodes will fail.
In addition, note the following:
•
•
When mapping an audio profile to your channel sources, note that Spectrum supports Dolby E decode
on the “Player,” “Live,” and “External In” sources, but not the “Graphics” source.
If you wish to pass-through Dolby E without decoding, from the Source Type menu, select PCM.
IMPORTANT: If your audio profile includes Dolby E decode and down-mixes or shuffles
audio to the upper 9-16 channels, make sure your player is configured for 16 channels
of audio.
Creating an audio profile group
Once you have created a group of profiles you can map the profiles to your Spectrum X or ChannelPort
channel sources, such as a player, graphic, or external input.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the Physical
Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. In the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure Audio
Profiles. The Audio Profile Groups page for your Spectrum video server appears
4. Click Create New Group to open the Configure Audio Down Mix page.
5. In the Audio Profile Group Name field, type the name of the group.
6. If you wish to apply the same voice-over and audio down mix setting to both SDI 0 and SDI 1 for
all the audio profiles in this group, select theMirror SDI 0 to SDI 1 check box. If you wish to apply
different audio settings to SDI 0 and SDI 1, leave this option unselected.
7. Under Profile 1, configure as follows:
•
•
Voice Over Level (dB): Type a value, from -100 to 0 (from silence to full volume) to indicate the
level of voice-over for this audio input. For information on how Spectrum processes audio voiceovers, see "About Audio Processing of Voice-overs."
Duck Level (dB): Type a value from -100 to 0 (from silence to full volume) to indicate the duck
level for this audio input.
206
Configuring audio profiles
•
Add Mix: Click to open theEdit Mix dialog box and then configure the following
◦
Type: Select from the following:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
PCM: Use for PCM or to pass-through Dolby E without decoding.
Dolby® 1&2: (available with Dolby E decode license only) indicates the Dolby E source pair.
Dolby® 3&4
Dolby® 5&6
Dolby® 7&8
Dolby® 9&10
Dolby® 11&12
Dolby® 13&14
Dolby® 15&16
NOTE: When you select a Dolby E source pair, the Dolby E source is
decoded into 8 input channels. When configuring a mix, you must indicate
how the decoded input channels of your source are associated with inputs
of the Mix option you select. See "About Dolby E Decode Support" for more
information.
Mix : Select from the following:
5.1:2: down-mixes from 5:1 surround sound to stereo.
5.1:1: down-mixes from 5:1 surround sound to mono.
2:1: down mixes from stereo to mono.
1:1: mixes mono to mono, and can be used to shuffle one channel for another.
Mute: mutes the audio channel.
7.1:2: down-mixes from 7.1 surround sound to stereo.
7.1:1: down-mixes from 7.1 surround sound to mono.
6:6: (for Dolby E only) use to shuffle the six 5.1 decoded input channels to six output
channels.
◦ 8:8: (for Dolby E only) use to shuffle the eight 7.1 decoded input channels to eight output
channels.
In: Select the input audio channels. For 7.1, note: S.L. = surround left; S.R. = surround right;
L.R. = left rear; R.R. = right rear.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
NOTE: For 5.1 and 7.1 down-mixes, the LFE input is dropped.
•
•
◦ Out: Select the output audio channels.
◦ Click OK to save the mix.
Copy Previous Mix icon (plus sign button): Click to add another mix, which is identical to the
previous one.
Delete icon (button): Click to delete the selected mix.
8. Configure additional profiles as desired.
9. Click Save Group to save this audio profile group.
207
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Examples of audio profiles
Find examples of different audio profiles and descriptions of their possible uses.
Examples of audio profiles for use with voice overs
For help with configuring your own profiles, review the examples of audio profiles, which can be used with
voice overs.
The following tables show three different profiles, which can be used with secondary graphic events.
In this Audio Profile Group, Mirror SDI 0 to SDI 1 is selected so that both SDI outputs share the same
configuration for each profile. For all the profiles in this group, only the Voice Over and Duck levels are
configured.
Profile 1 shows a case in which a graphic template, which includes a jingle, will be added over the top of
the main video. In this case, the audio for the main video and the audio for the jingle remain at the same
level without any Voice Over or Duck so both values are set to 0.
Table 6-9: Profile 1
Mix modes SDI 0
Voice Over Level (db): 0
Duck Level (dB): 0
Profile 2 shows a case in which a promo for a new show will be added over the audio for the main video.
In this case, the audio for the main video is suppressed completely while the promo becomes fully
audible, so the Duck level is set to -100.
Table 6-10: Profile 2
Mix modes SDI 0
Voice Over Level (db): 0
Duck Level (dB): -100
Profile 3 shows a case where a DVE for breaking news is added over the top of the main video. In this
case, the audio for the main video is only suppressed a little while the breaking news segment becomes
audible, so the Duck level is set to -3.
Table 6-11: Profile 3
Mix modes SDI 0
Voice Over Level (db): 0
Duck Level (dB): -3
Examples of audio profiles for use with multiple languages
For help with configuring your own profiles, review the examples of audio profiles, which can be used with
multiple language tracks.
The following two audio profile examples illustrate cases in which certain audio channels are dedicated
for use with certain languages. In both examples, the Mirror SDI 0 and SDI 1 option is selected.
In the Profile 1 table below, the “Channel Inputs” columns describe which audio input channels are used
for which languages. The “Profile 1 Channel Output” columns describe how the inputs are down-mixed to
the output channels, as shown in the accompanying figure. Note that by not specifying channels 7 and 8
in the output, those inputs will be passed through as is.
208
Configuring audio profiles
The following figure shows how the down-mix described in the Profile 1 table is configured.
209
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
In the Profile 2 table below, the “Channel Inputs” columns are identical to those Profile 1 table but the
“Profile 2 Channel Output” columns show different outputs. For example, the output for channels 7 and 8
are specified.
The following figure shows how the down-mix described in the Profile 2 table is configured.
210
Configuring audio profiles
Examples of audio profiles using Dolby® E decode
For help with configuring your own profiles, review the examples of audio profiles using Dolby E decode.
Profile 1, shown in the following figure, shows a case where a movie track in Dolby E is decoded from
channels 1 and 2, and then down-mixed from 7.1 surround sound to stereo.
Figure 6-6: Profile 1
Profile 2, shown in the following two tables, shows a case where the Dolby E source on channels 1 and
2 contains a movie track in 5.1 surround and a separate language (Spanish) in a stereo pair (this is 5.1+2
configuration). In addition, on channels 7 and 8, there is a stereo pair of PCM audio containing a third
language (French). This profile decodes and down-mixes the movie track from 5.1 to stereo, mutes the
Spanish, and shuffles in the French.
In the following tables, the “Decoded Dolby E Channel 1 & 2 Inputs” column describes the decoded
Dolby E source. The “PCM Channel Inputs” column describes the PCM channel Inputs. And the “Channel
Output” columns describe how the inputs are mixed to the output channels as shown in the figure that
follows.
211
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
NOTE: In the following graphic, the LFE input is not shown in the In column, indicating that
it is dropped.
Figure 6-7: Profile 2
Profile 3, shown in the following two tables, includes the same source described in Profile 2. Like Profile
2, this profile decodes and down-mixes the movie track from 5.1 to stereo. However, in this profile, the
stereo pair of PCM audio containing French on channels 7 and 8 is dropped, and the Spanish (decoded
from the Dolby E source on channels 1 and 2) is shuffled to different output channels.
212
Configuring audio profiles
The following figure shows how the Profile 3 down-mix is configured in Spectrum Management.
Figure 6-8: Profile 3
Importing an audio profile group
You can import an audio profile group to your video server.
1. Navigate to the Audio Profile Groups page.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the
Physical Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. From the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure
Audio Profiles.
2. In the Import Group field, click Browse to open an Explorer window.
3. Browse to the .XML file that contains the Audio Profile Group. This file will have the same name as
the group.
4. Click Import Group to import the file.
213
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Exporting an audio profile group
You may export an audio profile group for use on a different video server.
1. Navigate to the Audio Profile Groups page.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the
Physical Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. From the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure
Audio Profiles.
2. In the Select column, select the check box for the Audio Profile Group you wish to export, and then
click Export Group.
3. The browser allows you to open or save the .XML file that contains the audio profile. Choose Save
as to open an Explorer window, and then navigate to the desired directory and save the file.
Deleting an audio profile group
You may delete an audio profile group at any time.
1. Navigate to the Audio Profile Groups page.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the
Physical Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. From the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure
Audio Profiles.
2. In the Select column, select the check box for the Audio Profile Group you wish to export, and then
click Delete Group.
Mapping audio profiles to a channel
Once you have created an Audio Profile Group, you can map the profiles from that group to your
Spectrum Xor ChannelPort channel sources. Once mapped, the channel will continue to use those audio
profiles by default.
IMPORTANT: If you modify an Audio Profile Group after it has been applied to a Spectrum
X or ChannelPort channel, you must re-apply that group for the changes to take effect.
1. Navigate to the Properties page for the channel you wish to map.
a. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
b. Click the Spectrum X or ChannelPort name or icon to open its Properties page.
2. Click the Configure Channel A or Configure Channel Bbutton to open the properties page for that
channel.
3. Under Audio Profile Group, click Change Audio Profile Group to open the Select Group menu.
4. From the Select Group menu, select the Audio Profile Group you wish to apply to this channel.
5. Under Audio Profile Mapping, for each source, use the drop-down menu to select the Audio Profile
you wish to apply to that source. If the default 0 is selected, no profile will be applied.
6. Click Apply to save your changes.
214
Configuring audio watermarking
NOTE: When mapping an audio profile to your channel sources, note that Spectrum
supports Dolby E decode on the Player, Live, and External In sources, but not the
Graphics source.
IMPORTANT: Spectrum does not provide a warning if you exceed the four decode
limit when mapping profiles to your channel sources. If you attempt to apply more than
four Dolby E decodes to a Spectrum X or ChannelPort, all the decodes will fail.
About audio processing of voice-overs
Spectrum processes audio voice-overs in a particular order, which is static. This order is important to note
when configuring audio profiles and planning for voice-overs using secondary events like Digital Video
Effects (DVEs), graphics, or an EAS.
Spectrum processes audio for DVE0 first, DVE1 second, graphics third, and AES input (used for an EAS)
fourth. When configuring voice-overs, this means, for example, that the audio layer for a graphic will
always be above the audio layer for a DVE, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-9: Voice-over processing order
Configuring audio watermarking
With Spectrum 8.3 or later, you can add audio watermarks to a Spectrum X channel during playout.
Note the following points about Spectrum support for audio watermarking.
•
•
•
•
•
•
®
Spectrum uses Kantar Media Watermarking to add audio watermarks to PCM audio channels.
Audio watermarking is supported with Spectrum X in either shared storage mode or internal storage
mode.
Spectrum supports a total of 32 watermarked audio channels per Spectrum X.
Audio watermarking is only supported for 25Hz/50Hz (PAL) frame rates.
If you have configured audio profiles for your Spectrum X channel, note that Spectrum applies audio
watermarking to the audio channels after any changes specified in the audio profiles.
Once you have configured audio watermarking for a Spectrum X channel, the associated player must
be de-activated and then activated again for the changes to take effect.
Installing license files for audio watermarking
®
In order to add audio watermarks with Kantar Media Watermarking, you must have both the Harmonic
license for audio watermarking, "WM-KANTAR-CH," and also the required license and audience files from
Kantar installed on your Spectrum video server.
You can verify that the Harmonic license is installed by viewing the Licensed Features page in
SystemManager. See "Viewing licensed features for a Spectrum video server."
215
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Before you begin
Make sure you can access the Kantar Watermarking Support portal here: http://www.kantarmedia.com/
watermarkinghelpdesk.
If you do not already have an account, follow the steps online to create one. You will need to work with
Kantar to receive the necessary license files for Kantar Media Watermarking.
Review the following steps to acquire the license and audience files from Kantar and apply them.
1. Locate the "AuthCode" text file for each Spectrum X that will use audio watermarking.
◦
For a Spectrum X in internal storage mode:
a. Using Windows Explorer, access the fs0/watermark directory on your Spectrum X file system.
From the Disk Utilities page in SystemManager, you can click the "Explore Filesystem" link to
open the file system for your video server.
When prompted, enter the user name and password for your video server file system. The root
directory of the video server file system will appear in a new Explorer window.
b. The watermark directory contains sub-folders for each I/O module, channel, and primary or
secondary output. In the following image, for "Tap8P11-0," the name of the I/O module is "11," and
"-0" indicates channel A. "Tap811-1" is the directory for channel B of the same I/O module. The
"primary" and "secondary" sub-folders correspond to the primary and secondary outputs for each
channel.
Select the "AuthCode" text file from any primary or secondary sub-folder in the watermark
directory for this Spectrum X, and copy it to your client system.
◦
For a Spectrum X in shared storage mode:
a. Using Windows Explorer, access the fs0/watermark directory on your Spectrum video server file
system.
b. You will need one "AuthCode" text file for each Spectrum X connected to your Spectrum video
server regardless of how many I/O modules are installed in each Spectrum X chassis. In other
words, one "AuthCode" file per Spectrum X chassis.
For example, in the previous image, Tap8P11 and Tap8P1207 could be I/O modules installed in
two separate Spectrum X devices. In that case, you would need two "AuthCode" text files—one
216
Configuring audio watermarking
from a Tap8P11-0 or Tap8P11-1 primary/secondary sub-folder, and one from a Tap8P1207-0 or
Tap8P1207-1 primary/secondary sub-folder.
If Tap8P11 and Tap8P1207 are I/O modules installed in the same Spectrum X chassis, then you
would only need one "AuthCode" text file, which can be copied from a primary or secondary subfolder within either the Tap8P11 or Tap8P1207 folder.
For any Spectrum X connected to your Spectrum video server, select the "AuthCode" text file and
copy it to your client system.
2. Provide your Kantar representative the "AuthCode" text file for each Spectrum X that will use audio
watermarking, and request a corresponding Kantar license file and audience file. From Kantar, you
will need to receive:
◦
◦
A Kantar license file (named license.lic), which is unique to your Spectrum X chassis (regardless of
whether it is being used in internal storage mode or shared storage mode).
One or more audience files (all named license.aud) which are unique to your Spectrum X chassis
(regardless of whether it is in internal storage mode or shared storage mode). Each audience file
contains a list of audience names that you can select from when configuring watermark settings for
a Spectrum X channel.
3. Copy and paste the Kantar license file and audience files to your watermark directory as follows.
a. Paste the license.lic file into all primary or secondary sub-folders for a Spectrum X chassis.
b. Paste an audience file into the primary or secondary sub-folder that applies to the output you want
to use with that audience file.
NOTE: It is possible to have multiple audience files on the same Spectrum X,
each file containing a different list of audience names. This allows you to select
different audience names for different Spectrum X channels and outputs. However,
all audience files must be named license.aud. If using multiple audience files on
the same system, you will need to keep track of which files contain which audience
names.
You cannot have more than one audience file per sub-folder.
IMPORTANT: Every primary or secondary subfolder for a Spectrum X must contain
both a license.lic and license.aud file in order to add watermarking on that channel
output.
4. Once you have copied all the license and audience files from Kantar, restart your Spectrum X system.
If using Spectrum X in shared storage mode, restart both the Spectrum video server and any attached
Spectrum X.
217
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
What to do next
Once you have restarted your system, you can configure audio watermarking for your Spectrum X
channels.
NOTE: Any time you replace a Spectrum X chassis, you will need to acquire new license
files for the replacement Spectrum X.
Configuring a Spectrum X channel for audio watermarking
Configure audio watermarking on a Spectrum X channel.
Before you begin
Make sure you have the necessary Harmonic and Kantar licenses installed on your system. If a
license is missing, SystemManager will display an error message, and you will be unable to configure
watermarking.
If possible, de-activate the associated player for the Spectrum X channel you want to configure.
NOTE: Spectrum supports audio watermarking on a total of 32 PCM audio channels per
Spectrum X.
1. Navigate to the Channel Properties page for your Spectrum X
a. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
b. Click the Spectrum X icon to open its Properties page.
c. Click the Configure Channel A or Configure Channel B button to open the properties page for
that channel.
2. In the Configure Audio Processing Settings section, click Audio Processing Configuration to
open the Audio Pipeline Configuration page for that channel.
218
Configuring audio watermarking
3. (Optional) If you want the audio watermarking settings on the Secondary output (SDI 1) to mirror
the settings on the Primary output (SDI 0), click theMirror SDI 0 to SDI 1 checkbox. When this is
selected, only the configuration options for Primary Configuration (SDI 0) will be visible, and the
settings from SDI 0 will be applied to SDI 1.
4. For the Primary or Secondary output (SDI 0, SDI 1) of the Spectrum X channel, indicate which audio
channels will receive a watermark by adding them in groups of one, two, or three (mono, stereo, or
triple). To add a group of audio channels, click Add Group.
5. Configure groups as follows.
a. From the Group drop-down menu, select mono, stereo or triple to indicate the number of
channels in that group.
b. From the Starting Channel drop-down menu, select the starting channel for that group.
Note that once a group is added, SystemManager automatically adjusts the starting channel of the
subsequent group so that channel groups do not overlap.
NOTE: If two channel groups overlap, Spectrum will generate error messages and
audio watermarking will not be applied.
In the following example, the "triple" group includes channels 1, 2, and 3. For the next group,
when "stereo" is selected, SystemManager automatically makes the starting channel 4 and
includes channel 5. For the next group, when "mono" is selected SystemManager automatically
makes the starting channel 6 and includes only that channel. Note that you can choose a starting
channel of 1-16 as long as channels don't overlap, and as long as there are sufficient unassigned
channels for the selected group type.
219
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
c. From the Audience Name drop-down menu, select the audience name for that group. Note
that the options in this menu are populated from the license.aud file in the sub-folder for the
corresponding output.
In the above example, the first three channels are watermarked with the audience name "test1,"
channels three and four are watermarked with the audience name "test2," and channel six is
watermarked with the audience name, "test3."
You can delete a group of channels by selecting the group and clicking Delete.
6. Once you have added all the audio watermarking groups for a channel. Click Apply to save the
changes.
7. For watermarking to take effect, the associated player must be disabled and then re-enabled again.
Audio watermarking will be added during playout.
8. If you de-activated the associated player prior to configuring this Spectrum X channel, activate it
now for the changes to take effect. If you were not able to de-activate the associated player prior to
configuring audio watermarking, de-activate it and then activate it for the changes to take effect.
NOTE: Audio watermarking is supported only on players configured for 25Hz/50Hz
(PAL) frame rates.
NOTE: If you modify audio watermarking settings and save the changes, any
associated players must be disabled and then re-enabled again for the changes to take
effect.
Configuring Dolby® E encode
With Spectrum 8.3 or later, using a Spectrum X licensed for Dolby E encode, you can encode PCM audio
channels and output them as compressed Dolby E audio during playout.
Note the following points about Spectrum support for encoding Dolby E audio.
•
•
•
•
With the "DOLBY-ENCODE" license, Spectrum supports four Dolby E encode configurations per
Spectrum X channel.
Spectrum supports encode of two Dolby E program configurations: 5.1+ 2 and 5.1+1+1.
When configured, Dolby E encode occurs after any audio changes made from audio profiles, and after
any audio watermarking that has been configured for a channel.
Once you have configured audio watermarking for a Spectrum X channel, the associated player must
be de-activated and then activated again for the changes to take effect.
220
Configuring Dolby® E encode
Configuring a Spectrum X channel for Dolby E encode
Configure Dolby E encode on a Spectrum X channel.
Before you begin
If possible, de-activate the associated player for the Spectrum X channel you want to configure.
1. Navigate to the Channel Properties page for your Spectrum X
a. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page and System Diagram.
b. Click the Spectrum X icon to open its Properties page.
c. Click the Configure Channel A or Configure Channel B button to open the properties page for
that channel.
2. In the Configure Audio Processing Settings section, click Audio Processing Configuration to
open the Audio Pipeline Configuration page for that channel.
3. Click the Dolby E Encode tab.
4. (Optional) If you want the Dolby E encode settings on the Secondary output (SDI 1) to mirror the
settings on the Primary output (SDI 0), click theMirror SDI 0 to SDI 1 checkbox. When this is
selected, only the configuration options for Primary Configuration (SDI 0) will be visible, and the
settings from SDI 0 will be applied to SDI 1.
5. For the Primary or Secondary output (SDI 0, SDI 1) of the Spectrum X channel, add a Dolby E encode
configuration by clicking Add Dolby E Encoder.
6. Configure the Dolby E encoder as follows.
221
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 6: Spectrum I/O channel configuration
Output Channels
Select the Dolby stereo pair that you want to output for this encode
configurartion.
Program
Select the program configuration. Choose from 5.1+2, which provides 5.1
plus stereo or 5.1+1+1, which provides 5.1 plus two mono channels.
In the Program Details section, configure the following.
Description
Enter a description for the program.
Input channels
Select one of 16 PCM audio channels for each of the input channels for the
program.
Metadata
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Low Frequency Channel: When clear, the low frequency channel (LFE)
is muted. When selected, the LFE will be present.
Dialogue Normalization: Enter the value required by your system. Note
that the default value of 27 results in -27 decibels.
Room Type Equalization: Select either None, Large, or Small as
required by your system.
RF Compression Profile: Select the value required by your system.
Line Compression Profile: Select the value required by your system.
7. Once you have added all the Dolby E encode configurations for your Spectrum X channel, click Save
Configuration.
You can delete an encode configuration at any time by selecting it and clicking Delete Dolby E
Encoder.
8. If you de-activated the associated player prior to configuring this Spectrum X channel, activate it
now for the changes to take effect. If you were not able to de-activate the associated player prior to
configuring Dolby E encode, de-activate it and then activate it for the changes to take effect.
222
Chapter 7
Player configuration
Configure and modify players in a Spectrum System.
IMPORTANT: When configuring Players on MediaDirectors 2100, 2101, 2102 and 2102B,
it is important to remember that each Player is associated with a specific host, and each
Player may only be connected to those MediaPorts attached to that selected host. A Player
that resides on Host 0 cannot be connected to a MediaPort that resides on Host 1.
NOTE: SystemManager checks the firmware version on Spectrum systems and adjusts
the player configuration user interface according to the features supported in the firmware
version. If the firmware version of any component on your Spectrum system is too old
to support this SystemManager feature, a warning message will appear in the Player
Properties page asking you to upgrade to a supported firmware version for this release of
SystemManager. Harmonic recommends that you upgrade to supported firmware versions
soon after installing the latest SystemManager release.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creating a player
Configuring video tracks
Configuring audio tracks
Configuring audio scrub
Configuring track tag rules for an audio track
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
Changing the player state
Player to player dubbing
Disconnecting Devices
Using Auto Input Sense recording
Deleting players
Copying a Player
Configuring GPIO settings for players
Adjusting output timing
Creating multiple audio track players
Moving players
About allowing players to be enabled or disabled by automation
About the player utility
About VANC implementation in Spectrum
About AFD support
About Harmonic timecode behavior
About Cue-to-Timecode with VDCP control
223
Chapter 7: Player configuration
•
About players created using Spectrum Management
Creating a player
Create a player, and review the necessary steps before activating it.
1. From the Configuration tab, click Player Configuration, and then click the icon for a Spectrum video
server to open the Player List page for that server.
2. Click Create a Player, type a name for the new player in the text box, and then click Create. Note that
you cannot use the same Player name twice in a Harmonic system. Refer to “About Naming Files and
System Elements” for naming conventions.
3. From the Edit Player page, configure player options moving from the top to the bottom of the page.
See the “Edit Player options” section for reference.
NOTE: Many options on the Edit Player page will change based on selections you
make as you configure your player.
4. Click a video track button to add a video track to the player. Follow the procedure in “Configuring
video tracks” that applies to your video track.
5. From the Track section that appears, click Attach devices to open the Attach devices page.
6. From the Attach devices page, select an I/O module. Follow the steps in “Attaching devices and
setting conversion options” to configure any conversion settings for your I/O module, and then click
Done to return to the Edit Player page.
7. Click the Audio button to add an audio track.
8. From the Audio track section, click Attach devices. Attach a device to the audio track, and configure
any settings for that track.
9. Add additional tracks as needed.
10. Activate and enable the player by clicking Activate and Enable.
What to do next
Edit Player options on page 224
Configuring video tracks
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
Configuring audio tracks
Changing the player state
Edit Player options
The Edit Player page provides a number of options. Note that the player must be deactivated before
configuring.
Name
Note that you cannot use the same Player name twice in a Harmonic system.
Frame Rate
Note that some track type options may be grayed out depending on the
selected frame rate.
224
Creating a player
NOTE: If you plan on doing cross conversion with this player,
refer to “About Configuring for Cross Conversion” before
selecting the frame rate.
Player Type
•
•
•
Branded: Select if the player will be used to play branded content. Branded
players are automatically set as “play only,” “EE Mode = Never,” and can
only be attached to a ChannelPort or Spectrum X. For this player type, the
BNC config setting on the Attach Devices page is configured as AES In by
default.
Record: Select for “record only” players.
Hybrid: Select if the player may be used for play or record.
Mode
Select from Play Only, Record Only, or Play or Record
Control
Note the I/O module receiving serial control commands does not have to be the
same I/O module that plays or records media.
•
•
•
Manual: if selected, there are no additional choices for control.
Harmonic Playout: If selected, the player will use the Polaris Play: Playlist
Control for control.
VDCP: If selected, select as follows:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
BVW
IMPORTANT: The following options should not be
selected unless directed by your automation vendor or
Harmonic technical support:
Cue-to-Timecode: Select if applicable to your system
ID Request: Checks ID for presence of all media files.
Play Cue : Checks ID for presence of all media files.
If selected, select as follows:
•
•
Timecode Display
Non-Drop Frame or
Drop Frame
Signal Port: Choose the port number that you want to control. Select
from 0 to 127.
MediaPort Name: Select the desired I/O module you want to receive
serial control commands.
MediaPort Channel: Select the desired I/O module channel.
Advance-to-Cued: Enter the minimum number of frame times the VDCP
port should still on reaching the end of a clip and before advancing to the
beginning of the next cued clip. The Advance-to-Cued option can be
used in conjunction with the player Last-Frame-Freeze option. Setting
the Last-Frame-Freeze option to a non-zero value “N” causes the output
to go black after freezing on the last frame of the active clip for N frames.
If the Advance-to-Cued option is set to a value “M” where M is larger
than N, then the output will go black after N frames of freezing on the last
frame and then advance to the cued clip after another M-N frames.
MediaPort Name: Select the desired I/O module you want to receive serial
control commands.
MediaPort Channel: Select the desired I/O module channel.
Note that this selection only applies to players configured as 525/29.97,
1080i/29.97, 525/29.97, or 720p/59.94. The default setting is Drop Frame.
225
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Record Timecode
Source
•
•
Playback Timecode
Source
•
•
•
External: Specifies that the timecode should be obtained from an external
source.
Internal (TCG on): Specifies that the timecode should be obtained from the
server’s Timecode Generator.
From Clip: Specifies that the timecode should be obtained from the clip.
Internal (TCG on): Specifies that the timecode should be obtained from the
server’s Timecode Generator. The default setting is From Clip.
Timecode Generator Mode: When either Record of Playback Timecode
Source is set to Internal (TCG on), an additional set of options are available
to configure timecode generation.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Hold: Allows you to maintain timecode generation at a constant value
specified using the Player API.
Free Run : Specifies a continuous increase in value, starting from a value
specified using the Player API.
Locked to Player Timeline: Specifies that the timecode value is derived
from the current position on the timeline.
Locked to Clip Position: Specifies that the timecode is derived from the
current position within the current clip.
Locked to Clip’s First Timecode: Specifies that the timecode is derived
from the current clip’s first timecode value.
Locked to VITC input reference: Specifies that the timecode is derived
from the reference input Vertical Interval Timecode (VITC).
NOTE: When "Play and Record" Players are configured
for Internal Timecode Generator and Locked to Clip
Timecode, recorded clips are produced with starting times
of 00:00:00.00 with VITC times from the original source,
not 00:00:00.00. For the MediaDirector 2202/2201, if a
LTC timecode source is connected, the MediaDirector
automatically uses that as the timecode source for any
attached player. This setting overrides the reference VITC
from the MediaPort for purposes of automation. However,
if the attached player is configured with a different frame
rate than that of the LTC input, then its reference will not
be overridden. For example, a LTC input with a frame rate
of 25 Hz would not override the reference for a player
configured with a frame rate of 29.97 Hz.
Last Frame Freeze
0 indicates the last frame will be frozen until the next clip.
EE Mode
•
•
•
Normal: When selected, the input video for the player is displayed in the
video out (or video loop-through) whenever the player is stopped.
Never: When selected, the input video for the player is never displayed in
the video out (or video loop-through) regardless of the player state.
Record: When selected, the input video for the player is displayed in the
video out (or video loop-through) only when the player is recording.
226
Creating a player
Stop recording when (Optional, if you have configured a Record player or a Play or Record player)
disk is full
Unchecked by default. Select if you wish players to stop recording when there is
no disk space.
Stop recording when (Optional, if you have configured a Record player or a Play or Record player)
Input error occurs
Unchecked by default. Select if you wish players to stop recording when there is
an SDI video input error.
NOTE: To change “Stop recording...” settings for existing
players created prior to SystemManager 5.23 and Spectrum
6.4.2, first deactivate the player then change these settings, and
then reactivate the player.
To change these settings for all players in your system created
with SystemManager 5.23 or later and Spectrum 6.4.2 or later,
use the Player Parameters settings on the Options page.
Media Wrapper
Format
For information on supported track and media wrapper format combinations,
refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats included in the Spectrum
documentation suite.
Default Clip
Directory
Harmonic recommends that you leave this field empty. Doing so allows the
Spectrum video server to determine the default location for clips
If you choose a different default directory, it must have been previously created,
and the full path name must be used (for example, /fs0/mydirectory) in the
Default Clip Directory field. To create directories on the Spectrum video server
file system, ensure that you have first mapped the file system to a network
drive. Once this is done, directories can be created in the normal way. The
Spectrum video server expects directory names to be separated using forward
slashes (‘/’,) not backward slashes as used within Microsoft Windows.
NOTE: Changing the Player’s Clip Directory using Windows
ClipTool will not affect the Clip Directory that is used by other
ClipTools, nor will it affect the Clip Directory used by control
applications (for example, VDCP, BVW, etc.).
NOTE: When configuring a player to preview from your
Harmonic MediaGrid or NAS, make sure to enter the Default Clip
Directory as follows:
•
•
for omfs mounts: file:///mnt/nas/omfs/<folder name>
for cifs mounts: file:///mnt/nas/cifs/<folder name>
Use 704 Up/Down
Conversion
(Optional for players configured as “Play Only” or “Play and Record” with
a frame rate of 25 Hz, and I/O module that supports up/down conversion
attached). Select to up-convert or down-convert to output that is 704 samples
wide rather than 720 samples wide. To make this the default selection for all
new players, refer to “Configuring players to use 704 up/down conversion by
default.”
Ignore clip RP-186
AFD
(Optional for players configured as “Play Only” or “Play and Record) Select
to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD data on clips being played out. To make
this the default selection for all new players, in SystemManager, click Home >
Options > Ignore clip RP-186 AFD: Enabled.
Ignore clip AFD
Select to ignore AFD data in clips being played out.
227
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
NOTE: This option works only for clips, not external inputs, and
is only available in the following cases:
•
•
For players attached to a Spectrum X in standard channel
mode
For players with a frame rate of 29.97 Hz
Frame Still
Select to cause material that is stilled (or frozen) during playout to be a frame
rather than a single field. Stilled playout includes cued mode, play at rate of
zero, and when the player position hits the end of the timeline). Note that a
frame-still provides higher spatial resolution but at the cost of motion artifacts if
there is much motion between the pair of fields that comprise the frame.
Subtitle Handling
(For any player configured for 25 or 50 Hz frame rate)
NOTE: For subtitles or teletext that use the OP-47 standard, up
converting or down converting is a MediaPort-wide setting. For
the MediaPort 7000 series, in order to convert OP-47 subtitles,
on the I/O Module Properties page, you must first set OP-47
subtitle to/from SD to “Enable” before configuring the options in
this step.
•
•
•
•
Disable Conversion/Insertion: Disables the conversion or
insertion of subtitle information.
Up-convert to SMPTE-2031/Down-convert: Up-converts
or down-converts subtitles to SMPTE-2031. This option is
only available if the player is configured for 25 or 50 Hz frame
rate.
Up-convert to OP-47/Down-convert: Up-converts or downconverts subtitles to OP-47. This option is only available if the
player is configured for 25 or 50 Hz frame rate.
Always output OP-47 Packets:
◦
•
Closed Caption
Handling
If checked, Spectrum will output OP-47 packets
regardless of whether subtitles are present in the SD clip.
If there are no SD subtitles, Spectrum will output empty
OP-47 packets.
◦ If clear, Spectrum will only output OP-47 packets on fields
where subtitles are present in the SD clip.
Onboard Subtitle Insertion: Inserts subtitle information
in the player. This option is only available if the player is
configured for 25 or 50 Hz frame rate. If you have purchased
the subtitle insertion license for this channel, the Configure
Caption button will be activated.
(For any player configured for 59.94 or 29.97 Hz frame rate)
•
•
Disable Insertion: Disables the conversion or insertion of subtitle
information.
Onboard Closed Caption Insertion: Inserts subtitle information in the
player. This option is only available if the player is configured for 59.94 or
29.97 Hz frame rate. If you have purchased the closed caption insertion
license for this channel, the Configure Captions button will be activated.
228
Creating a player
Open Caption
Handling
(For Spectrum X or ChannelPort channels licensed for Open Caption insertion.)
•
•
Record AFD/AR
Override
Disable Insertion: Disables the conversion or insertion of open caption
information.
Open Caption Insertion: Inserts open caption information in the player.
When selected, the Configure Open Captions button will be activated.
(Optional. For Record players on Spectrum systems with 7.3.1 and later.)
•
•
•
Always: when selected, the specified values in the AFD override and
Aspect Ratio override fields will be applied to the input regardless of
whether or not AFD or aspect ratio information is present.
Only if missing: when selected, if AFD or aspect ratio information is
detected on the ingest stream, that information will be stored in the clip.
You may specify values in the AFD override and Aspect Ratio override
fields but those values will only be used if AFD or aspect ratio information is
absent from the ingest stream.
Never: select to disable AFD and aspect ratio override fields.
SDI input AFD
override
(Optional. For Record players on Spectrum systems with 7.3.1 and later.) Enter
a value between 8 to 15. This is the AFD code to be used as the override
setting.
SDI input Aspect
Ratio override
(Optional. For Record players on Spectrum systems with 7.3.1 and later.) Select
the aspect ratio (4x3 or 16x9) to be used as the override setting.
NOTE: AFD/AR override settings for a player will also apply to
proxy tracks for that player.
Related information
About naming files and system elements on page 117
Configuring video tracks on page 231
Configuring subtitle insertion on page 261
Configuring closed caption insertion on page 265
Configuring open caption insertion on page 267
About Cue-to-Timecode with VDCP control on page 315
Configuring players to stop recording when the disk is full on page 27
Configuring players to stop recording when an input error occurs on page 27
About Harmonic timecode behavior on page 308
Configuring players to use 704 up/down conversion by default on page 28
Configuring players to ignore RP186 (chroma LSB) AFD on page 29
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
229
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Wrapper format notes
Note any restrictions that apply to the wrapper format you are using.
Notes on MXF ARD_ZDF_HDF Wrapper Formats
Selecting an MXF ARD_ZDF_HDF wrapper format automatically adds a video and audio track, which do
not include Remove button unlike other players. This is to ensure that there is at least one video track
and one audio track.
MXF
Available with Record players at 25 Hz, this wrapper adds an MPEG-2 XDCAM
ARD_ZDF_HDF01a
HD track and an audio track with 8 channels.
(XDCAM HD, 1080i25,
8 mono tracks)
MXF
Available with Record players at 25 Hz, this wrapper adds an MPEG-2 XDCAM
ARD_ZDF_HDF01b
HD track and an audio track with 16 channels.
(XDCAM HD, 1080i25,
16 mono tracks)
MXF
ARD_ZDF_HDF02a
(AVCI, 1080i25, 8
mono tracks)
Available with Record players at 25 Hz, this wrapper adds an AVC-Intra 1080i
track and an audio track with 8 channels.
MXF
ARD_ZDF_HDF02b
(AVCI, 1080i25, 16
mono tracks)
Available with Record players at 25 Hz, this wrapper adds an AVC-Intra 1080i
track and an audio track with 16 channels.
MXF
ARD_ZDF_HDF03a
(AVCI, 720p50, 8
mono tracks)
Available with Record players at 50 Hz, this wrapper adds an AVC-Intra 720p
track and an audio track with 8 channels.
MXF
ARD_ZDF_HDF03b
(AVCI, 720p50,
16mono tracks)
Available with Record players at 50 Hz, this wrapper adds an AVC-Intra 720p
track and an audio track with 16 channels.
Notes on MXF OP1a Wrapper Formats
Note some points specific to MXF OP1a wrapper formats.
•
•
•
MXF OP1a (Internal-eVTR, Low Latency) Only appears if the selected Frame Rate is 25 or 29.97.
MXF OP1a (Standard, Low Latency) Only appears if the selected Mode includes Record, and the
Spectrum video server firmware is 5.1 or later.
For players using either the MXF OP1a (Internal-eVTR, Low Latency) wrapper or the MXF OP1a
(SMPTE RDD9) wrapper, the video track and first audio track will not display a Remove button unlike
other players. This is to ensure that there is at least one video track and one audio track. To remove
the video and audio track, change the wrapper to something other than MXF OP1a (Internal-eVTR,
Low Latency) or MXF OP1a (SMPTE RDD9). The Remove button will reappear
230
Configuring video tracks
Notes on the MXF AS-02 2011 Wrapper Format
Note some points specific to MXF AS-02 2011 wrapper formats.
•
AS-02 2011 allows you to treat a directory as a clip. To take advantage of this feature, Spectrum
provides two modes that can be used for record players. When you select MXF AS-02 2011 for
a record player, an additional drop-down menu appears. If you select the default option, “when
recording, create subdirectory with .mxf extension,” only directories with a “.mxf” extension will
be treated as clips. If you select “when recording, create subdirectory with no extension,” any
directory present in a player’s active directory will be treated as a clip regardless of name or extension.
However, “.dir” is a reserved directory extension (that is, “clip.dir” will never be seen as a clip).
IMPORTANT: If you select “when recording, create subdirectories with no extension,”
make sure you do not store non-clip directories within a player’s active directory. Doing so
may result in automation systems treating a directory as a clip and inadvertently deleting it.
•
•
Spectrum only supports Simple AS-02 2011 Bundles (that is, single op1b files in a
package).
Modifying an AS-02 2011 Bundle via access of the OP1b wrapper directly will treat the
clip as AS-02 2009, which will not update the manifest .xml file. This can cause the
AS-02 2011 bundle to be invalid.
Notes on the GXF Wrapper Format
Note some points specific to the GFX wrapper format.
•
•
•
At this time, Spectrum supports only playout of GXF-wrapped content, not record.
Spectrum supports GXF for the following media types:
◦ MPEG-2: 525, 625 and 720p, 1080i
◦ DV25 and DVCPRO50: 525, 625
◦ DVCPRO HD
◦ AVC-Intra
When selecting VBI or VANC for a video track with the GFX wrapper, note that the field name may
appear as VBI, VANC, or VBI/VANC depending on attached MediaPort and track type. In all cases,
select GFX Data Track to play out VBI or VANC data
Configuring video tracks
Configure any video tracks for your player.
NOTE: You can add tracks of different video formats to the same player or add multiple
tracks of the same video format. When creating a Player. However, any values you enter or
options you select must be supported by the I/O module to which the Player is attached.
Configuring a DV track
You can add a DV (25 Mbps) track with two channels of embedded audio to the Player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click DV 25 to add a DV video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support DV 25, see the
Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching
devices and setting conversion options.”
231
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
3. From the Configuration drop-down menu, choose between the Simple, Advanced, or Advanced
Back to Back configuration.
•
•
The Simple configuration programs a DV 25 Player that records and plays back only a single type
of clip.
If you select Simple, the Player records and plays back a single type of clip only. No other
configuration is necessary.
Depending on the attached MediaPort, you may configure the player as Advanced or Advanced
Back to Back. An Advanced player can switch between different types of clips, such as DV/
DVCPRO and MPEG-2. But, in order to switch, you must first stop the player, eject the clip(s) from
the timeline and then load the new format clips. An Advanced Back to Back player can playback
a mix of clip types without having to stop.
The Advanced configuration programs a DV 25 Player that records a single type of clip but plays
back different types of DV, DVCPRO, or MPEG clips.
Figure 7-1: Creating a DV Player—Advanced Configuration
If you select Advanced or Advanced Back to Back, the player records a single type of clip but
plays back different types of DV, DVCPRO, or MPEG clips. Configure as follows according to
Player mode:
◦
Play only or Play and Record mode:
Set the I-Frame playback rate in the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
For no I-Frame playback, enter 0.
◦ Set the Long GOP playback rate in the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
For no Long GOP playback, enter 0.
◦ Select the clip type from the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu. If no
DV media types are to be played back, select None. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only,
select 25 Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, select 50 Mbps.
Record Only mode: No additional configuration is needed.
◦
◦
4. As required, click DV 25 again to add more DV tracks to the Player. This procedure would be
required, for example, if you wanted one Player to handle more than one signal, such as a key signal
and a fill signal simultaneously.
If you added a video track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
232
Configuring video tracks
5. If the video definition of the track is Standard or both High and Standard, the VBI Type drop-down
menu will appear. To preserve VBI data, you may select VBI File.
For some I/O modules, if the Media Wrapper Format is MXF OP1a (Standard) or MXF OP1a
(Standard, Low Latency), you may also select SMPTE 436M Track.
If the player is configured to record, a series of eight drop-down boxes appears. Select the lines that
you wish to record. A minimum of one must be selected, otherwise the Player cannot be activated.
Note that the VBI line selection only affects recording. When clips are played back, all VBI lines that
were previously recorded will be inserted into the outgoing signal.
6. As required, add an additional video track of the same or different format.
NOTE: Spectrum supports players that have two attached video tracks of the same
format (DV 25, DVCPRO 50, or MPEG 25 I-Frame).
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring a DVCPRO Player
You can add a DVCPRO (25 Mbps) video track to your player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click DVCPRO to add a DVCPRO 25 video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module by clicking Attach devices. To verify which I/O
modules support DV 25, see the Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on
attaching devices, see “Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
3. From the Configuration drop-down menu, choose between the Simple, Advanced, or Advanced
Back to Back configuration.
•
•
The Simple configuration programs a DVCPRO 25 Player that records and plays back only a
single type of clip.
If you select Simple, the Player records and plays back a single type of clip only. No other
configuration is necessary. Please continue to step 5.
Depending on the attached I/O module, you may configure the Player as Advanced or Advanced
Back to Back. An Advanced Player can switch between different types of clips, such as DV/
DVCPRO and MPEG-2. But, in order to switch, you must first stop the Player, eject the clip(s) from
the timeline and then load the new format clips. An Advanced Back to Back Player can playback
a mix of clip types without having to stop.
The Advanced configuration programs a DVCPRO 25 Player that records a single type of clip but
plays back different types of DV, DVCPRO, or MPEG clips.
Figure 7-2: Creating a DVCPRO 25 Player—Advanced Configuration
233
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
If you select Advanced, the Player records a single type of clip but plays back different types of
DV, DVCPRO, or MPEG clips. Configure as follows according to Player mode:
◦
Play only or Play and Record mode:
Set the I-Frame playback rate in the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
For no I-Frame playback, enter 0.
◦ Set the Long GOP playback rate in the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
For no Long GOP playback, enter 0.
◦ Select the clip type from the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu. If no
DV media types are to be played back, select None. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only,
select 25 Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, select 50 Mbps.
Record Only mode:
◦
◦
An Xfer Speed drop-down box appears only when the mode is set to “Record Only” and only when
the Frame Rate is set to “29.97”. Select between 1x and 4x. When set to 1x, the track may only be
connected to DV/MPEG I/O modules for normal speed ingest of SDI material, or to the SDI/SDTI I/
O module for 1x ingest of DVCPRO material carried over SDTI. When set to 4x, the track may only
be connected to the SDI/SDTI I/O module for 4x ingest of DVCPRO material carried over SDTI.
4. As required, click DVCPRO again to add more DVCPRO tracks to the Player.
If you added a video track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
5. If the video definition of the track is Standard or both High and Standard, the VBI Type drop-down
menu will appear. To preserve VBI data, you may select VBI File.
For some I/O modules, if the Media Wrapper Format is MXF OP1a (Standard) or MXF OP1a
(Standard, Low Latency), you may also select SMPTE 436M Track.
If the player is configured to record, a series of eight drop-down boxes appears. Select the lines that
you wish to record. A minimum of one must be selected, otherwise the Player cannot be activated.
Note that the VBI line selection only affects recording. When clips are played back, all VBI lines that
were previously recorded will be inserted into the outgoing signal.
6. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
234
Configuring video tracks
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Creating a DVCPRO 50 Player
You can add a DVCPRO 50 (Mbps) video track with four channels of embedded audio to the Player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click DVCPRO 50 to add a DVCPRO 50 video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support DV 50, see the
Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching
devices and setting conversion options.”
3. From the Configuration drop-down menu, choose between the Simple, Advanced, or Advanced
Back to Back configuration.
•
•
The Simple configuration programs a DVCPRO 50 Player that records and plays back only a
single type of clip.
If you select Simple, the Player records and plays back a single type of clip only. No other
configuration is necessary.
Depending on the attached I/O module, you may configure the Player as Advanced or Advanced
Back to Back. An Advanced Player can switch between different types of clips, such as DV/
DVCPRO and MPEG-2. But, in order to switch, you must first stop the Player, eject the clip(s) from
the timeline and then load the new format clips. An Advanced Back to Back Player can playback
a mix of clip types without having to stop.
Figure 7-3: Creating a DVCPRO 50 Player—Advanced Configuration
If you select Advanced or Advanced Back to Back, the Player records a single type of clip but
plays back different types of DV, DVCPRO, or MPEG clips. Configure as follows according to
Player mode:
◦
Play only or Play and Record mode:
◦
Set the I-Frame playback rate in the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
For no I-Frame playback, enter 0.
235
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Set the Long GOP playback rate in the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
For no Long GOP playback, enter 0.
◦ Select the clip type from the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu. If no
DV media types are to be played back, select None. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only,
select 25 Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, select 50 Mbps.
Record Only mode: No additional configuration is needed.
◦
◦
4. As required, click DVCPRO 50 again to add more DVCPRO 50 tracks to the Player. This procedure
would be required, for example, if you wanted one Player to handle more than one signal, such as a
key signal and a fill signal simultaneously.
If you added a video track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track to delete it.
5. If the video definition of the track is Standard or both High and Standard, the VBI Type drop-down
menu will appear. To preserve VBI data, you may select VBI File.
For some I/O modules, if the Media Wrapper Format is MXF OP1a (Standard) or MXF OP1a
(Standard, Low Latency), you may also select SMPTE 436M Track.
If the player is configured to record, a series of eight drop-down boxes appears. Select the lines that
you wish to record. A minimum of one must be selected, otherwise the Player cannot be activated.
Note that the VBI line selection only affects recording. When clips are played back, all VBI lines that
were previously recorded will be inserted into the outgoing signal.
6. As required, add an additional video track of the same or different format or continue by adding an
audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Creating a DVCPRO 50 Player on page 235
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Creating a DVCPRO HD player
You can configure a DVCPRO HD player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click DVCPRO HD to add a DVCPRO HD video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support DVCPRO HD,
see the Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see
“Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
236
Configuring video tracks
Figure 7-4: Creating a DVCPRO HD player
If you added a video track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
3. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Creating a DV MPEG SD Player
You can configure a Player, which can play DV and MPEG video tracks back to back.
1. From the Edit Player page, click MPEG-2 to add an MPEG video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support DV and MPEG
SD, see the Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see
“Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
3. From the Configuration drop-down box, select Advanced Back to Back as shown in the following
figure.
237
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Figure 7-5: Creating a DV MPEG SD Player
NOTE: Advanced Back to Back is only available on MPEG base video tracks.
4. From the Record Format drop-down box, select from I-Frame, Long GOP, or IMX.
When Long GOP is selected as the record format, you can select Enable Open GOP if you wish to
record Open GOP.
5. Both Play only and Play and Record Player Modes are supported for DV MPEG Players. Depending
on the Mode selected, proceed as follows:
•
Play and Record
mode
•
•
From the Format drop-down menu, choose the required format: I-Frame, Long GOP, or IMX.
In the Bitrate field specify a valid bitrate for the selected format. For a description of valid bitrates
for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
Select the required Chroma setting. Choose from 4:2:2 or 4:2:0.
In the Maximum I-Frame playback bitrate... field, enter the desired maximum decoding bitrate.
For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper
Formats. Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
In the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field, enter the desired maximum decoding
bitrate. For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and
Wrapper Formats. Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
In the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu, select the maximum bandwidth
of DV type media you expect to play back. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only, choose 25
Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, choose 50 Mbps.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Play only mode
From the Format drop-down menu, select the required format: I-Frame, Long GOP, or IMX.
In the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate field, enter the desired maximum decoding
bitrate. For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and
Wrapper Formats. Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
In the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate field, enter the desired maximum decoding bitrate.
For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper
Formats. Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
In the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu, choose the maximum
bandwidth of DV type media you expect to play back. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only,
choose 25 Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, choose 50 Mbps.
238
Configuring video tracks
6. If the video definition of the track is Standard or both High and Standard, the VBI Type drop-down
menu will appear. If you want to preserve or play back VBI data, select VBI File or Internal.
A DV MPEG Player cannot include embedded VBI. However, if the VBI data option is selected, the
Player can play back both separate and embedded VBI, if embedded VBI is present.
For some I/O modules, if the Media Wrapper Format is MXF OP1a (Standard) or MXF OP1a
(Standard, Low Latency), you may also select SMPTE 436M Track.
NOTE: For clips created with non-Harmonic equipment, Harmonic recommends that
you select Internal.
If the player is configured to record, a series of eight drop-down boxes appears. Select the lines that
you wish to record. A minimum of one must be selected, otherwise the Player cannot be activated.
If you are configuring VANC, note that the following selections reduce the number of available VBI
lines:
◦
◦
◦
If the player frame rate is 29.97 Hz, this reduces available VBI lines by one.
If VITC capture is selected from the Attach Devices page, this reduces available VBI lines by two.
Line 21 Closed Captioning reduces available VBI lines by one.
Note that the VBI line selection only affects recording. When clips are played back, all VBI lines
that were previously recorded will be inserted into the outgoing signal.
7. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC type drop-down
menu. Depending on your wrapper format, you may select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track.
IMPORTANT: Avoid selecting VANC for SD video without assistance from Harmonic
technical support.
NOTE: SMPTE 436M is only available for MXF clips, and is only supported on some I/
O modules for playout with SD material.
In the Maximum number of VANC data field, enter the desired bytes per frame value. For
more information about VANC for SD video, contact Harmonic technical support. VANC capture
adjustments (number of bytes) can only be controlled by some I/O modules. Adjusting the number of
bytes for other I/O modules is not supported.
8. Continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Creating an MPEG SD Player
You can add an MPEG video track (with selectable bitrates) to a Player for SD output.
1. From the Edit Player page, click MPEG-2 to add an MPEG video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support MPEG-2,
Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching
devices and setting conversion options.”
239
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
NOTE: For the MediaPort 5320 series, if you selected Record Only or Play and
Record for the Mode, make sure that, in the Video Definition drop-down menu,
Standard is selected. Attempting to encode MPEG-2 Long GOP video which contains
difficult content, such as “strobe” or heavily flashing lights, at a bit rate of 18 Mb/s,
may result in encoder errors on the MediaPort 5320 series. These errors may include
video artifacts when the recorded content is played back. If the attached I/O module
does not support the selected player settings, then the following message appears:
“Specified combination of video parameters is not supported by the attached device.”
For a description of valid bitrates and formats for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum
Media and Wrapper Formats.
3. From the Configuration drop-down box, select between the Simple, Advanced, or Advanced Back
to Back configuration.
•
•
The Simple configuration allows you to design an MPEG Player that records and plays back only
a single type of MPEG clip.
Clip type is selected using the Format or Record Format field. The bitrate for both the encoded
and the decoded clip must be the same.
Depending on the attached MediaPort, you may configure the Player as Advanced or Advanced
Back to Back. An Advanced Player can switch between different types of clips, such as DV/
DVCPRO and MPEG-2. But, in order to switch, you must first stop the Player, eject the clip(s) from
the timeline and then load the new format clips. An Advanced Back to Back Player can playback
a mix of clip types without having to stop.
The Advanced Back to Back configuration allows you to design an MPEG Player that records
and plays back different types of MPEG and DV clips
Figure 7-6: Creating an MPEG SD Player—Advanced Configuration
The encoded clip type is selected using the Record Format field, and the decoded clip types are
selected using two Playback Bitrate fields; one for I-Frame only clips and one for Long GOP
clips. With this configuration, you can play back clips that were encoded at different bitrates.
However, by supporting different playback bitrates, the Player utilizes a larger IEEE 1394
bandwidth.
240
Configuring video tracks
NOTE: The Advanced or Advanced Back to Back configuration page changes
based on the selected Player Mode: If Play and Record is selected, both the
Record Bitrate and Playback Bitrate fields appear. If Record Only is selected,
only the Record Bitrate field appears. If Play only is selected, only the Playback
Bitrate fields appear.
4. Depending on the configuration selected, proceed as follows:
•
•
◦
If you selected Simple, in the Format or Record Format and Bitrate fields, choose the required
format and specify a bitrate for that format. Continue to step 6. For a description of valid bitrates
for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. Clips with bitrates below the
entered value can also be played.
NOTE: When Long GOP is selected as the record format, and the selected frame
rate is 25Hz, the GOP Length drop-down menu appears. You may select a GOP
length of 12 (recommended) or 15.When Long GOP is selected as the record
format, you can select Enable Open GOP if you wish to record Open GOP.
If you selected Advanced or Advanced Back to Back, your entries now depend on the Player
mode:
Play and Record mode:
◦
◦
NOTE: When Long GOP is selected as the record format, and the selected
frame rate is 25Hz, the GOP Length drop-down menu appears. You may select
a GOP length of 12 (per standard) or 15 (not recommended).When Long GOP
is selected as the record format, if you wish to record Open GOP, you can select
Enable Open GOP.
◦ In the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate... fields, enter the desired maximum decoding
bitrate. For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and
Wrapper Formats. Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
◦ In the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field, enter the desired maximum decoding
bitrate. For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and
Wrapper Formats. Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
◦ In the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu, choose the maximum
bandwidth of DV type media you expect to play back. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only,
choose 25 Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, choose 50 Mbps.
Record Only mode:
◦
◦
In the Record Format and Bitrate field choose the required format and specify a bitrate for that
format.
In the Record Format and Bitrate fields, choose the required format and specify a bitrate for
that format.
NOTE: When Long GOP is selected as the record format, and the selected
frame rate is 25Hz, the GOP Length drop-down menu appears. You may select
a GOP length of 12 (per standard) or 15 (not recommended).When Long GOP
is selected as the record format, if you wish to record Open GOP, you can select
Enable Open GOP.
Play only mode:
◦
In the Maximum I-Frame playback bitrate... field, enter the desired maximum decoding
bitrate. For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and
Wrapper Formats. Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
241
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
◦
◦
In the Maximum Long GOP Bitrate field, enter the desired maximum decoding bitrate. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
Clips with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
In the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu, choose the maximum
bandwidth of DV type media you expect to play back. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only,
choose 25 Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, choose 50 Mbps.
5. Select the required Chroma setting. Choose from 4:2:2 or 4:2:0.
6. If the video definition of the track is Standard or both High and Standard, the VBI Type drop-down
menu will appear. If you want to preserve or play back VBI data, from the VBI Type drop-down menu,
select either Internal or VBI File.
For some I/O modules, if the Media Wrapper Format is MXF OP1a (Standard) or MXF OP1a
(Standard, Low Latency), you may also select SMPTE 436M Track.
NOTE: For clips created with non-Harmonic equipment, Harmonic recommends that
you select Internal.
If the player is configured to record, a series of eight drop-down boxes appears. Select the lines that
you wish to record. A minimum of one must be selected, otherwise the Player cannot be activated.
For some I/O modules, if you are also configuring VANC for SD video, note that the following
selections reduce the number of available VBI lines:
•
•
•
If the player frame rate is 29.97 Hz, this reduces available VBI lines by one.
If VITC capture is selected from the Attach Devices page, this reduces available VBI lines by two.
Line 21 Closed Captioning reduces available VBI lines by one.
Note that the VBI line selection only affects recording. When clips are played back, all VBI lines
that were previously recorded will be inserted into the outgoing signal.
7. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC type drop-down
menu. Depending on your wrapper format, you may select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track.
IMPORTANT: Avoid selecting VANC for SD video without assistance from Harmonic
technical support.
NOTE: SMPTE 436M is only available for MXF clips, and is only supported on some I/
O modules for playout with SD material.
In the Maximum Number of VANC data field, enter the desired bytes per frame value. For more
information about VANC for SD video, contact Harmonic technical support.
VANC capture adjustments (number of bytes) can be controlled for some I/O modules.
NOTE: Depending on the attached I/O module, an option for MPEG-1 Proxy Record
(for ‘Record Only’ or ‘Play and Record’ players) may be available.
8. As required, add an additional video track of the same or different format.
9. Continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
242
Configuring video tracks
About recording proxies with the MediaPort 5000 series on page 270
Recording proxies with the MediaPort 7000 series on page 269
About VANC implementation in Spectrum on page 304
Creating an MPEG HD Play only Player
You can add an MPEG video track (with selectable bitrates) to a Player for HD output.
1. From the Edit Player page, click MPEG-2 to add an MPEG video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support MPEG HD,
Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching
devices and setting conversion options.”
Figure 7-7: MPEG HD Play only player
3. If you want to preserve or play back VBI data, select an option from the VBI Type drop-down menu:
Internal, VBI File, or SMPTE 436M Track (options will vary based on wrapper format).
NOTE: For clips created with non-Harmonic equipment, Harmonic recommends that
you select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track. SMPTE 436M is only available for MXF
clips, and is only supported some I/O modules with playout.
4. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC Type drop-down
menu. Depending on your wrapper format, you may select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track.
In the Maximum number of VANC data field, enter the desired bytes per frame value. VANC capture
adjustments (number of bytes) can be controlled for some I/O modules.
5. If you wish to adjust Output Timing, click the Output Timing button.
6. As required, add an additional video track of the same or different format or: continue by adding an
audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Adjusting output timing on page 300
About VANC implementation in Spectrum on page 304
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
243
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Creating an MPEG HD Record only Player
You can add an MPEG video track to a Player for HD ingest.
1. From the Edit Player page, make sure the Mode is set to Record Only.
2. Click MPEG-2 to add an MPEG video track to the Player.
3. From the Record Format drop-down box, select the media format to use. Choose between I-Frame,
Long GOP, IMX, or a preset format. The following preset formats can be used to create clips, which
can be edited by non-linear edit software on your own computer. Make sure to select the correct
wrapper type required by your non-linear edit software.
NOTE: When Long GOP is selected as the record format, you can select Enable
Open GOP if you wish to record Open GOP.
Preset formats include:
HDV 720. This format automatically enters a bitrate of 19 Mbps and a chroma of 4 2:0 .
4. XDCAM EX for NLE. This format automatically enters a bitrate of 35 Mbps and a chroma of 42:0.
5. XDCAM HD for NLE.
•
•
If you have selected a frame rate of 25 or 29.97, then you can select between bitrates of 18, 25,
35, or 50. Bitrates of 18, 25, and 35 enter a chroma of 4:2:0. Bitrate of 50 enters a chroma of
4:2:2.
If you have selected a frame rate of 50 or 59.94, then this format automatically enters a bitrate of
50 and a chroma of 4:2:2
NOTE: The available formats vary depending on the selected Mode, Frame Rate,
and Configuration.
6. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support MPEG HD
record, Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see
“Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
Figure 7-8: Creating an MPEG HD Record Only Player
7. In the Bitrate drop down box, specify the required bitrate.
NOTE: The bitrate ranges/values listed for I-Frame, Long GOP, and IMX are those
supported by a Spectrum system in general. A particular type of I/O module attached
to a Spectrum video server may have stricter limits. Refer to Spectrum Media and
Wrapper Formats for detailed information according to I/O module type.
244
Configuring video tracks
8. Select the required Chroma setting. Choose from 4:2:2 or 4:2:0. Depending on previous selections
this value may be entered automatically.
9. If the video definition of the track is Standard or both High and Standard, the VBI Type drop-down
menu will appear. If you want to preserve or play back VBI data, select an option from the VBI Type
drop-down menu: Internal, VBI Data, or SMPTE 436M Track (options will vary based on wrapper
format).
NOTE: For clips created with non-Harmonic equipment, Harmonic recommends that
you select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track.
SMPTE 436M is only available for MXF clips, and is only supported on some I/O
modules.
Using the eight drop-down VBI line selection boxes, select the lines that you wish to record. A
minimum of one line must be selected.
Note that the VBI line selection only affects recording. When clips are played back, all VBI lines that
were previously recorded will be inserted into the outgoing signal.
10. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC Type drop-down
menu. Depending on your wrapper format, you may select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track.
NOTE: SMPTE 436M is only available for MXF clips, and is only supported on some I/
O modules.
In the Maximum number of VANC data field, enter the desired bytes per frame value. VANC capture
adjustments (number of bytes) can be controlled for some IO modules.
NOTE: Depending on the attached I/O module, the option for MPEG-1 Proxy Record
may be available.
11. As required, add an additional video track of the same or different format, or continue by adding an
audio track. Refer to for instructions on selecting audio tracks.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Recording proxies on page 269
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
About VANC implementation in Spectrum on page 304
Creating an MPEG SD Player to Demux Transport Streams and VBI Data
You can create an MPEG SD Player to demux transport streams and VBI data.
1. Follow the procedure to create an MPEG SD player.
2. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track. Note the
following important points regarding audio tracks:
•
•
AES3 elementary streams must comply with SMPTE 302M (one Packetized Elementary Stream
(PES) packet per frame, one 302 header per PES packet).
A maximum of two Program Identifiers (PIDs) containing 2, 4, or 8 channels per PID, with 1, 2, 4,
or 8 channels per file are supported where the minimum channels per PID is greater than or equal
to the number of channels per file.
245
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
•
There is no need to match the channel count of the Player and stream since record no longer
terminates and black is inserted if the stream is absent.
3. Connect the tracks to the MediaPort 4010.
Additional information about demuxing:
•
•
•
Only one program can be demuxed at one time.
If no Program Selection number has been assigned using the Attach Devices page of the
SystemManager application, the first program found will be demuxed by the MediaPort 4010.
When configuring Record players to demultiplex ATSC streams using the MediaPort 4010, the
player must be configured with the exact number of audio channels present in the feed. If the
Demux player is configured for 4 channels of audio and only two channels are present, the stream
will not be recorded.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Creating an MPEG HD Player to Demux Transport Streams
To create an MPEG HD Player to demux transport streams:
1. Follow the procedure to create an MPEG HD player.
2. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track. Note the
following important points regarding audio tracks:
•
•
•
AES3 elementary streams must comply with SMPTE 302M (one Packetized Elementary Stream
(PES) packet per frame, one 302 header per PES packet).
A maximum of two Program Identifiers (PIDs) containing 2, 4, or 8 channels per PID, with 1, 2, 4,
or 8 channels per file are supported where the minimum channels per PID is greater than or equal
to the number of channels per file.
There is no need to match the channel count of the Player and stream since record no longer
terminates and black is inserted if the stream is absent.
3. Connect the tracks to the MediaPort 4010.
Additional information about demuxing
•
•
•
Only one program can be demuxed at one time.
If no Program Selection number has been assigned using the Attach Devices page of the
SystemManager application, the first program found will be demuxed by the MediaPort 4010.
When configuring Record players to demultiplex ATSC streams using the MediaPort 4010, the
player must be configured with the exact number of audio channels present in the feed. If the
Demux player is configured for 4 channels of audio and only 2 channels are present, the stream
will not be recorded.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
246
Configuring video tracks
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Creating an Uncompressed (SD only) player
You can add an Uncompressed (SD only) video track to a player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click Uncompressed (SD only) to add a 10-bit SDI video track to the
Player. This media type does not include embedded audio.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support Uncompressed
SD, Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see
“Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
3. As required, click Uncompressed (SD only) again to add more Uncompressed (SD only) tracks to
the Player.
4. If you added a video track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
5. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
About Recording and Playing Back XDCAM HD Clips
You can record XDCAM HD compatible clips by setting up an external encoder and recording ASI using a
MediaPort 4010, or by using the Spectrum X, MediaPort 7300 or 5320 series. These MediaPorts have a
multi-rate MPEG-2 HD encoder that can encode video at the following ranges: I-Frame 50-100 Mbps and
Long GOP 18-85 Mbps. They can support either the 4:2:0 (main) or 4:2:2 (studio) compression profiles.
Each Spectrum X SDI I/O card, MediaPort 7300 series module and MediaPort 5321 has two HD inputs
and the MediaPort 5322 has four.
Using the SystemManager application, you can set up a player that will record at the XDCAM HD
operating points with 1440 sampling, if desired.
Creating an XDCAM HD or XDCAM EX Player
You can create an XDCAM HD or XDCAM EX player, which is compliant with several non-linear editors,
including Final Cut Pro,
1. From the Edit Player page, make sure the Mode is set to either Record Only or Play or Record.
2. Click MPEG-2 to add an MPEG video track to the Player.
3. From the Record Format drop-down box, select the media format to use. Choose between XDCAM
HD for NLE, or XDCAM EX for NLE. The following preset formats can be used to create clips, which
can be edited by non-linear edit software on your own computer. Make sure to select the correct
wrapper type required by your non-linear edit software.
•
•
XDCAM EX for NLE: This format automatically enters a bitrate of 35 Mbps and a chroma of 4:2:0.
XDCAM HD for NLE:
247
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
◦
◦
If you have selected a frame rate of 25 or 29.97, then you can select between bitrates of 18, 25,
35, or 50. Bitrates of 18, 25, and 35 enter a chroma of 4:2:0. Bitrate of 50 enters a chroma of
4:2:2.
If you have selected a frame rate of 50 or 59.94, then this format automatically enters a bitrate
of 50 and a chroma of 4:2:2.
NOTE: The available formats vary depending on the selected Mode, Frame Rate, and
Configuration.
4. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support XDCAM HD or
XDCAM EX, Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see
“Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
NOTE: For the MediaPort 5320 series, make sure that, in the Video Definition dropdown menu, High is selected.
5. In the Configuration drop-down menu, select either Simple, Advanced, or Advanced Back to
Back.
NOTE: To play Final Cut Pro-exported XDCAM-HD 422 50 Mb clips and record clips
editable by Final Cut Pro, Harmonic recommends that you create two separate players
using the Simple configuration: one player for record set at 50 Mbps, and another
player for play out, with the bit rate set high enough to account for any variances in the
exported file (60 Mbps or above).
•
•
The Simple configuration allows you to design an MPEG Player that records and plays back only
a single type of MPEG clip.
Clip type is selected using the Format or Record Format field. The bitrate for both the encoded
and the decoded clip must be the same.
Depending on the attached MediaPort, you may configure the Player as Advanced or Advanced
Back to Back. An Advanced Player can switch between different types of clips, such as DV/
DVCPRO and MPEG-2. But, in order to switch, you must first stop the Player, eject the clip(s) from
the timeline and then load the new format clips. An Advanced Back to Back Player can playback
a mix of clip types without having to stop.
The Advanced configuration allows you to design an MPEG Player that records and plays back
different types of MPEG and DV clips.
Figure 7-9: Creating an XDCAM HD Player—Advanced Configuration
248
Configuring video tracks
The encoded clip type is selected using the Format or Record Format field, and the decoded
clip types are selected using two Playback Bitrate fields; one for I-Frame only clips and one for
Long GOP clips. With this configuration, you can play back clips that were encoded at different
bitrates. However, by supporting different playback bitrates, the Player utilizes a larger IEEE 1394
bandwidth.
IMPORTANT: The available fields in the Advanced configuration change according
to the selected Player mode: If “Play and Record” is selected, both the Record
Bitrate and Playback Bitrate fields appear. If “Record Only” is selected, only the
Record Bitrate field appears. If “Play Only” is selected, only the Playback Bitrate
fields appear.
6. Depending on the configuration selected, proceed as follows:
•
•
◦
If you selected Simple, enter a valid bit rate for the selected format. Note that your options may
vary depending on previous selections. For a description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer
to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats.
If you selected Advanced or Advanced Back to Back, your entries now depend on the Player
mode:
Play or Record mode:
In the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate... field, leave the value as 0.
In the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field, enter a valid bitrate. For a description of
valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. Clips with
bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
◦ In the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... field, leave the value as None.
Record Only mode:
◦
◦
◦
◦
In the Record Format and Bitrate fields, make sure the required format and bitrate for that
format is entered. See step 3.
7. If necessary, select the required Chroma setting. Choose from 4:2:2 or 4:2:0. In most cases, this
setting will be automatically entered.
8. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC Type drop-down
menu. Depending on your wrapper format, you may select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track.
NOTE: SMPTE 436M is only available for MXF clips, and is only supported on some I/
O modules.
In the Maximum number of VANC data field, enter the desired bytes per frame value. VANC capture
adjustments (number of bytes) can be controlled for some I/O modules.
NOTE: Depending on the attached I/O module, an option for MPEG-1 Proxy Record
(for ‘Record Only’ or ‘Play and Record’ players) may be available.
9. As required, add an additional video track of the same or different format.
NOTE: Support is provided for Players which have two attached video tracks of the
same format (MPEG 25 I-Frame).
10. Continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
249
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
About recording proxies with the MediaPort 5000 series on page 270
Recording proxies with the MediaPort 7000 series on page 269
About VANC implementation in Spectrum on page 304
Creating an XDCAM-HD RDD9 Player
You can create an RDD9 compliant XDCAM-HD player (inter-operable with Sony XDCAM-HD devices).
Note the following restrictions with XDCAM-HD RDD9 players.
•
•
•
•
•
•
This player is only available in a simple configuration, meaning it will record and play back only a
single type of MPEG-2 clip.
This player type only allows one MPEG-2 video track. Once the MPEG-2 video track appears, buttons
for all other video tracks are grayed out.
The only available audio file type is .wav.
Audio channels are recorded with 1 channel per file
For record, you must have a minimum of 2 audio channels and a maximum of 16.
If the bit rate for the video is 18, 25, or 35 Mbps, then the record sample size for the audio track is set
to 16 bps. If the bit rate for the video is 50 Mbps, then the record sample size for the audio track is set
to 24 bps.
1. From the Edit Player page, make sure the Mode is set to either Record Only or Play or Record.
2. From the Media Wrapper Format drop down menu, select one of the following:
•
•
MXF OP1a (SMPTE RDD9)
MXF OP1A (Internal, early Sony style XDCAM-HD RDD9)
The first option, MXF OP1a (SMPTE RDD9), will work with most editors. If you are using an editor,
such as Edius, that requires the early Sony RDD9 format, then select MXF OP1A (Internal, early
Sony style XDCAM-HD RDD9). If you are unsure of which one to select, first try MXF OP1a
(SMPTE RDD9) and, only if it does not work, then try MXF OP1A (Internal, early Sony style
XDCAM-HD RDD9).
This automatically adds an MPEG-2 video track and a .wav audio track.
3. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support MPEG-2,
Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching
devices and setting conversion options.”
250
Configuring video tracks
Figure 7-10: Creating an XDCAM-HD RDD9 player
NOTE: To play Final Cut Pro-exported XDCAM-HD 422 50 Mb clips and record clips
editable by Final Cut Pro, Harmonic recommends that you create two separate players
using the Simple configuration: one player for record set at 50 Mbps, and another
player for play out, with the bit rate set high enough to account for any variances in the
exported file (60 Mbps or above).
4. If it is not already specified, in the Bitrate drop down box, specify the required bitrate.
The Chroma is determined automatically by the bit rate setting. A bit rate of 18, 25, and 35 Mbps
results in chroma: 4:2:0. A bit rate of 50 Mbps results in chroma: 4:2:2.
5. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC Type drop-down
menu. Depending on your wrapper format, you may select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track.
NOTE: SMPTE 436M is only available for MXF clips, and is only supported on some I/
O modules with playout.
In the Maximum number of VANC data field, enter the desired bytes per frame value. VANC capture
adjustments (number of bytes) can only be controlled for some I/O modules.
NOTE: Depending on the attached I/O module, an option for MPEG-1 Proxy Record
(for ‘Record Only’ or ‘Play and Record’ players) may be available.
6. As required, add an additional audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
251
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
About recording proxies with the MediaPort 5000 series on page 270
Recording proxies with the MediaPort 7000 series on page 269
About VANC implementation in Spectrum on page 304
Creating a DNxHD/VC-3 player
You can add a DNxHD/VC-3 video track to the Player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click DNxHD/VC-3 to add a DNxHD/VC-3 video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support VC-3, Spectrum
Media and Wrapper Formats document. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching devices and
setting conversion options.”
3. In the Configuration drop-down menu, select either Simple or Advanced Back to Back.
•
•
The Simple configuration allows you to design a Player that records or plays back only a single
type of DNxHD/VC-3 clip.
An Advanced Back to Back player can switch between different types of clips, such as DNxHD/
VC-3 and MPEG-2 without having to stop.
Figure 7-11: Creating a DNxHD/VC-3 Player—Advanced Configuration
The decoded clip types are selected using the Playback bit rate fields. With this configuration,
you can play back clips that were encoded at different bitrates. However, by supporting different
playback bitrates, the Player utilizes a larger IEEE 1394 bandwidth.
4. Depending on the configuration selected, proceed as follows:
5. If you selected Simple, continue to the next step.
If you selected Advanced Back to Back, enter a valid bit rate for the selected format. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. Clips
with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
For VC-3 media playback, the bit rate will be entered automatically depending on the player frame
rate:
•
•
For NTSC frame rates (59.94Hz or 29.97Hz), the bit rate will be 145 Mbps.
For PAL frame rates (50Hz or 25Hz), the bit rates will be 120 Mbps.
6. As required, click DNxHD/VC-3 again to add more DNxHD/VC-3 tracks to the Player. If you added a
video track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
7. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
252
Configuring video tracks
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Creating a Data Player (DVB/ASI)
You can add a Data track to the Player, for use in DVB/ASI applications.
1. From the Edit player page, click Data to add a data track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the MediaPort 4010 for recording and playing.
3. Enter a bitrate value in the Maximum Bitrate field. The valid bitrate field is 2 -100.0 Mbps.
4. If you added a track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
NOTE: Audio tracks should not be added to a Data Player.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Creating an AVC-Intra Player
You can add an AVC-Intra video track to the Player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click AVC-Intra to add an AVC-Intra video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module by clicking Attach Devices. To verify which I/O
modules support AVC-Intra, see Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For details on attaching
devices, see “Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
NOTE: To play out 3G on the Spectrum X, you must select 1080p/50 for the Primary/
Secondary Output Video Format on the Attach Devices page.
Figure 7-12: Creating an AVC-Intra player
3. For Record or Play and Record players at 50 or 59.94 Hz, select the Record Video Definition: High or
3G.
253
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
4. Depending on the player mode, the Configuration field may appear. Select Simple to allow only one
clip type for record and playback. Select Advanced Back to Back to allow different clip types to be
played back. Note this setting only allows one clip type for record.
5. In the Preset field, you may select the following options: XAVC, AVCU, or AVC.
NOTE: For the MediaPort 7000 series, you may create a player for playout of the
XAVC media format, which is supported with the AVCI-PLAY license and Spectrum 7.7
or later.
6. In the AVCI Record Format field, select either Class 50 or Class 100 as required.
7. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC Type drop-down
menu. Depending on your wrapper format, you may select Internal or SMPTE 436M Track. If you
select an option for VANC, enter a value for the number of bytes of VANC data per frame to be
preserved.
NOTE: Depending on the properties of the attached I/O module, the option for
MPEG-1 Proxy Record may be available.
8. If you have attached a MediaPort 7600 and have selected a Frame Rate of either 25 Hz or 29.97 Hz
and a Video Definition of High, a PsF video input check box appears. Check this option if you wish
to record progressive segmented frame content (1920x1080/25PsF or 1920x1080/29.97PsF).
NOTE: With Spectrum 8.0 and later, the PsF video input option is not available.
9. For Advanced Back to Back players, select the play back bit rates:
•
•
•
•
Set the I-Frame playback rate in the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your device, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For no
I-Frame playback, enter 0.
Set the Long GOP playback rate in the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your device, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For no
Long GOP playback, enter 0.
Select the clip type from the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu. If no DV
media types are to be played back, select None. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only, select 25
Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, select 50 Mbps
Select the AVCI Playback Format: select either Class 50 or Class 100 as required.
NOTE: For record AVC-Intra players that use an MXF wrapper type, you may select
to record SPS (Sequence Parameter Set) and PPS (Picture Parameters Set) data in
each frame. To do this, you must select Record SPS/PPS in every frame of AVCI
clips that use MXF wrapper on the Properties page for the connected Spectrum
server.
10. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
About VANC implementation in Spectrum on page 304
About recording proxies with the MediaPort 5000 series on page 270
Recording proxies with the MediaPort 7000 series on page 269
254
Configuring video tracks
Creating an AVC-Intra UHD player
UHD playout and record is supported on the Spectrum X for AVC-Intra players with the MXF OP1a
wrapper.
Before you begin
For the I/O module that will be attached to this player, make sure:
•
•
The video and audio I/O is connected as described in the "Spectrum X SDI I/O connectors: UHD
channel" section of the Spectrum X Quick Reference Guide.
The Channel Configuration option on the I/O Module Properties page is set to Ultra.
NOTE: For UHD Record players, note that Harmonic only supports encode of the UHD
format. This means the input must be a UHD raster.
1. From the Edit Player page, for Frame Rate, select either 50 or 25 or 59.94 or 29.97.
2. For Player Type, select Branded or Record. Hybrid is not supported for UHD players.
3. Configure EE Mode as follows:.
◦
◦
For Play only players, EE Mode is set to Never by default.
For Record only players, for optimal performance, Harmonic recommends that you set the player
to Normal.
CAUTION: For UHD Record players, configuring the EE Mode to any setting other
than Normal may result in a delay when previewing material.
4. For Media Wrapper Format, select MXF OP1a (Standard).
5. Click AVC-Intra to add an AVC-Intra video track to the Player.
6. In the AVC-Intra track section, for Preset, select AVCU or XAVC.
7. For the AVCI Playback Format drop-down menu:
◦
◦
If you selected the XAVC preset, select Intra 4:2:2.
If you selected the AVCU preset, select Intra 4k 4:2:2.
8. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module by clicking Attach Devices. For details, see
“Attaching devices and setting conversion options.”
9. On the Attach Devices page, in the Primary Output Video Format column, select either
Interleaved or square division depending on the requirements of your downstream equipment.
10. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
255
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Result:
The following shows a sample AVC-Intra track configured for UHD.
Figure 7-13: AVC-Intra UHD track
Creating an AVC-Long GOP player
You can add an AVC-Long GOP video track to the Player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click AVC-Lgop to add an AVC Long GOP video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support AVC-Long GOP,
see Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching devices
and setting conversion options.”
NOTE: To play out 3G on the Spectrum X, you must select 1080p/50 for the Primary/
Secondary Output Video Format on the Attach Devices page.
Figure 7-14: Creating an AVC-Long GOP player
3. Depending on the player mode, the Configuration field may appear. Select Simple to allow only one
clip type for record and playback. Select Advanced Back to Back to allow different clip types to be
played back. Note this setting only allows one clip type for record.
4. For Record or Play and Record players, under Video Definition, select Standard or High. (Options
vary depending on player frame rate.)
NOTE: Spectrum does not support 3G AVC Long GOP record at this time.
5. In the Preset field, you may select the following options: XAVC, AVCU, or AVC.
•
For the AVCU preset, select from ClassG12, ClassG25, or ClassG50 (Options vary depending on
video definition.)
256
Configuring video tracks
•
For the XAVC and AVC presets, select the desired Bitrate and/or Sampling from the respective
menus.
6. If you want to preserve or playback VANC data, select an option from the VANC Type drop-down
menu. With the MXF OP1a(Standard) wrapper type, you may select None or SMPTE 436M Track. If
you select an option for VANC, enter a value for the number of bytes of VANC data per frame to be
preserved.
7. For Advanced Back to Back players, select the play back bit rates:
•
•
•
•
Set the I-Frame playback rate in the Maximum I-Frame only playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your device, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For no
I-Frame playback, enter 0.
Set the Long GOP playback rate in the Maximum Long GOP playback bitrate... field. For a
description of valid bitrates for your device, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For no
Long GOP playback, enter 0.
Select the clip type from the Maximum DV media playback Bitrate... drop-down menu. If no DV
media types are to be played back, select None. If using DV 25 or DVCPRO media only, select 25
Mbps. If using DVCPRO 50 media, select 50 Mbps
Select the AVCI Playback Format: select either Class 50 or Class 100 as required.
8. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
About VANC implementation in Spectrum on page 304
Creating a ProRes Player
You can add a ProRes video track to the Player.
1. From the Edit Player page, click ProRes to add a ProRes video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support ProRes, see
Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching devices and
setting conversion options.”
3. In the Configuration drop-down menu, select either Simple or Advanced Back to Back.
•
•
The Simple configuration allows you to design a Player that plays back only a single type of
ProRes clip.
An Advanced Back to Back player can switch between different types of clips, such as ProRes
and MPEG-2 without having to stop.
257
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Figure 7-15: Creating a ProRes Player—Advanced Configuration
The decoded clip types are selected using the Playback bit rate fields. With this configuration,
you can play back clips that were encoded at different bitrates. However, by supporting different
playback bitrates, the Player utilizes a larger IEEE 1394 bandwidth.
4. Depending on the configuration selected, proceed as follows:
5. If you selected Simple, continue to the next step.
If you selected Advanced Back to Back, enter a valid bit rate for the selected format. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. Clips
with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
For Maximum ProRes media Playback bit rate, the bit rate will be entered automatically depending
on the player frame rate:
•
•
For NTSC frame rates (59.94Hz or 29.97Hz), the bit rate will be 157 Mbps.
For PAL frame rates (50Hz or 25Hz), the bit rates will be 122 Mbps.
6. As required, click ProRes again to add more ProRes tracks to the Player. If you added a video track
by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
7. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Creating an AVC (H.264) Player
You can add an AVC video track to the Player.
IMPORTANT: Spectrum ChannelPort supports playout of AVC at PitchBlue® operating
points and AVC-Intra operating points only. Attempting to play other AVC clips may result in
a failure to play.
NOTE: If you are configuring an AVC player to play PitchBlue AVC clips, you must use an
NTSC frame rate (59.94Hz or 29.97Hz).
258
Configuring video tracks
1. From the Edit Player page, click AVC/H.264 to add an AVC video track to the Player.
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. To verify which I/O modules support AVC/H.264, see
Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. For details on attaching devices, see “Attaching devices and
setting conversion options.”
3. In the Configuration drop-down menu, select either Simple or Advanced Back to Back.
The Simple configuration allows you to design a Player that plays back only a single type of AVC clip.
An Advanced Back to Back player can switch between different types of clips, such as AVC and
MPEG-2 without having to stop.
Figure 7-16: Creating an AVC Player—Advanced configuration
The decoded clip types are selected using the Playback bit rate fields. With this configuration, you
can play back clips that were encoded at different bitrates. However, by supporting different playback
bitrates, the Player utilizes a larger IEEE 1394 bandwidth.
4. Depending on the configuration selected, proceed as follows:
5. If you selected Simple, continue to the next step.
If you selected Advanced Back to Back, enter a valid bit rate for the selected format. For a
description of valid bitrates for your I/O module, refer to Spectrum Media and Wrapper Formats. Clips
with bitrates below the entered value can also be played.
6. As required, click AVC/H.264 again to add more AVC tracks to the Player. If you added a video track
by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
7. As required, add a video track of a different format, or continue by adding an audio track.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Edit Player options on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
259
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Creating a Compressed Stream Player
With Spectrum 8.3 and later, you can configure a Compressed Stream Player to record a selected
program from a network transport stream, wrapped as .MXF or .MXF low latency to the Spectrum file
system.
Before you begin
Follow the first four procedures described in Configuring transport stream ingest on page 88.
Note the following points about compressed stream players:
•
•
•
•
Compressed stream players are supported only on Spectrum X in internal storage mode.
A compressed stream player records directly to the video server and is not attached to an I/O module.
Spectrum decodes MPEG or AAC compressed audio to PCM audio.
Spectrum will rewrap ARIB captions or metadata if present in the program source
1. Create a player as described in the first three steps of "Creating a player." From the Edit Player page,
click Compressed Stream Player. Note that the Add Track buttons will be grayed out as well as
some player options.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the list of player options, and verify that the Required Licensed Features
field shows FW-MIP-9000-TS-INGEST, and that Current Available Licenses shows at least 1. If this
license is not available, contact your Harmonic representative to acquire a license.
3. For the Default Clip Directory, either leave empty to ingest to clip.dir or enter a directory on the
Spectrum file system to be used for transport stream ingest.
Note that the directory must be created prior to configuring the player, and the full path name must
be used (for example, /fs0/mydirectory) in the Default Clip Directory field. To create directories on the
Spectrum video server file system, ensure that you have first mapped the file system to a network
drive. Once this is done, directories can be created in the normal way. The Spectrum video server
expects directory names to be separated using forward slashes (‘/’,) not backward slashes as used
within Microsoft Windows.
NOTE: If you have a configured a Watch Folder on your system, do not specify that
folder for your Default Clip Directory.
4. Edit the following player options that relate to transport stream ingest:
Local Interface
Select the Ethernet interface that you want to use for the transport stream
player. Use only eth2, eth3, eth4, and eth5 on the Spectrum X. Interfaces
that are not connected or configured will be not be selectable in this menu.
Select RouteTable
If you have configured a RouteTable for your transport stream ingest, select
it from the drop-down menu.
Select Feed
If you have selected a RouteTable, select a feed specified in your
RouteTable from the drop-down menu.
NOTE: Selecting a RouteTable feed will automatically
populate the remaining transport stream fields with the
parameters specified in the RouteTable. Changing the
settings after selecting a feed does not automatically change
the RouteTable settings. You can only modify RouteTables
from the RouteTable configuration page.
260
Configuring video tracks
Source Address
(Optional) If the IP address for the source transport stream is available,
enter that IP address. If not, leave this field empty.
Multicast Address
Enter the Multicast address for the transport stream.
Port Number
Enter the port number for the transport stream.
Program Number
Enter the program number (not PID) for the player. This identifies the
program within the compressed stream.
5. Activate and enable the player by clicking Activate and Enable.
Related information
Configuring transport stream ingest on page 88
Configuring subtitle insertion
If you have purchased a license for onboard subtitle insertion and configured a player for 25 or 50 Hz
frame rate, Spectrum allows you to insert and configure subtitle information for that player.
Spectrum supports the following file types for subtitle or teletext: STL, PAC, and 890.
In order to use subtitle insertion, make sure to follow the procedures in this section:
1. Create a subtitle directory in the clip.dir folder on your video server that you can use to copy subtitle
files to your system.
2. Verify that the filetypes.conf file on your video server supports subtitles..
3. Configure subtitle insertion from the Edit Player page.
Related information
Creating the subtitles directory on the video server on page 262
Verifying that filetypes.conf supports subtitle/open/closed caption insertion on page 263
Configuring subtitle insertion from the Edit Player page on page 263
261
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Creating the subtitles directory on the video server
By default, Spectrum looks for subtitle files in clip.dir/subtitle.dir on the video server file system. This
folder is not created automatically.
1. From SystemManager, click the Disk Utilities icon in the left-hand column to open the Disk Utilities
page.
2. From the Disk Utilities page, click the hyperlink for your video server to open the corresponding Disk
Utilities page.
3. In the Logical View area, click Explore Filesystem file://...
Figure 7-17: File System, Logical View
4. When prompted, enter the user name and password for your video server file system. The root
directory of the video server file system will appear in a new Explorer window.
Note that if the root directory does not appear or a message appears indicating the browser is unable
to connect, you may need to add the IP address of your SystemManager to the list of trusted sites in
Internet Explorer.
a. From Internet Explorer, click Tools > Internet Options > Security > Trusted Sites > Sites to
open the Trusted sites dialog box.
b. In the Add this website to the zone field, enter your SystemManager IP address (preceded by
“http://”), and then click Add.
c. Click Close and then click OK. Retry the Explore Filesystem link.
5. Using Windows Explorer, create a new folder named subtitle.dir in the clip.dir directory on the file
system.
262
Configuring video tracks
Figure 7-18: Creating subtitle.dir
Verifying that filetypes.conf supports subtitle/open/closed caption insertion
Before copying any subtitle or open or closed caption files to the subtitle directory on video server, check
that they are supported.
To do so, make sure that the filetypes.conf configuration file on the video server includes the following
line:
none /subtitle.dir/.*$
NOTE: For newer video servers, this line may already be present. For older video servers,
you may need to add it.The previous version of this guide instructed that you set this line to
“small.” Harmonic now recommends changing this line to “none” to reduce disk space used
by subtitle files.
To modify the filetypes.conf file, navigate to the Properties page for your video server and, under Change
Settings, click Edit filetypes.conf.
Configuring subtitle insertion from the Edit Player page
Configure subtitle insertion settings for a player.
1. Create a player, as described in “Creating a Player.”
2. From the Edit Player page, in the Subtitle Handling field, select Onboard Subtitle Insertion. The
Configure Caption button will be activated.
3. Click Configure Captions to open the Configure Captions page.
4. From the HD Transmission mode drop-down menu, select either OP47 or SMPTE2031. This mode
will apply to all streams and services that you configure on this page.
5. Click Add Stream to open the stream section of the page. You may add 8 streams per player.
263
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
6. In the stream section of the page, select the VBI lines that will be used for the down-converted output
of the subtitle stream. Make sure to select enough VBI lines to accommodate the subtitle information.
If you are unsure which VBI lines to select, start with 21. Adding one line for each service will likely
provide enough bandwidth to support all of your subtitles. For example, if three services are added,
then selecting VBI lines 20, 21, and 22 for both Field 1 and Field 2 will probably work.
7. If required by your system, you may select Dummies to insert “dummy” packets when subtitle
information is not present in the stream.
NOTE: The OP42 operating practice requires dummy packets. In this case, only VBI
line 21 is allowed.
8. Click Add Service to add a subtitle service to the stream. You may add multiple services to a stream.
Figure 7-19: Configure Subtitles
9. Configure the service as follows:
Language
Select the desired language.
Row0
Type a label for this subtitle service. Note that this text will not be visible to a
viewer watching the subtitles.
Page
Type the required page number based on your language selection. This
will be a hexadecimal number between 100 and 8FF that corresponds to
the Teletext page number. Note that page numbers are defined according
to your region. Also note that OP42 requires subtitles to be on page 888.
Other pages should only be used if you understand your particular system
requirements.
Stop pg.
Type the page number used for the packets that terminate a subtitle
submission. This will be a hexadecimal number between 00 and FF. The
teletext specification reserves page FF for this purpose though some
systems use different numbers.
File Type
Select the file type for this service. Select from the following:
◦
◦
◦
STL
PAC
890
264
Configuring video tracks
Suffix Tags
(Optional) If you wish to include suffix tags for this service, type them in
this field. Suffixes may begin with any valid character or be empty (for
example, .en,_en,,en) Note that two commas together may be used to
indicate a blank tag.
Extensions
(Required) Type the extensions to be used for your subtitles.
Extensions must begin with a period and be separated by commas (for
example, .stl,.pac).
NOTE: When searching for subtitle and teletext files,
Spectrum will start with the first suffix tag listed and look for
each extension in the order listed until it finds a matching file.
For example, for the service shown in the preceding figure,
if you have files named “Clip” Spectrum will locate them in
the following order: Clip_Spanish.cap, Clip_Spanish.CAP,
Clip_spa.cap, and Clip_spa.CAP.
Parallel
(Checked by default) Harmonic recommends that you leave this option
selected. Make sure that your selection is the same for all services and
streams. Note that this option may be required when using certain brands of
downstream equipment, including TVLogic* monitors.
CAUTION: Clearing this option causes the subtitles to be
transmitted in Serial mode (one after the next) rather than
in parallel. This may result in some subtitles not appearing
at the correct time in relation to the video, and should only
be cleared if you are sure that the target system requires
magazine serial transmission.
Clears
If selected, a clear screen packet will be transmitted every 10 seconds to
ensure subtitle text is automatically removed from the screen. This setting
doesn't have effect if there is no file to insert, and subtitle data will be
passed through.
Double Transmit
Select to transmit all caption packets twice, as required by the OP42(3.d)
standard. Only leave this option clear if you are certain that your system
does not require subtitle packets to be transmitted twice.
Remove
Click to remove a service.
10. Click Apply to apply the changes or click Add Stream to add another subtitle. If you wish to remove a
stream, you may click the Remove button in the Stream section of the page.
11. When finished configuring, click Done to return to the Edit Player page.
Configuring closed caption insertion
If you have purchased a license for onboard closed caption insertion and configured a player for 29.97
or 59.94 Hz frame rate, Spectrum allows you to insert and configure closed caption information for that
player.
Spectrum supports the following file types for captioning: Cheetah, NCI, and SCC.
In order to use closed caption insertion, make sure to follow the procedures in this section:
1. Create a subtitles directory in the clip.dir folder on your video server that you can use to copy caption
files to your system.
265
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
2. Verify that the filetypes.conf file on your video server supports subtitles, and open or closed captions.
3. Configure closed caption insertion from the Edit Player page.
Related information
Creating the subtitles directory on the video server on page 262
Verifying that filetypes.conf supports subtitle/open/closed caption insertion on page 263
Configuring Closed Caption Insertion from the Edit Player page on page 266
Configuring Closed Caption Insertion from the Edit Player page
Configure closed caption insertion for a player.
1. Create a player, as described in “Creating a Player.”
2. From the Edit Player page, in the Closed Caption Handling field, select Onboard Closed Caption
Insertion. The Configure Captions button will be activated.
3. Click Configure Captions to open the Configure Captions page.
Figure 7-20: Configure Captions
4. Under “Closed Captioning, ” for Clip XDS data:
•
•
Select Pass to keep any extended data services (XDS) information in the clip (for example, rating
or V-chip) and pass it through.
Select Block to block any XDS information in the clip.
5. Under “Primary Service CC1/CS1,” configure the service for Closed Caption Channel 1 (EIA-608) and
DTV Caption Service 1 (EIA-708). Configure the following options:
266
Configuring video tracks
Enable Insertion
Select to enable the service to be inserted (overwriting existing services
CC1 & CC2 for CC1 insertion and CC3 & CC4 for CC3 insertion).
File Type
Select the file type for this service. Select from the following:
◦
◦
◦
Cheetah
NCI
SCC
NOTE: Both Cheetah and NCI files can use the .cap
extension. If using .cap files, make sure to verify if they are
Cheetah or NCI.
Suffix tags
(Optional) If you wish to include suffix tags for this service, type them in
this field. Suffixes may begin with any valid character or be empty (for
example, .en,_en,,en) Note that two commas together may be used to
indicate a blank tag.
Extensions
(Required) Type the extensions to be used for your subtitles.
Extensions must begin with a period and be separated by commas (for
example, .cap,.scc)
NOTE: When searching for caption files, Spectrum will start
with the first suffix tag listed and look for each extension in
the order listed until it finds a matching file. For example,
for the Secondary Service shown in the preceding figure,
if you have files named “Clip” Spectrum will locate them in
the following order: Clip_Spanish.cap, Clip_Spanish.CAP,
Clip_spa.cap, and Clip_spa.CAP.
6. Under “Secondary Service CC3/CS2,” configure the service for Closed Caption 3 (EIA-608) and DTV
Caption Service 2 (EIA-708). Configure the options as described in the previous step.
7. Click Apply to apply the changes.
8. When finished configuring, click Done to return to the Edit Player page.
Configuring open caption insertion
Spectrum 7.6 and later supports onboard open caption insertion for a I/O module channel with the open
caption license.
With this feature, you may insert and configure open caption information for a player of any frame rate
attached to a licensed channel.
Spectrum supports the following file types for captioning: EBU-STL and Cavena 890.
1. Copy your open caption template(s) to the graphics directory on your Spectrum video server, /fs0/
gfx.dir.
2. Create a player, as described in “Creating a Player.”
3. From the Edit Player page, in the Open Caption Handling field, select Open Caption Insertion. The
Configure Open Captions button will be activated.
4. Click Configure Open Captionsto open the Configure Open Captions page.
267
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Figure 7-21: Configuring Open Captions
5. Under “Open Caption Configuration” configure as follows:
File Type
Select the file type for this service from the following options:
◦
◦
STL (EBU-STL format)
890 (Cavena 890 format)
Suffix Tags
(Optional) If you wish to include suffix tags for this service, type them in
this field. Suffixes may begin with any valid character or be empty (for
example, .en,_en,,en) Note that two commas together may be used to
indicate a blank tag.
Extensions
Type the extensions to be used for your subtitles. Extensions must begin
with a period and be separated by commas (for example, .stl,.890).
NOTE: When searching for caption files, Spectrum will start
with the first suffix tag listed and look for each extension in
the order listed until it finds a matching file. For example, for
the open caption in the preceding figure, if you have files
named “Clip,” Spectrum will locate them in the following
order: Clip_English.stl, Clip_English.STL, Clip_eng.stl, and
Clip_eng.STL.
Template
Type the name of the template (including extension) in your graphics
directory to be used for open captions.
Layer
Select the graphics layer to be used for the open captions template.
6. Click Apply to apply the changes.
7. When finished configuring, click Done to return to the Edit Player page
NOTE: Once a clip with open captions is playing, if you wish to stop the open captions
from displaying without interrupting the playing clip, note that you must fade down the
layer that contains the open caption template using either FXTool or the appropriate
Oxtel command via automation.
268
Configuring video tracks
Best practices for Spectrum Open Caption templates
Note the best practices for using Spectrum Open Caption templates.
Spectrum Open Caption templates are designed to be on the highest available graphics layer. Once
an Open Caption template is configured on the top layer, it will persist and Open Captions will fade up
or down as appropriate. If an Open Caption template is removed via Oxtel, Spectrum will re-load the
template automatically.
The Player API does provide an extension to override a Spectrum Open Caption template. However,
Harmonic does not recommending doing so at this time. If you need to override an Open Caption
template, contact your Harmonic representative for assistance.
Recording proxies
A proxy is a low-resolution version of recorded video content. Some Spectrum I/O modules allow you to
record proxies to your Spectrum system.
Recording proxies with the MediaPort 7000 series
The MediaPort 7101, 7301, and 7601 series allow you to record proxies to your Spectrum system.
For each MediaPort module, you can have two channels configured to record proxies.
Once a player is configured to record proxies, when the player records, it will simultaneously write a proxy
file to the proxy.dir directory located in the main clip directory on your file system, which is clip.dir by
default. Proxy files will retain the same base name as the source clip and use the extension .mxf or .mov
depending on your configuration.
1. Configure a Record Only player or Play and Record player (SD or HD).
2. Connect the track to the appropriate MediaPort. The following MediaPorts 7000 Series support
proxies: MediaPort 7101, 7301, and 7601.
NOTE: When attaching the MediaPort, you may select either Channel A or Channel B
as the Connection Port.
A check box for MPEG-4 Proxy Record will appear as shown.
Figure 7-22: MPEG-4 Proxy Record check box
3. Select the MPEG-4 Proxy Record check box. A separate track called Proxy H.264 will appear.
269
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Figure 7-23: Proxy H.264 track
4. Configure the proxy track options as described in the following section.
About recording proxies with the MediaPort 5000 series
The 5320, 5220, and 5620 series MediaPorts and 5320 and 5220 series MediaDeck Modules allow you to
record proxies to your Spectrum or MediaDeck system.
For each of the 5320, 5220, and 5620 series MediaPorts you can have two channels configured and
enabled to record proxies.
In order to configure a player to record proxies, the attached MediaPort or MediaDeck Module must first
be set for Proxy mode. Once the MediaPort or MediaDeck Module and attached player is configured to
record proxies, when the player records, it will simultaneously write a proxy file to the proxy.dir directory
located in the main clip directory, which is clip.dir by default. Proxy files will retain the same base name
as the source clip and use the extension .mpg.
Note that in order to enable the proxy feature, any players configured for audio scrub must be deactivated
due to bandwidth constraints. Perform the following procedures in the order listed below.
Configuring a MediaPort 5000 series to record proxies
Configure your I/O module to record proxies.
NOTE: Note this section applies only to the MediaPort 5320, 5220, and 5620 series.
1. From the System Diagram page, click the icon for the MediaPort or MediaDeck Module you will use
to record proxies. Its I/O Module Properties page appears.
2. Under General Information, scroll to the Proxy Record Mode versus Audio Scrub Play Mode
section.
This section will show either Proxy Record mode enabled or Audio Scrub mode enabled. They
cannot both be enabled at the same time. If the status under After Next Reboot and After Last
Reboot shows Proxy Record then continue to the next section.
If the status shows Audio Scrub Play then do the following:
a. Click Set Proxy Record Mode. A warning message appears indicating that all players attached
to this MediaPort which are configured for Scrub Audio must be deactivated before you record
proxies, otherwise their performance will be affected. Click OK.
b. If you have players that are configured for Audio Scrub, deactivate those players at this time.
c. Restart the MediaPort or MediaDeck Module in order for the changes to take affect.
270
Configuring video tracks
What to do next
Configuring a Player for a MediaPort 5000 Series to Record Proxies on page 271
Related information
Activating and deactivating players on page 294
Rebooting the I/O module on page 174
Configuring a Player for a MediaPort 5000 Series to Record Proxies
Configure a player to record proxies.
1. Configure an MPEG Record Only player or Play and Record player (SD or HD).
2. Connect the track to the appropriate MediaPort. The following MediaPorts 5xxx Series support
proxies: MediaPort 5320, 5220, and 5620.
NOTE: When attaching the MediaPort 5320, 5220, and 5620 you may select either
Channel A or Channel B as the Connection Port.
3. Add an audio track. Once you have added an audio track, the check box for MPEG-1 Proxy Record
will be enabled.
Figure 7-24: MPEG-1 Proxy Record check box
4. Select the MPEG-1 Proxy Record check box.
An MPEG-1 track, identified as a Low Resolution Proxy, will appear below the audio track.
Figure 7-25: Low Resolution Proxy
By default, the proxy track shows the same number of audio channels as the audio track for this
player. This number can be changed but may not exceed 8 channels.
5. Activate the player.
271
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
When used to record, this player will simultaneously write a proxy file to the proxy.dir directory
located in the main clip directory, which is clip.dir by default. Proxy files will retain the same base
name as the source clip and use the extension .mpg.
Related information
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Activating and deactivating players on page 294
Proxy options
When recording a proxy there are a number of configuration options available.
Video Definition
column
Note that this value will reflect the Video Definition you have selected for the
associated video track.
Frame Geometry
From the drop-down menu, select the frame geometry for the proxy. Note that
the options will change depending on whether the player is configured for
Standard or High Definition, and depending on the selected frame rate of the
player.
Bitrate
Enter the desired video bit rate for the proxy from 0.6 to 3.0 Mbps.
Wrapper Format
Select either MXF or MOV for the wrapper format.
Audio Bitrate
Select 64, 96, or 128 kbps for the audio bit rate.
Number of Audio
Channels
Select the desired number of audio channels.
Proxy Logo
Enter the path of any logo you wish to appear on the proxy. Note that the logo
must be a .PNG file and must reside on your Spectrum file system.
•
•
•
Timecode Burn
X-Pos: Enter a value for the horizontal placement of logo. The value will
depend on the selected frame geometry. For example, if the frame geometry
is 352 x 288, the X-Pos value will be between 0 and 352.
Y-Pos: Enter a value for the vertical placement of logo. The value will
depend on the selected frame geometry. For example, if the frame geometry
is 352 x 288, the Y-Pos value will be between 0 and 288.
Opacity: Enter a value for the desired percentage of opacity of the logo.
Select an option for the placement of the timecode on the proxy. The default is
none. The graphic in the following figure illustrates each of the options.
272
Configuring video tracks
Figure 7-26: Timecode Burn locations
Captions
Select if you wish to embed closed caption information in the proxy.
AFD
Select if you wish to store Active Format Description (AFD) as ancillary data in
the proxy.
Timecode
Select if you wish to embed the timecode in the proxy wrapper.
IPV Compliant Proxy Select if you wish to create a proxy track that can be used with IPV
SpectreView*.
Enable Transfer to
SpectreView
(Available if you have selected IPV compliant Proxy). Select if you wish
to enable transfers to SpectreView. Once selected, additional fields for
configuration with SpectreView appear. Configure them as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Server IP: Enter the IP address of the SpectreView Server.
Server port: Enter the port number for the SpectreView server. Note that the
default value of 8000 is the correct port number for connecting via Spectrum.
FTP User Name: Enter the FTP user name required for transferring files
with SpectreView.
FTP Password: Enter the FTP password required for transferring files with
SpectreView.
URL Path: Enter the URL path for performing clip transfers into
SpectreView.
Replace existing clip: Select if you wish to overwrite any existing proxy file
of the same name.
Create Daily Folder: Select if you would like the IPV server to create a new
subdirectory each day within the FTP destination folder, which will be named
according to the month, day, and year.
NOTE: Spectrum does not perform any checks to make sure
file names are compliant with the IPV SpectreView server,
and will not generate any errors or messages if you have
specified a file name that is not compliant. For information
273
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
on accepted file names, refer to the IPV SpectreView
documentation.
Configuring audio tracks
Audio tracks can be added to any Player (except Data Players), in addition to the default “interleaved”
audio tracks that are present only in DV, DVCPRO and DVCPRO 50 Players.
These tracks can be recorded in .aiff or .wav format. Note the following important points regarding
interleaved audio:
•
•
•
•
DV and DVCPRO video files (.dv) by default include two channels of interleaved audio.
DVCPRO 50 video files (.dv) by default include four channels of interleaved audio.
HDCAM (.hdcam) video files do not include interleaved audio.
MPEG (.mpg) video files do not contain interleaved audio.
Figure 7-27: Adding a separate audio track
1. On the Edit Player page, click the Audio button to add an audio track.
2. Connect the Audio track to an I/O module.
NOTE: When configuring Record players to demultiplex ATSC streams using the
MediaPort 4010, the player must be configured with the exact number of audio
channels present in the feed. If the Demux player is configured for 4 channels of audio
and only 2 channels are present, the stream will not be recorded. An advanced feature
is available that allows you to configure a single Player with multiple audio tracks. In
this configuration, each audio track is associated with its own individual I/O module.
Refer to “Creating Multiple Audio Track Players” for details.
3. In the Total drop-down box, choose the total number of audio channels that you wish to record in the
entire track.
4. In the Recorded with drop-down box, choose the number of audio channels that you wish to record
in each file. Select between 2, 4, 6, 8, or 16 channels per file. Note that not all choices are available,
depending upon your selection in the “Total” drop-down. The “About Audio Track Combinations”
section includes additional information on what possibilities are offered in these settings.
5. Select the maximum sample size variable for the audio data played back or recorded by this player.
Depending on the type of player one or both of the following menu options will appear:
◦
Record sample size: choose between 16-bit or 24-bit samples.
274
Configuring audio tracks
◦
Playback max sample size: choose between 16-bit, 24-bit, and 32-bit samples.
6. In the Audio File Type drop-down box, choose between .aiff or .wav formats. Select the appropriate
file type, based on your individual requirements. There is no difference in performance between the
two file types.
7. For MediaPorts 7000 series (with Spectrum 6.4 or later) and Spectrum X, the Loop Audio When
Stepping Frames check box appears. When this option is checked, if you pause the player, the audio
for the paused frame and the following nine frames will play in a continuous loop.
8. Depending on the type of I/O module, the Audio Scrub Play check box may appear (for ‘Play Only’ or
‘Play and Record’ players).
9. The Audio Resampling section appears in all players attached to a MediaPort or Spectrum X, and
record-enabled players attached to any other I/O module used for record. The number of drop-down
boxes changes dynamically, depending upon your selection in the Total drop-down box.
For each audio pair:
•
•
•
Choose Auto to record normal PCM audio data, or correctly flagged non-PCM data (for example,
Dolby AC-3, Dolby E). Normal PCM audio data will be re-sampled so that it is clock-synchronized
with video. Non-PCM data will be passed unchanged.
Choose None to force audio resampling off. Use this selection if your playback equipment does
not properly tag non-PCM data.
The Number of language tag rules drop-down box allows you to apply language tag rules for the
playout of audio files associated with the audio tracks of a particular Player.
10. If you added an audio track by mistake, click the Remove button adjacent to the track.
NOTE: Spectrum cannot record audio simultaneously from multiple MediaPorts into a
MPEG-2 MXF OP1a track at 29.97/59.94 Hz. When recording this wrapper format and
frame rate, all audio must come from a single MediaPort. This limitation does not apply
to other wrapper formats or frames rates.
Related information
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Creating multiple audio track players on page 301
Configuring audio scrub on page 276
Configuring track tag rules for an audio track on page 278
About selectable audio tracks on page 275
About audio track combinations on page 276
About selectable audio tracks
For separate audio tracks, there are some points to note.
•
•
•
All separate audio files associated with a single audio track must have the same number of channels,
sample size and file format.
When recording Dolby E or Dolby AC3, do not configure the Player’s audio track as single-channel
files. All channels must be recorded with a minimum of two channels per file. If you record as a singlechannel file, the Dolby data will be corrupted.
Each separate audio file may hold 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 16 channels.
275
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
•
•
Players must be configured to match the maximum expected bandwidth of clips to be played on that
output. If a clip exceeds the maximum expected bandwidth, during playback the Player will fail —
producing either silence or a reduced number of audio tracks limited by the Player.
Back-to-back playout of mixed audio formats (.aiff or .wav) is supported.
About audio track combinations
Note the possible audio track combinations that may be created.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If 1 total channel, then 1 channel per file
If 2 total channels, then 1, 2 channels per file
If 4 total channels, then 1, 2, 4 channels per file.
If 6 total channels, then 1, 2, 6 channels per file (existing)
If 8 total channels, then 1, 2, 4, 8 channels per file
If 10 total channels, then 1, 2, 10 channels per file (new)
If 12 total channels, then 1, 2, 4, 12 channels per file (new)
If 14 total channels, then 1, 2, 14 channels per file (new)
If 16 total channels, then 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 channels per file
Note that the number of available channels per file divides evenly into the total number of channels.
Configuring audio scrub
Audio scrub requires different configuration steps depending on the type of I/O module you are using.
About audio scrub
Audio scrub mode provides a higher quality audio output, helpful to video editors and operators when
jogging or shuttling through content.
Audio scrub mode is supported on the MediaPort 5320, 5220, 5400, 5500, 5620, 7000 series, and
Spectrum X.
The audio scrub feature works for up to four channels of audio. When scrub mode is enabled, regardless
of how the audio tracks are grouped, the first four channels are scrubbed and the remaining channels are
muted.
For the MediaPort 7xxx series and Spectrum X, audio scrub does not require any I/O module
configuration. For the MediaPort 5xxx series, in order to configure a player with audio scrub, the attached
MediaPort or MediaDeck Module must first be set for Audio Scrub Mode. Note that in order to enable the
Audio Scrub feature, any players configured for Proxy Record must first be deactivated due to bandwidth
constraints. The two modes cannot be configured at the same time.
Once a player has been enabled for audio scrub, the output audio is scrubbed whenever the player is
operating between 1/16th and 2x play, forward or backward. Those regions are shown in green in the
following figure.
276
Configuring audio scrub
Figure 7-28: Audio Scrub Rates
Above 2x forward or below -2x backward, the player reverts to “CD audio”, which is the same off-speed
audio behavior used for non-audio scrub players. Those regions are shown in blue. Below 1/16th (for
example, at 1/32nd), the player is muted rather than reverting to CD audio.
The red star in the figure marks the special case of normal, 1x playback. If the player jumps directly to 1x
from a non-scrubbable rate (such as paused or greater than 2x), it will leave scrub mode and revert to
normal audio play with all channels
Related information
Activating and deactivating players on page 294
Rebooting the I/O module on page 174
Configuring a MediaPort for audio scrub
For the MediaPort 5220, 5320, and 5600 series, you must configure the MediaPort for audio scrub if you
wish to use it.
NOTE: This procedure applies to the 5220, 5320, and 5600 series MediaPorts only. If you
are using a different I/O module, continue to “Configuring a Player for Audio Scrub”.
1. From the System Diagram page, click the icon for the MediaPort or MediaDeck Module you will use
to play audio scrub material. Its I/O Module Properties page appears.
2. Under General Information, scroll to the Proxy Record Mode versus Audio Scrub Play Mode
section.
This section will show either Proxy Record mode enabled or Audio Scrub mode enabled. They
cannot both be enabled at the same time. If the status under After Last Reboot and After Next
Reboot shows Audio Scrub Play Mode then continue to the next section.
If the status shows Proxy Record then do the following:
a. Click Set Audio Scrub Play Mode. A warning message appears indicating that all players
attached to this MediaPort which are configured for Proxy Record must be deactivated before you
activate players configured for Audio Scrub, otherwise their performance will be affected. Click
OK.
b. If you have players that are configured for Proxy Record, deactivate those players at this time.
c. Restart the I/O module in order for the changes to take effect.
Related information
Activating and deactivating players on page 294
Rebooting the I/O module on page 174
277
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Configuring a Player for Audio Scrub
Configure a player for Audio Scrub.
1. Configure an MPEG Play Only or Play and Record player (SD or HD).
2. Connect the track to the appropriate I/O module. The following I/O modules support audio scrub:
MediaPort 5620, 5500, 5400, 5320, 5220, 7000 series, and Spectrum X.
3. Add an audio track.
4. Attach the audio track to the appropriate I/O module.
5. The audio track includes the Audio Scrub Play check box.
Figure 7-29: Audio Scrub Play check box
6. Click the Audio Scrub Play check box.
NOTE: If the check box for Audio Scrub Play does not appear, double-check that you
have followed the steps in “Configuring your MediaPort or MediaDeck Module for Audio
Scrub.”
7. Activate the player.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Activating and deactivating players on page 294
Configuring track tag rules for an audio track
You can apply language tag rules for the playout of audio files associated with the audio tracks of a
particular Player.
Before you begin
NOTE: The Number of Language Tag Rules field only appears if you have enabled
Player Track Tagging from the SystemManager Options page.
Editing track tags
Once you have edited a Track Tag File (according to the “Editing track tags” section) and added an audio
track to a player, you can use the language tag section of the Edit Player page to create rules, which
associate the player’s audio track with language tags on the clip to be played. The rules specify which
language tag on the clip the Spectrum system looks for, and in what order. When Spectrum matches
the language tag specified in the rule with a tag on the clip, it assigns all audio channels on the clip to
278
Configuring track tag rules for an audio track
the next available channel of the audio track for that player. Once all channels on the audio track are
assigned, Spectrum stops looking for rules.
1. Create a player.
2. From the Edit Player page, click Audio to add an audio track to the Player.
3. From the language tag rules drop down box, select the number of rules you wish to institute. Select
from 0 to a maximum of 16 rules to be applied to audio file playout. Note the following:
•
•
•
Track Tags are only available if you have already edited and saved the Track Tag File (see “Editing
track tags”) If you have not edited the Track Tag File, Language Tag selections do not appear
and audio tracks in a clip will play back in the order they were recorded (or as rearranged by
TrackTool).
If you select zero (0) rules, then track tagging is disabled for this Player; and audio tracks in
the clip will play out in the order in which they were recorded, or “stacked” by the TrackTool
application.
Depending on the number of language tag rules selected, SystemManager displays a
corresponding number of rows from which you can select up to six language tags. The selections
in the language tag drop-down menus determine the order that SystemManager will search for
audio tracks to play back, starting with Tag 1 and ending with Tag 6. If the audio track in Tag 1 is
not found, then SystemManager attempts to play the audio track in Tag 2 and so forth.
4. If you would like to configure more than 6 tags per rule, select the Allow 16 tags per rule check box
to increase the number of tags per rule.
5. For each rule, make your track selections. Note the following:
•
•
If tags are not specified for a particular rule, the SystemManager sets these tags to None.
The numbering scheme for "tracknum" tags starts with zero. To select the first audio track in the
clip’s track stack, set the tag to tracknum0.
Track tag examples
Find guidelines and examples for track tag usage.
Note the following general guidelines about Track Tagging:
•
•
•
•
If you want to specify the language tag for the audio to play out of a particular port, select silence as
the last tag in each row..
When applying tags, Harmonic recommends that all tracks have the same number of channels per file.
If either Track Tagging is turned off on the Player, or there are no tags associated with a clip, the clip is
loaded as if Track Tagging is disabled.
Audio track tagging and rearranging is limited to audio tracks and cannot be applied to individual audio
channels. A clip can contain one or more audio tracks; each of these tracks may contain one or more
audio channels.
279
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Example: Track tags with two audio channels
The following figure illustrates a configuration of two audio channels, with one language tag rule to be
applied to channel output.
Figure 7-30: Sample track tag configuration with one rule
The configuration in the preceding figure dictates playout as follows:
•
Rule 1 stipulates that if an Spanish track is present in a clip, Spanish is played out. If no Spanish track
is found, one channel of silence is the output.
280
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
Example: Track tags with four audio channels
The following figure illustrates a configuration of four audio channels, with four language tag rules to be
applied to channel output.
Figure 7-31: Sample track tag configuration with four rules
The configuration in the preceding figure dictates playout as follows:
•
•
•
•
Rule 1 stipulates that if an English track is present in a clip, English is played out. If no English track is
found, a Spanish track is played out if present. If no Spanish track is found, a Chinese track is played
out if present. If no Chinese track is found, one channel of silence is the output.
Rule 2 stipulates that if a French track is present in a clip, French is played out. If no French track is
found, an English track is played out if present. If no English track is found, then a Spanish track is
played back. If no Spanish track is found, then the first audio track in the clip’s track stack would be
played back. If no track is found, silence is the output.
Rule 3 stipulates that if a Spanish track is present in a clip, Spanish is played out. If no Spanish track
is found, English is played out if present. If no English track is found, French is played out. If no French
track is found, Chinese is played out. If no Chinese track is found, one channel of silence is the output.
Rule 4 stipulates that if a Chinese track is present in a clip, Chinese is played out. If no Chinese track
is found, English is played out if present. If no English track is found, French is played out. If no French
track is found, English is played out. If no English track is found, Spanish is played out if present. If no
Spanish track is present, one channel of silence is the output.
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
When configuring a player, connect the player to an I/O module.
1. From the Edit Player page, for each track, click the Attach Devices button (within each track section)
to display the Attach Devices page.
Note that the available fields and columns on this page will vary based on the I/O module.
281
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Figure 7-32: Attach Devices page options
2. In the Attach column, click the check box adjacent to the I/O module that you wish to connect. The
name of the current Player will appear in the Players (tracks) attached column. Repeat this selection
for any other listed devices that you want to attach to this track.
NOTE: In SystemManager, all MediaPort 5XX2 series (for example, 5002, 5222, or
5322) appear as two separate 5XX1 MediaPorts respectively.
3. The Channel column displays the available channels for attaching MPEG tracks. Click the drop-down
arrow to select a different channel.
4. When attaching a video track to the Spectrum X, if the player type is set to Hybrid, the BNC Config
column appears. Select the configuration you wish to use for the corresponding MFIO connector
on Spectrum X breakout cable. The following table shows possible configurations for the MFIO
connectors on the Spectrum X breakout cable.
MFIO
Connector
Function in Standard Channel
Mode
Function in Enhanced Channel
Mode
MF#1
Channel A AES In / Channel A
LTC In
AES In / LTC In
MF#2
Channel A LTC Out
LTC Out
MF#3
Channel B AES In/Channel B LTC
In
Unused
MF#4
Channel B LTC Out
Unused
NOTE: The information in the following step only applies to the MediaPort 4100,
5400, 5500, and 7000 series, ChannelPort, and Spectrum X. For all other MediaPort s,
continue to step 7.
5. Configure up or down conversion options.
6. If you are working with a record-capable Player, in the Recording Device column, click the radio
button for the one device (MediaPort or Third-party Device) that you want to use as the source of
media during recording.
7. When attaching video tracks to the MediaPort 5320 for recording HD content at frame rates of 25 or
29.97 Hz, the Horizontal Sample Rate column appears. Select the sample rate (either 1920 or 1440)
that applies to the content you are recording.
8. If you are attaching audio or video tracks to a MediaPort 4010, the Program Number field appears.
This field specifies the number for the program which should be extracted from the transport stream
and demuxed. Enter a string of up to four characters in length, where each character is a hex digit
(0-9, a-f, or A-F).
282
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
NOTE: The information in Step 8 only applies to the MediaPort 4100, 5400, 5500, and
7000 series, and ChannelPort. For all other MediaPort s, continue to step 9.
9. If you are working with an audio track and the device is capable of embedding and de-embedding
audio in the SDI signal, a drop-down menu will appear in the Audio Embedding column. Note that
this column only appears for AES/EBU tracks, or for all DV tracks without an accompanying AES/EBU
track. Choose the desired embedding option:
◦
None — Audio information is transmitted and received on the MediaPort ’s AES/EBU connectors
only.
◦
◦
For recording, audio will not be de-embedded from the SDI input signal. It will instead be
recorded from the AES/EBU connectors.
◦ For playback, audio will not be embedded in the SDI output signal. It will instead be played out
from the AES/EBU connectors.
Embedded — The MediaPort uses audio data that is embedded in the SDI signal for recording and
playback.
◦
◦
For recording, audio will be de-embedded from the SDI input signal. Any signal on the AES/
EBU connectors will be ignored.
◦ For playback, all eight audio channels (at full 24-bit resolution) will be embedded in the SDI
output signal.
Limited — The following actions occur:
◦
◦
For recording, all audio data will be de-embedded from the SDI input signal. Signals on the
AES/EBU connectors will be ignored.
For playback, the MediaPort only embeds two pairs of audio channels (at 20-bit resolution) into
the SDI output signal.
10. If the Player is record capable, the Player’s Record Timecode Source is “External,” and the
recording device is capable of recording LTC timecode, under Time code Format, in the timecode
Input drop-down box, select LTC only, ATC, or Reference VITC.
◦
◦
◦
LTC only: select to accept LTC input over the MediaPort ’s LTC input connector.
NOTE: LTC as a Record timecode source is not available for HDCAM configured
players. External timecode for HDCAM always comes from the ancillary/horizontal
data in the HDCAM SDTI stream.
ATC: select to read ATC from the MediaPort ’s SDI input connector. If selected, you must also
select the desired Line number.
Reference VITC: if selected, the timecode is derived the reference input VITC.
11. If the Player is play capable, the Player’s Playback Timecode Source is “From Clip,” under Time
code Format, in the Output drop-down box, select either LTC only or VITC & LTC.
NOTE: For SD players, Spectrum will output LTC, ATC, and VITC. For HD players,
Spectrum will output LTC and ATC.
•
•
Select LTC only to output LTC only to the MediaPort ’s LTC output connector.
Select VITC & LTC, and then select the desired Line number to insert timecode into those lines on
the MediaPort ’s SDI output connector.
NOTE: For the MediaPort 5320 and 5220, the output timecode options that you
select on the Attach Devices page apply to the channel that you have selected
in the Assignable LTC Output field of the I/O Module Properties page for the
attached MediaPort.
283
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
12. Click Done to return to the Edit Player page. At this point, the Player’s selected track is connected to
the selected Device(s). The device(s) will be listed in the track section.
Related information
Up/down conversion options for the MediaPort 7000 series, ChannelPort, and Spectrum X on page 284
Up/down conversion options for the MediaPort 5400 and 5500 series on page 288
Up/down conversion options for the MediaPort 7000 series, ChannelPort,
and Spectrum X
The Attach devices page provides up/down conversion options for some I/O modules.
Figure 7-33: Up/Down Conversion Options
In the Primary Output Video Format column, you can select a video format or select Native, which will
output the same format as the video clip that is playing. For example, when SD material is playing, the
output is SD SDI and when HD material is playing, the output is HD SDI.
IMPORTANT: Harmonic recommends using Native Mode for preview only, and not for
live, on-air playout. When a player is in Native Mode and different clip types (with different
formats or frame rates) are loaded on the timeline, there will be some delay between
transitions.
The video source designated in the Player Properties page will be converted, or passed through, as
selected. For example, if you selected a standard definition format on the Player Properties page, and a
high definition format in the Primary Output Video Format menu, the video would be up-converted. Note
that for standard definition formats, you may also choose the desired aspect ratio: 4x3, 16x9, or mixed
aspect.
For UHD, select either Interleaved or square division depending on the requirements of your
downstream equipment.
284
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
Under VANC line placement, you can specify VANC line placement for the Primary Output by configuring
the following settings.
OP-47 (for 25 or 50
Hz only)
Select the VANC line to be used for OP-47 data. Selecting Auto will allow
Spectrum to automatically select the VANC line. Selecting Suppress will cause
the closed caption data to be suppressed.
SMPTE-2031(for 25
or 50 Hz only)
Select the VANC line to be used for SMPTE-2031 data.Selecting Auto will allow
Spectrum to automatically select the VANC line. Selecting Suppress will cause
the closed caption data to be suppressed.
SMPTE-334-2 (CC)
Select the VANC line to be used for closed caption data. Selecting Auto will
allow Spectrum to automatically select the VANC line. Selecting Suppress will
cause the closed caption data to be suppressed.
SMPTE-2016-3 (AFD) Select the VANC line to be used for AFD data. Selecting Auto will allow
Spectrum to automatically select the VANC line. Selecting Suppress will cause
the AFD data to be suppressed.
SCTE-104
Select the VANC line to be used for SCTE-104 data. Selecting Auto will allow
Spectrum to automatically select the VANC line. Selecting Suppress will cause
the SCTE-104 data to be suppressed.
TC
Select the VANC lines to be used for ATC data. Selecting Auto will allow
Spectrum to automatically select the VANC line. Selecting Suppress will cause
the ATC data to be suppressed.
Reserve VANC lines
Click to open a list of check boxes that correspond to VANC lines. Select the
check boxes for the VANC lines that you wish to reserve for a specific use.
Any VANC lines that are not selected may be used for VANC types other those
indicated in the VANC line placement drop-down menus.
NOTE: For UHD formats, VANC plackets are only embedded on link A. VANC line
placement corresponds to the 1080p line number on link A.
In the Secondary Output Video Format column, select the desired video format or Native for the
secondary output.
VANC line placement Specify VANC line placement for the Secondary Output.
Ext Converter
(For MediaPort modules only) If using an external converter, use the drop-down
menu to specify the number of reference fields of external processing delay
to be used when connecting to an external converter to perform up or down
conversion. Select a value between 1 and 12. The default is OFF. Note the
following guidelines when performing external conversion:
•
•
•
•
•
To use an external converter, connect the secondary output connector
for each channel to the converter, and then connect the output from the
converter to the input connector for that channel.
You must specify the video format for the secondary output. This will identify
what kind of input is accepted by the external converter.
The video format that you specify for the primary output defines the output
of that connector.
You must configure the external converter to provide an output format that
matches the chosen primary output format.
Make sure to specify the up/down conversion settings for the primary
output. The Spectrum I/O module internal conversion will be used on the
285
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
primary output for any conversions that don’t match the configuration of the
external converter. For example, the external converter may perform 720p
to 1080i conversion, and the internal converter may perform SD to 1080i upconversion.
In the Video Definition Converter column, select the appropriate up and down conversion options by
reviewing the following information.
Up
This menu displays aspect ratio adjustment options when frames are being
up converted from SD to HD. Click the drop-down arrow to select from the
following:
Internal, Pillar specifies that black bars should be inserted on the sides as
necessary to fill the screen.
Internal, Crop specifies that the top and bottom of frames should be
cropped and black bars should be inserted on the sides as necessary to fill
the screen. When a frame is too large horizontally, the sides of the frame
should be cropped and black bars inserted on the top and bottom to fill the
screen.
Internal, Full specifies that black bars should be inserted above and below
the frame to maintain the aspect ratio of the original source (usually a picture
of 16:9 aspect ratio or wider).
Internal, Anamorphic specifies that frames should be stretched horizontally
and vertically to fill an entire 16:9 aspect ratio HD screen.
Internal, NonLinear specifies that frames should be stretched in a nonlinear fashion with the stretch occurring more at the edges of the picture, and
less as you move toward the center.
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE: The Internal, NonLinear stretch option works only
for clips, not external inputs. It produces up-converted video
with the AFD setting of "Full." This option is only available in
the following cases:
◦
◦
4:3 AFD
For players attached to a Spectrum X in standard channel
mode
For players with a frame rate of 29.97 Hz
This menu allows you to choose the AFD value you wish to apply to the video
output. The options are shown in the following table.
Table 7-1: AFD Values
AFD value
Definition
0000
Not Specified
1000
4x3 image full frame (same as coded frame)
1001
4x3 image full frame
1010
16x9 image as letterbox
1011
14x9 image as letterbox
1101
4x3 image with alt. 14x9 center
286
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
AFD value
Down
1110
16x9 image with alt. 14x9 center as letterbox
1111
16x9 image with alt. 4x3 center as letterbox
This column displays aspect ratio adjustment options when frames are being
down converted from HD to SD. Click the drop-down arrow to select from the
following:
Internal, Crop specifies that the top and bottom of the frame should be
cropped and black bars should be inserted on the sides as necessary to fill
the screen. When a frame is too large horizontally, the sides of the frame are
cropped and black bars are inserted on the top and bottom to fill the screen.
Internal, Letter specifies that when a frame fails to fill a screen vertically,
black bars should be inserted above and below the frame to maintain the
original aspect ratio of the original source (usually a picture of 16:9 aspect
ratio or wider).
Internal, Full specifies that black bars should be inserted above and below
the frame to maintain the aspect ratio of the original source (usually a picture
of 16:9 aspect ratio or wider).
Internal, Anamorphic specifies that frames should be compressed
horizontally and vertically to fit into a 4:3 aspect ratio SD screens.
•
•
•
•
16:9 AFD
Definition
This menu allows you to choose the AFD value you wish to apply to the video
output. The options are shown in the following table.
Table 7-2: 16:9 AFD Values
AFD value
Definition
0000
Not Specified
1000
16x9 image full frame
1001
4x3 image as pillarbox
1010
16x9 image as frame protected
1011
14x9 image as pillarbox
1101
4x3 image with alt. 14x9 center as pillarbox
1110
16x9 image with alt. 14x9 center
1111
16x9 image with alt. 4x3 center
NOTE: Up converting or down converting subtitles or teletext
that use the OP42 and OP47 standards is now an I/O modulewide setting, which affects all players attached to that I/O
module. It can be enabled from the I/O module Properties
page.
Related information
About Native Mode on page 291
287
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Enabling OP-47 subtitle conversion on page 170
About up conversion or down conversion options on page 292
About SCTE-104 proxy insertion on page 289
About connecting external up/down converters to Spectrum MediaPorts on page 293
Up/down conversion options for the MediaPort 5400 and 5500 series
The Attach devices page provides up/down conversion options for some I/O modules.
Figure 7-34: Up/Down Conversion options
In the Video Output Format column, you can select a video format or select Native, which will output the
same format as the video clip that is playing For example, when SD material is playing, the output is SD
SDI and when HD material is playing, the output is HD SDI.
IMPORTANT: Harmonic recommends using Native Mode for preview only, and not for
live, on-air playout. When a player is in Native Mode and different clip types (with different
formats or frame rates) are loaded on the timeline, there will be some delay between
transitions.
The video source designated in the Player Properties page will be converted, or passed through, as
selected. For example, if you selected a standard definition format on the Player Properties page, and a
high definition format in the Primary Output Video Format menu, the video would be up-converted. Note
that for standard definition formats, you may also choose the desired aspect ratio: 4x3, 16x9, or mixed
aspect.
In the Video Definition Converter column, select the appropriate up and down conversion options by
reviewing the following information.
Up
This menu displays aspect ratio adjustment options when frames are being
up converted from SD to HD. Click the drop-down arrow to select from the
following:
•
•
•
None Specifies that no up conversion adjustment should take place.
Internal, Pillar Specifies that black bars should be inserted on the sides as
necessary to fill the screen.
Internal, Crop: Specifies that the top and bottom of frames should be
cropped and black bars should be inserted on the sides as necessary to fill
the screen. When a frame is too large horizontally, the sides of the frame
288
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
•
•
Down
should be cropped and black bars inserted on the top and bottom to fill the
screen.
Internal, Full Specifies that black bars should be inserted above and below
the frame to maintain the aspect ratio of the original source (usually a picture
of 16:9 aspect ratio or wider).
Internal, Anamorphic: Specifies that frames should be stretched
horizontally and vertically to fill an entire 16:9 aspect ratio HD screen.
This column displays aspect ratio adjustment options when frames are being
down converted from HD to SD. Click the drop-down arrow to select from the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
None: Specifies that no down conversion aspect ratio adjustment should
take place.
Internal, Crop Specifies that the top and bottom of the frame should be
cropped and black bars should be inserted on the sides as necessary to fill
the screen. When a frame is too large horizontally, the sides of the frame are
cropped and black bars are inserted on the top and bottom to fill the screen.
Internal, Letter: Specifies that when a frame fails to fill a screen vertically,
black bars should be inserted above and below the frame to maintain the
original aspect ratio of the original source (usually a picture of 16:9 aspect
ratio or wider).
Internal, Full Specifies that black bars should be inserted above and below
the frame to maintain the aspect ratio of the original source (usually a picture
of 16:9 aspect ratio or wider).
Internal, Anamorphic Specifies that frames should be compressed
horizontally and vertically to fit into a 4:3 aspect ratio SD screens.
NOTE: With this release of SystemManager, up converting
or down converting subtitles or teletext that use the OP47
standards is now a MediaPort-wide setting, which affects all
players attached to that MediaPort. It can enabled from the I/
O Module Properties page.
Related information
About Native Mode on page 291
About up conversion or down conversion options on page 292
Configuring OP-47 subtitle conversion for the MediaPort 5000 series on page 171
About SCTE-104 proxy insertion
Note the standards and features of Spectrum SCTE-104 proxy insertion.
Spectrum adheres to the following standards document: SCTE- 104 2012 Automation System to
Compression System Communications Applications Program Interface (API).
A Spectrum system licensed for SCTE-104, does the following:
•
•
•
•
Provides a SCTE Proxy Injector compliant server
Adheres to the SCTE client-server protocol.
Manages the TCP/IP connection for the SCTE proxy service
Accepts a TCP/IP carried request
289
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
•
Inserts the SCTE-104 request on in VANC
The Spectrum, as a proxy injector server, immediately passes on valid requests in VANC. It does not
change the timing of a request, and it does not delay it for a specific target time.
Downstream, a SCTE-104 recipient acts as SCTE-104 injector, typically a Distribution Encoder. The
injector's job is to place the SCTE-104 payload into an MPEG Transport Stream as a SCTE35 packet.
Note the following:
•
•
The Spectrum SCTE-104 service uses the IP address of the Spectrum video server on which it
is installed. This IP address and the SCTE-104 license are both shown on the Spectrum Server
Properties page in SystemManager.
The TCP port for SCTE-104 is 5167.
The SCTE-104 protocol uses a message field name, “DPI Index,” to identify the output device associated
with a given request. The DPI Index value to be used by automation systems can be derived from the
physical connection from video server to the I/O module, as shown in the following table.
Spectrum server
port connected to
ChannelPort
ChannelPort
channel
Primary Output DPI
PID index
Secondary Output
DPI PID index
com0
A
101
102
com0
B
103
104
com1
A
201
202
com1
B
203
204
External Automation provides the SCTE Proxy Injector Client and will connect to the Service via the video
server's IP address and Port Number and, typically, will have a configuration to map the DPI-Index for
the specific channel SDI output. Note that both the primary and secondary output have independent DPIIndices.
Note that licensing is enforced on the video server, where the service resides. One SCTE-104 license
maps to one value in the dpi_pid_index field of the protocol, which maps to one primary channel on
a specific physical I/O module. That licensed connection could reference any single dpi_pid_index
value. The number of licenses is the limit on the total number of simultaneous connections, or uses of
SCTE-104. If you attempt one more connection than your license supports, that extra connection will be
refused, and a message will appear on the syslog.
Configuring SCTE-104 proxy insertion
Configure SCTE-104 proxy insertion for your Spectrum system.
1. Verify that your Spectrum video server is licensed for SCTE-104. From the Spectrum Server
Properties page, under General Properties, verify that SCTE-104 appears in the Additional
Licensed features field.
2. For a new or existing player, navigate to the Attach Devices page, and select the VANC line to be
used for SCTE-104 data, or select Auto to allow Spectrum to automatically select the VANC line.
If your Spectrum video server is licensed for SCTE-104, the service starts automatically.
290
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
Related information
About SCTE-104 proxy insertion on page 289
Up/down conversion options for the MediaPort 7000 series, ChannelPort, and Spectrum X on page 284
About Native Mode
Selecting Native Mode causes the player to set the format of the video output to the same format of the
video clip that is playing.
For example, when SD material is playing, the output is SD SDI, and when HD material is playing, the
output is HD SDI. This feature is supported on the MediaPort 5320, 5500, 5600, and 7000 series.
IMPORTANT: Harmonic recommends using Native Mode for preview only, and not for
live, on-air playout. When a player is in Native Mode and different clip types (with different
formats or frame rates) are loaded on the timeline, there will be some delay between
transitions.
Note that players only play clips with matching or half-rate frame rates. For example, a 50Hz player can
play 50Hz and 25Hz clips. Whereas, a 25Hz player can only play 25Hz clips. This means a 50Hz player
can play 625, 1080i25, and 720p50 clips while a 25Hz player configured for native mode can only play
625 and 1080i/25 clips.
Make sure to load clips on the timeline before the player is cued for play. The video output format cannot
be changed midstream so, for MediaPorts that support up/down conversion, playing non-matching clips
back-to-back will result in the clips being up-converted or down-converted. For MediaPorts that do not
support up/down conversion, an attached player in Native Mode will only play clips with matching frame
rates (for example, a 50Hz player only plays 720p50 clips). For these MediaPort s, if you play successive
non-matching clips, the output will be black.
The following table shows the Native Mode playout options for each supported MediaPort and player
configuration.
Table 7-3: Native Mode Limitations
MediaPort
Player Frame Rate
Native Play types
MediaPort 5320
Interlaced
SD, 1080i
MediaPort 5320
Progressive
720p
MediaPort 5500
Interlaced
SD, 1080i
MediaPort 5500
Progressive
SD, 720p
MediaPort 5600
Interlaced
1080i
MediaPort 5600
Progressive
720p
MediaPort 7000
Interlaced
SD, 1080i
MediaPort 7000
Progressive
SD, 1080i, 720p
291
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
About configuring for cross conversion
The MediaPort 7000 series is capable of playing out different video frame rates on the same timeline
continuously, which is known as cross conversion.
To configure a player to do cross conversion, you must select the higher of the two possible frame rates.
For example, if you want to play out both 720p and 1080i on the same timeline, you must select a frame
rate of 50Hz rather than 25Hz. Likewise, for NTSC, if you want to play out both 59.94Hz and 29.97Hz on
the same timeline, you must select 59.94Hz as the player frame rate in SystemManager.
About up conversion or down conversion options
Note the output results for up conversion or down conversion options.
Note that for some video content, which contains AFD information, the aspect ratio conversion options
are contained within the clip. For more information about AFD support, refer to “About AFD Support.” The
following diagrams illustrate the frame output for up or down conversion.
The following diagram displays frame output associated with each Up Conversion Aspect Ratio option.
Figure 7-35: Up conversion aspect ratio results
The following diagram displays frame output associated with each Down Conversion Aspect Ratio option.
292
Attaching devices and setting conversion options
Figure 7-36: High definition down conversion aspect ratio results
Related information
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
About AFD support on page 306
About connecting external up/down converters to Spectrum MediaPorts
Note the I/O ports to use when connecting an external up/down converter to a MIP-7000 series
MediaPort.
Figure 7-37: Attaching an Up/Down Converter to MediaPort 7000 series
Note that only the primary output connector for each channel of the MediaPort is available. The
secondary output connector and the input connector on the MediaPort are connected to the external
converter as shown.
293
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Related information
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Changing the player state
Change the player state to activate or deactivate, and enable or disable the player.
About activating and deactivating, enabling and disabling
In order to use a player to play or record, you must activate it and enable it using the Activate and
Enable button on theEdit Player page or the Enable option on the Player List page.
You can activate multiple players per I/O module channel at a time, allowing an automation system to
switch between players and enable or disable a player as needed. To take advantage of this functionality,
refer to “Using Auto Input Sense Recording.”
Note the following important points:
•
•
•
•
An activated player can be either enabled or disabled. You may have several players activated per
MediaPort channel at a time but ONLY ONE can be enabled.
A player must be activated and enabled in order to play or record. A disabled player cannot be used.
This release includes an Activate as disabled button on the Edit Player page, which sends the
player definition to the Spectrum device but does not enable the player. This may be useful if you are
using an automation system to automatically enable different players at different times.
If a player state has been changed by some means other than SystemManager (for example by
automation or by using the Player API), SystemManager will not detect that change until you click on
the Refresh Player List button on the Player List page.
NOTE: When License Enforcement is enabled, SystemManager will display an error
message if you attempt to activate a player attached to Spectrum X that exceeds your
license limit. To review your installed licenses, from the Spectrum Server Properties
page, click View Licensed features
Related information
Using Auto Input Sense recording on page 296
Activating and deactivating players
You can use more than one method to activate or deactivate a player.
•
To activate from the Player List page, click the Enable hyperlink for the desired Player, or select
multiple Players and click the Enable Selected button. This activates and enables the selected
player(s). If the Player cannot be activated, an Error Message appears that details the reasons.
NOTE: Only one player can be activated and enabled per MediaPort channel at a time.
•
To activate from the Edit Player page, click Activate and Enable or Activate as disabled at the
bottom of the page.
Clicking Activate as disabled sends the player definition to the Spectrum device. This may be useful
if you are using an automation system to automatically enable different players at different times.
294
Player to player dubbing
•
•
To deactivate a Player from the Player List page, click the Deactivate hyperlink for the desired Player,
or select multiple Players and click the Deactivate Selected button.
To deactivate a Player from the Edit Player page, click the Deactivate button at the bottom of the
page.
Enabling and disabling players
You can use more than one method to enable or disable a player.
•
•
•
•
To enable a player from the Player List page, click the Enable hyperlink for the desired Player, or
select multiple Players and click the Enable Selected button. This activates and enables the selected
player(s). If the Player cannot be enabled, an error message appears that details the reasons.
NOTE: Only one player can be activated and enabled per I/O module channel at a
time.
To enable a player from the Edit Player page, click Activate and Enable at the bottom of the page.
To disable a Player from the Player List page, click the Disable hyperlink for the desired Player, or
select multiple Players and click the Disable Selected button.
To disable a Player from the Edit Player page, click the Disable button at the bottom of the page.
Player to player dubbing
Dub from one player to another using the Player-to-Player Dubbing feature.
1. From the Player List page, ensure that the player you wish to use as your Source player is shown as
Inactive, and that the player you wish to use as your Target player is also shown as Inactive.
2. Click the Edit link for the Source player to open the Edit Player page. Then scroll to the bottom of
the page to locate the Player-to-Player Dubbing Configuration section, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 7-38: Connecting to a Target Player
3. Using the drop-down box, select the Target player. Then, depending on your system configuration,
click either Connect via 1394 or Connect via I/O device.
4. Activate the Source player by clicking the Activate button at the bottom of the Edit Player page. This
will also activate the Target player.
The Player Properties page for both the active Source and Target players will display a message
indicating the Source and Target players, including a hyperlink to each player.
The Player List page will also indicate which player is a Source and Target.
295
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Disconnecting Devices
Disconnect devices from tracks on a Player.
1. Make sure the player is deactivated.
2. On the Edit Player page, locate the track that you want to disconnect, and click the Attach Devices
button to display the Attached Devices page.
3. On the Attach Devices page, clear the box in the Attach Device column for the device(s) that you
want to disconnect. Note that you can disconnect one device and leave others connected.
4. Click Done to return to the Edit Player page.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other tracks that you wish to disconnect.
6. Click Done to return to the Player List.
Related information
Activating and deactivating players on page 294
Using Auto Input Sense recording
You can attach several players to a single I/O module channel and allow the server to automatically select
one for recording.
Note the following important points:
•
•
•
•
•
The Spectrum server will automatically select an appropriate player from a set of players attached to
a I/O module once it detects either a CueRecord command or that a new clip is attached to an empty,
stopped timeline, and the players are correctly configured to record.
The video input must be stable and correct at the time the server detects a CueRecord or that a new
clip is attached on an empty stopped timeline. Note that the I/O module should sense the new video
input within a half second of a stable input. This may add up to a half second to process the above
commands.
Make sure only one player in a set of players attached to an I/O module channel is enabled at one
time. Spectrum does not prevent you from enabling multiple players, which will result in record/
playback problems.
Spectrum only switches players automatically when the currently active player is stopped and the
timeline is empty. For example, this means automation must stop and eject all clips after recording in
order for Spectrum to switch to the correct player for playout.
Make sure the set of players attached to the I/O module are all be configured for the same frame rate
family. All attached players must either be 25 Hz and 50 Hz, or they must all be 29.97 Hz and 59.94
Hz. You cannot mix a 25 Hz players with 29.97 Hz players.
1. Make sure all the players you wish to use are attached to the same I/O module channel and
configured to record. If you wish to play after recording, make sure the first player you wish to use is
configured for play and record.
NOTE: If you wish to use the Auto Sense feature to play and record media with
multiple frame rates (within the same frame rate family), do not configure multiple Play
and Record players. Instead, configure only one player for Play and Record and make
sure the frame rate set is set high enough to play out all the necessary frame rates.
296
Deleting players
And then create multiple Record players configured to record the desired frame rates.
The Auto Sense Recording feature will not work correctly with multiple Play and Record
players.
2. Activate and Enable the first player by using the Activate and Enable buttons.
3. For all subsequent players, configure them as Activated and Disabled by using the Activate as
disabled button.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Changing the player state on page 294
Deleting players
You can delete a player from the Player List page.
1. From the Player List, make sure that the Player(s) to be deleted have been deactivated.
2. Once deactivated, click the Delete Hyperlink for the desired Player, or select multiple Players and
click Delete Selected. A warning dialog appears.
3. Click OK to delete the Player(s).
Copying a Player
SystemManager allows you to create a new player by copying an existing player.
For certain player configurations, SystemManager will copy all player settings including all track and
device information. Note the following requirements a player must adhere to in order for all player settings
to be copied:
•
•
•
The player is configured with no more than one video track, one audio track, and one proxy track.
The player is attached to at least one I/O module but not more than one (for example, if there were
multiple tracks attached to separate devices).
Any MediaPort attached to the player is either a 5000 series or 7000 series, and any ChannelPort
attached to the player is either a 7000 series or 8000 series.
IMPORTANT: For players that do not follow the above requirements, the following settings
will not be copied: Track configuration such as Simple or Advanced; Proxy tracks; Attached
device information; Closed Caption or Subtitle settings.
1. Click the Configuration tab, and then click Player Configuration in the left-hand column to open the
Player Configuration page.
2. Click the video server that contains the player(s) you wish to copy to open the Player List page.
3. From the Player List page, select the player you wish to copy and click Copy Selected.
4. From the Copy Player page, enter the name of the new player, and then click Copy.
297
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Note that when you make a copy, by default, the new player retains the base name of the original
player but includes a prefix of “Copy_” and a numeric suffix starting with “0.” For example, if you have
a player named “Player” and you make three copies, SystemManager will name them Copy_Player0,
Copy_Player1, and Copy_Player2.
5. From the Destination Device page, click the device channel you wish to attach the new player to,
and then click Done.
NOTE: The Destination Device page will only display devices within the same family
of the attached device for the original player. For example, if the original player is
attached to a ChannelPort 8000 series, the Destination Device page will only display
available ChannelPort 8000 series channels even if there are other I/O modules in your
system.
6. Verify that the new player appears on the Player List page. The new player is inactive and disabled
by default.
7. Double-check the settings of the new player before activating to ensure that all settings are correct.
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Configuring GPIO settings for players
You can configure your Spectrum system to control players via GPIO.
If you wish to use GPIO triggers for player control, first configure GPIO settings for the I/O module on its
respective Properties page, configure and attach the player to that I/O module, and then follow the steps
in this procedure to map the GPIO triggers to your player.
1. Once you have attached a player to the I/O module, navigate to the Player Properties page or Edit
Player page for that player.
2. From the Track section of the page, click the GPIO Trigger button to open the Change GPIO Player
Configuration page.
The Change GPI Player Configuration page displays the player name, frame rate, video format and
definition, and name of the attached I/O module in the top section of the page.
298
Configuring GPIO settings for players
Figure 7-39: Change GPI Player Configuration page
3. Click the Edit GPIO Player Configuration check box to configure the functionality for each GPI line.
4. Edit the Trigger Mapper section as follows. Then click Apply to save settings or Cancel to return to
default values.
If you have configured a GPI line for Input, the GPIs section will be available. The Name column
displays the name of the trigger. In the Function column, select as follows:
<blank>
If selected, the trigger ignores any signal and takes no action.
Play Pause/Continue If selected, the signal will cause the player to Play and then toggle between
Pause and Continue with each signal.Note that, for this action, the Trigger
State on the I/O Module Properties page should be set to Activating or
Deactivating.
299
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Record Start/Stop
If selected, the trigger will cause a player in the “cue record” state to go to
the “record” state. It will also cause a player in the “record” state to go to the
“stop” state.
Play Take Next
If selected, the signal will cause the player to play and then advance to
the next clip with each following signal. If the last clip is present the player
will advance to the end of the clip. Note that, for this action, the Trigger
State on the I/O Module Properties page should be set to Activating or
Deactivating.
Crash Record
If selected, you must also select the Max Record Duration in hours and
minutes. The signal will cause the player to record as long as the GPI
trigger is asserted or until the specified duration is reached.Note that, for
this action, the Trigger State on the I/O Module Properties page should be
set to Active.
NOTE: When using Crash Record, the resulting clip is
named with the current date/time of the crash record:
YYYYMMDD-HHMMSS
ARC Control
If selected, the signal will be used to change the aspect ratio for the
currently playing clip. The ARC for the player will be reset to the player ARC
configuration on the next clip. From the drop-down menu, select the desired
aspect ratio to be used for ARC control. Note that the “default” selection
applies whatever aspect ratio was present on the channel before the latest
ARC Control event.
If you have configured a GPI line for Output, the GPOs section will be available. The Name column
displays the name of the trigger. In the Action column, select as follows:
<blank>
If selected, the trigger ignores any signal and takes no action.
Tally Play
If selected, the player drives the GPO signal while it is playing.
Tally Record
If selected, the player drives the GPO signal while it is recording.
5. Click Done to return to the Player Properties page. To return to the I/O Module Properties page at
any time, you can click Configure GPIO.
6. Perform steps 1 through 5 for all attached players.
Related information
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers on page 172
Adjusting output timing
You can adjust a player’s output timing if needed.
A Player’s output timing can be adjusted in two different locations:.
•
•
An active Player’s output timing can be adjusted on the Player Properties page.
An inactive Player’s output timing can be adjusted on the Edit Player page.
300
Creating multiple audio track players
IMPORTANT: Only qualified video technicians should use this procedure. Before
commencing, ensure that you have the proper test and measurement equipment on hand,
and that it is properly connected to the I/O module.
1. On the Player Properties page or the Edit Player page, click Output Timing to display the Adjust
Output Timing page.
Figure 7-40: Adjust Output Timing
NOTE: Whether the display for Output timing shows HD Output Timing or SD Output
Timing, or both, will vary depending on the attached device and video standard
configured.
2. Depending on the desired output, in the HD Output Timing for... and/or SD Output Timing for...
field(s), enter the desired output timing, or click the desired timing buttons to increment or decrement
the output timing — by lines, half-lines, pixels and half pixels.
NOTE: If you manually type an output timing value in the field, you must press Enter
for the new value to register.
3. When the adjustments are complete, click Done to return to the original page (Player Properties
page or Edit Player page). Click Cancel to return to the original page without making (or accepting)
any changes — the original timing value will be restored.
Creating multiple audio track players
You can configure a single player with multiple audio tracks and associate the player with multiple I/O
modules.
In this configuration, each audio track is associated with its own individual I/O module. For example, you
wish to create a Player that has a single DV video channel, and 12 audio channels. This configuration
cannot be accomplished using a single I/O module. Instead, the Player must be connected to two I/O
modules.
301
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
NOTE: Spectrum supports up to 96 audio tracks, 48 embedded pairs per video clip. Up to
48 audio tracks can now be played simultaneously.
1. Ensure that all I/O modules that you wish to connect to the new Player are all connected to the same
Spectrum video server. This can be verified on the SystemManager’s System diagram.
2. Ensure that the input video signal is distributed to the SDI input connectors on all Spectrum video
servers. This step is necessary in order to synchronize all audio tracks to the same video.
3. Create a player.
4. From the Edit Player page, click the button for the desired video track media type. Optionally, you
may choose to add VBI.
5. For the selected video track, click Attach Devices to display the Attach Devices page.
6. In the Attach the Device column, click the check box for the first I/O module that you wish to connect
to the Player.
7. Click Done to return to the Edit Player page.
8. Click Audio as many times as necessary, until the desired number of channels are achieved — also
taking into account the number of I/O modules available. For example, if you want to use 14 channels,
click Audio twice. Select 8 channels in the first track, and 6 channels in the second track.
9. Click Attach Devices for each audio track, and attach the track to one of the selected MediaPort s.
Ensure that each track is connected to a unique MediaPort. Click Done within the Attach Devices
page for each track.
10. On the Edit Player page, click Done to complete the procedure and return to the Player List. The
Player may now be activated and used in the normal manner.
The following figure illustrates a multi-track player with 14 audio channels.
Figure 7-41: Multiple Audio Track Players Configuration Example
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Configuring audio tracks on page 274
Activating and deactivating players on page 294
302
Moving players
Moving players
You can move one or more Players from one Spectrum server to another.
Additionally, Players may be moved from Spectrum servers that are not responding. This feature is useful
when MediaPorts are moved between Spectrum servers (thus requiring you to move the MediaPort s’
associated Players), and when Spectrum servers need to be serviced.
1. Navigate to the Player List for the destination Spectrum server. At the bottom of the page, select the
source Spectrum server from the drop-down box.
2. Click Select Players to display the Select Players page.
3. Choose the Players that you wish to move between Spectrum servers by clicking the appropriate
check boxes. You can also click Select all Players or Clear Selection as desired.
4. Click Move to perform the move function between Spectrum servers . The selected Players will
disappear from the list.
5. Click Done to complete.
About allowing players to be enabled or disabled by automation
SystemManager allows players on your Spectrum system to be enabled or disabled using an automation
system. If you wish to configure your system for automation control of players, contact your automation
vendor to find out if they have implemented this capability.
CAUTION: In order to allow automation control of players, the player resource safety
check in SystemManager must be disabled (see “Configuring the player resource check”).
When the player resource check is disabled, SystemManager no longer resolves conflicts
between players competing for bandwidth and I/O module resources automatically. Instead,
you must verify on your own that conflicting players are not activated simultaneously.
Related information
Configuring the player resource check on page 26
About the player utility
Note the minimum time between recording to a Spectrum server and viewing the clip.
Keep the following important points in mind:
•
Note the minimum safe zone between the “Record” Player and a “Playout” Player viewing the clip
being recorded on a Spectrum video server:
◦
•
The minimum safe zone for Players on the same host of the same Spectrum video server is 10
seconds.
◦ If the “Record” Player is on a different Spectrum video server or a different host of the same
MediaDirector than the “playout” Player, the minimum safe zone in all cases is 40 seconds.
In order to prevent queuing or playing a clip in a Playout Player in violation of the minimum safe zone,
the software notifies the playout control application that the clip is unavailable until it is greater than 10
seconds or 40 seconds in duration (or recording is finished) if the players are on the same host or on
303
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
different hosts, respectively. The actual time from crash record to availability of playout may be several
seconds longer, owing to record startup and automation polling latencies. For VDCP controllers, the
NOT READY TO PLAY BIT in the VDCP ID Request command is used. For Omnibus controllers,
QServ gets this status from the Spectrum video server and reports that such a clip is not load-able,
and further reports an error if a load is attempted.
About VANC implementation in Spectrum
Note how Spectrum implements VANC for HD video.
NOTE: This section deals with VANC for HD video. If you wish to preserve VANC data for
SD video, please contact Harmonic technical support for assistance.
In a Spectrum System, Vertical Ancillary Data (VANC) is, by default, ignored during the recording of
HD material. Using the SystemManager application, you can preserve information in the stored clip by
specifying a non-zero value, up to a maximum of 6000 bytes on the Edit Player page as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 7-42: Edit Player—VANC Implementation
The number of bytes specified per frame is saved with the recording. If the clip is later played on a
Spectrum System, it is reconstructed as VANC in the HD baseband output. Bytes in excess of the
specified value will not be recorded.
Preserving VANC data in a recording consumes bandwidth. Bandwidth requirements for VANC-328M,
which applies if you select Internal as your VANC type for an MPEG-2 track, are listed in the following
table.
Table 7-4: Bandwidth requirements for VANC-328M data
Bandwidth Required for VANC-328M (Mbps)
VANC Bytes
Preserved per
Frame
Frame Rate (fps)
25
29.97
50
59.94
1000
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.5
304
About VANC implementation in Spectrum
Bandwidth Required for VANC-328M (Mbps)
2000
0.4
0.5
0.8
1.0
3000
0.6
0.7
1.2
1.4
4000
0.8
1.0
1.6
1.9
5000
1.0
1.2
2.0
2.4
6000
1.2
1.4
2.4
2.9
a Spectrum System automatically decreases the video recording bit rate by the amount shown so that
the total bit rate (VANC plus video) does not exceed the value configured into the Player. You should
take this information into account when setting the bit rate in order to achieve the desired video quality.
No adjustment is needed for playback-only Players because the clip will conform to the settings used for
recording, that is, a Player set for “X” Mbps playback will accommodate any VANC as long as the Player
used to record the clip used the same bit rate or less.
Notes about VANC for AVC-Intra
•
•
•
The AVC-Intra format reserves a fixed amount of space for VANC data regardless of whether or not
VANC is present. Therefore, the space used for AVC-Intra clips is independent of how much VANC is
captured.
For 1080i resolution, 5760 bytes are reserved for VANC. For 720p resolution, 2880 bytes are reserved
for VANC.
Each VANC packet has DC (data count) bytes of payload. Storing a VANC packet in AVC-Intra uses
DC + 7 bytes of the reserved space.
Equation for VANC-328M
The VANC-328M equation can be used to determine the number of bytes required to store VANC data for
SMPTE-328M encoding.
The following equation can be used to determine the number of bytes required to store VANC data for
SMPTE-328M encoding.
Key:
•
•
N = number of VANC packets
DCn = data count for VANC packet n (this data count is the number of user data words in the VANC
packet)
305
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Equation for VANC-436M
The VANC-436M equation can be used to determine the number of bytes required to store VANC data for
SMPTE-436M.
Key:
•
•
N = number of VANC packets
DCn = data count for VANC packet n (this data count is the number of user data words in the VANC
packet)
About AFD support
Note how Spectrum handles AFD data.
The Active Format Description or AFD is a standard set of codes that can be inserted in the baseband
SDI video signal which carries information about their aspect ratio and active picture characteristics.
Standard AFD codes provide information to video devices about where in the coded picture the active
video is and also the “protected area” which is the area that needs to be shown. Outside of the protected
area, edges at the sides or the top can be removed without the viewer missing anything significant. Video
decoders and display devices can then use this information, together with knowledge of the display shape
and user preferences, to choose a presentation mode. The AFD codes are described by SMPTE-2016-1
and RP-186-1995 for HD and SD video respectively.
Spectrum supports AFD for both HD and SD video on the MediaPort 5220, 5320, 5400, 5500, and 7000
series, as well as ChannelPort and Spectrum X.
If the MediaPort you are using supports AFD and you are playing content that contains AFD information,
the AFD value in that content will override your player configuration settings in SystemManager. However,
even if you are playing content that contains AFD information, make sure to configure the up/down
conversion options for your player in SystemManager. This is necessary for the internal converter to be
activated. If no AFD information is found in your video content, then the aspect ratio settings selected in
SystemManager will be used by default.
NOTE: If you are recording HD video that contains AFD information in the VANC data,
make sure to preserve a sufficient amount of VANC data in the stored clip by specifying the
appropriate value (up to a maximum of 6000 bytes) on the Edit Player page. If you do not
set a high enough value, you may lose AFD information.
When playing a clip with AFD values, a Spectrum system looks for the AFD information in the order
described in the following table, and then plays out the first AFD value that it finds. This priority is applied
when the clip is loaded in order to determine the aspect ratio of the internal up or down converter.
306
About AFD support
Table 7-5: AFD Priority Table
Priority
Description
1st
Harmonic aspect ratio flag
2nd
Encoda aspect ratio flag
3rd
MXF AFD picture essence descriptor
value
4th
AFD information in 436M track
NOTE: You can use the Media API to obtain or change the AFD value in a clip.
The following table summarizes all of the Encoda to Harmonic aspect ratio mappings. Note that “Ana”
refers to “Anamorphic.”
Table 7-6: Encoda AFD to Harmonic Aspect Ratio Table
TV Width Code
(Encoda)
Harmonic Aspect Ratio
(blank)
Player or Clip Tag Default
W
Wide (16:9); Up = Ana, Down = Letter
16
16:9; Up = Ana, Down = Letter
14
14:9; Up = Crop, Down = Crop
4
4:3; Up = Pillar, Down = Full
1
AFD = 1, 4:3; Up = Pillar, Down = Full
2
AFD = 2, 16:9; Up = Full, Down = Letter
3
AFD = 3, 14:9; Up = Crop, Down = Crop
5
AFD = 5, 4:3/14:9; Up = Crop, Down = Crop
6
AFD = 6, 16:9/14:9; Up = Crop, Down = Crop
7
AFD = 7, 4:3; Up = Pillar, Down = Full
The following table shows the mapping between Harmonic Aspect Ratio Conversion values and SMPTE
2016 AFD codes.
Table 7-7: Harmonic Aspect Ratio to SMPTE 2016 and RP186 AFD codes
Harmonic Aspect Ratio
AFD Codes for Standard
Definition
Anamorphic
1000/1
Crop
1011/0
Full
1010/0
Pillar
1001/0
307
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Harmonic Aspect Ratio
AFD Codes for Standard
Definition
Anamorphic
1000/1
None
Invalid
Harmonic Aspect Ratio
AFD Codes for High Definition
Anamorphic
1000/1
Crop
1011/1
Full
1001/1
Letter
1010/1
None
Invalid
For diagrams of the Harmonic up conversion and down conversion aspect ratio options refer to “About up
conversion or down conversion options.”
Related information
About up conversion or down conversion options on page 292
About Harmonic timecode behavior
Harmonic has extensive timecode management capabilities for selecting sources, encoding lines, and
generating/regenerating timecode at record, and playback time.
Timecode sources may come from the Player’s LTC input connection, be extracted from the vertical
interval (VI) of the Player’s source video, or may be automatically generated internally from the system’s
MediaDirector reference input (as selected on the Properties page in the General Properties sections).
Irrespective of Player type - whether Record or Play, a timecode source must be chosen for each Player.
For Record Players:
On the Edit Player page, the Record Timecode Source selection determines if the timecode will be
generated internally, or externally.
•
•
If External is selected, the source can be either LTC or VITC (as selected on the Attach Devices
page).
If Internal (TCG on) is selected, timecode is obtained from the server’s Timecode Generator.
Regardless of the “Input” timecode source, the record input timecode data will be saved as part of the
video media file. If the Player is configured to preserve “VBI data” (as selected in the Track Section of
the Edit Player page), up to 8 selected lines of information are also recorded with the media file. This
option is available for DV 25, DVCPRO 25, DVCPRO 50, and MPEG tracks only.
For Play Players:
On the Edit Player page, the Playback Timecode Source selection determines if the timecode will be
generated internally (regardless of recorded data) for each clip — or from the recorded media.
308
About Harmonic timecode behavior
From Clip
Allows you to output the timecode stored inside the clip itself. The timecode is
read frame-by-frame from the clip and output using the MediaPort.
Internal (TCG on)
Allows you to output timecode from the server’s Timecode Generator.
When Internal (TCG on) is selected for either Record or “Play” Players, an
additional set of options are available to configure timecode generation. The
choices are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hold Allows you to maintain timecode generation at a constant value
specified using the Player API.
Free Run Allows you to define a continuous increase in value starting from a
value specified using the Player API.
Locked to Player Timeline Timecode is generated based on the timeline
position. Typically, timecode will start from 00:00:00:00 and will be
continuous thorough the entire back-to-back clip sequence.
Locked to Clip’s First Timecode Timecode is generated by the internal
Timecode Generator (TCG) but the TCG is re-initialized at the beginning
of each clip with the clip’s start timecode value, offset by the difference
between the “clip in” value used when attaching the clip (OmPlrAttach)
and the first frame value of the clip (OmPlrClipGetInfo). When the timeline
position reaches the next clip, the TCG again re-initializes to a value based
on the clip’s start timecode and how the clip was attached.
NOTE: This option is undefined for a Record Player;
selecting this option inserts valid but indeterminate timecode.
Locked to Clip Position Timecode is generated by the internal timecode
generator (TCG) but the TCG is re-initialized to a value based on how the
clip was attached (OmPlrAttach). When the timeline position reaches the
next clip, the TCG again re-initializes to a value based on how the clip was
attached.
Locked to VITC input reference: Timecode is derived from the Vertical
Interval Timecode (VITC) in the reference input.
Comparing “From Clip” with “Locked to Player Timeline”
When a clip is recorded with timecode, the timecode values are stored in the wrapper file and media
essence file. The wrapper file only holds the start timecode while the media essence file holds all
timecode values, frame-by-frame.
The timecode output from a MediaPort can be produced from the media essence file or generated by the
MediaDirector ’s internal Timecode Generator (TCG).
The following figure illustrates a scenario where there are three PAL (625) clips A, B and C, each
recorded for 10 seconds (250 frames), and all loaded on to the timeline.
309
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Figure 7-43: Comparing Multiple Clip Timecodes on a Timeline
To output the actual timecode stored inside the media essence file, the Player’s Playback Timecode
Source must be set to “From Clip”. The timecode is read frame-by-frame from the media essence file
and output using the MediaPort. In a back-to-back playback, the timecode output will change when a
different clip starts to play. Referencing the previous figure, the From Clip timecode value at points A, B,
C, & D are listed in the following table.
Table 7-8: From Clip Timecode Values
Point
Timeline Position
MediaPort Timecode
Output
A
00:00:00:00
20:05:00:00
B
00:00:10:00
00:08:40:00
C
00:00:20:00
05:10:20:00
D
00:00:29:24
05:10:29:24
If the Player’s Playback Timecode Source is set to Internal (TCG on) and Timecode Generator
Mode is set to Locked To Player Timeline then the timecode output is generated based on the timeline
position. The actual timecode stored inside the media essence file is no longer being used. Typically the
timecode output will start from 00:00:00:00 and will be continuous throughout the entire back-to-back.
Referencing previous figure, the Locked to Player timecode values at points A, B, C, & D are listed in the
following table. .
Table 7-9: Locked to Player Timeline Timecode Values
Point
Timeline Position
MediaPort Timecode
Output
A
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
B
00:00:10:00
00:00:10:00
C
00:00:20:00
00:00:20:00
310
About Harmonic timecode behavior
Point
D
Timeline Position
00:00:29:24
MediaPort Timecode
Output
00:00:29:24
About “Locked to Clip’s First Timecode”
If the Player’s Playback Timecode Source is set to Internal (TCG on) and Timecode Generator Mode
is set to Locked to Clip’s First Timecode then the internal timecode generator is reinitialized at the
beginning of each clip with the start timecode from that clip.
The timecode value is not read frame-by-frame from each clip. The start timecode is read from the
wrapper file and used to extrapolate the remaining timecode for the particular clip. As the playback of one
clip reaches the end and a new clip begins to play, the Timecode Generator repeats the action by reading
the start timecode of the new clip and extrapolates the remaining timecode for that new clip.
Figure 7-44: Comparing Multiple Clip Timecodes on a Timeline
Referencing the previous figure, the Locked to Clip’s First Timecode values at points A, B, C, & D are
listed in the following figure.
Table 7-10: Locked to Clip’s First Time Code Values
Point
Timeline Position
MediaPort Timecode
Output
A
00:00:00:00
20:05:00:00
B
00:00:10:00
00:08:40:00
C
00:00:20:00
05:10:20:00
D
00:00:29:24
05:10:29:24
If the timecode stored inside the media essence file has discontinuity, that discontinuity will not affect
the MediaPort ’s timecode output because the timecode output is extrapolated from the wrapper file’s
311
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
start timecode instead of reading frame-by-frame from the media essence file. This is the main difference
between From Clip and Locked To Clip’s First Timecode.
Figure 7-45: Locked to Clip’s First Time Code Timeline
Harmonic API commands can be used to modify the wrapper file start timecode without affecting the
actual timecode stored inside the media essence file.
For example, clip A’s wrapper file start timecode was changed from the original value of 20:05:00:00 to a
new value of 08:30:00:00. Referencing the previous figure, “Locked to Clip’s First Time Code Timeline,”
if Timecode Generator Mode is set to “Locked to Clip’s First Timecode” and clip A was loaded and
playback, then the timecode output is listed in the following table.
Table 7-11: Modifying Timecode using Harmonic API Commands
Point
Timeline Position MediaPort Timecode
Output
Actual Timecode in
Media Essence File
A
00:00:00:00
08:30:00:00
20:05:00:00
B
00:00:04:24
08:30:04:24
20:05:04:24
C
00:00:09:24
08:30:09:24
20:05:09:24
Comparing “Locked to Clip’s First Timecode” and “From Clip”
Note the differences between the Locked to Clip’s First Timecode and From Clip options.
The following figure shows a single PAL (625) clip that has been recorder for 30 seconds (750 frames)
and with discontinuous timecode.
312
About Harmonic timecode behavior
Figure 7-46: Locked to Clip’s First Timecode timeline
When the Timecode Generator Mode is set to Locked to Clip’s First Timecode, the internal Timecode
Generator only reads the start timecode from the wrapper file and extrapolates the remaining timecode for
the same clip.
Referencing the previous figure, the timecode value at points A, B, C, & D are listed in the following table.
Table 7-12: Locked to Clip’s First Timecode Values
Point
Timeline Position
MediaPort Timecode
Output
A
00:00:00:00
12:05:00:00
B
00:00:10:00
12:05:10:00
C
00:00:20:00
12:05:20:00
D
00:00:29:24
12:05:29:24
When the Playback Timecode Source is set to From Clip, the timecode is read frame-by-frame from the
media essence file and output using the MediaPort. Referencing the previous figure, the timecode value
at points A, B, C, & D are continuous as listed in the following table.
Table 7-13: From Clip Timeline
Point
Timeline Position
MediaPort Timecode
Output
A
00:00:00:00
12:05:00:00
B
00:00:10:00
02:05:00:00
C
00:00:20:00
06:05:10:00
D
00:00:29:24
06:05:19:24
313
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
About “Locked to Clip Position”
If the Player’s Timecode Generator Mode is set to “Locked to Clip Position” then the internal Timecode
Generator is reinitialized at the beginning of each clip, with the IN point of each clip.
For example, if there are two PAL (625) clips A and B, and each clip has a duration of 5 minutes (7500
frames), each clip is trimmed down as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7-47: Locked to Clip Position Timeline
In the following figure, when the two clips are loaded on to the timeline and playback, the timecode output
at points A, B and C are listed in the table that follows..
Figure 7-48: Not Locked to Clip Timeline
Table 7-14: Locked to Clip
Point
Timeline Position
MediaPort Timecode
Output
A
00:00:00:00
00:00:12:00
B
00:00:08:00
00:00:40:00
314
About Cue-to-Timecode with VDCP control
Point
C
Timeline Position
MediaPort Timecode
Output
00:01:47:24
00:02:19:24
The timecode value is not read frame-by-frame from each clip. Instead the IN point of each clip is read
and used to extrapolate the remaining timecode for the particular clip. As the playback of one clip reaches
the end and a new clip begins to play, the Timecode Generator repeats the action by reading the IN point
of the new clip and extrapolates the remaining timecode for that new clip.
About Cue-to-Timecode with VDCP control
Note some important points about the “Cue-to-Timecode” selection, when choosing VDCP control for a
player.
IMPORTANT:
Examples of Cue-to-Timecode Enabled and Disabled
Note examples of Cue-to-Timecode being enabled and disabled.
For both of the following examples, a clip with an ID of “XYZ” has been created with the following
metadata:
Clip Length: 00:01:00.00
Start Position: 02:00:00.00
Start Timecode: 12:00:00.00
Example: Example: Cue-To-Timecode disabled
In the following table, with the Cue-To-Timecode setting disabled, the first VDCP command will work fine.
But the second VDCP command will fail because the decoder is using 02:00:00.00 as the first frame of
video, and the start position for that command indicates frame12:00:00.00 as the start.
Table 7-15: Cue-To-Timecode disabled
VDCP Command
ID
Start Position
Length
Will it work?
Cue With Data
XYZ
02:00:00.00
00:01:00.00
Yes
Cue With Data
XYZ
12:00:00.00
00:01:00.00
No
315
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 7: Player configuration
Example: Example: Cue-To-Timecode enabled
In the following table, with the Cue-To-Timecode setting enabled, the first VDCP command will work fine.
But the second VDCP command will fail because the decoder is using 12:00:00.00 as the first frame of
video, and the start position for that command indicates frame 02:00:00.00.
Table 7-16: Cue-To-Timecode enabled
VDCP Command
ID
Start Position
Length
Will it work?
Cue With Data
XYZ
12:00:00.00
00:01:00.00
Yes
Cue With Data
XYZ
02:00:00.00
00:01:00.00
No
About players created using Spectrum Management
With Spectrum 7.6 and later, you may use the Spectrum Management application on the MediaDeck
7000, or (with 8.0 and later) Spectrum X to create players.
IMPORTANT: Players created with Spectrum Management cannot be modified, deleted,
activated, or deactivated using SystemManager.
SystemManager will display players created with Spectrum Management in read-only mode, and will not
allow any modifications or other functionality. To modify, activate/deactivate, or delete these players, use
Spectrum Management.
316
Chapter 8
Playout channel configuration
Configure a Playout Channel on your Spectrum video server, and configure any services including Polaris
Play: Playlist Control (Playlist Control), Polaris Play: Media Fetch (Media Fetch), and Traffic and Billing.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
About playout channels
About Polaris Play: Playlist Control
Configuring a playout channel
Media Fetch configuration overview
Traffic and Billing
Configuring SNMP critical error traps for Playlist Control
Configuring Delay Service
About playout channels
A Playout Channel is a process that runs on a Spectrum video server, which provides control for players
and graphics, allowing you to preview graphics with PreviewTool as well as control a player attached to an
I/O module.
When you use PreviewTool to preview graphics, the Playout Channel retrieves clips from the clips
directory and graphics from the graphics directory on the Spectrum video server. Each I/O module
channel can be connected to one Playout Channel. The following table shows how many Playout
Channels are available per video server.
Table 8-1: Playout Channels per Video Server
Video Server
# Playout
Channels
MediaDirector 2201
12
MediaDirector 2202
24
MediaCenter configured with two
public networking ports
12
MediaCenter configured with four
public networking ports
8
MediaCenter 2200B
20
Spectrum X
4
317
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
Video Server
# Playout
Channels
MediaDeck 7000
4
MediaDirector 2251B and 2251
12
MediaDirector 2252B and 2252
24
About Polaris Play: Playlist Control
Playlist Control is an optional, licensed Spectrum system feature that provides unattended playout of clips
and graphics driven by a channel's traffic schedule.
Playlist Control controls the Playout Channel and graphics plane of a Spectrum system, but it is not a fullfeatured automation system: each instance of Playlist Control controls only the channel for which it has
been configured.
Playlist Control consists of software present on a Spectrum system and tools for monitoring channels
and creating traffic schedules including Playlist and Scheduler. For information on Playlist Control and
Playlist Control tools, refer to the Polaris Play: Playlist User Guide. A Spectrum system that is licensed
for Playlist Control can use the Traffic and Billing service and, optionally, the Media Fetch service as well.
PreviewTool uses the Playout Channel to retrieve clips from the clips directory and templates from the
graphics directory on the Spectrum video server.
NOTE: In order to use Playlist Control to control a player, you must first configure that
player to use “Harmonic Playout” for control.
Configuring a playout channel
Configure a playout channel on the Spectrum video server.
Note that when you configure a Playout Channel using the Playout Channel Properties page, you must
associate the Playout Channel with an active player only, not an inactive one.
1. In SystemManager, click the Video Server Services icon in the left-hand column to open the Video
Server Services page as shown in the following figure.
Figure 8-1: Video Server Services Page
318
Configuring a playout channel
From the Video Server Services page, under Playout Channels, you can view details of all the Playout
Channels grouped according to video server. For each video server Playout Channel, you can view
the following:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Channel Name: Displays the name of the Playout Channel.
IP Address: Displays the IP address of the Spectrum video server on which the Playout Channel
is running.
Port: Displays the network port for the Playout Channel. This is the port that PreviewTool and
SystemManager use to connect to a Playout Channel.
Player Name: Displays the name of the active player associated with the Playout Channel.
I/O Module Name: Displays the name of the I/O module, which is connected to the Playout
Channel.
Channel: Displays the I/O module channel used by the Playout Channel.
2. From the Channel Name column click a Playout Channel to open the Playout Channel Properties
page.
3. On the Playout Channel Properties page, configure playout channel settings as necessary.
NOTE: Applying any changes to the Playout Channel causes the channel to restart.
NOTE: When License Enforcement is enabled, SystemManager will display an error
message if you attempt to save a Playout Channel that exceeds your license limit. To
review your installed licenses, from the Spectrum Server Properties page, click View
Licensed features
Before configuring Media Fetch and Traffic and Billing settings, refer to Media Fetch configuration
overview on page 331 and Traffic and Billing on page 334.
Related information
Player configuration on page 223
Enabling and configuring global Traffic and Billing Settings on page 335
Media Fetch configuration overview on page 331
Channel
Configure channel properties for your Playout Channel.
Channel Name
If you wish to change the name of the playout channel from the default, enter
the new name. Note this name must match the channel name used in your
Playlist Control playlists.
Description
As needed, enter text to describe the playout channel.
Time Zone
Select the desired time zone for this channel from the drop-down menu.
Channel Type
•
•
Preview: If selected, this channel can be used with the PreviewTool to run
short playlists of video clips or optionally external video with graphic overlays
and play them on an I/O module. A Spectrum X or ChannelPort is required if
the playlist contains external video or graphics.
Playout: If selected, this channel can be used for 24/7 on-air playout of
video clips and graphics. The channel can also use the Traffic and Billing
319
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
and Media Fetch services. Note that this option is only available with a
Playlist Control license.
Startup Offline
When selected, the Playout Channel will start up in Offline Mode. In Offline
Mode, the Playout Channel (or Playlist Control) no longer controls the player
or graphics on the I/O module. This may be useful if you wish to use Playlist
Control as a back-up automation system. When the Playout Channel is offline,
and Startup Offline is selected, you may still configure the Playout Channel,
load and run playlists or schedules but the Playout Channel will not interfere
with external automation control of the player and graphics. Note that the
Playlist application can also be set to offline mode.
Playout Channel
icons
Playlist Control allows you to load icons to distinguish each channel in Playlist
and Scheduler. If you do not provide an icon, Playlist Control will use a default
icon. If you provide an icon that is not the correct size, Playlist Control will scale
it to the expected size.
•
•
Small Icon: To load an icon for use on the channel tab of the Playlist Control
tools GUI, click Browse and navigate to the desired icon. This option
supports .PNG files that are 16x16 pixels or smaller.
Large Icon: To load an icon for use in the single channel event list view
and in the multi-channel timeline view in the Playlist Control tools GUI, click
Browse and navigate to the desired icon. This option supports .PNG files
that are 48x36 pixels or smaller.
About Offline mode and Startup states
You can set Playlist to run in offline mode as a back-up automation system.
In Offline mode, Playlist Control may be configured and loaded with schedules or playlists but does not
actively control the Spectrum X or ChannelPort. Note that when setting Offline mode, you must also
configure the Startup state of the Playout Channel in SystemManager to Startup Offline so that when the
Playout Channel restarts (which occurs whenever it is configured), it does so in Offline mode, and does
not take control of the player or graphics attached to the Spectrum X or ChannelPort.
In SystemManager, from the Playout Channel Properties page, in the Channel section, select Startup
Offline.
In the Playlist application, select Playlist Control > Offline mode.
In Playlist, the Offline Mode icon turns yellow when Offline mode is enabled.
NOTE: Applying changes to a Playout Channel instance causes it to restart.
IMPORTANT: External automation systems may require VDCP for player control. When
switching to Playlist Control for automation, make sure that you have selected Harmonic
Playout for Control in your Player settings in SystemManager.
320
Configuring a playout channel
Location
This section of the page provides information about the location of the Playout Channel.
Host Name
Displays the name of the Spectrum video server.
Network Port
Displays the network port for this Playout Channel. This is the port that
PreviewTool and SystemManager use to connect to a Playout Channel.
Client Network Port
Displays the network port that Playlist uses to connect to a Playout Channel.
Playlist uses this to transfer playlists and as-run log files.
Selecting controlled devices
Configure the Controlled Devices settings to select the active player(s) to be controlled by Playlist Control.
If your I/O module is in Enhanced Channel mode, you can select two players (channels A and B) to be
controlled, as shown in the following figure. Playlist Control allows you to mix between the two players
to a single output on the I/O module. If you select two players to be controlled, any Playlist Control
transitions that you configure will apply to transitions between those players. In order to configure two
controlled players, note the following requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
Enhanced Channel must be enabled on the I/O module.
The two players must be configured for compatible frame rates and latency.
Both players must be activated.
Both players must be configured on the same I/O module but separate channels. For example, if
player 1 is configured on Channel A, player 2 must be configured on Channel B.
Both players must be configured for the same clip directory.
1. Under Instance 1, in the Player Name field, select the player that will be associated with this Playout
Channel. Only players that have a video track attached to an I/O module will be available to select.
Note the following points:
•
•
If you have selected Channel Type: Preview, all active players will be available in the in Player
Name drop-down menu. If you have selected Channel Type: Playout, only players configured for
Control: Harmonic on the Player Properties page will be available.
Only active players will be available in Player Name drop-down menu, not inactive ones.
2. (Optional) If Enhanced Channel is enabled, under Enhanced Channel Instance 2, in the Player
Name field, select the player that will be associated with this Playout Channel. The same restrictions
described in the previous step apply.
The remaining empty fields will be automatically filled based on the player settings
Current Player
Displays the name of the player currently associated with this Playout
Channel.
Player Name
Select the active player to be controlled by this playout channel.
I/O Module Name
This field automatically displays the name of the I/O module attached to the
player shown in the Player Name field.
Current Frame Rate
This field displays the frame rate of the player shown in the Current Player
field.
321
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
Playout Frame Rate
This field automatically displays the frame rate of the player shown in the
Player Name field.
Channel
This field automatically displays the name of the Channel used by the player
in the Player Name field.
Related information
Player configuration on page 223
Player for Time Reference
The options in the Player for Time Reference section provide time reference configuration for the playout
channel.
Same as Player
Above
Select this option if you want the current player for this Playout Channel to be
used as a time reference for the Playout Channel.
•
Current Player: Displays the name of the player currently associated with
this Playout Channel.
Reference Player
Name
From the drop-down menu, select from the list of activated players. The
selected player will be used as a time reference for the Playout Channel. Use
this setting if you want to use a different player to provide the time reference
than the playout channel's current player.
Time Zone
Select the time zone to be used for the reference player. Make sure this
matches the timezone reference (house clock). UTC is often the preferred
timezone for reference time, but, in some cases, you may have time reference
in local time.
Discontinuity
Warning
Enter the threshold value used by Spectrum to generate a warning if it detects
a discontinuity in the timecode for the I/O module reference. For example, if this
value is set to 0, any discontinuity in the timecode will result in warning.
Current Frame Rate
Displays the frame rate for the current player.
Reference Frame
Rate
This field automatically displays the frame rate of the reference player shown in
the Reference Player Name field.
DST Transition
Range
Enter the threshold value used by Spectrum to generate a warning if the
daylight savings time transition occurs differently than expected.
Error Checking
The Error Checking settings are used by Spectrum to determine when to send error messages.
Playlist Warning
Threshold
Enter the threshold value to be used by Spectrum before sending a warning
if there is a problem in the playlist (for example, missing material, or schedule
gap). If the time from the current on-air time to time of error is less than
threshold, Spectrum will generate a warning.
Schedule Gap Error
Threshold
Enter the threshold value to be used by Spectrum before sending an error if
there is a gap in the playlist. If there is a schedule gap in the playlist greater
than the threshold, then Spectrum will generate an error.
322
Configuring a playout channel
Generate Error on
Empty Playlist
When selected, if there are not enough events in the playlist to extend past the
time indicated in the Playlist Error Threshold field, Spectrum will generate an
error.
Enable Duration
Update
When selected, Spectrum automatically checks the duration of a clip on the
Spectrum video server and displays this value in Playlist or Scheduler.
Playlist Error
Threshold
Enter the threshold value to be used by Spectrum before sending an error if
there is a problem in the playlist (for example, missing material, or schedule
gap). If the time from the current on-air time to time of error is less than
threshold, Spectrum will generate a error.
Schedule Overlap
Error Threshold
Enter the threshold value to be used by Spectrum before sending an error if
there is an overlap in the playlist. If there is a schedule overlap in the playlist
greater than the threshold, then Spectrum will generate an error.
Missing Material
Scan Time
Enter the amount of time Spectrum will look ahead in the playlist when
searching for events with missing material.
Graphic Fade Rates
The Graphic Fade Rates section determines fade rates for graphic templates.
Slow Fade Duration
(seconds)
Enter the duration you want a slow fade of a template to last. This time duration
can be entered as a decimal.
Medium Fade
Duration (seconds)
Enter the duration you want a medium fade of a template to last. This time
duration can be entered as a decimal.
Fast Fade Duration
(seconds)
Enter the duration you want a fast fade of a template to last. This time duration
can be entered as a decimal.
Default Fade In Rate
Click the drop-down arrow, and select Slow, Medium, Fast, or Cut to set the
default fade in rate of templates.
Default Fade Out
Rate
Click the drop-down arrow, and select Slow, Medium, Fast, or Cut to set the
default fade out rate of templates.
Transitions
The Transitions section includes settings for primary event transitions
NOTE: This section applies only to primary events, which include clips and external SDI
input.
Add or remove transitions as needed using the Add Transition and Remove options.
Transition Name
Enter the name of the transition. Note this is the same name that is used in the
“Transition” field of the Playlist Control playlist.
Transition Type
Select between the following transition types:
•
•
•
Simple Fade: Sets the video and audio transition types to Fade.
Simple Mix: Sets the video and audio transition types to Mix
Custom Mix: Allows you to select different video and audio transition types
for this transition.
323
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
Video Transition
Type
Select between Fade, Mix, or Cut.
Video Fade Up
Enter the time from the midpoint of the video transition to the end point of the
video transition. This sets the rate for the second half of the video transition.
Video Fade Down
Enter the time from the start point of the video transition to the mid point of the
video transition. This sets the rate for the first half of the video transition.
Audio Transition
Type
Select between Fade, Mix, or Cut.
Audio Fade Up
Enter the time from the midpoint of the audio transition to the end point of the
audio transition. This sets the rate for the second half of the audio transition.
Audio Fade Down
Enter the time from the start point of the audio transition to the mid point of the
audio transition. This sets the rate for the first half of the audio transition.
Audio Transition Lag Enter the number of seconds that the audio transition will lag behind video
transition, referenced to the mid point of both. You may enter a negative value if
you wish the audio transition to precede the video transition.
Default Transition
Select the transition to be used if the playlist does not specify a transition.
324
Configuring a playout channel
Channel Control
The Channel Control section provides a number of features for controlling a channel.
Figure 8-2: Playout Channel Properties
Channel Override
With the Channel Override feature, you may configure the layer, and graphic or clip to be used when the
Channel Override button in Playlist is clicked.
If this section is configured and you click the Channel Override button using Playlist, Playlist Control will
switch the channel to black, locate the specified graphic and/or clip, and load it on the specified layer for
this channel.
NOTE: If both the Graphic and Clip fields are left empty, when the Channel Override
button is clicked, the video output will go to black.
325
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
Layer
Select the layer to be used to load the specified graphic or clip when a channel
is overridden with the Channel Override button in Playlist.
Graphic
Type the name of the default graphic template to be used when a channel is
overridden with the Channel Override button (for example, template.swf). Note
that the specified graphic must be present in the graphics directory.
Clip
Type the name of the default clip to be used when a channel is overridden with
the Channel Override button (for example, evergreen.mpeg). Note that the
specified clip must be present in the clip.dir directory.
Mixer Override
With the Mixer Override feature, you may configure the layer and template to be used when the Mixer
Override button in Playlist is clicked.
If you click the Mixer Override button using the Playlist, and Mixer Override is configured, Playlist Control
will switch to the source indicated in the override fields, locate the template specified in this Graphics
Template field and load it on the specified layer for this channel.
NOTE: If both the Graphic and Clip fields are left empty, when the Mixer Override button
is clicked, the video output will go to black.
Layer
Select the graphics layer to be used when a channel is overridden with the
Mixer Override button.
Graphic
Enter the name of the default template to be used when a channel is overridden
with the Mixer Override button (for example, template.swf). Note that the
specified template must be present in the graphics directory. If this field is left
empty, when the Mixer Override button is clicked, the video output will go to
black.
Clip
Enter the name of the default clip to be used when a channel is overridden
with the Mixer Override button (for example, evergreen.mpeg). Note that the
specified clip must be present in the clip.dir directory. If this field is left empty,
when the Mixer Override button is clicked, the video output will go to black.
Override Source
Select the override source to be used when a channel is overridden. Note that
available sources depend on your I/O model and channel mode (for example,
standard channel or enhanced channel).
Override Color
If Color Generator is selected as the Override Source, type a color to be used
as the Override Color. Valid options include any color defined by CSS3 (http://
www.w3.org/TR/css3-color/).
ARC Override
The ARC Override feature allows you to change the aspect ratio of a clip during playout. This may be
useful if there is an unexpected issue with a clip.
If you click the ARC Override button in Playlist, the aspect ratio of the current clip will change to the ARC
Override setting and last for the duration of the clip.
ARC Override
Select the desired aspect ratio option from the drop-down menu.
326
Configuring a playout channel
Clear Channel
The Clear Channel feature allows you to configure Playlist to clear the playlist and switch to a default
source.
Enable Cutback to
Default
Select one of the following:
•
•
True: if selected, enables cutback to a default source after “Clear playlist” is
selected in Playlist.
False: if selected, no cutback will occur.
Default Source
Select the source to be used when a channel playlist is cleared and “Enable
Cutback to Default” is selected. Note that available sources depend on your
I/O module and channel mode (for example, standard channel or enhanced
channel).
Default Color
If you have selected Color Generator as the Default Source, enter the color to
be played. Valid options include any color defined by CSS3 (http://www.w3.org/
TR/css3-color/).
Manual Take Delay
The Manual Take Delay option allows you to specify the delay to occur between the current clip and the
next clip once Take Next is selected in Playlist.
Note the following considerations when setting this value:
•
•
•
For V-fade transitions, this value should be greater than the fade down time specified in the
Transitions section.
Transition time will vary according to player load time.
Transition time will vary according the graphics load time.
Manual Take Delay
Enter the manual take delay value in seconds.
Event Manager (GPI) Input
The Event Manager (GPI) Input feature allows you to map GPI triggers to Playlist operations.
NOTE: GPI triggers must be configured for the I/O module before they can be mapped.
Add Event(s)
Click to add an event.
Event Name
Select the GPI trigger to be used for a Playlist operation.
Action Type
Select the desired Playlist operation. For details on any of the Playlist
operations, see the Playlist Help system or the Polaris Play: Playlist User
Guide.
Action type options
TakeNext
This activates the Take Next operation in Playlist
ExternalCue
This allows you to trigger events through a GPI.
ToggleOverride
This action toggles the Channel Override operation in Playlist.
327
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
SetOverride
This activates Channel Override operation in Playlist until the GPI is deasserted.
ToggleStopStart
This action starts or stops a playlist in Playlist.
SetStopStart
This action starts or stops a playlist in Playlist until the GPI is de-asserted.
ToggleMixerOverride This action toggles the Mixer Override operation in Playlist.
SetMixerOverride
This activates the Mixer Override operation in Playlist until the GPI is deasserted.
ToggleArcOverride
This action toggles the ARC Override operation in Playlist.
SetArcOverride
This activates the ARC Override operation in Playlist until the GPI is deasserted.
ToggleHoldNext
This activates the Hold Next operation in Playlist.
SetHoldNext
This activates the Hold Next operation in Playlist until the GPI is de-asserted.
DropNext
This activates the Drop Next operation in Playlist.
ChannelClear
This activates the Channel Clear operation in Playlist.
ToggleOffline
This action toggles the Offline mode in Playlist.
SetOffline
This action activates the Offline mode in Playlist.
Related information
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers on page 172
GPO Secondary Events
The GPO Secondary Events feature allows you to map secondary events (graphics) to GPO triggers.
NOTE: GPO triggers must be configured for the I/O module before they can be mapped.
Add Event(s)
Click to add an event.
GPO Name
Enter the name that will be used to identify this GPO in the playlist.
•
Event Name
Critical Alarm: Default GPO trigger. If you wish to receive critical Playlist
Control errors via GPO, click the Event Name drop-down menu, and then
select the GPO trigger to be used for the Critical Alarm event.
Select the GPO trigger to be used for the secondary event. If you have not yet
configured GPO triggers, this menu will be empty.
Related information
Overview of configuring GPIO triggers on page 172
Configuring SCTE-104 for downstream program insertion
With Spectrum 8.2 and later and the SCTE-104 license, you can configure SCTE-104 settings to trigger
downstream program insertion (DPI) for certain material types.
The SCTE-104 protocol is used by automation systems to communicate with an "Injector" that inserts
SCTE-35 messages into a program stream, providing the downstream DPI information needed to "splice"
328
Configuring a playout channel
a different program or commercial material into the program stream. Spectrum acts as a proxy device to
accept SCTE-104 messages and place the appropriate ones into the VANC area of the associated SDI
video supplied to the injector.
Note the following about Spectrum support for SCTE-104 triggering:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Splice messages are sent for events, based on the event's material type. Material type configuration
determines which events will generate splice requests.
The splice time is the event start time, and the duration is the event duration.
Multiple back-back events can optionally generate a single splice request (configured by material
type), with a duration that is the sum of the events' durations.
Spectrum sends a fixed "avail" number of zero for each break, and supports only simple, linear break
triggering.
Spectrum sends a "program ID" of zero in each splice request.
Spectrum sends splice messages only on the primary output of the I/O module, not on the secondary
output.
First, configure the following SCTE-104 settings, and then configure material type settings to enable
SCTE-104 triggering.
1. Configure the following SCTE-104 settings.
Enable SCTE-104
Select to enable/disable SCTE-104 triggering.
Trigger preroll time
Indicates the pre-roll time in seconds to be sent in the SCTE-104 splice
request.
Message repeat
When enabled, the splice request message will be sent multiple times.
Message count
Indicates the number of times that the splice request message will be sent.
Message Period
Indicates the length of the interval (in seconds) between splice request
messages.
Example: If the following settings are configured:
◦
Trigger preroll time = 4 seconds
◦ Message repeat = selected
◦ Message count = 3
◦ Message period = 2 seconds
Then three splice requests will be sent:
◦
◦
◦
The first request is sent 8 seconds before the event. (Preroll time + two message periods = 8)
The second request is sent 6 seconds before the event. (Preroll time + one message period =
6)
The third request is sent 4 seconds before the event. (Preroll time = 4)
2. In the Material Types enable SCTE-104 triggering and configure SCTE-104 settings as follows.
◦
◦
dpi Enable: Select to enable SCTE-104 triggers for the selected material type.
dpi Separate Triggers: Select to indicate that separate SCTE-104 triggers should be sent for
every event of the selected material type. Note if this option is not selected for a given material
type, multiple back-to-back events of that same material type will generate a single splice request
with a duration that is the sum of the events' durations.
For example:
329
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
If dpi Separate Triggers is selected, and two back-to-back events of the same material type are
on the timeline, two separate splice request messages will be sent, one for each event.
If dpi Separate Triggers is not selected, and two back-to-back events of the same material type
are on the timeline, only one splice request message will be sent for both events.
Configuring Material Types
The Material Types feature allows you to associate a material type with an icon or clip, which will appear
in Playlist or Scheduler to identify the type of material for a Playlist Control primary event.
The following material types are configured by default: Program, Commercial, Promo, StationID, and
PSA.
Material types can be configured with a default clip that plays instead of the scheduled clip if Playlist
Control detects any of the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
The scheduled clip is missing.
The scheduled clip is still transferring and not ready for playout.
The scheduled clip has the wrong frame rate.
An error occurs when trying to attach the clip to the timeline.
The substitution occurs when the event is added to the timeline. If Playlist Control detects any of the
conditions described above, it places the default clip that matches the material type and duration of the
scheduled event on the timeline
•
•
To add an icon for a material type, click the Browse button for that material, and then navigate to and
select the icon you wish to use.
To add a default clip that will be used in case a substitution is needed for the respective Material type,
click Add Clip to open two fields.
1. In the first field, enter the clip name.
2. In the second field, enter the maximum clip duration.
3. Click Add Clip.
•
Configure SCTE-104 downstream program insertion options as follows:
◦
◦
dpi Enable: Select to enable SCTE-104 triggers for the selected material type.
dpi Separate Triggers: Select to indicate that separate SCTE-104 triggers should be sent for
every event of the selected material type. Note if this option is not selected for a given material
type, multiple back-to-back events of that same material type will generate a single splice request
with a duration that is the sum of the events' durations.
For example:
If dpi Separate Triggers is selected, and two back-to-back events of the same material type are on
the timeline, two separate splice request messages will be sent, one for each event.
•
If dpi Separate Triggers is not selected, and two back-to-back events of the same material type
are on the timeline, only one splice request message will be sent for both events.
To add a new material type, click Add Material Type.
330
Media Fetch configuration overview
In the Material Type Name field for the new material type field, type a name. Add an icon and/or
default clip, as described in the previous steps.
NOTE: The Default and Program material types cannot be removed.
Traffic Settings
Under Traffic Settings you can configure the Playlist Load Time by entering the number of hours before
the start time of the playlist that the playout channel will load the playlist.
Media Fetch configuration overview
The Media Fetch service is a licensed service that runs on your Spectrum video server and coordinates
the transfer of media such as video clips, audio files, or graphical elements from a remote file system to
the local file system on your video server via FTP.
Once Media Fetch is configured and enabled for a Playout Channel, if the Playout Channel detects that
material indicated on the playlist is missing from the local file system, then Media Fetch searches the
FTP server(s) that have been configured on the Media Fetch Configuration page in SystemManager and
retrieves it.
Note the following limitations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media Fetch supports connections to a maximum of four FTP servers.
Media Fetch supports a maximum of four simultaneous transfers.
Media Fetch does not support the AS02 wrapper type.
If a media file is specified without a file extension, Media Fetch will search for it using the following file
extensions based on the specified media type:
◦ Video files: .mov, .mxf
◦ Audio files: .wav, .aiff
◦ Graphic files: .swf, .png, .jpg, .jpeg, .bmp, .tga, .mp4, and .flv
Media Fetch assumes that only media files with extensions of .mov and .mxf may reference additional
media files.
If you have configured subtitles for a player, Media Fetch will search for associated subtitle files based
on the subtitle file extensions.
To configure Media Fetch, perform the following procedures in order.
1. Configuring Media Fetch for the video server on page 332
2. Configuring Media Fetch for a Playout Channel on page 334
About File System Management
The File System Management feature allows you to manage file space on the video server file system to
make room for new media.
Once enabled, File System Management will delete older media files to make room for new media files.
It determines which files to delete based on which files are the largest, and then the oldest, and deletes
those files first. It also follows the parameters that you set in the Cleanup Threshold Percent and
Protected Files fields. For example, if the Cleanup Threshold is set to 90, once the video server file
system is at least 90 percent full, File System Management will delete the largest and least recently used
331
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
files to maintain 10% disk free space. However, it will not delete any files specified in the Protected Files
field.
Note the following:
•
•
•
File System Management only deletes files on video server directories that are currently being
accessed by the Playout Channels on the video server. For a given Playout Channel, this includes
the directory used by the player shown in the Current Player field on the Playout Channel Properties
page. By default, these locations include /fs0/clip.dir for video and /fs0/ gfx.dir for graphic and audio
files.
The video server logs the history of all file deletions at /fs0/<dirname>/logs.
In order for File System Management to work effectively, Media Fetch must be enabled on all Playout
Channels. Otherwise, it could delete a file that is used by a non-enabled channel.
Configuring Media Fetch for the video server
When configuring the Media Fetch service, first configure it on the Spectrum video server.
1. From the Video Server Services page, locate the video server you wish to configure, and then click
the corresponding Edit Media Fetch link to open the Media Fetch Service Configuration page as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 8-3: Media Fetch Service Configuration Page
2. Configure the File System Management section as follows:
◦
◦
◦
Enable: Click to enable File System Management.
Cleanup Threshold Percent: Enter the percent of disk space that marks when file system
management should start. The default value is 90 percent.
Protected Files: Enter the names of any files that you wish to not be deleted by file system
management (separated with commas or semicolons).
332
Media Fetch configuration overview
3. In Remote File System and Directory Locations > Transfer Window enter the number of minutes
prior to scheduled air time that a missing file will transfer
4. In the FTP Settings section, you can configure FTP groups with one or more FTP servers, import
an FTP Group, or export an FTP Group. Once you have configured an FTP group, you may map a
playout channel to that group from the Playout Channel Properties page.
5. Click Apply to save your changes.
Configuring an FTP Group
With SystemManager 6.3 and later, you can configure one or more groups of FTP servers to use with
the Media Fetch service. Creating multiple FTP groups and mapping your channels to the appropriate
group is one way to ensure that each channel accesses the correct assets. For example, you may have
duplicate names for assets that exist on multiple servers. Using FTP groups allows you to group assets
as needed, and then map your channels to those groups appropriately.
1. In the Default Group section, click Add FTP Server.
Figure 8-4: Media Fetch Service Configuration—FTP Settings
2. Configure your FTP settings as follows:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Name: Enter the name of the FTP server you wish to use.
Path: Enter the path that Media Fetch will us to access files on your FTP server.
Server Address: Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server.
Server Portt: Enter the port number for your FTP server that will be used by Media Fetch. The
default is port 21.
Username: Enter the user name for your FTP server.
Password: Enter the password for your FTP server.
Asset Type: Select the file types supported by this FTP server. Media Fetch will search the FTP
for the selected asset types. Press the Ctrl key to select multiple options.
333
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
◦
◦
Relative Secondary Path: If using Independent Branding and organizing the graphics by folder,
enter the relative secondary path for independent branding graphics.
Allow Growing Files: Select to allow download of files that are actively being copied to the FTP
server (that is, their file size is growing). Note if you chose this option, the FTP server must support
transfer of growing files and the asset model must be Low Latency.
3. Add any additional FTP servers as desired by repeating steps 1-2. You may also import or export an
FTP group, as follows:
•
To export an FTP Group:
a. Click the Export FTP Group button for the FTP group you wish to export. A message appears
asking if you wish to save or open the corresponding XML file.
b. Save the corresponding XML file for the FTP group to your desired location.
•
To import an FTP Group:
a. under Import FTP Group, click the Browse button to browse to the XML file for the FTP group
you wish to import.
b. Click Import Group.
c. Verify that the FTP group details appear, and then click Apply to save your changes.
4. Click Apply to save your changes.
Configuring Media Fetch for a Playout Channel
Configure the Media Fetch service for a single playout channel.
1. From the Playout Channel properties page, make sure you have selected Channel Type: Playout.
2. From the Media Fetch section of the Playout Channel properties page, make sure the Enable Media
Fetch check box is selected.
3. In the Media Fetch > FTP Group field, select the FTP group you have configured in the previous
procedure or leave the default.
Traffic and Billing
Configure specific locations to be used for the playlist or as-run log files.
Note the following:
•
•
•
In order to use the Traffic and Billing feature, it must be enabled on the video server.
Multiple Playout Channels may use the same locations for the playlist or as-run log files on a video
server. The default locations are shared by all Playout Channels on a video server.
Note the following default location on your video server for loading your playlists:
//<IP address>/fs0/traffic/<serial number>/playlists
◦
◦
IP address: The IP address of your Spectrum video server.
Serial number: The serial number of your Spectrum video server
Both the IP address and serial number of your video server can be found on the Video Server
Properties page.
334
Traffic and Billing
•
Note the following default location on your video server for storing your as-run lists:
//<IP address>/fs0/traffic/<serial number>/asruns
◦
◦
IP address: The IP address of your Spectrum video server.
Serial number: The serial number of your Spectrum video server
Both the IP address and serial number of your video server can be found on the Video Server
Properties page.
Related information
Enabling and configuring global Traffic and Billing Settings on page 335
Viewing Spectrum video server properties on page 52
Enabling and configuring global Traffic and Billing Settings
You may enable and configure traffic and billing for all playout channels on a Spectrum video server.
The traffic and billing service is an integral part of the Playlist Control feature that allows you to upload
to your Spectrum system a playlist of primary and secondary events (such as video clips, audio, and
graphics) for a specified channel and to retrieve a corresponding as-run file. Once traffic and billing is
enabled, you can configure traffic and billing settings and override the default locations of playlist and asrun folders using the Playout Channel Properties page.
Note that any settings you configure for an individual playout channel will override the global settings on
the “Edit Traffic And Billing Services” page.
1. Make sure you have created the player you wish to use for Playlist Control and configured it to use
“Harmonic Playout” for Control.
2. Make sure you have attached the player you wish to use for Playlist Control to your I/O module, and
then activated it.
3. In SystemManager, click the Video Server Services icon in the left-hand column to open the Video
Server Services page.
4. Under Playout Channels, click Enable Traffic and Billing Service for the desired video server to
enable and configure Traffic and Billing for all channels on the video server.
5. Configure as follows:
◦
◦
Path Options: Select FS to use a playlist watch folder on the local Spectrum file system. Select
FTP to use a playlist watch folder on an FTP server. If FTP is selected, enter the following details:
◦ Username: Enter the user name for the FTP server (20 character limit).
◦ Password: Enter the password for the FTP server (20 character limit).
◦ FTP Server: Enter the IP address of the FTP server.
Playlist Path: Enter the path of the playlist watch folder on the local Spectrum file system to be
used for loading your playlist to the video server. Fill in this field only if you wish to configure a
different path than the default location. Note that you must use forward slashes in the path name.
Back slashes are treated as escape characters and will result in an invalid path.
NOTE: If this field is changed from the default path, Spectrum will ignore any
channel name specified in the playlist file XML and force this channel to be used
when the playlist is sent to the Playout Channel.
335
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
As Run Path: Enter the path to be used for storing your as-run files on the video server. Fill in this
field only if you wish to configure a different path than the default location. Note that you must use
forward slashes in the path name. Back slashes are treated as escape characters and will result in
an invalid path.
As-Run Format: Select the output format to be used for the as-run file.
◦ BXF 2.0: Select for general BXF compatibility.
◦ BXF 2.0 Myers: Select for compatibility with the Myers traffic system.
◦ PE 1.5: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 8.2.
◦ PE 1.4: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 8.0.
◦ PE 1.3: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 7.7 and 7.8.
◦ PE 1.2: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 7.6.
Enable BXF Messaging: Click to enable integration with a BXF traffic system and to receive BXF
messages.
Destination Name: Enter the name of the BXF traffic system. If you have selected BXF 2.0 Myers
in the As-Run Format field, Myers ProTrack is entered automatically.
BXF Traffic Server URL: Enter the IP address of the BXF traffic server.
Transfer Protocol: Select either REST or SOAP depending on your BXF traffic server. If you have
selected BXF 2.0 Myers in the As-Run Format field, SOAP is entered automatically.
6. Click Apply to apply all playout channel settings.
For instructions on creating and loading a Spectrum Playlist Control playlist and retrieving a Spectrum
as-run list, refer to “Using Polaris Play: Playlist Control” in the Polaris Play: Playlist User Guide .
Related information
Creating a player on page 224
Attaching devices and setting conversion options on page 281
Changing the player state on page 294
Configuring Traffic and Billing for a single playout channel
You can configure settings for an individual playout channel that override the default settings for your
Spectrum video server.
Harmonic recommends that you enable and configure default Traffic and Billing settings for all playout
chanels on a Spectrum video server first. Then, once you have done that, follow the instructions to
change the settings for an individual playout channel, which will override the default settings.
1. From the Video Server Services page, click a Playout Channel to open the Playout Channel
Properties page.
2. In the Traffic and Billing section of the page, configure settings as follows:
Reset to Default
Select to configure the Playout Channel to use the default playlist and asrun log locations.
Enable Traffic and
Billing
Click to enable or disable the Traffic and Billing service for this channel.
Note that Traffic and Billing can be configured per channel or globally for all
playout channels on a video server. Note that if you configure Traffic and
Billing settings for an individual channel, those settings override the global
settings.
336
Traffic and Billing
Path Options
Select FS to use a playlist watch folder on the local Spectrum file system.
Select FTP to use a playlist watch folder on an FTP server. If FTP is
selected, enter the following details:
◦
◦
◦
Playlist Path
Username: Enter the user name for the FTP server (20 character limit).
Password: Enter the password for the FTP server (20 character limit).
FTP Server: Enter the IP address of the FTP server.
Enter the path of the playlist watch folder on the local Spectrum file system
to be used for loading your playlist to the video server. Fill in this field only
if you wish to configure a different path than the default location. Note that
you must use forward slashes in the path name. Back slashes are treated
as escape characters and will result in an invalid path.
NOTE: If this field is changed from the default path,
Spectrum will ignore any channel name specified in the
playlist file XML and force this channel to be used when the
playlist is sent to the Playout Channel.
As Run Path
Enter the path to be used for storing your as-run files on the video server.
Fill in this field only if you wish to configure a different path than the default
location. Note that you must use forward slashes in the path name. Back
slashes are treated as escape characters and will result in an invalid path.
As-Run Format
Select the output format to be used for the as-run file
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
BXF 2.0: Select for general BXF compatibility.
BXF 2.0 Myers: Select for compatibility with the Myers traffic system.
PE 1.5: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 8.2.
PE 1.4: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 8.0.
PE 1.3: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 7.7 and 7.8.
PE 1.2: Select for Spectrum Playlist Control version 7.6.
Enable BXF
Messaging
Click to enable integration with a BXF traffic system and to send and receive
BXF messages.
Destination Name
Enter the name of the BXF traffic system. If you have selected BXF 2.0
Myers in the As-Run Format field, Myers ProTrack is entered automatically.
◦
◦
BXF Traffic Server URL: Enter the IP address of the BXF traffic server.
Transfer Protocol: Select either REST or SOAP depending on your BXF traffic server. If you have
selected BXF 2.0 Myers in the As-Run Format field, SOAP is entered automatically.
3. Click Apply to apply all playout channel settings.
Related information
Enabling and configuring global Traffic and Billing Settings on page 335
337
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
Configuring SNMP critical error traps for Playlist Control
You can configure a Spectrum video server to send trap messages to one or more client systems via
SNMP when a critical error occurs on a Playlist Control channel.
1. From the System Diagram, click your Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to open the Physical
Configuration page.
2. Click the picture of the Spectrum video server to display the Properties page.
3. In the Host Properties section of the page, in the Change Settings field, click Configure SNMP
Traps. The Configure SNMP Critical Error Traps for Playlist Control page appears.
Figure 8-5: SNMP Critical Error Trap Configuration
4. To enable trap notifications, in the Send trap notifications? menu, select Yes.
5. To add a destination client system, click Add Trap Destination.
6. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address for the client system.
For the Port and Community fields, leave the default values.
NOTE: Do not change the default values for the Port and Community fields unless
instructed by Technical Support.
4. Click Apply to save your changes.
You may add more trap destinations at any time. To remove a trap destination, click the Remove
check box and then click Remove Trap Destination.
Configuring Delay Service
Delay Service adds real time program delay capability to the Spectrum system. With this licensed service,
Spectrum can provide up to 24 simultaneous delayed outputs, or delay channels, for every ingest.
Launching Delay Service from SystemManager
You can launch Delay Service directly from the Spectrum video server properties page in
SystemManager.
1. From the System Diagram, click the Spectrum video server heading (or icon) to reach the Physical
Configuration page, and then click the video server icon to display the Properties page.
338
Configuring Delay Service
2. Under Host Properties, in the Change Settings field, click Launch Delay Service.
Logging in to Delay Service
You can access Delay Service from a web browser on a client computer by using the IP address of your
Spectrum video server, or by launching it from SystemManager.
Access the landing page by logging in with either the "user" level account or the "admin" level account.
NOTE: For Delay Service, there is no difference in permissions between the two accounts.
However, for Spectrum Management there is. For more details, see the Spectrum
Management Help system.
1. Type the IP address of your Spectrum server in your browser.
The Log in page appears.
2. Type the credentials for the user or admin account, and click Log in.
"user" log in:
◦
◦
User name: user
Password: user
"admin" log in:
◦
◦
User name: admin
Password: omneon
The landing page appears.
339
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
Once you are logged in, you can change your user name and password, by clicking the account icon
in the upper-right hand corner of the landing page, and selecting Change Password.
3. Click the Delay Service icon to open Delay Service.
Configuration overview
To configure Delay Service, you must also configure the Spectrum Players and Playout Channels that will
be used for delay.
1. Using SystemManager or Spectrum Management, configure the Record and Play Players you want to
use for delay as Control: Harmonic Delay.
2. In SystemManager or Spectrum Management, configure the Playout Channel for your Spectrum
server as Channel Type/Type: Delay.
3. Log in to Delay Service and setup your Spectrum video server or mulitple servers, depending on the
delay model you choose.
4. Using Delay Service, add delay channels to your Spectrum video server(s).
SystemManager configuration for Delay Service
Using SystemManager, configure any Players and Playout Channels for that you will use for Harmonic
Delay.
Configuring a player for Delay Service using SystemManager
To use a player with Delay Service, the player must be configured for Harmonic Delay.
NOTE: Scroll to the Required Licensed Feature section at the bottom of the Edit Player
page to verify that there is an available Delay Service license on the video server.
1. Navigate to the Edit Player page for the Record or Playout player you want to use with Delay Service.
2. From the Control drop-down menu, select Harmonic Delay.
Note that Default Clip Directory will be disabled.
NOTE: For any Record players that will be used in "grid" or "grid mirrored" delay mode
with Harmonic MediaGrid, the player(s) must be set to a low-latency format.
3. Once you have finished configuring the player, activate it.
Configuring a Playout Channel for Delay Service using SystemManager
In order to configure a Playout player with Delay Service, it must be controlled by a playout channel.
NOTE: This procedure is not required for Record players.
1. Navigate to the Playout Channel Properties page for the playout channel you wish to use with Delay
Service.
To open the Playout Channel Properties page, click the Video Server Services link in the left-hand
column, locate your Spectrum video on the Video Server Services page, and then click the playout
channel link under the Channel Name column.
2. Under Channel, in the Channel Type field, select Delay.
3. Under Controlled Devices, click the Player Name drop-down menu and select the player to be
controlled by this playout channel.
340
Configuring Delay Service
NOTE: Only active players will appear in this menu.
4. Verify that the player name appears in the Current Player field.
Note that Media Fetch is automatically enabled.
NOTE: The Material Types section of the Playlist Control page allows you to
configure backup content to be used in the event that the Record player fails. For
details, see "Configuring Material Types" in the SystemManager User Guide.
5. Click Apply to save the changes.
Setting up Delay Service
Delay Service setup varies depending on which model of delay you are using.
Setting up Delay Service for simple delay
Configure Delay Service for the simple delay model on your Spectrum video server.
NOTE: Instead of specifying IP addresses for your Spectrum devices, if DNS names are
available, you can enter the DNS name for each device.
1. From the Delay Service home page, click Setup.
2. Under Configuration, in the Delay Model drop-down menu, select simple.
3. (Optional) In the Purge files older than (in hours) field, enter the number of hour you want Delay
Service to wait before purging ingested files from the Spectrum video server.
4. Under Spectrum servers to configure, enter the IP address for your Spectrum video server.
NOTE: If you have an Extended File System (EFS) configuration, make an entry for
each Spectrum video server in your EFS that will use Delay Service and enter the IP
address for each one.
5. Click Save to save the setup and return to the Delay Service home page.
You can view your setup values at a later time by clicking Setup.
341
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
What to do next
Continue to "Creating a delay channel."
Setting up Delay Service for grid delay
Configure Delay Service for the grid delay model on your Spectrum video servers.
NOTE: Instead of specifying IP addresses for your Spectrum or Harmonic MediaGrid
devices, if DNS names are available, you can enter the DNS name for each device.
1. From the Delay Service home page, click Setup.
2. Under Configuration, in the Delay Model drop-down men, select grid.
3. (Optional) In the Purge files older than (in hours) field, enter the number of hour you want Delay
Service to wait before purging ingested files from the Spectrum video server.
4. UnderGrid Setup, configure the following values.
MediaGrid Host
Enter the IP address for your ContentDirector.
MediaGrid User
Name
Enter the user name for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
MediaGrid Password Enter the password for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
5. Under Spectrum servers to configure, click Add to make an entry for each Spectrum video server
that will be used in the delay channel, and then enter the IP address for each one. This includes the
Spectrum video servers that are recording the content to be delayed with this delay channel as well
as the ones that are playing out.
For example, if you have one Spectrum server recording the content to be delayed and two Spectrum
servers playing out the content with delay, you will need to add an entry for all three.
NOTE: Make sure any players and playout channels on those Spectrum servers are
configured for Harmonic Delay.
6. Click Save to save the setup and return to the Delay Service home page.
You can view your setup values at a later time by clicking Setup.
What to do next
Continue to "Creating a delay channel."
Setting up Delay Service for grid mirrored delay
Configure Delay Service for the grid mirrored delay model on your Spectrum video servers.
NOTE: Instead of specifying IP addresses for your Spectrum or Harmonic MediaGrid
devices, if DNS names are available, you can enter the DNS name for each device.
1. From the Delay Service home page, click Setup.
2. Under Configuration, in the Delay Model drop-down men, select grid mirrored.
3. (Optional) In the Purge files older than (in hours) field, enter the number of hour you want Delay
Service to wait before purging ingested files from the Spectrum video server.
4. Under Grid Setup, configure the following values.
342
Configuring Delay Service
MediaGrid Host
Enter the IP address for your ContentDirector.
MediaGrid User
Name
Enter the user name for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
MediaGrid Password Enter the password for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
5. Under Spectrum servers to configure, click Add to make an entry for each Spectrum video server
that will be used in the delay channel, and then enter the IP address for each one. This includes the
Spectrum video servers that are recording the content to be delayed with this delay channel as well
as the ones that are playing out.
Note that you will have entries for at least three Spectrum servers, two for recording the content to be
delayed, and one or more for playing out the content with delay.
NOTE: Make sure any players and playout channels on those Spectrum servers are
configured for Harmonic Delay.
6. Click Save to save the setup and return to the Delay Service home page.
You can view your setup values at a later time by clicking Setup.
The following shows an example of a grid mirrored setup.
343
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
344
Configuring Delay Service
What to do next
Continue to "Creating a delay channel."
Creating a Delay Channel
Create a delay channel for your Spectrum system.
NOTE: Instead of specifying IP addresses for your Spectrum or Harmonic MediaGrid
devices, if DNS names are available, you can enter the DNS name for each device.
1. From the Delay Service home page, click Add to open the Create a Delay Channel page.
2. Configure the Delay Channel settings as follows.
Name
Type the name of the Delay Channel.
Delay Channel Stop
◦
◦
Playback Stop: When selected, the clip will stop playing once the Delay
Channel stops.
Playback Continue: When selected, the clip will continue playing after
the Delay Channel stops.
Max Allowable Delay Enter the maximum amount of time that the clip can be delayed. The limit is
24 hours.
Delay Type
This field shows the delay model that was selected during setup.
Playout Channel
Detach
◦
◦
Playback Stop: When selected, the clip will stop playing once the
Playout Channel is detached.
Playback Continue: When selected, the clip will continue playing after
the Playout Channel is detached.
3. Under Record Player, configure the following.
NOTE: If you have setup Delay Service for grid mirrored delay, you will need to enter
details for two Record players.
Spectrum
Enter the IP address of the Spectrum server on which the Record player is
running.
Player
Select the Record player from the drop-down menu. Only players that have
been configured as Control: Harmonic Delay will appear.
Frame Rate
This field displays the Frame Rate of the selected player.
4. In the Playout Channels section, click Add to add a Playout Channel, and configure the following.
Spectrum
Enter the IP address of the Spectrum server on which the Playout Channel
is running.
Playout Channel
Select the Playout Channel from the drop-down menu. Only Playout
Channels that have been configured as Channel Type: Delay will appear.
Frame Rate
This field displays the Frame Rate of the player associated with the selected
Playout Channel.
Delay
Enter the desired delay time between ingest and playout. Note the following
limits according to delay model:
345
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
◦
For Simple delay:
◦
◦ The minimum value is 30 seconds.
◦ The maximum is the value entered for "Maximum Allowable Delay."
For Grid or Grid mirrored delay:
◦
◦
The minimum value is 12 minutes.
The maximum is the value entered for "Maximum Allowable Delay."
NOTE: You cannot add the same Playout Channel more
than once for one Delay Channel.
Standby
When selected, the Playout Channel will be in Standby mode until you start
it.
Example: The following example shows a Delay Channel in grid mirrored mode. Note that two
Spectrum servers with Record players are configured in the Record Player section.
5. Click Save to save the Delay Channel and return to the home page.
346
Configuring Delay Service
Result:
The Delay Channel will be visible on the home page and show a status of Stopped.
What to do next
Continue to "Running a Delay Channel."
Delay Service home page options
From the Delay Service home page, you can view or filter Delay Channels on the system, add new
Delay Channels, modify or delete existing ones, and access the pages to setup the system or run Delay
Channels.
Filter
This field allows you to search for a specific Delay Channel name on the
system.
Refresh
Click to update the Delay Channel list with the latest information.
Add
Click to open the Create a Delay Channel page where you can create and
save a new Delay Channel.
Setup
Click to open the setup page where you can specify the Spectrum servers and
Harmonic MediaGrid to be used and configure other settings such as delay
model.
Delay Channel Name Displays the name of any Delay Channels configured on the system. You can
sort by name list by clicking the up/down arrows.
Double-click the Delay Channel Name to access the Running Delay Channel
page for that Delay Channel and run it.
347
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
Status
Displays the status of the Delay Channels on the system. You can sort by status
by clicking the the up/down arrows.
Modify
Click to open the Modify Delay Channel page. From this page, you can modify
Delay Channel details.
Delete
Click to delete the corresponding Delay Channel.
Running a Delay Channel
From the Running Delay Channel page, you can run or stop the Delay Channel, add Playout Channels,
change the state of Record Players or Playout Channels, and modify delay.
1. From the Delay Service home page, move your cursor over the Delay Channel details to highlight it,
and then double-click the highlighted area to open the Running Delay Channel page.
NOTE: You can view configuration details for the Delay Channel by clicking the Show
Config down arrow in the upper right-hand corner.
Once a Delay Channel is running, you can stop/start the recording, detach/attach or stop Playout
Channels, and view related alarms.
You can also add Playout Channels by clicking Add, or modify the Delay field for Playout Channels
while the Delay Channel is running or stopped. But you must click Save in order for the changes to
take effect.
2. Verify the details for your Delay Channel, and then click Run at the bottom of the page to start running
the channel. When running, the Record player(s) start recording, and the attached Playout Channels
load material to the timeline at the designated time.
The following shows an example of a Delay Channel configured for grid mirrored delay. In this
example, the Record Players are recording and the Playout Channels are cued. Once they begin
playing, their status will change to "Playing."
348
Configuring Delay Service
NOTE: The Delay Type field shows "grid" for both grid and grid mirrored delay models.
NOTE: If Standby is selected, the Playout Channel will remain in a stopped state until
you click Attach, at which point it will change to cued.
When the Delay Channel is running, the Run button changes to Stop.
To stop the Delay Channel, click Stop. To return to the home page, click Done.
Stopping or detaching players
From the Running a Delay Channel page, you can stop or detach players while the Delay Channel is
running or stopped. Note the difference between the stop and detach operations.
For a Playout Channel, if Playout Channel Detach: Playback Stop is selected and you click Detach, the
Playout Channel material is removed from the timeline, and the Attach button is enabled. When you click
Attach, the material is re-loaded to the timeline without interrupting the Delay Channel.
When you click the red "stop" button, the Playout Channel material is removed from the timeline.
However, in this case, in order to attach the stopped Playout Channel, you must stop the Delay Channel
as well. Once the Delay Channel is stopped, the Attach button for the stopped Playout Channel will be
enabled.
•
To stop a Record player: click the red "stop" button to the right of the player details.
If you have two Record players, you can stop one and the other will continue to record. Stopping a
Record player will not stop the Delay Channel.
349
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 8: Playout channel configuration
•
•
•
To stop a Playout Channel: click the red "stop" button to the right of the Playout Channel details.This
removes the Playout Channel material from the timeline.
To detach a Playout Channel: click the Detach button to the right of the Playout Channel details.
This removes the Playout Channel material from the timeline.
To attach a Playout Channel: click the Attach button to the right of the Playout Channel details. This
re-loads the Playout Channel material to the timeline.
Viewing alarms
When a Delay Channel is running, you can click the alarm icons to view alarms related to Record players
and Playout Channels.
From the Running Delay Channel page, when the Delay Channel is running, an alarm icon appears next
to Record Players and Playout Channels. Note that an alarm icon is present even when there is no error.
From the Running Delay Channel page:
•
A blue alarm icon indicates an informational alarm.
•
A blinking red icon indicates an error or critical alarm.
•
Double-click the alarm icon to open the Alarm page for your Record Players and Playout Channels.
•
From this page you can view alarm details.
If there are multiple pages to view, you can use the navigational buttons in the bottom left-hand corner.
To return to the home page, click Cancel.
350
Chapter 9
Spectrum client configuration
This chapter provides advanced configuration and operation instructions for Spectrum video servers in a
Spectrum system.
IMPORTANT: The procedures outlined in this section are written for qualified technical
personnel, skilled at advanced networking procedures. If you have any questions, please
consult with your facility’s Information Service staff or contact Technical Support.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setting IP addresses through vDHCP
About the Domain Name System setup
Adding a new Spectrum video server
About NetBIOS naming
About Spectrum video server network services
About the File Server setup
About client setup
Browsing the Spectrum video server file system from a client
Mapping a Spectrum video server file system to a Windows network drive
Connecting a Macintosh to the Spectrum server using SMB
Playing media files from a Spectrum video server on a Client PC
Copying files from a Spectrum video server to a Client PC
Copying files from a Client PC to a Spectrum video server
Setting IP addresses through vDHCP
The Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used by Harmonic equipment can either be isolated, or part of a
customer’s existing network.
Please note the following important points:
•
•
•
Consultation with your Information Service (IS) staff or a book on TCP/IP basics is highly
recommended before this step.
Because there are security implications, an Internet router might be configured as a firewall to prevent
unauthorized access.
The range of IP addresses assigned to the Ethernet is called an IP subnet.
IP address assignment is performed through the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). The
SystemManager Platform runs Microsoft Windows 7.
351
Chapter 9: Spectrum client configuration
If the Harmonic equipment is part of an existing network that can provide DHCP service, the third party
vDHCP server can be turned off. In this case, the customer’s network will need to provide the appropriate
IP addressing information to the SystemManager and MediaDirector devices.
Despite the word “Dynamic” in its name, vDHCP should be configured to make the IP addresses as
permanent (static) as possible after the initial automatic assignment. This is commonly referred to as IP
address “reservation.” Setting up an IP address reservation for the MediaDirector ensures that it obtains
the same IP address from the vDHCP server every time. Reserving the MediaDirector ’s IP address is
recommended — but not mandatory.
NOTE: Each MediaDirector host must have a unique IP address.
1. Determine the MediaDirector ’s IP and Ethernet (or MAC) address(es). To do this, ensure that the
MediaDirector is powered on.
2. If the MediaDirector is properly connected within your system and powered on, it has received a
single IP address (MediaDirector 2100) or multiple addresses (MediaDirector 2101, 2102, or 2102B)
from the vDHCP server. To find the IP addresses:
a. Start the SystemManager application.
b. Click the Configuration tab to display the Configuration page.
c. In the System diagram, click a “single” MediaDirector host icon (not the dual host icon) to display
the Physical Configuration page.
d. Click the MediaDirector ’s picture to display the Properties page.
e. At the top of the page, make a note of the selected host’s IP address. The vDHCP server has
assigned this IP address, but it is a dynamic IP address and not a static or “reserved” one.
f. Repeat steps b through e for the additional MediaDirectors and/or subsequent MediaDirector
hosts.
3. Launch the vDHCP application by double-clicking the small vDHCP icon located in the bottom right
corner of the desktop, on the Task Bar.
The vDHCP Settings window appears.
Figure 9-1: VDHCP Settings window
352
Setting IP addresses through vDHCP
4. Click the Active Leases tab to display a list of all the IP address leases that have been assigned by
the vDHCP server. A sample tab is shown below.
Figure 9-2: VDHCP Settings—Active Leases Tab
5. In the list, highlight the entry for the first host’s IP address. Next, copy (CTRL+C) the Ethernet address
that appears in the Hardware Address field.
NOTE: It is recommended that you use the host’s current IP address for the
reservation. If you decide to use another IP address, ensure that the IP address is
within the address range specified in the vDHCP UI’s “Address Ranges” tab. The range
is preceded by a green check mark. In addition, ensure that the IP address that you
wish to use does not currently belong to any other device, and that it is not reserved. If
required, click the Help button on the vDHCP UI for more information about ranges and
reservations.
6. Click the Reservations tab, a sample of which is shown below.
353
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 9: Spectrum client configuration
Figure 9-3: VDHCP Settings—Active Leases Tab
At the bottom, click the Mac Addr radio button, and paste (CTRL+V) in the Ethernet address. Next,
click in the IP Address field and enter the host’s IP address (as you noted in step 2).
IMPORTANT: Check your entries. The MediaDirector will not function properly if the
Ethernet and IP addresses are incorrectly entered.
7. Click the Set button to activate the reservation for the selected host.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for additional hosts.
9. Reboot the MediaDirector.
10. As outlined in step 2, navigate to each host’s Properties page and ensure that the selected host has
received the IP address that you just entered on the vDHCP Reservations tab.
NOTE: If you have a system that includes multiple MediaDirector, such as an EFS
system, the procedure Changing Network/File System Performance Settings
About the Domain Name System setup
The Internet Domain Name System (DNS) can be used to allow Spectrum video server hosts to be
named consistently across multiple Platforms, from anywhere on the Internet. Having a DNS server is
not mandatory for Harmonic devices to function. Any DNS server can be used to provide name service.
Note that the SystemManager Platform uses Windows 2000 Professional operating system, and hence
cannot be used as a DNS server. You may skip the remainder of this section if you do not plan to use a
DNS server.
Adding entries to the DNS database for Spectrum video server hosts allows name-based access to the
hosts (as opposed to using IP addresses). In addition, the DHCP server should be configured to give out
the address of a DNS server to Spectrum video servers, so that the hosts can name themselves. If the
default DNS server is on another IP subnet than the Spectrum video server host, a default route must
also be given on the DHCP server.
354
Adding a new Spectrum video server
DNS names are case insensitive on look-up of addresses from names, but they preserve upper and
lowercase on lookup of addresses to names. For example:
•
•
If the name “SportsServer” is assigned IP address 1.2.3.4, “SPORTSSERVER” and “sportsserver” will
also map to 1.2.3.4.
If 1.2.3.4 is mapped to a name, SportsServer is returned.
Multiple names can be assigned to the same address, for example, for logical names. For best results,
keep the names (up to the first dot) under 15 characters in length, and use only letters and digits — so
that they match the NetBIOS names described below. Using descriptive names that match physical labels
on the Spectrum video servers themselves is a good policy.
Adding a new Spectrum video server
Set up a new Spectrum video server on a TCP/IP network.
1. If you have a DNS server, create a name for the Spectrum video server in the DNS server. Create
DNS entries in both directions, “A” records and “PTR” records. The “A” record maps a host name to
an IP address in a DNS zone. Its counterpart (the PTR resource record) is used to map an IP address
to a host name in a DNS reverse lookup.
2. Add the address (as assigned in step 1) to the DHCP server (vDHCP).
3. Connect the Spectrum video server to a network with a vDHCP server.
For details, refer to the Spectrum System Installation Guide.
4. When power is applied, each Spectrum video server host attempts to obtain an IP address from
the DCHP server. If it does not succeed, the Ethernet LED or LEDs (for one or both hosts) on the
Spectrum video server’s front panel flash. The hosts continue to look for a DCHP server until they are
successful, as indicated by the LED(s) in a steady ON condition.
Refer to MediaDirector Orientation in the Spectrum Installation Guide as required for a complete
description of all front panel LED assignments.
NOTE: A default route is also requested from the vDHCP server. This route is required
if clients from more than the local network will access the server.
5. Once a host has an IP address, it attempts to get a name from the DNS server that corresponds to its
IP address, using the “PTR” record added in step 1 above.
6. If there is no DNS server present, or if there is no entry for the host, the host will assign a name for
itself. See “Default names for Spectrum video servers.”
If the DNS names were not found on the first try (step 7), reboot the Spectrum video server again.
7. Use the vDHCP manager to mark the IP addresses that were assigned to the host Ethernet
addresses as permanent.
Related information
Setting IP addresses through vDHCP on page 351
355
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 9: Spectrum client configuration
About NetBIOS naming
In addition to the standard Internet Domain Name System, the NetBIOS system is also used on Windows
platforms.
Instead of being centrally administered, each device (such as a PC or a Spectrum video server) names
itself and broadcasts “advertisements.” A master browser on each subnet picks up these broadcasts
automatically, to allow individual Windows users to see who is on the local subnet. In a small installation,
this mechanism may be sufficient, thus avoiding the DNS set up. For best results, keep both names
consistent (DNS and NetBIOS).
NOTE: When users assign a NetBIOS name to a host from the SystemManager, it should
be unique on the network. This not only applies to the Spectrum video server host, but also
to a Windows PC or any other device that advertises its NetBIOS name. Refer to “About
Device Name Limitations” for additional information.
When Spectrum users talk about “seeing” a Spectrum video server, they are usually talking about
browsing into it from a client. Please note the following important points:
•
•
•
•
•
For mapping names to addresses, both DNS and NetBIOS are case insensitive. However, while DNS
preserves the upper/lower case in the name, NetBIOS converts the name to all upper case.
The name as seen in a Windows browser shows the first character upper case, and the remainder
lowercase; the actual NetBIOS representation is all upper case.
Although NetBIOS allows some other special characters in its names, using only letters and numbers
is compatible with DNS. NetBIOS names are limited to 15 characters.
The name displayed by the SystemManager is the NetBIOS name. Changing the Spectrum video
server’s name within the SystemManager only changes its NetBIOS name.
Remember that the MediaDirectors 2101, 2102, and 2102B have multiple hosts, all of which may be
browsed independently from a client. However, the hosts will display the same file information.
About Spectrum video server network services
Note the TCP/IP services that are implemented on the Spectrum video server.
•
•
•
•
•
Network file access using the CIFS protocol.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP). Many platforms (Microsoft Windows and others) include both command
line FTP programs, and browsers that take URLs of the form ftp://MediaDirector Name/fs0.
Monitoring and management. Private messages are sent from each Spectrum video server to the
SystemManager.
Network file access using the AFP (Apple File Sharing) protocol. This allows Macintosh computers to
access media on a Spectrum video server.
Spectrum Player Control Protocol. Messages are sent from each control application, such as the
ClipTool — to and from the Spectrum video server being controlled.
NOTE: The services listed above are available from any single-host or multiple-host
Spectrum video server. The first four services provide the same information regardless
of which host is used. The “Player Control Protocol” service provides information that
pertains only to Players configured on the individual host.
356
About the File Server setup
About the File Server setup
The Spectrum video server provides file server functionality similar to that of Microsoft Windows*.
The protocol by which such servers and clients exchange information is called the Common Internet File
System (CIFS), but it is better known by its historical name, Server Message Block (SMB). CIFS is also
referred to as Samba on UNIX systems that include a software suite that implements the SMB protocol.
The Spectrum video server’s CIFS file server allows Windows, Macintosh, and Linux clients to access
media on the Spectrum video server’s file system in much the same way as they would access files
on a standard Windows server. This allows customers to use many of the powerful software packages
available for video production and media management, using industry standard computer platforms — in
conjunction with content recorded on Harmonic products.
Note the following important points regarding MediaDirector 2101, 2102, and 2102B hosts:
•
•
All hosts provide the same identical view of the MediaDirector ’s file system information.
Each host runs a separate CIFS server, and each host’s CIFS setup is configured individually.
About client setup
Note some important points regarding client setup.
•
•
Microsoft Windows clients need no additional software to access a Spectrum video server.
Macintosh OS 9 and earlier clients require a third-party software program such as DAVE, from Thursby
Software Systems, Inc. to support SMB mounted file systems.
◦
◦
◦
You should install DAVE on your Macintosh before proceeding.
Another approach is to use a PC emulator package, such as Virtual PC from Microsoft.
Macintosh OS X clients need no additional software to access a Spectrum video server.
NOTE: Macintosh clients may also access Spectrum video servers using the AFP
protocol, in addition to CIFS.
If you are mounting a Spectrum video server to a Linux client, Harmonic recommends that you use the
“mount -t cifs” command and not the “mount -t smbfs” command.
Client platform-specific instructions are provided for accessing the Spectrum video server file system
from both Windows and Macintosh OSX based computers. For specific help on the OS 9 Macintosh
user interface, refer to the documentation and help provided by the vendor of the DAVE application. The
instructions beyond accessing files in the following sections are specific to Windows clients, although the
concepts are the same for Macintosh clients.
Clients should be configured to use a naming protocol (DNS or NetBIOS) that has been set up as
described in this chapter. This is another reason to keep DNS and NetBIOS names consistent — clients
are more likely to work no matter how they are setup.
Browsing the Spectrum video server file system from a client
Browse the file system from a client connected to a Spectrum video server.
1. Open the Network Neighborhood window (Windows NT, Windows 9x), the My Network Places
window (Windows 2000, XP), or Network and Sharing Center (Windows 7).
357
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 9: Spectrum client configuration
2. Inside, click Entire Network > Microsoft Windows Network > Workgroup. You will find an icon for
each Spectrum video server host on your subnet. If the Spectrum video server hosts do not appear,
enter the \\MediaDirector Host Name or \\IP address in the address bar.
3. Double-click the host icon to display a folder (share) typically called “fs0.” This name corresponds
to the Spectrum video server’s File System name. There will be a share for each File System on
the Spectrum video server. For an EFS (Extended File Sharing), a file system could be visible and
accessible from all the MediaDirectors sharing the file system.
4. Double-click on the share to view the file system and folders as desired. The following figure
illustrates a sample system that includes multiple MediaDirector s.
Figure 9-4: MediaDirector File System in Client Window
5. The properties of a folder or an individual file can be viewed by right-clicking on the corresponding
icon.
The following figure illustrates a sample Properties dialog for a .mov file. Only “Created” and
“Modified” times are stored on a MediaDirector. The time given as “Accessed” is really the
“Modified” time. Security attributes on files are not supported in the current release.
358
Mapping a Spectrum video server file system to a Windows network drive
Figure 9-5: Properties Dialog
Note that the properties of the entire file system are not visible until the file system is mapped to a
drive.
Mapping a Spectrum video server file system to a Windows
network drive
Many applications require the Spectrum video server’s file system to be mapped to a network drive.
1. Right-click on the fs0 icon (or the File System name icon) and select Map Network Drive.
2. The newly created network drive should be visible in Explorer. In the following figure, fs0 on
Playout1 is mapped to the client’s E: drive.
359
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 9: Spectrum client configuration
Figure 9-6: Mapping file system to network drive
3. The file system’s properties are available by right clicking on the network drive icon.
Note that the File System field reads NTFS, even though this is not an NTFS file system, but a
Spectrum video server file system.
The Spectrum video server file system does not have the restrictions of a FAT file system — names
can be up to 255 characters and files can be many Gigabytes long. The amount of free and used
space is not perfectly accurate, but it can be used as a guide.
If the video server's file system is mapped as a network drive on a PC and the Spectrum video server
is rebooted, the following error message may appear:
“An error occurred while reconnecting <drive letter>: to <File System name>Microsoft Windows
Network: The local device name is already in use. This connection has not been restored.” and
“Cannot copy <filename>: The specified network name is no longer available.”
To resolve this problem, click OK, then click on the file system icon on Windows Explorer. The red “x”
on the file system icon will disappear after some seconds.
Connecting a Macintosh to the Spectrum server using SMB
Browsing or using Harmonic files on Macintosh OS X systems require the Spectrum video server’s file
system to be mounted.
1. From the Macintosh client, in Finder, click the Go pull-down menu and select the Connect to Server
item. A dialog appears.
2. If the NETBIOS name server is found by the operating system, the host names will appear in the top
pop-up menu. If so, select the desired host and click Connect.
3. If the desired host name does not appear in the pop-up, type in the IP address of the desired host
preceded by “smb://” and, then click Connect.
360
Playing media files from a Spectrum video server on a Client PC
Figure 9-7: Selected host name in the Connect to Server Dialog
4. Once the operating system has located the desired server on the network, provide an appropriate
user name and password and click on OK.
5. Upon successfully entering a user name and password, the SMB Mount dialog is displayed. Select a
folder from the pop-up menu, typically called fs0 and click OK. As in Windows, this name corresponds
to the Spectrum video server’s File System name.
Playing media files from a Spectrum video server on a Client PC
Play media files from a Spectrum video server on a Client PC.
1. Install an application on the client that supports the file format you intend to play. For example, clip
files with the .mov extension (and containing DV media) and media files with a .dv extension may
be played with QuickTime™ version 5.0 or later. To download and install QuickTime™, go to http://
www.apple.com/quicktime/download.
Microsoft Windows Media Player is initially associated with .mov files, but since it only supports
older variants of the QuickTime format, Windows Media Player will not play .mov files recorded on a
Spectrum video server.
As shown below, after QuickTime is installed, the icons representing DV files refresh to show that
there is now an application associated with these files.
Figure 9-8: Media.dir Window
2. Double-click the file that you wish to play. This starts the execution of QuickTime.
3. Clicking the Play button in the QuickTime window plays the media file.
361
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 9: Spectrum client configuration
NOTE: Current CIFS File Server performance supports playing DV streams in realtime directly from the Spectrum video server, but the QuickTime player itself is not
tolerant of network latency, so video frames may be skipped.
Copying files from a Spectrum video server to a Client PC
Copy files from a Spectrum video server to a Client PC.
1. Using Windows Explorer, find the file on the Spectrum video server that you wish to transfer.
2. Drag that file’s icon from its location on the Spectrum video server, and drop it on the icon of the
desired destination folder. For example,, in the following image, file cnn1JQQ18.dv has been copied
to a folder named “Clips on My Computer” on local disk C.
Figure 9-9: Clips on My Computer Window
3. To play the file, double-click its icon, and then click the Play button in the QuickTime window. Other
Windows mechanisms for file transfer and linkage (cut, paste, copy, and shortcuts) may also be used.
NOTE: When copying a file using SMB to or from a Windows PC, the windows
progress dialog box incorrectly calculates time remaining to copy, first showing
a reasonable and increasing value, and then showing a very large value for a
considerable time. The copy eventually succeeds, despite the errant time remaining
indication. This problem appears to be a Windows problem since it is reproducible
when copying a 5GB file between two Windows 2000 PCs.
Copying files from a Client PC to a Spectrum video server
Copy files from a client PC to a Spectrum video server.
1. Find the file that you wish to transfer.
2. Drag the icon from its location on local disk, and drop it at the desired Spectrum video server location.
You can use other Windows mechanisms for file transfer and linkage (cut, paste, copy, and shortcuts).
Note that under certain conditions, you may experience poor throughput when copying a file from a
Windows 7 client PC to a legacy Spectrum system (MediaDirectors 2100, 2101, 2102 or 2102B) using
CIFS/Samba. The following recommendations may help alleviate this issue.
•
If possible, use FTP instead of CIFS for transferring large files.
362
Copying files from a Client PC to a Spectrum video server
•
•
You may experience slow transfers when overwriting an existing file. In this situation, it may be
better to delete the previous version of the file, and then copy in the new version
You may experience slow transfers when transferring a file into the root directory of the Spectrum
file system. In this situation, it may be better to transfer the file into a temporary directory, and then
once the transfer is complete, move the file to its final location.
363
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Part III
Harmonic MediaGrid
Harmonic MediaGrid
•
•
•
Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
364
Chapter 10
Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Find basic configuration procedures for Harmonic MediaGrid.
Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation Guide for detailed instructions on installing a Harmonic
MediaGrid.
NOTE: Before commencing Harmonic MediaGrid configuration, ensure that vDHCP is
disabled on the SystemManager Platform. Refer to the SystemManager Installation Guide
for instructions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gaining secure access to the Harmonic MediaGrid system
About Harmonic MediaGrid licenses
Installing a Harmonic MediaGrid license file on a cluster
About clusters, volumes and groups
About mixing ContentServers and scheduled balancing
About checkpoints and scheduling checkpoints
Configuring Harmonic MediaGrid
Restarting a Harmonic MediaGrid device
Powering down a Harmonic MediaGrid system
Powering on a Harmonic MediaGrid system
Editing the slice size configuration file
Editing the ContentServer configuration file
Editing the High Bandwidth ContentBridge configuration file
Editing the ContentBridge configuration file
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing
Enabling and configuring log forwarding
Balancing the ContentServer controllers
Upgrading Harmonic MediaGrid firmware
Changing the Harmonic MediaGrid wink state
Enabling and configuring checkpoint schedules
Changing the descriptions for Harmonic MediaGrid components
365
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Gaining secure access to the Harmonic MediaGrid system
Access the Harmonic MediaGrid using one of three types of users: regular user, Harmonic MediaGrid
administrator, and SystemManager administrator.
1. From the Configuration tab, click the Access Control icon in the Harmonic MediaGrid section of the
left-hand column. The Access Control Settings for Harmonic MediaGrid Devices page appears.
Figure 10-1: Access Control Settings for Harmonic MediaGrid
2. Enter information in the following fields to gain secure access.
•
•
For Regular user access, contact your IT department for information.
For Harmonic MediaGrid Administrator level access use:
◦
◦
◦
◦
Username: mgadmin
Password: 1234
Confirm Password 1234
Domain: (empty)
•
For SystemManager Administrator level access use:
◦
◦
◦
◦
Username: omneon
Password: usm
Confirm Password usm
Domain: (empty)
3. Click Save Settings to save changes. The SystemManager now provides access to the Harmonic
MediaGrid according to the security access level assigned to the user.
About Harmonic MediaGrid authentication
Security on a Harmonic MediaGrid is provided at three levels: regular user, Harmonic MediaGrid
administrator, and SystemManager administrator.
Using Windows
Domain Controller
(WDC)
Connecting to a WDC provides a user’s security token and a list of group
memberships. Thus, a WDC is a requirement for facilities operating a Harmonic
MediaGrid Regular users are permitted this level of access.
For more information about WDC, a good general starting point is the Windows
Server Cookbook: http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/windowsvrckbk/index.html
366
About Harmonic MediaGrid licenses
NOTE: Although Harmonic neither recommends nor supports
this, customers with expert level skills and knowledge can
connect to a Samba-emulated WDC. For more information
about a Samba-emulated WDC, go to: http://www-128.ibm.com/
developerworks/linux/library/l-samba-tng.html
Using the
ContentManager
application
ContentManager allows you to set user and group level security for various
Harmonic MediaGrid files and directories through Access Control Lists (ACLs).
Once an ACL is created, you can customize the security preferences for each
individual Access Control Entry (ACE). In summary, Harmonic MediaGrid
Administrators are permitted to configure the Harmonic MediaGrid, whereas
regular users are not. Refer to the ContentManager User’s Guide for additional
information.
Using Harmonic
MediaGrid with MAS
The Media Application Server (MAS) provides unified content management
capabilities across various storage systems, as well as a common view of
content stored across multiple file systems. SystemManager Administrators
are permitted to configure Harmonic MediaGrid directories using a MAS system.
Refer to the Media Application Server User Guide for additional information.
NOTE: Do not log in as a SystemManager administrator if you
plan to configure ContentManager settings.
About Harmonic MediaGrid licenses
Note some points about Harmonic MediaGrid licenses.
At least one compute node license must be installed to enable client grid access. This license restricts
grid usage by limiting the maximum number of grids allocated at any time, as well as limiting each grid
to a maximum number of nodes. Additional compute node licenses must be installed if the maximum
number of nodes in use is exceeded.
The compute node license(s) is included in Harmonic MediaGrid license files. After the licenses have
been purchased, the license file(s) ending in .omlic, are sent by e-mail to customers. License file(s)
should be placed in the D:\Licenses directory of the SystemManager Platform. Refer to “Obtaining and
Installing a SystemManager License File” in the SystemManager Installation Guide for step by step
instructions.
Once Harmonic MediaGrid license file(s) are available in the D:\License directory on the SystemManager
Platform, you can install them on a cluster.
Installing a Harmonic MediaGrid license file on a cluster
Install a license file on a Cluster.
NOTE: You must have Administrator privileges to perform this function.
1. Ensure that a license file is available for use in the D:\Licenses directory of the SystemManager
Platform that controls the Harmonic MediaGrid. Contact Technical Support if the license file is not in
this directory.
367
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
2. From the Configuration tab, click the Install License icon in the left-hand column to access the
Install License page.
3. Identify the required license and select an installation location from the Select Cluster list.
4. Select the appropriate check box.
5. Click Install.
The license file is installed on a ContentDirector in the selected cluster.
About clusters, volumes and groups
When setting up a Harmonic MediaGrid system, generally, there will be one cluster, one volume, and one
group, all of which are generated automatically by the Configuration Assistant.
Term
Description
Cluster
Includes a volume and its associated ContentDirector,
ContentServer and ContentStore nodes within a Harmonic
MediaGrid.
Volume
Includes the file system, one Group, and its associated
ContentServer and ContentStore nodes in a Harmonic
MediaGrid.
Group
A collection of one or more ContentServer units and their
attached ContentStore nodes.
About mixing ContentServers and scheduled balancing
Clients can utilize the full bandwidth and storage provided by ContentServer 1000 series and
ContentServer 2000 series in a mixed-server configuration (ContentServers 1042 and ContentServers
2122/2124 in the same Harmonic MediaGrid system).
NOTE: At this time, the ContentServer 3000 or 4000 and ContentStores 3160, 4000, or
5840/5840A series cannot be mixed with ContentServer 1000 or 2000 series in the same
Harmonic MediaGrid system.
In order for a mixed server configuration to function properly, you must make sure the system is balanced
on a regular basis by using the Balancer feature included in this version of SystemManager. Enabling and
configuring scheduled balancing for a cluster ensures that all ContentServers have disk space balanced
across the cluster.
Related information
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing on page 391
368
About checkpoints and scheduling checkpoints
About checkpoints and scheduling checkpoints
Enabling Checkpoints allows you to save a copy of all File System metadata stored in a ContentDirector.
Data is saved to a single file—the Checkpoint file and stored on a ContentServer.
Each ContentServer holds a single Checkpoint file; each new Checkpoint goes to a different
ContentServer. If a disaster destroys all ContentDirectors, File System metadata can be retrieved from
the Checkpoint file and then restored to a new ContentDirector.
Checkpoint scheduling allows you to periodically create Checkpoint files. A ContentServer stores a
single Checkpoint file. Each time a Checkpoint is created, a different ContentServer is used to store
the Checkpoint file. This allows several Checkpoints to exist on a Harmonic MediaGrid, so that the File
System data is redundantly protected.
Checkpoints can be immediate (on demand) or scheduled at intervals. You can set the interval from 1 to
12 hours, 16 or 20 hours, or from 1-15 days. Checkpoint intervals can be configured to occur at any hour
of the day, and on any day of the week.
Harmonic makes the following recommendations for Checkpoints and Checkpoint Scheduling:
•
•
•
•
All ContentDirectors should have Checkpoints enabled and a schedule configured.
Schedule Checkpoints to occur at least every 24 hours.
All ContentDirectors in a cluster should have identical Checkpoint intervals but different starting times.
For example, if a Harmonic MediaGrid has three ContentDirectors, then ContentDirector A could have
a schedule start time of Monday at midnight, ContentDirector B would have Tuesday at midnight, and
ContentDirector C would have Wednesday at midnight. The Checkpoint interval should then be set to
72 hours on each ContentDirector. This would ensure a Checkpoint occurred every 24 hours, rotating
among the ContentDirectors.
Before configuring checkpoints, Harmonic recommends that you set the time zone on each
ContentDirector. Refer to “Setting ContentDirector Timezones” in the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation
Guide for step by step instructions.
NOTE: Contact Harmonic technical support if you wish to access information in the
Checkpoint file.
The Events section on a ContentDirector Properties page provides information about the success or
failure of the last attempted checkpoint operation.
Related information
Enabling and configuring checkpoint schedules on page 398
Viewing and clearing alarms and events for Harmonic MediaGrid components on page 462
Configuring Harmonic MediaGrid
Once you have configured your Harmonic MediaGrid system by running the configuration assistant, and
initialized a cluster, you may perform some additional configuration.
Before you begin
For information on running the configuration assistant, refer to “System Configuration” in the Harmonic
MediaGrid Installation Guide.
369
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
To configure and maintain Harmonic MediaGrid RAID systems, refer to “Harmonic MediaGrid RAID
Configuration and Maintenance.”
NOTE: To perform the required initial configuration tasks for a Harmonic MediaGrid, you
will need Admin level access.
Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
Gaining secure access to the Harmonic MediaGrid system
Creating or deleting a volume
You can create or delete a volume from SystemManager.
NOTE: When setting up a Harmonic MediaGrid system with the ContentServer 3000 or
4000, there can only be one cluster, one volume, and one group, all of which are generated
automatically by the configuration assistant. You must have Administrator privileges to
perform these functions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
Figure 10-2: Cluster Properties—Volumes Section
2. In the Volumes section of the page, proceed as follows:
•
•
To create a Volume: Click Create Volume. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the
creation. Click OK. A new volume is added to the list of volumes.
To delete a Volume: Select the volume to be deleted and click Delete Volume. A dialog box
appears asking you to confirm the deletion. Click OK. The volume is removed from the list of
volumes.
NOTE: Only one volume is supported on the Harmonic MediaGrid.
3. Click Done.
Related information
Creating or deleting a volume on page 370
Creating or deleting groups
You can create or delete groups from SystemManager.
NOTE: When setting up a Harmonic MediaGrid system with the ContentServer 3000 or
4000, there can only be one cluster, one volume, and one group, all of which are generated
automatically by the configuration assistant.
370
Configuring Harmonic MediaGrid
The number of groups should be equal to or slightly higher than the expected replication factor. Once the
desired replication factor is chosen, set up a grouping arrangement that best supports that replication
factor.
NOTE: You must have Administrator privileges to perform these functions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the cluster with the required volume. The
Cluster Properties page appears. Scroll to the Groups section as shown in the following figure.
Figure 10-3: Cluster Properties—Groups Section
3. In the Groups section of the page, proceed as follows:
•
•
To create a Group: Click Create Group. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the creation.
Click OK. A new Group is added to the list of Groups.
To delete a Group: Select the Group to be deleted and click Delete Group. A dialog box appears
asking you to confirm the deletion. Click OK. The Group is removed from the list of Groups.
4. Click Done.
Adding or removing ContentServers from a group
You can add or remove ContentServers to/from a Group.
NOTE: When setting up a Harmonic MediaGrid system with the ContentServer 3000 or
4000, there can only be one cluster, one volume, and one group, all of which are generated
automatically by the configuration assistant.
Follow these guidelines when adding ContentServers to a group:
•
•
The recommended configuration is 12 ContentServers per group. Note that the default replication
factor is three; the replication factor can be changed to best support the number of ContentServers.
For maximum performance, do not use less than 10 ContentServers in a group. This provides a
sufficient pool of ContentServers for slice storage.
NOTE: You must have Administrator privileges to perform these functions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the cluster with the required Group. The
Cluster Properties page appears. Scroll down the page to display the Group section.
3. Click the required Group ID to display the Group Properties page as shown in the following figure.
371
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Figure 10-4: Group Properties
4. To add a Server to the Group, click Add Server(s) to this Group. The Unattached ContentServers
page appears where you select which Server to add. Click Confirm Add. A dialog box appears which
prompts you to confirm the addition. Click OK.
5. To remove a Server from the Group, select the Server and click Remove Selected Servers. A dialog
box appears prompting you to confirm the delete. Click OK.
6. Click Done.
The Server has been added to or deleted from the group as specified. Deleted Servers can be reused
with another group (or the same group) within a Harmonic MediaGrid at a later time.
Related information
Setting replication factors for file systems on page 375
About ContentBridge discovery and cluster association
Note how SystemManager discovers ContentBridges and High Bandwidth ContentBridges.
ContentBridges and High Bandwidth ContentBridges will not be added to SystemManager automatically if
they are not in the same IP network as the SystemManager or ContentDirectors being monitored. In most
cases, the Connect Device feature must to be used to add such devices.
Note that ContentBridges and High Bandwidth ContentBridges will not be displayed in a cluster if they are
not in the same IP network as one of the cluster’s ContentDirectors. Also, their cluster value will be shown
as “unknown” in such cases. The ContentBridge cluster association is for convenience only and does not
affect operation.
Related information
Connecting a device from a different IP network on page 39
372
Configuring Harmonic MediaGrid
Adding or removing groups from a volume
You can add or remove an existing Group to/from a Volume.
You must have Administrator privileges to perform these functions.
NOTE: When setting up a Harmonic MediaGrid system with the ContentServer 3000 or
4000, there can only be one cluster, one volume, and one group, all of which are generated
automatically by the configuration assistant.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the cluster with the required volume. The
Cluster Properties page appears. Scroll down the page to display the Volume section.
3. Click the required Volume to display the Volume Properties page, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 10-5: Adding or Removing Groups
4. To add a group to the volume, click Add Group to Volume. The Unattached Groups page appears,
which allows you to select which group to add. Click Confirm Add. A dialog box appears, which
prompts you to confirm the addition. Click OK.
5. To remove a group from the volume, select the group and click Remove Group from Volume. A
dialog box appears, which prompts you to confirm the delete. Click OK.
6. Click Done.
The Group has been added or deleted from the Volume as specified. A deleted group can be added
to another (or the same) volume at a later time.
373
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Creating or deleting file systems from a volume
You can create or delete a file system.
NOTE: You must have Administrator privileges to perform these functions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the cluster with the required Volume. The
Cluster Properties page appears.
3. Scroll down the page to the Volumes section and click the required Volume ID to access the Volume
Properties page.
4. Choose one of the following:
•
•
To create a File System: In the File System field at the top of the page, enter a File System name
and click Create File System. Refer to “About Naming Files and System Elements” for rules to
follow when naming a File System.
NOTE: Only one File System can be associated with a Volume; if one File System
is already created for a volume the Create File System button will be grayed out.
To delete a File System: In the File System field, click Delete File System.
5. A dialog box appears to confirm the deletion. Click OK.
6. Click Done to complete the task. The File System has been created or deleted from the Volume as
specified.
Related information
About naming files and system elements on page 117
Setting or changing file system permissions
You can change permissions for a file system.
NOTE: You must have Administrator privileges to perform these functions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the cluster with the required Volume. The
Cluster Properties page appears.
3. Scroll down the page to the Volumes section and click the required Volume ID to access the Volume
Properties page..
4. In the File System field, select from:
◦
◦
Owner only access: Select to limit access to the person who has logged in. This is the default
permission.
Open to all users: Select to provide File System access to all users.
5. Click Change Permissions to save the change.
374
Configuring Harmonic MediaGrid
Setting replication factors for file systems
You can set the replication factor for a file system.
NOTE: You must have Administrator privileges to perform these functions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the cluster with the required Volume and
associated File System. The Cluster Properties page appears.
3. Scroll down the page to the Volumes section and click the appropriate Volume IDto access the
Volume Properties page.
4. In the Default File System Replication Factor field, enter a number between 2 and 105. Refer to
“About File System Replication Factors” for recommendations about replication factors. The default
replication factor is 3.
5. Click Change Default Replication Factor to set the change.
About file system replication factors
For Harmonic MediaGrid systems with the ContentServer 1000 and 2000 series, Harmonic recommends
that you keep the replication factor for your system set to 3 (the default setting) or, at minimum, 2.
CAUTION: Note that setting the replication factor to 1 will lead to data loss in the case of
system or disk failure.
About ContentServer and Cluster bandwidth measurements
SystemManager provides bandwidth measurement statistics on a drive read, write and re-replication
basis for each ContentServer.
Aggregate statistics are also available for each cluster. For ContentServers, the drive read, write and rereplication measurements are summed over all the ContentServers of the cluster and are shown as the
Bandwidth Utilization on the Cluster Properties page.
Figure 10-6: Cluster Properties—Bandwidth Utilization
The aggregate total is compared to the potential available bandwidth and calculated as a percentage,
which is shown as the Bandwidth Utilization (Average per ContentServer) on the Cluster Properties
page. This percentage is then checked against the SystemManager alarm levels. The alarm levels can be
configured from Diagnostics tab, using the Edit Thresholds page.
The default alarm levels are presented as follows:
375
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
•
•
•
An ERROR (orange) alarm is raised if the value moves into the (80...90) range.
A CRITICAL (red) alarm is raised if the value moves into the (90...100) range.
An INFO (blue) alarm is raised if the value moves into the (0...80) range.
No alarm is raised if the value is in the same range as it was when this measure was last checked.
NOTE: ContentServers unresponsive to SystemManager queries for the read, write and
re-replication counters are omitted from the calculation.
Related information
Editing alarm thresholds on page 36
Restarting a Harmonic MediaGrid device
Safely restart a device from the Properties page in SystemManager.
1. From the Properties page for the device you wish to restart, click the Reboot button located at the
bottom of the General Properties section.
2. Click OK to confirm.
Result: The device restarts.
3. Verify that the Status field changes to Not Responding, and then returns to its previous state.
NOTE: It might take a few minutes for the status to change, depending on the length of
the discovery cycle and the status of other devices in your network.
Powering down a Harmonic MediaGrid system
Power down the entire system only when directed to do so by Harmonic support.
This procedure requires that you shut down all ContentDirector nodes first, then all ContentBridge nodes,
and then all ContentServer nodes. Wait for each group of devices to change to Not Responding before
powering down the next group of devices. It may take a few minutes for the status to change to Not
Responding, depending on the length of the discovery cycle and the status of other devices in your
network.
IMPORTANT: Only perform the following steps if directed to do so by Harmonic technical
support.
1. From the Configuration tab in SystemManager, click the Servers & Switches icon.
2. From the Servers & Switches page, click the link for the cluster that you wish to shut down.
3. From the Cluster Properties page, in the Shutdown cluster section, click Shutdown all
ContentDirectors in a cluster.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Scroll to the ContentDirectors section of the page and confirm that the Network Status indicates
Not Responding.
6. Disconnect the power cables from each ContentDirector.
376
Powering down a Harmonic MediaGrid system
After each ContentDirector has shut down, the Shutdown all ContentBridges in a cluster button
will be activated.
7. Click Shutdown all ContentBridges in a cluster.
8. Click OK to confirm.
9. Scroll to the ContentBridges section of the page and confirm that the Network Status has changed
to Not Responding.
10. Disconnect the power cables from each ContentBridge.
After each ContentBridge has shut down, the Shutdown all ContentServers in a cluster button
will be activated.
11. Click Shutdown all ContentServers in a cluster.
12. Click OK to confirm.
13. Scroll down to the ContentServers/ContentStores section of the page and confirm that the Network
Status indicates Not Responding.
14. Physically power down each ContentServer and ContentStore in the cluster as follows:
Option
Description
ContentServer 4000
Press the power button on the control panel and hold for four seconds.
Once the disk drive LEDs are off, disconnect the two power cords from the
back of the server.
ContentServer 3000
Press the red power button on the control panel on the front of the server
and hold for five seconds. Once the disk drive LEDs are off, disconnect the
two power cords from the back of the server.
ContentStore
5840/5840A
Move all power supply switches to the “off” position. Once the front panel
LEDs are off, disconnect the power cables from the power supplies.
ContentStore 4240
Press the power button on the control panel and hold for four seconds.
Once the disk drive LEDs are off, disconnect the two power cords from the
back of the server.
ContentStore 3160
Press the red power button on the control panel on the front of the device
and hold for five seconds. Once the disk drive LEDs are off, disconnect the
two power cords from the back of the device.
15. Shut down the SystemManager platform:
a. Click the Start button on the task bar, and then click Shut Down.
b. Disconnect the power cable if necessary.
16. Power down each Network Switch by disconnecting the power cords.
Powering down a single ContentDirector
Safely power down the device from SystemManager.
1. From the Configuration tab, click the Servers & Switches icon.
2. From the Servers & Switches page, in the ContentDirector section, click the name of the
ContentDirector you wish to power down.
377
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
3. From the Properties page, click the Shutdown button located at the bottom of the General
Properties section.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Verify that the Status field indicates Not Responding.
NOTE: It might take a few minutes for the status to change, depending on the length of
the discovery cycle and the status of other devices in your network.
6. Disconnect the power cables.
Powering down a single ContentBridge
Safely power down the device from SystemManager.
1. From the Configuration tab, click the Servers & Switches icon.
2. From the Servers & Switches page, in the ContentBridge section, click the name of the
ContentBridge you wish to power down.
3. From the Properties page, click the Shutdown button located at the bottom of the General
Properties section.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Verify that the Status field indicates Not Responding.
NOTE: It might take a few minutes for the status to change, depending on the length of
the discovery cycle and the status of other devices in your network.
6. Disconnect the power cables.
Powering down a single ContentServer
Use SystemManager to safely power down the device.
1. From the Configuration tab, click the Servers & Switches icon.
2. From the Servers & Switches page, in the ContentServers/CotentStores section, click the name of
the device you wish to power down.
3. From the Properties page, click Shutdown All Enclosures to shut down both controllers.
NOTE: This also shuts down all managed ContentServer and ContentStore nodes.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Verify that the Status field indicates Not Responding.
NOTE: It might take a few minutes for the status to change, depending on the length of
the discovery cycle and the status of other devices in your network.
6. Physically power down the device as follows:
Option
Description
ContentServer 3000
Press the power button on the control panel and hold for five seconds.
ContentServer 4000
Press and hold the power button on the control panel for four seconds.
378
Powering on a Harmonic MediaGrid system
7. Once all disk drive LEDs are off, disconnect both power cables from the rear of the chassis.
Powering down a single ContentStore
Safely power down the device from SystemManager.
1. From the Configuration tab, click the Servers & Switches icon.
2. From the Servers & Switches page, in the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the name
of the device you wish to power down.
3. From the Properties page, click the Shutdown button located at the top of the page.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Verify that the Status field indicates Not Responding.
NOTE: It might take a few minutes for the status to change, depending on the length of
the discovery cycle and the status of other devices in your network.
6. Physically power down the device as follows:
Option
Description
ContentStore 3160
Press the red power button on the control panel on the front of the device
and hold for five seconds. Once the disk drive LEDs are off, disconnect the
two power cords from the back of the device.
ContentStore 4240
Press and hold the power button on the control panel for four seconds.
Once all disk drive LEDs are off, disconnect the power cables from the
power supplies.
ContentStore
5840/5840A
Move all power supply switches to the “off” position. Once the front panel
LEDs are off, disconnect the power cables from the power supplies.
Powering on a Harmonic MediaGrid system
Make sure all Harmonic MediaGrid devices are connected before continuing.
IMPORTANT: The steps must be followed in the order described below.
1. Apply power to the network switches by plugging the power cords into power sources.
2. Apply power to the SystemManager by connecting the power cord to a power source, and then
pressing the power button on the front panel.
NOTE: If you have already configured the SystemManager with an IP address ending
in "dot-10," wait until after the Configuration Assistant is complete before powering on
this device.
3. Apply power to each ContentDirector by connecting both power cords to separate, isolated power
sources, and then press the power button on the front panel.
Result: The ContentDirector takes approximately five minutes to start. Wait for the power-on indicator
to light before continuing.
4. If the High Bandwidth ContentBridge is part of your system, apply power by connecting both power
cords to separate, isolated power sources, and then press the power button on the front control panel.
379
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Wait for the power-on indicator to light before continuing.
5. If the ContentBridge 1000B is part of your system, apply power by connecting the power cord to a
power source, and then press the power switch on the rear panel.
6. Apply power to each ContentServer and ContentStore as follows:
Option
Description
ContentServer 4000
Connect the power cords to power sources, and then press the power
button on the front panel.
ContentStore 4240
Connect the power cords to power sources, and then press the power
button on the control panel.
ContentServer 3000
Connect the power cords to power sources. Press the power button on the
control panel on the front of the server.
ContentStore 3160
Connect the power cords to power sources, and then press the power
button on the front panel.
ContentStore
5840/5840A
Connect the power cords to the power supplies and to power sources. Move
all power supply switches to the "on" position.
Editing the slice size configuration file
If instructed by Harmonic technical support, you can modify the slice size configuration file.
IMPORTANT: As the final step in replacing a ContentDirector, review this configuration
file to ensure it contains the latest settings. Click Save to save the file on the new
ContentDirector. Refer to the ContentDirector Component Replacement Guide and the
product release notes for complete replacement instructions.
CAUTION: Do not edit the Slice Size configuration file unless instructed by Harmonic
technical support. Using a smaller-than-recommended slice size can result in an
unexpected loss of disk space.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the required cluster to access the Properties
page.
3. Click View/Edit Slice Size Config to access the Edit “sliceSizeSpec” File page. Note that the View/
Edit Slice Size button is only enabled if you are logged in as Administrator.
380
Editing the ContentServer configuration file
Figure 10-7: Edit “sliceSizeSpec” File
NOTE: If one or more ContentDirectors go offline, the Slice Size configuration file is
automatically synchronized for you when the ContentDirectors comes back online. No
additional steps are necessary to synchronize the configuration file.
Editing the ContentServer configuration file
The ContentServer configuration file can be edited to set time zones, enable jumbo frames, and change
other options.
IMPORTANT: As the final step in replacing a ContentDirector, review this configuration
file to ensure it contains the latest settings generated by the Configuration Assistant.
Click Save to save the file on the new ContentDirector. Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid
Component Replacement Guide and the product release notes for complete replacement
instructions.
NOTE: If you make manual edits to this configuration file, you must save the file on every
ContentDirector in the cluster.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the required cluster to access the Properties
page.
3. Click View/Edit ContentServer Config to access the Edit ContentServer Config File page, a
sample is displayed in the following figure.
381
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Figure 10-8: Edit ContentServer Config File
4. If the config file does not exist, do the following:
a. Start an SSH session to the ContentDirector.
b. Create the directory and file by typing:
sudo vi /tftpboot/config/config
Set each field as follows:
LOGHOST=172.16.1.200
REBOOT_ON_PANIC=YES
SLICED_WATCHDOG=YES
SLICED_LOGLEVEL=err
ENABLE_JUMBO_SERVER=NO
ENABLE_JUMBO_BRIDGE=NO
382
Editing the ContentServer configuration file
5. Set the time zone specific to your location, for example:
SLICE_TIMEZONE=Etc/GMT+8
Refer to the following table for a specific time zone.
Table 10-1: Time Zones
Region
GMT Relative Time
Zone
Region
GMT Relative Time
Zone
Eniwetok
Etc/GMT+12
Rome
Etc/GMT-1
Samoa
Etc/GMT+11
Israel
Etc/GMT-2
Hawaii
Etc/GMT+10
Moscow
Etc/GMT-3
Alaska
Etc/GMT+9
Baghdad
Etc/GMT-4
Pacific
Etc/GMT+8
New Delhi
Etc/GMT-5
Mountain
Etc/GMT+7
Dhakar
Etc/GMT-6
Central
Etc/GMT+6
Bangkok
Etc/GMT-7
Eastern
Etc/GMT+5
Hong Kong
Etc/GMT-8
Atlantic
Etc/GMT+4
Tokyo
Etc/GMT-9
Brazilia
Etc/GMT+3
Sydney
Etc/GMT-10
Mid-Atlantic
Etc/GMT+2
Magadan
Etc/GMT-11
Azores
Etc/GMT+1
Wellington
Etc/GMT-12
Greenwich
Etc/GMT+0
6. Make any other edits as necessary. When you are done editing the configuration file, click Save File.
IMPORTANT: If one or more ContentDirectors go offline, the ContentServer
configuration file is not automatically synchronized for you when the ContentDirectors
comes back online. To manually synchronize the configuration file, go back to the Edit
ContentServer Config File window and save the file again.
ContentServer 1000/2000 series parameters
Refer to the ContentServer 1000 series and ContentServer 2000 series parameters when editing the
ContentServer configuration file.
LOGHOST
The IP address of the log host
REBOOT_ON_PANIC
Will set the ContentServers to reboot 60 seconds after a kernel panic. This should be set to YES.
SLICED_WATCHDOG
Loads a kernel module that reboots the ContentServer if it stops working. This should be set to YES.
SLICED_LOGLEVEL
Determines how verbose logs should be. Acceptable options are: all, info, warn, err.
383
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
SLICE_TIMEZONE
Determines the time zone for your location. For reference, refer to the Table 47: Time Zones on page
383 table.
ENABLE_JUMBO_SERVER=NO
Determines the MTU (maximum transmission unit) size used on the ContentServer. This option uses
an MTU size of 1500. Set this field to YES to enable jumbo frames. The MTU size for Harmonic
MediaGrid with jumbo frames enabled is 9000.
ENABLE_JUMBO_BRIDGE=NO
Determines the MTU size used on the ContentBridge. This option uses an MTU size of 1500. Set
this field to YES to enable jumbo frames. The MTU size for Harmonic MediaGrid with jumbo frames
enabled is 9000.
CIFS_CASE_SENSITIVE
Determines if the CIFS (Samba) server running on the ContentBridge is case sensitive or not when
looking at files and directories. Acceptable options are YES, NO and the default AUTO.
ContentServer 3000 and 4000 series parameters
Refer to the ContentServer 3000 and 4000 series parameters when editing the ContentServer
configuration file.
LOGHOST
Is the IP address of the log host
REBOOT_ON_PANIC
Will set the ContentServers to reboot 60 seconds after a kernel panic. This should be set to YES.
SLICE_TIMEZONE
Determines the time zone for your location. For reference, refer to the Table 47: Time Zones on page
383 table.
ENABLE_JUMBO_SERVER=NO
Determines the MTU (maximum transmission unit) size used on the ContentServer. This option uses
an MTU size of 1500. Set this field to YES to enable jumbo frames. The MTU size for Harmonic
MediaGrid with jumbo frames enabled is 9000.
ENABLE_JUMBO_BRIDGE=NO
Determines the MTU size used on the ContentBridge. This option uses an MTU size of 1500. Set
this field to YES to enable jumbo frames. The MTU size for Harmonic MediaGrid with jumbo frames
enabled is 9000.
CIFS_CASE_SENSITIVE
Determines if the CIFS (Samba) server running on the ContentBridge is case sensitive or not when
looking at files and directories. Acceptable options are YES, NO and the default AUTO.
About Jumbo Frames support
Jumbo frames are a feature that allows for larger transmission sizes of Ethernet frames over a network.
Harmonic MediaGrid supports jumbo frames; however, every device on your network between Harmonic
MediaGrid and the client (including the client itself) must also support jumbo frames, with a common
packet size, to take advantage of this feature. Network performance is severely impaired otherwise.
Jumbo frames may improve transfer performance between Harmonic MediaGrid and other devices on the
network in some cases. However, an improvement will not always be obtained, depending on the devices’
ability to process data relative to the maximum network transfer speed available.
384
Editing the High Bandwidth ContentBridge configuration file
The Network Switches are enabled by default. Refer to “Configuring a ContentServer” to enable jumbo
frames on the remaining Harmonic MediaGrid devices.
Harmonicstrongly recommends that, before enabling jumbo frames, you initially set up and test the
Harmonic MediaGrid with all other parts of the system infrastructure with jumbo frames disabled, to
ensure correct functionality.
Editing the High Bandwidth ContentBridge configuration file
When editing the High Bandwidth ContentBridge configuration file, refer to the parameter descriptions
from both the ContentServer configuration file and the ContentBridge configuration file for reference.
The High Bandwidth ContentBridge configuration file combines values from both the global configuration
file for ContentServers and ContentBridges as well as values from the individual ContentBridge
configuration file.
On a High Bandwidth ContentBridge, the configuration file is stored locally on the disk at /etc/
gateway.conf.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. Scroll down to the High Bandwidth ContentBridges section.
3. In the Config column, click the Edit Config link for the High Bandwidth ContentBridge you wish to
configure. The Edit Config File on High Bandwidth ContentBridge page appears as shown in the
following figure.
385
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Figure 10-9: Edit High Bandwidth ContentBridge Config File
4. Click Save File when you are done editing the configuration file.
5. Reboot the High Bandwidth ContentBridge after editing the configuration file for the changes to take
effect.
Related information
ContentServer 1000/2000 series parameters on page 383
ContentServer 3000 and 4000 series parameters on page 384
ContentBridge configuration file parameters on page 388
Editing the ContentBridge configuration file
The ContentBridge configuration file can be edited to support authentication and multiple-user access to
the Harmonic MediaGrid, as well as various other settings.
The ContentBridge receives a configuration file from the primary ContentDirector. It may also receive the
file from the secondary ContentDirector if this has been enabled in the DHCP service configuration. This
file is required for ContentBridge operation and controls client access to the Harmonic MediaGrid system.
The ContentBridge configuration file must exist on both the Primary and Secondary ContentDirectors.
Before editing this file you must know the following information:
•
The name of the file system(s) on the Harmonic MediaGrid.
386
Editing the ContentBridge configuration file
•
The user name and password of the account used to export the Harmonic MediaGrid file system(s).
Each file system may be exported with a different user name.
The configuration file is downloaded using the same name as its hostname. For example, ContentBridge
CLB01200 attempts to download the file /tftpboot/config/gateway/CLB01200. The hostname of the
ContentBridge is formed by appending its serial number to the letters CLB. Once present on the
ContentBridge, the configuration file must be edited to support authentication and multiple-user access to
the Harmonic MediaGrid.
IMPORTANT: As the final step in replacing a ContentDirector, review this configuration
file to ensure it contains the latest settings generated by the Configuration Assistant.
Click Save to save the file on the new ContentDirector. Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid
Component Replacement Guide and the product release notes for complete replacement
instructions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters section, click the Name hyperlink for the required cluster to access the Properties
page.
3. Click View/Edit ContentBridge Config to access the Edit ContentBridge Config File page. A
sample is displayed in the following figure.
Figure 10-10: Edit ContentBridge Config File
If the config file does not exist, do the following:
a. Start an SSH session to the ContentDirector.
387
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
b. Create the directory and file on the ContentDirector by typing:
sudo vi /tftpboot/config/gateway/<hostname>
The hostname is the five digit serial number of the ContentBridge prefixed with CLB. For example,
ContentBridge 01001 is named CLB01001.
4. Edit the parameters as needed.
5. Click Save File when you are done editing the configuration file.
6. Reboot the ContentBridge for the changes to take effect.
IMPORTANT: If one or more ContentDirectors go offline, the ContentBridge
configuration file is not automatically synchronized for you when the ContentDirectors
comes back online. To manually synchronize the configuration file, go back to the Edit
ContentBridge Config File page and save the file again.
ContentBridge configuration file parameters
Refer to ContentBridge configuration file parameters when editing the ContentBridge configuration file.
Enabling User
Access
Every user who wants access through the ContentBridge will need the following
line in this configuration file. Set up a new line in this format for each Mount
needed:
CB CLD FS_NAME USERNAME PASSWORD
Edit the file as follows:
•
•
•
•
Replace CLD with the DNS name of the ContentDirector.
Replace FS_NAME with the name of the file system to mount.
Replace USERNAME with the user name for that particular mount.
Replace PASSWORD with the password associated with the USERNAME
entry.
NOTE: When the ContentBridge is configured for
ActiveDirectory, adding user access with the “CB lines, as
described in this section, is not supported.
Enabling CIFS
Mounts
CIFS mounts are enabled using the MEDIA_API option. Turning this option on
provides the ability to transfer files using the CIFS protocol. Add the following
line to the ContentBridge configuration file to enable this option:
MEDIA_API=YES
See the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation Guidefor complete instructions on
configuring the remote Media API to initiate transfers.
Enabling/Disabling
CIFS Oplocks
Disabling CIFS oplocks improves data integrity for highly concurrent
applications that use file locking. The setting is disabled by default. This option
only affects the operation of CIFS on a ContentBridge.
Add the following line to the configuration file to disable CIFS oplocks:
CIFS_OPLOCKS=NO
388
Editing the ContentBridge configuration file
# Acceptable options are “YES” and “NO”.
This parameter must be set in the configuration file on all ContentDirectors
in a cluster in/tftpboot/confg/config or in the /etc/gateway.conf file for a high
bandwidth ContentBridge
Enabling NFS
Support
Enabling NFS support provides the ability to transfer files to using the NFSv3
protocol. Add the following line to the ContentBridge configuration file to enable
this feature:
NFS=YES
# Acceptable Options are "YES" and "NO".
NO is the default
Adding the line above causes all user accessible file systems to be accessible
via NFSv3.
Enabling FS
Permissions
Add the following line to the configuration file on all ContentDirectors in a
cluster:
PERMISSIONS=YES
# Acceptable Options are "YES" and "NO".
NO is the default
Adding Performance Add the following (optional) performance tuning settings. When missing,
Tuning Settings
default values are used. The default values vary per operating system. Refer
to Memory Buffer Control in the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation Guide for
guidelines. Do not add these tuning parameters without first checking with your
Harmonic representative.
NOTE: The following options apply for both “CB” and “MG”
mounts.
Mount Specific Options (add on to specific mount lines):
CB CLD FS_NAME USERNAME PASSWORD OPTION=VALUE,OPTION=VALUE,...
# Valid OPTIONs:
•
•
•
•
•
filelimit: controls the maximum number of simultaneously open files the
Linux FSD supports. Replace VALUE with a number greater than 1.
readahead: controls the amount of read-ahead memory used by each open/
active file. Units are in slices. Replace VALUE with a number between 1 and
16, inclusive.
rdmsave: controls the amount of random-save memory used by each open/
active file. Units are in slices. Replace VALUE with a number between 0 and
6, inclusive
domain: Replace VALUE with a character string that is the Windows Active
Directory or Domain against which the ContentBridge is authenticated.
readpri: Allows the Linux FSD to set the “read” priority for a ContentBridge.
Replace VALUE with one of the following to set the priority:
◦
◦
◦
◦
bg = background
low = low
nr = normal
rt = real time
389
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
•
◦ rt = system
writepri: Allows the Linux FSD to set the “write” priority for a ContentBridge.
Replace VALUE with one of the following to set the priority:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Enabling Transfer of
Growing Files (TailMode FTP)
bg = background
low = low
nr = normal
rt = real time
rt = system
The tail-mode FTP feature provides the ability to transfer growing files to
platforms other than Spectrum using the ContentBridge. Add the following line
to the ContentBridge configuration file to enable this feature:
tailmode_enable=YES
Adding the line above enables tail-mode FTP with the default interval of 20
seconds. The interval—the time the ContentBridge waits to check for more data
to send before completing a transfer—can be adjusted by adding the following
optional line:
tailmode_interval=number of seconds
The number of seconds can be 0 to any number, however, updates to the file
might be missed with anything less than 10 seconds and anything longer than
30 is probably unnecessary, unless long delays are expected.
About the Media API
Version
As of Harmonic MediaGrid version 2.3, the only supported Media API version
is 5.5. Regardless of the setting you enter for MEDIA_API_VERSION, it will
default to 5.5.
Enabling Jumbo
Frames for
an Individual
ContentBridge
Jumbo frames can be enabled or disabled for individual ContentBridges by
entering the ENABLE_JUMBO_BRIDGE parameter. Specify YES or NO to
enable or disable jumbo frames for an individual ContentBridge. For example,
ENABLE_JUMBO_BRIDGE=YES.
Enabling SMB
Signing
SMB signing is a feature that allows SMB communications to be digitally signed
at the packet level, enabling the recipient to confirm the point of origination and
the authenticity.
NOTE: CIFS performance is affected when SMB signing is
enabled.
To configure SMB signing, add the SERVER_SIGNING option followed by one
of three values:
•
•
•
auto: Samba sever offers SMB signing but does not enforce it for the clients.
disabled: (Default setting) SMB signing on Samba server is disabled.
mandatory: Samba server enforces SMB signing for the clients.
For example:
SERVER_SIGNING=auto
390
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing
From the Balancer page in SystemManager, you can initiate balancing or configure scheduled balancing
to ensure that the disk space is balanced across all the ContentServers in a cluster.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters section, click the Name hyperlink for the required cluster to access the Cluster
Properties page.
3. In the ContentServer Balancer Scheduling row, click View/Edit Balancer Scheduling. The Balancer
page appears.
In the Balancing Status section, you can view the following for the selected cluster:
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Slices Balanced: Displays the slice count balanced since the balancing started.
Slices to be Balanced: Displays the slice count yet to be balanced. This is an approximate
number that is calculated at the beginning of the balancer run. This value is static and does not
change while the balancer is running.
Elapsed Time in Minutes: Displays the time in minutes since the last balancer started.
Host: Displays the ContentDirector which is running the balancer.
Status: Displays the current status of the balancer. This field will show either Running, Not
Running, or Suspended if the balancer has been suspended during slice repair.
Balancing Required?: Indicates whether or not balancing is recommended. This will show either
No, Recommended, or Highly Recommended.
NOTE: If a ContentDirector failover occurs while the balancer is running, the new
ContentDirector will recalculate the number of slices to be balanced without taking
into account the balancing that already occurred with the failed ContentDirector. The
values shown in the Balancing Status will change based on the recalculation by the
new ContentDirector.
◦
◦
◦
In the On-demand Balancing section, the following buttons are available:
Start balancer(normal) now: Click to start the balancer in normal speed immediately regardless
of any other selected settings.
Start balancer(high) now: Click to start the balancer in high speed immediately regardless of any
other selected settings.
Stop balancer now: Click to stop the balancer immediately regardless of any other selected
settings.
4. In the Scheduled Balancing section, you can configure the schedule and other parameters for
rebalancing. To enable and configure the schedule, click the Edit Schedule check box. This enables
the parameters as shown in the following figure.
391
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
Figure 10-11: Edit Schedule
NOTE: The Balancer uses the system time of the SystemManager server. If the
system time for the client you are using to access SystemManager is different than the
system time for the SystemManager server, this may create confusion.
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
Enable: Click to enable balancing for the selected day.
Starttime: Click the drop-down menus to select the hour and minute that balancing
will start on the selected day.
Duration: Click the drop-down menu to choose the duration of the scheduled
balancing for the selected day.
Speed: Click the drop-down menu to select between Normal and High speed
balancing. Harmonic recommends that you run High speed only at times when there
are no clients accessing the cluster (for example, this may be late at night). If clients
are connected to the cluster, Normal speed should be used.
High speed balancing is equivalent to multiple clients accessing the cluster and will
reduce the bandwidth of the cluster.
Set Schedule (button): Click to save any changes made in the Scheduled
Balancing section of the Balancer page.
Disable All (button): Click to disable balancing for all days.
5. Click Done to return to the Cluster Properties page.
Enabling and configuring log forwarding
Log Forwarding allows you to configure your ContentDirector to send log files to a desired e-mail address.
Before you begin
IMPORTANT: Before configuring Log Forwarding, make sure that you have followed the
procedures described in “Adding the Harmonic MediaGrid Devices to the Local DNS” and
“Setting Up Reverse DNS Lookups” in the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation Guide.
Make sure you are logged into the Harmonic MediaGrid system.
1. From the Configuration tab in SystemManager, click the Servers and Switches icon under the
Harmonic MediaGrid heading in the left-hand column.
2. From the Servers and Switches page, click the link for the cluster that contains the ContentDirector
for which you want to configure log forwarding. The Cluster Properties page for that cluster appears.
392
Enabling and configuring log forwarding
3. From the Cluster Properties page, click the View/Edit Log Forwarding Options button.
The Edit “Log Forwarding Configuration” File... page appears.
Figure 10-12: Edit “Log Forwarding Configuration” File page
4. Read the descriptions of the values in the configuration file and then modify the values as needed.
5. Once you have modified the values, click Save File. A message appears indicating whether the file
was successfully saved.
Log forwarding configuration values
Refer to the log forwarding configuration values for the cluster.
CUSTOMER
(Optional) The name of the customer to be included in the log file.
SMTP_SERVER
(Required) IP address or hostname of the SMTP server.
SMTP_USER
(Required) The user name required for connecting to the SMTP server. If the
sever does not require authentication, then leave this value blank.
SMTP_PASS
(Required) The password required for connecting to the SMTP server. If the
sever does not require authentication, then leave this value blank.
SMTP_TO
(Required) This is the destination e-mail address to which log e-mails will be
sent. To send Harmonic MediaGrid log files to Harmonic technical support, enter
MGSupportLogs@omneon.com for this value.
SMTP_FROM
(Required) A valid e-mail address, which will be used for replies to the log email. Any reply to the log e-mail will go to this “from” address.
393
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
SMTP_SUBJECT
(Optional) If specified, this value will be used as the subject in the e-mail
messages sent out.
SMTP_MESSAGE
(Optional) Any message you wish to include in the log e-mail, which may
include information regarding the company, system, and so on.
ATTACHMENT_SIZE
(Optional) The specified size of each log, indicated in bytes (b), kilobytes (k), or
megabytes (m). When this size is reached, the log is split into separate e-mails.
NOTE: Make sure the ATTACHMENT_SIZE value is smaller
than the maximum e-mail attachment size allowed by your e-mail
server.
SLEEP_TIME
(Optional) When multiple e-mails are being sent, this value specifies the amount
of time, in seconds, that SystemManager will wait before sending each e-mail.
SEND_ENABLED
(Required) When set to TRUE, this value enables Log Forwarding, and, when
set to FALSE, disables it.
Possible log forwarding errors
If a problem occurs with log forwarding once it has been configured (for example, due to an invalid entry
in the configuration file), SystemManager will generate an alarm describing the problem.
The following figure shows an example of the e-mail sent by log forwarding once it has been configured.
Figure 10-13: Example e-mail produced by Log Forwarding
Note that the e-mail contains the following elements:
•
Original File name, which includes:
•
•
•
◦ Customer Name (underscores replace any unacceptable characters)
◦ Cluster ID
◦ Hostname
◦ Harmonic MediaGrid software version
◦ Time and Date stamp
◦ Original uncompressed file name
Timestamp of e-mail
Identification of which file this is among the total number of files
A user-definable message
These elements, and the content of the e-mail, will vary depending on your modifications to the Log
Forwarding configuration file
394
Balancing the ContentServer controllers
Balancing the ContentServer controllers
Harmonic recommends that you balance the Slice Server processes across controllers to improve
performance after certain situations.
Any time one controller on a ContentServer goes down, the active Slice Server processes on that
controller fail over to the remaining controller. Harmonic recommends that you balance both controllers
following any of the events listed below. If you fail to do so, it can negatively affect the performance of the
ContentServer.
•
•
•
•
•
Capacity expansion
ContentServer upgrade
Controller replacement
Controller fail-over
If the Managed ContentServers and ContentStores field on the ContentServer Properties page
shows all, or a large majority, of ContentStore and ContentServer nodes being managed by one
controller (for example, five out of six).
NOTE: Harmonic recommends that you schedule balancing during times when the system
is not loaded. For example, this may be late at night. System performance may be affected
while balancing is occurring.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer to access the Properties page.
3. Click the Failback button.
NOTE: You may also use the Failback button on any ContentStore being managed by
the ContentServer you wish to balance.
4. Verify that all ContentServer and ContentStore nodes appear in the Managed ContentServers
and ContentStores field on the ContentServer Properties page. If they are not all listed, contact
Harmonic technical support for assistance.
After clicking Failback, you may observe on the ContentServer Properties page that some
ContentStore or ContentServer nodes in the Managed ContentServers and ContentStores field for
one controller now appear under a different controller, in which case, balancing was successful.
Upgrading Harmonic MediaGrid firmware
Upgrade firmware using SystemManager. To ensure a smooth system upgrade, upgrade devices in the
given order.
NOTE: To avoid loss of service, upgrade ContentDirector nodes one at a time, as
described in the steps that follow.
1. From the left-hand column on the Home tab, click the Firmware Selection icon to display the
Firmware Version Selection page, shown below.
395
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
2. In the Harmonic MediaGrid column, click the radio button for the desired firmware version. The red
check mark indicates the selected version.
3. When the confirmation dialog appears, click OK to accept.
4. Click the Upgrade Firmware icon in the left-hand column to display the Upgrade Firmware page.
5. In the ContentDirectors section, click in the Select column to specify the ContentDirector you want
to upgrade.
6. Click Upgrade ContentDirectors to start upgrading the firmware of the selected ContentDirector.
IMPORTANT: When upgrading and/or rebooting Harmonic MediaGrid devices, do
not upgrade or reboot two different device types at the same time. Consult with your
Harmonic representative if you need assistance.
7. Wait for the Status column to show Connected.
8. Once the status of the first ContentDirector returns to Connected, proceed with upgrading the
remaining ContentDirector nodes, one a time, by repeating steps 5-7.
9. Clear or delete the alarms and monitor them for a few minutes to ensure that no new alarms are
generated after each ContentDirector is upgraded.
10. Restart the ContentDirector nodes in your system, one by one, by clicking Reboot ContentDirector.
IMPORTANT: When upgrading to version 3.4.x or later, after all ContentDirector nodes
have restarted once, restart all ContentDirector nodes, except the last one in your
system, a second time in the same order. This will enable the improved space reporting
provided in 3.4.x and later.
11. Return to the ContentDirectors section of the Upgrade Firmware page to verify the version number
for each node that was upgraded.
12. Upgrade the firmware for the ContentServer nodes in your system.
396
Changing the Harmonic MediaGrid wink state
a. In the Controllers section of the page, select one controller per ContentServer to upgrade
by clicking in the Select column for the corresponding controller and then clicking Upgrade
Controllers.
IMPORTANT: Upgrading both controllers on a ContentServer at the same time will
cause the system to be unavailable during reboot and is not recommended.
You can upgrade multiple controllers from different ContentServer enclosures in parallel by
selecting one controller from each ContentServer you wish to upgrade.
b. Once the firmware has been downloaded to the controller(s), return to the Controllers section
of the Upgrade Firmware page, select each controller that was upgraded and click Reboot
Controllers.
Result: The updated firmware version displays when the reboot is complete.
c. Select the second controller for each ContentServer you are upgrading by clicking in the Select
column for the corresponding controller and then clicking Upgrade Controllers.
d. Select each controller that was upgraded and click Reboot Controllers.
Result: The updated firmware version displays when the reboot is complete.
e. Once you have upgraded both controllers on a ContentServer, Harmonic recommends that you
balance the ContentServer.
13. Upgrade the firmware for the ContentBridge or High Bandwidth ContentBridge in your system:
•
•
For the ContentBridge: In the ContentBridges section, click in the Select column to specify one or
more unit(s) for upgrade, and then click Reboot ContentBridges.
For the High Bandwidth ContentBridge: In the High Bandwidth ContentBridges section, select
one or more unit(s) for upgrade, and then click Upgrade High Bandwidth ContentBriges.
NOTE: If you are upgrading from Harmonic MediaGrid version 3.1 or later, the High
Bandwidth ContentBridge will restart automatically once the upgrade is complete.
If you are upgrading from a version prior to 3.1, you must manually restart the High
Bandwidth ContentBridge. Make sure to wait at least 15 minutes after upgrading before
you restart. To restart, click the link in the Name column to navigate to the Properties
page, and then click Reboot.
Changing the Harmonic MediaGrid wink state
You can change the wink state for a component, cluster, volume, or group.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Cluster, ContentServers, ContentDirectors, ContentBridge sections, select the cluster or
component to wink and click the Wink button.
•
•
If On, click Wink Off to stop winking the cluster of unit’s blue light bar(s), located on the front of the
units.
If Off, click Wink On to start winking the unit’s blue light bar(s), located on the front of the units
3. To wink a volume or group, select the appropriate cluster and then select which volume(s) or group(s)
to wink.
NOTE: If one of the units of a unit is not winking, the top level wink status for that unit
is reported as “Mixed”. For instance, a volume and it’s associated cluster will report
397
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 10: Harmonic MediaGrid configuration
“mixed” if some group(s) within the volume are winking (On) and some are not (Off).
Thus, the only time the wink status of a cluster is On is when all units within the cluster
(volumes, groups, ContentServers, ContentDirectors, and ContentBridges) are set to
On.
Enabling and configuring checkpoint schedules
Harmonic strongly recommends that you schedule Checkpoints for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
Note the following important points:
•
•
You must have Administrator privileges to perform these functions.
Before configuring checkpoints, Harmonic recommends that you set the timezone on each
ContentDirector. Refer to “Setting ContentDirector Timezones” in the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation
Guide for step by step instructions.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentDirectors section, click the Name hyperlink to access the Properties page for the
required ContentDirector.
In the Current Checkpoint Schedule section, click Change Checkpoint Schedule to access the
Checkpoint Configuration page.
Figure 10-14: Checkpoint Configuration
3. In the Checkpoint Configuration Schedule section, configure as follows:
◦
◦
◦
Start Day Select the day when the next Checkpoint should occur.
Start Time Select the hour of the day when the next Checkpoint should start.
Interval Select the interval between Checkpoints; from 1 to 12 hours, 16 or 20 hours, or from 1 -15
days.
398
Changing the descriptions for Harmonic MediaGrid components
4. Click Create a Checkpoint Now to perform an immediate Checkpoint or click Save Schedule to save
the schedule information and perform the Checkpoint at the specified time.
Related information
About checkpoints and scheduling checkpoints on page 369
Changing the descriptions for Harmonic MediaGrid components
You can change description that SystemManager displays for each component.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentDirectors, ContentServers, and/or ContentBridges section(s), click the Name
hyperlink to access the unit’s Properties page.
3. Click Change Desc to display the Change .... Description page.
4. Type the new description in the text box.
5. Click Save to save the description and return to the Properties page.
The new description appears in the unit’s Description field.
399
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 11
Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and
Maintenance
This chapter provides RAID set configuration and maintenance procedures for ContentServers and
ContentStores.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Supported RAID configurations
Creating a RAID set
Creating a RAID set with Auto Create
Destroying a RAID set
Failing a drive
Unfailing a drive
Changing RAID set wink state
Stopping a RAID set rebuild in progress
Restarting a RAID set rebuild
Making a hot spare
Clearing a hot spare
Drive capacity expansion in a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system
Supported RAID configurations
Note the difference between “capacity optimized” and “performance optimized” RAID configurations, and
which configurations are supported in each ContentServer and ContentStore model.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all ContentServers and ContentStores in a stack are
configured with the same RAID geometry.
In the capacity optimized RAID configuration, the disk drives are configured in a Dual Parity (DP) RAID
array, ensuring that the system can continue to function despite the failure of any two disk drives. This
configuration optimizes storage capacity at the cost of bandwidth. A capacity optimized RAID set typically
uses a 6+2 configuration.
NOTE: In the ContentStore 5840, capacity optimized RAID sets use a 5+2 configuration.
In the performance optimized RAID configuration, each RAID set has a single redundant disk drive, and
each enclosure has N total number of hot spares. This configuration optimizes bandwidth at the cost of
storage capacity. A performance optimized RAID set typically uses a 2+1 configuration.
400
Supported RAID configurations
RAID configurations for the ContentServer 3000 and ContentStore 3160
Find the available disk drive configurations for the ContentServer 3000 and ContentStore 3160.
Make sure to select the RAID set that works best for your needs.
Table 11-1: RAID configurations for the ContentServer 3000 and ContentStore 3160
# Drives
RAID Sets
Capacity per
Drive
Storage Capacity
16
2 x (6+2)
1 TB
12 TB
16
2 x (6+2)
2 TB
24 TB
16
2 x (6+2)
3 TB
36 TB
16
2 x (6+2)
4 TB
48 TB
16
2 x (6+2)
6 TB
72 TB
16
5 x (2+1) +1
1 TB
10 TB
16
5 x (2+1) +1
2 TB
20 TB
16
5 x (2+1) +1
3 TB
30 TB
16
5 x (2+1) +1
4 TB
40 TB
16
5 x (2+1) +1
6 TB
60 TB
NOTE: No other disk drive configurations are supported for the ContentServer 3000 and
ContentStore 3160 series.
RAID configurations for the ContentServer 4000 and ContentStore 4240
Find the available disk drive configurations for the ContentServer 4000 and ContentStore 4240.
Make sure to select the RAID set that works best for your needs.
Table 11-2: RAID configurations for the ContentServer 4000 and ContentStore 4240
# Drives
RAID Sets
Capacity per
Drive
Storage Capacity
24
3 x (6+2)
2 TB
36 TB
24
3 x (6+2)
4 TB
72 TB
24
3 x (6+2)
6 TB
108 TB
24
7 x (2+1) + 3
2 TB
28 TB
24
7 x (2+1) + 3
4 TB
56 TB
24
7 x (2+1) + 3
6 TB
84 TB
NOTE: No other disk drive configurations are supported for the ContentServer 4000 and
ContentStore 4240 series.
401
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 11: Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
RAID configurations for the ContentStore 5840
Find the available disk drive configurations for the ContentStore 5840.
Make sure to select the RAID set that works best for your needs.
Table 11-3: RAID configurations for the ContentStore 5840
# Drives
RAID Sets
Capacity per
Drive
Storage Capacity
84
12 x (5+2)
4 TB
240 TB
84
12 x (5+2)
6 TB
360 TB
84
26 x (2+1)
+6
4 TB
208 TB
84
26 x (2+1)
+6
6 TB
312 TB
NOTE: No other disk drive configurations are supported for the ContentStore 5840.
Creating a RAID set
Use the Create RAID set utility to manually assign drives to a RAID set.
NOTE: This procedure can be performed automatically when you run the Harmonic
MediaGrid configuration assistant. For information about running the configuration
assistant, refer to “System Configuration” in the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation Guide.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all ContentServers and ContentStores in a stack are
configured with the same RAID geometry.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the Drives section of the page, click Create RAID Set to open the Create RAID Set page, as
shown in the following figure.
NOTE: If the Create RAID Set button is grayed out, then all drives are already
assigned to a RAID set.
402
Creating a RAID set with Auto Create
Figure 11-1: Creating a RAID set Manually
4. From the Create RAID set page, select the drives you wish to add to a RAID set.
5. In Selected RAID Set Type, select the desired RAID set type.
NOTE: If there are not enough drives available for the dual parity option then
SystemManager will only show the single parity option.
6. Click Create RAID Set.
The new RAID set will be visible in the RAID Sets section of the ContentServer or ContentStore
Properties page.
Creating a RAID set with Auto Create
Use the Auto Create RAID set utility to automatically assign drives to a RAID set.
NOTE: This procedure can be performed automatically when you run the Harmonic
MediaGrid configuration assistant. For information about running the configuration
assistant, refer to “System Configuration” in the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation Guide.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all ContentServers and ContentStores in a stack are
configured with the same RAID geometry.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
403
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 11: Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
3. In the Drives section of the page, click Auto Create RAID Set to open the Auto Create RAID Set
page, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE: If the Create RAID Set button is grayed out, then all drives are already
assigned to a RAID set.
Figure 11-2: Creating a RAID set with Auto Create
4. In Select RAID Set Type, select the desired RAID set type.
NOTE: If there are not enough drives available for the dual parity option then
SystemManager will only show the single parity option.
5. Click Done to create the RAID set and return to the ContentServer or ContentStore Properties page.
The new RAID set will be visible in the RAID Sets section of the ContentServer or ContentStore
Properties page.
Destroying a RAID set
In some cases, you may need to destroy one or more RAID sets.
CAUTION: Destroying a RAID set will wipe out all data in that RAID set.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the RAID sets section of the page, from the Select column, select the RAID set(s) you wish to
destroy, and then click Set Offline.
4. Verify that the Status for the RAID set(s) changes to “Offline.” At this point, the data on the drives will
not be accessible.
5. Select the offline RAID set(s), and then click Destroy.
6. Verify that the destroyed RAID set(s) no longer appears in the RAID set list.
404
Failing a drive
Failing a drive
Use the Fail drive procedure to remove a drive from a RAID set, when the drive is experiencing a loss of
data.
This step is performed as a prerequisite to removing the drive from the chassis and then replacing it with
a new drive, at which time the RAID set “rebuild” occurs automatically.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the Drives section of the page, select the drive(s) you wish to fail and click Fail Drives.
The drive status now appears as “Dead” and “Unraided.”
For instructions on replacing a failed drive, refer to the Component Replacement Guide for your
ContentServer or ContentStore.
Unfailing a drive
Use the Unfail drive procedure to make a failed drive available to be used in a RAID set.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the Drives section of the page, select the drive(s) you wish to unfail and click Unfail Drives.
The drive status changes to Alive.
Changing RAID set wink state
You can change the wink state of all drives in a RAID set.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the RAID sets section of the page, click the link in the GUID column for the RAID set you wish to
view. The RAID Utilities page appears. .
4. In the RAID Set drives wink state section, click Wink On to wink all drives in the RAID set. Click
Wink Off to turn off winking for all drives in the RAID set.
405
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 11: Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
Stopping a RAID set rebuild in progress
You can this stop a RAID set “rebuild” in progress.
Note that when the rebuild stops, the RAID set is left in a compromised state. In this state, the RAID set
can still be used, but there is no protection. If another drive is lost, your content will also be lost.
The rebuild might be manually stopped, for example, if you noted that the rebuild was occurring to the
wrong Hot Spare. Once stopped, the rebuild can be started again successfully.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the RAID sets section of the page, click the link in the GUID column for the RAID set you wish to
view. The RAID Utilities page appears.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Abort Rebuild.
5. Verify that the Rebuild status field reads “Aborted.”
The rebuild has now been stopped, but it can be started again successfully.
Restarting a RAID set rebuild
Restarting a RAID set rebuild
In some cases, you may need to manually restart at RAID set rebuild.
Normally, the rebuilding of a RAID set occurs automatically when a drive fails and a Hot Spare is
available. The rebuild can also occur when a failed drive is replaced.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the RAID sets section of the page, click the link in the GUID column for the RAID set you wish to
view. The RAID Utilities page appears.
4. Scroll to the bottom and click Start Rebuild. The status field changes to “Rebuilding.”
5. Click Done to save the changes and return to the ContentServer or ContentStore Properties page.
Making a hot spare
In some cases, you may need to make a hot spare drive.
If a drive failure occurs and a hot spare is available, the system will automatically utilize a hot spare
to rebuild a protected RAID set. A hot spare is a drive that will be used by the ContentServer or
ContentStore to fulfill hot spare requirements for any RAID set in the ContentServer or ContentStore
406
Clearing a hot spare
where the hot spare resides. If your system is configured with 2+1 RAID sets, Harmonic recommends that
you always have at least one hot spare available.
NOTE: If you enable Monitor Hotspares (from the Options page on the Home tab), the
SystemManager will raise an alarm (and send notification by e-mail and/or trap is so
configured) when a RAID set is no longer protected with an available hot spare.
1. Verify the hot spare drive’s condition. From the ContentServer/ContentStore Properties page, in the
Drives section on the page, the drive should appear as “Alive” and “Unraided.” If the drive does not
appear this way, contact Harmonic technical support.
2. Verify the drive’s firmware. If the firmware revision level does not match the other drives, contact
Harmonic technical support for assistance.
3. From the ContentServer/ContentStore Properties page, in the Drives section on the page, click the
GUID for the selected drive to display the Drive Properties page.
4. From the Drive Properties page, click Make Hot Spare. The button changes to Clear Hot Spare,
the drive’s status changes immediately to “Alive, Hot Spare,” and the drive is ready for use as a hot
spare.
5. Click Done to save the changes and return to the ContentServer or ContentStore Properties page.
Clearing a hot spare
You can clear a Hot Spare, for example, if you accidentally created a Hot Spare or if you want to use the
selected drive as a normal part of a RAID set.
1. From the ContentServer/ContentStore Properties page, in the Drives section on the page, click the
GUID for the selected drive to display the Drive Properties page.
2. From the Drive Properties page, click Clear Hot Spare. The button changes to Make Hot Spare, the
drive’s status changes immediately to “Alive,” and the drive is ready for use as normal drive.
3. Click Done to save the changes and return to the ContentServer or ContentStore Properties page.
Drive capacity expansion in a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system
Expanding drive capacity in your Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system requires significant planning. An
integral component of this process is shelf evacuation, which can take many hours, or even days, for
each ContentServer or ContentStore involved.
Please read the following sections carefully and plan accordingly.
NOTE: Capacity expansion requires Harmonic MediaGrid version 3.5 or later (on all
components in your Harmonic MediaGrid system) and SystemManager 6.2.3 or later.
About shelf evacuation
Shelf evacuation involves transferring data, one shelf at a time, to other shelves in the volume or, for
stretch cluster configurations, to other shelves in the same group.
This allows you to maintain uninterrupted access to data while expanding capacity, or while reconfiguring,
replacing, or retiring a shelf.
407
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 11: Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
In a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system, a shelf is one ContentServer 3000 or 4000, one ContentStore
3160 or 4240, or one drawer in a ContentStore 5840. The shelf being evacuated is automatically set to
read-only mode. It can still service client read requests, however this capability will diminish as data is
removed from the shelf after being copied to another shelf.
Note that, if the balancer is enabled when an evacuation begins, it will be suspended throughout the
evacuation process and will resume once all shelves return to normal service. After capacity expansion,
Harmonic recommends running the balancer on high priority in order to rebalance the system as quickly
as possible.
About write bandwidth during shelf evacuation
Although the Harmonic MediaGrid system can still service read and write requests during shelf
evacuation, note that write bandwidth will be reduced both by the portion represented by the shelf being
evacuated and by the overhead of copying slices to the other shelves.
During evacuation, you can set the priority level to either "normal" or "high", depending on your write
bandwidth requirements. When planning for capacity expansion, consider the impact that each priority
level will have on the entire time needed for expansion..
Priority Level
Description
Normal
If the Harmonic MediaGrid cluster will be in use during the evacuation
process (reads and writes are taking place), you should set the priority
level to normal. Note that this setting increases the amount of time
required to complete the evacuation.
High
If the Harmonic MediaGrid cluster will be idle during the evacuation
process (reads or writes will not be taking place), then you can set the
priority level to high. Note that this setting decreases the amount of time
required to complete the evacuation.
Reviewing available space
To prepare for capacity expansion, determine the amount of disk space that will be available in the
volume or group after a shelf has been evacuated.
Free up as much space as possible! When expanding capacity in multiple shelves, data is repeatedly
moved from one shelf to another. The less data there is to move, the faster the process will go.
1. In SystemManager, navigate to the Cluster Properties page, and then click Shelf Evacuation
Control/Status to open the Shelf Evacuation page for the cluster.
2. In the Total Disk Space column, find the shelf with the least amount of space. If each shelf has the
same total disk space, look in the Free Space (%) column and find the shelf with the greatest amount
of free space.
408
Drive capacity expansion in a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system
3. For the same shelf, note the Estimated free space in group/volume after evacuation.
The following table will help you determine if there is enough free space for evacuation:
Color
Status
Green
Sufficient space is available, even if the Harmonic MediaGrid cluster
will be in use (reads or writes are taking place) during the evacuation.
Yellow
Sufficient space is available if the Harmonic MediaGrid cluster will have
limited use during the evacuation.
Red
Sufficient space is available if the Harmonic MediaGrid cluster will be
idle (no reads or writes are taking place) during the evacuation.
Dark Red
Insufficient space available; the Write Disable and Evacuate buttons
are grayed out. You must free up space or add storage in order to
proceed.
About setting shelves to read-only mode
To prevent data from migrating to the next shelf to be evacuated in the same volume or group, you can
manually set this shelf to read-only.
CAUTION: Manually setting a ContentServer or ContentStore to read-only mode is
intended to facilitate capacity expansion ONLY. Do not set a shelf as read-only for any
other purpose.
By default, Harmonic MediaGrid distributes content that has been evacuated from one shelf equally
across all remaining shelves in the volume or group. This has the advantage of maintaining maximum
possible read bandwidth. However, it increases the total amount of time required for evacuation by
moving data to the shelf that will be evacuated next.
409
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 11: Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
If any of the following is true, DO NOT configure the additional shelf as read-only:
•
•
•
The volume, or each group in the stretch cluster, has fewer than 10 shelves.
The system has less than 20% available disk space.
You cannot tolerate further reduction in write bandwidth.
IMPORTANT: Harmonic recommends that you set no more than 2 shelves to read-only,
which includes the shelf being evacuated, in a volume or group of 10 shelves.
If you find during the evacuation process that your users require more writable space than anticipated,
you can return a shelf to read-write duty at any time.
After you have expanded drive capacity in the first or second shelf, the volume or group should have
enough free space to support setting all of the unexpanded shelves to read-only during subsequent
evacuations. Note that doing so concentrates the migrated content on the few remaining writable servers.
This, in turn, reduces the effective read bandwidth for files that contain these slices. If the system is not in
use, this will speed up the expansion process. However, it will take longer to balance the cluster after all
shelves have been expanded.
Expanding drive capacity
Begin this procedure only after you have determined that your system has sufficient free space and you
have planned accordingly.
1. In SystemManager, navigate to the Cluster Properties page, and then click Shelf Evacuation
Control/Status to open the Shelf Evacuation page for the cluster.
2. From the Priority drop-down menu, select the priority level for evacuation:
•
•
Normal: Select if the Harmonic MediaGrid cluster will be in use (reads or writes are taking place)
during shelf evacuation.
High: Select if the Harmonic MediaGrid cluster will be idle (no reads or writes are taking place)
during shelf evacuation.
NOTE: You may change the priority level at any time during the evacuation.
3. If your system meets the criteria specified in About setting shelves to read-only mode, you may set
the first two shelves to be evacuated in the volume or group as read-only. If your system does not
meet the criteria, skip this step.
a. Select Write Disable for the shelf that will be evacuated first, and then click OK to confirm.
Result: The CS Status changes to ReadOnly.
b. Select Write Disable for the shelf that will be evacuated next, and then click OK to confirm.
NOTE: For a stretch cluster configuration, select the next shelf that will be
evacuated in the same group.
Result: The CS Status field changes to ReadOnly and SystemManager updates the Estimated
free space in group/volume after evacuation.
c. Note the updated estimated free space after evacuation and consider the anticipated load during
the evacuation process.
d. If there is limited or insufficient free space, or you anticipate heavy load during the evacuation
process, return the shelf to normal service by clicking Write Enable.
4. For the shelf you intend to evacuate first, select Evacuate, and then click OK to confirm.
410
Drive capacity expansion in a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system
Result: Within a short while, the Write Disable and Evacuate buttons change to Write Enable
and Cancel Evacuation. The CS Status field changes to Evacuating, which also appears on the
Properties page and the Servers & Switches page.
Lastly, after a short delay, SystemManager shows an estimated time of completion. This estimate
is based on the rate at which the Harmonic MediaGrid has copied slices so far, and the number of
slices remaining, without regard to slice sizes. This estimate will change with increased/decreased
load on the system or network, or with significant variation in the size of slices to be moved.
5. Monitor the progress of the evacuation.
•
•
•
If the evacuation appears to be stuck at 99% or 100%, this may mean the shelf has not yet
reported that it is done deleting the last few slices that were copied to other shelves. Wait a few
minutes for the CS Status to update.
If an error occurs, refer to "Possible errors during shelf evacuation," and follow the instructions for
troubleshooting the particular error that occurred.
If necessary, you may cancel the evacuation by clicking Cancel Evacuation. Note that canceling
an evacuation does not return the data, which has already been transferred, back to the original
shelf.
Following a cancellation, you must return the shelf to normal service (see step 10) and rebalance
the ContentServer and ContentStore nodes in the cluster (see step 12).
Result: When evacuation is complete, the CS Status changes to Evacuated and the following
message appears:
Data migration for [component name] has completed. The component may be
retired.
NOTE: After a shelf is evacuated, the value for Free Space (%) may be slightly less
than 100. This is expected following a successful evacuation.
Proceed to the next step only after the evacuation has successfully completed.
6. Navigate to the Properties page and click Wink On to identify the physical ContentServer or
ContentStore that was evacuated.
NOTE: The ContentStore 5840 appears as two devices in SystemManager. Be sure to
navigate to the correct Properties page.
7. From the RAID Sets section of the Properties page, destroy all of the RAID sets for the shelf that
was evacuated.
For instructions, refer to "Destroying a RAID Set" in the Harmonic SystemManager User Guide.
8. For the shelf that was evacuated, replace the original drives with higher capacity drives.
For instructions, refer to the ContentServer Component Replacement Guide or ContentStore
Component Replacement Guide.
9. Using SystemManager, create new RAID sets for the shelf that was expanded.
For instructions, refer to "Creating a RAID Set with Auto Create" or "Creating a RAID Set" in the
Harmonic SystemManager User Guide.
10. From the Shelf Evacuation Control/Status page in SystemManager, click Write Enable for the shelf
that was evacuated to return the shelf to normal service.
11. Repeat step 3 through step 10 to expand capacity in the remaining shelves, one at a time.
411
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 11: Harmonic MediaGrid RAID Configuration and Maintenance
NOTE: For a stretch cluster configuration, alternate between groups with each shelf
expansion. If you have write-disabled an additional shelf, leave this shelf in read-only
mode (if possible) while expanding a shelf in the other group.
12. Once all the shelves have been returned to normal service, navigate to the View/Edit Balancer
Scheduling page for the cluster, and balance the ContentServer and ContentStore nodes.
Harmonic recommends that you select Start balancer(high) now to start the balancer immediately.
If that is not possible, configure your balancing shedule to complete as quickly as possible. Refer to
"Enabling and Configuring Scheduled Balancing" in the Harmonic SystemManager User Guide.
Related information
Destroying a RAID set on page 404
Creating a RAID set on page 402
Creating a RAID set with Auto Create on page 403
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing on page 391
Possible errors during shelf evacuation
Some errors, such as network outages and shelf failover, may interfere with the shelf evacuation process.
Check the View Alarms page for any errors that were generated during the evacuation.
If you see any of the following errors, check for network connectivity, shelf status (online/offline), and free
space on the shelf:
•
SSID=[SSID] Evacuation canceled due to excessive errors.
•
•
•
NOTE: This message refers to errors in retrieving status from the shelf being
evacuated.
SSID=[SSID] Evacuation canceled due to inaccessible server.
Unable to migrate slice: [SID]. Evacuation canceled.
Unable to migrate slice: [SID]. Evacuation of SSID=[SSID] canceled.
Once the Harmonic MediaGrid is stable, confirm that there is still sufficient space to evacuate the shelf
and then resume the procedure for expanding drive capacity.
If the error persists for the same slice ID, wait 10 minutes and try again.
In some cases, particularly on live systems, you may see the following error:
Data migration for ContentServer=[SSID] was not able to complete after [X]
retries.
If this occurs, contact Harmonic technical support for assistance.
412
Chapter 12
Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
This chapter provides procedures for monitoring performance of your Harmonic MediaGrid system. .
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Viewing all Harmonic MediaGrid clusters and components
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Viewing drive properties
Viewing RAID set information
Viewing Harmonic MediaGrid performance statistics
Viewing and clearing alarms and events for Harmonic MediaGrid components
Performing management and troubleshooting on a Harmonic MediaGrid
Viewing all Harmonic MediaGrid clusters and components
You can view properties for Harmonic MediaGrid clusters and components:
1. Click the Configuration Tab at the top of the SystemManager page.
2. Click the Servers & Switches icon in the left-hand column to access the Servers & Switches page.
Properties for all clusters
In the Clusters section of the Servers & Switches page, you can view properties for each cluster
created in the system.
Name (hyperlink)
Displays the name assigned to the cluster. Click on the hyperlink to access the
Cluster Properties page.
#Volumes
Displays the number of volumes which make up the cluster.
#Groups
Displays the number of groups which make up the cluster.
#File Systems
Displays the number of File Systems in the cluster.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space available across all ContentServers in a cluster.
Free Space(%)
Displays the percentage of free disk space across all ContentServers in a
cluster.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a cluster in a rack.
Click the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
413
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Select
Click the Select check box to select the cluster.
Wink on/off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected clusters.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the clusters.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all the clusters.
Properties for all ContentDirectors
In the ContentDirectors section of the Servers & Switches page, you can view properties for each
ContentDirector found in the system.
Name (hyperlink)
Displays the name assigned to the Server. Click on the hyperlink to access the
unit’s Properties page.
IP Address
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
IP Address 2
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
Network Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, authentication status, and security
access level, including “Connected,” “Not Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,”
“Starting Upgrade”; “Authenticated”, “Not Authenticated”; “Administrator”.
AD Connection
Status
Displays the status of the Active Directory connection, which may be “Up,”
“Down,” or “N/A.” Note that “N/A” means that either the cluster is not reporting
the AD connection status or that the cluster is not using AD for authentication.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds. Thus, 20:16:21:52:10 means 20 days, 16
hours, 21 minutes, and 52.10 seconds.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space available on the ContentDirector.
NOTE: The value in this field reflects cluster values. Each of
the ContentDirectors in a cluster reports the same value for the
cluster.
Free Space(%)
Displays the percentage of free disk space on the on the ContentDirector.
NOTE: The value in this field reflects cluster values. Each of
the ContentDirectors in a cluster reports the same value for the
cluster.
Cluster
Displays the cluster name to which the ContentDirector is assigned.
System Management Provides a link to the SystemManagement (Dell OpenManage) page for the
ContentDirector.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a cluster in a rack.
Click the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select the ContentDirector.
Wink on/off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected ContentDirectors.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the ContentDirectors.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all the ContentDirectors.
414
Viewing all Harmonic MediaGrid clusters and components
Properties for all ContentServers and ContentStores
In the ContentServers/ContentStores section of the Servers & Switches page, you can view properties
for each ContentServer or ContentStore found in the system.
Name (hyperlink)
Displays the name assigned to the device. Note that for the ContentServer 3000
or 4000 series, ContentServer names begin with S and ContentStore names
begin with J. Click on the hyperlink to access the Properties page for each
device.
IP Address
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
IP Address 2
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
Network Status
Displays the Server’s current network status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” “Starting Upgrade” etc.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total raw storage capacity of each server.
Free Space(%)
Displays the percentage of free disk space on the ContentServer.
Reads (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read” requests
sent to the ContentServer.
Writes (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write” requests
received by the ContentServer.
Re-replications (MB/
s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication requests
received by the ContentServer.
Cluster
Displays the cluster name to which the ContentServer is assigned.
Volume/Group/CS ID
Displays the volume name, to which the ContentServer is assigned; the group
name to which the ContentServer is assigned; and a numeric identifier for the
ContentServer within the cluster.
CS Status
Displays the Server’s current status within the cluster, including “No Cluster,”
“Initializing,” “OK,” “Degraded,” “Storage Failure,” “ReadOnly,” “Evacuating,” or
“Evacuated.”
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a unit in a rack. Click
the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select the ContentServer.
Wink on/off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected ContentServers.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the ContentServers.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all the ContentServers.
Related information
About re-replication (for ContentServer 1000 and 2000 Series only) on page 418
415
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Properties for all ContentBridges
In the ContentBridges section of the Servers & Switches page, you can view properties for each
ContentBridge found in the system. :
Name (hyperlink)
Displays the name assigned to the unit. Click on the hyperlink to access the
Content Bridge’s Properties page.
DNS Name
The DNS name of the ContentBridge.
IP Address
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
IP Address 2
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” “Starting Upgrade” etc.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds. Thus, 20:16:21:52:10 means 20 days, 16
hours, 21 minutes, and 52.10 seconds.
Cluster
Displays the cluster name to which the ContentBridge is assigned.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a unit in a rack. Click
the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select the ContentBridge.
Wink on/off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected ContentBridges.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the ContentBridges.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all the ContentBridges.
Properties for all High Bandwidth ContentBridges
In the High Bandwidth ContentBridges section of the Servers & Switches page, you can view
properties for each High Bandwidth ContentBridge found in the system.
Note that Harmonic provides an HA Pair utility that you may run to configure two High Bandwidth
ContentBridges in a High Availability (HA) pair. If you have configured an HA pair, the details of that pair
will appear under High Bandwidth ContentBridges (in HA mode), and some HA-specific fields will
appear, as shown in the following figure. For details on configuring an HA pair, see “Configuring High
Bandwidth ContentBridges in a High Availability (HA) Pair” in the Harmonic MediaGrid Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Figure 12-1: High Bandwidth ContentBridges (in HA mode)
Name (hyperlink)
Displays the name assigned to the unit. Click on the hyperlink to access the
Properties page.
IP Address
Displays the IP address for the High Bandwidth ContentBridge.
416
Viewing all Harmonic MediaGrid clusters and components
Shared IP
(for HA only) Displays the IP address shared by the two HA-paired High
Bandwidth ContentBridges.
Preferred
(for HA only) Displays the HA-paired High Bandwidth ContentBridge that is
configured as the Preferred node. If both nodes in an HA pair fail, in the event
of recovery, the preferred node becomes the “active” node first in order to avoid
conflicts resulting from two active nodes.
HA State
(for HA only) Displays either active or shadow. If network connectivity, power,
or an essential process fails on the “active” node, the “shadow” node then
becomes “active” and takes over operations.
Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” and “Starting Upgrade.”
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds. Thus, 20:16:21:52:10 means 20 days, 16
hours, 21 minutes, and 52.10 seconds.
Config
Access the High Bandwidth ContentBridge Configuration File.
System Management Provides a link to the Dell OpenManage utility.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a unit in a rack. Click
the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select the High Bandwidth ContentBridge.
Wink on/off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected High Bandwidth
ContentBridge.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the High Bandwidth ContentBridges.
Accessing the Dell OpenManage utility
Related information
Editing the High Bandwidth ContentBridge configuration file on page 385
Properties for all network switches
In the Network Switches section of the Servers & Switches page, you can view properties for each
network switch found in the system.
IP Address
Displays a unique identifier, typically the IP address of the switch.
Network Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, such as “Connected,” etc.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds.
Model
Displays the switch type.
Switch Management
(hyperlink)
Provides a link to the Switch Management (HP ProCurve Switch) page for the
particular unit.
417
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
About re-replication (for ContentServer 1000 and 2000 Series only)
Take note of the Re-replication statistic.
For the Re-replication statistic, a value of zero is normal (no re-replication occurred) and any value other
than zero means one of the following occurred:
•
•
•
The replication factor was changed to a higher number by the user (a lower number does not change
what is shown on the page)
Drive failure
Entire ContentServer failure
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid
components
SystemManager provides details on all Harmonic MediaGrid components.
Viewing properties for a single cluster
You can view properties for a single cluster.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the required cluster to access the Properties
page. The following figure shows a sample Cluster Properties page.
Figure 12-2: Harmonic MediaGrid Cluster Properties
418
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Properties for a single cluster
You can view the following properties in the general information section at the top of the page.
Name
Displays the assigned name for the cluster. Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid
Installation Guide for a discussion about naming conventions to follow.
#ContentDirectors
Displays the number of ContentDirectors assigned to the cluster.
#Volumes
Displays the number of volumes present in the cluster.
#Groups
Displays the number of groups present in the cluster.
#ContentServers
Displays the number if the ContentServers present in the cluster.
Total Disk Space
Displays the Total Disk Space across the cluster.
Free Space
Displays the free disk space available across the cluster and as a percentage of
Total Disk Space.
•
Bandwidth Utilization
◦
◦
◦
Cluster Bandwidth
Utilization
Reads (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes
per second for network [deleted disk] “read” requests sent to the
ContentServers in the cluster. This is the total network traffic measured
by all the ContentServers in the cluster.
Writes (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes
per second for network [deleted disk] “write” requests received by the
ContentServers in the cluster. This is the total network traffic measured
by all the ContentServers in the cluster.
Re-replications (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in
megabytes per second for re-replication requests received by the
ContentServers in the cluster. This is the total network traffic measured
by all the ContentServers in the cluster. .
Displays the percentage of average bandwidth usage per ContentServers in the
cluster. This is calculated by combining the total read, write, and re-replication
network traffic seen by all the ContentServers in the cluster, then divided by the
total number of ContentServers in the cluster.
NOTE: The following buttons are enabled if at least one
ContentDirector in the cluster is up.
Client Statistics
Click View Client Statistics to display a list of clients connected to the cluster
and the read and write transfer rates per client.
Grid Applications
Click View Grid Applications to view a Grid Application system view summary
and detailed information on an application by application basis.
Slice Size
Specification
Click View/Edit Slice Size Config to access the “sliceSizeSpec” file associated
with the cluster.
ContentServer
Configuration
Click View/Edit ContentServer Config to access the ContentServer
configuration file associated with the cluster.
ContentServer
Click View/Edit Balancer Scheduling to access the Balancer Scheduling
Balancer Scheduling page, which allows you to enable and configure scheduled balancing for a
cluster.
419
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
ContentBridge
Configuration
Displays each ContentBridge and its corresponding DNS Name, and IP
Addresses. Click View/Edit ContentBridge Config to access the configuration
file for the selected ContentBridge.
Sending E-mail
of Log files
Configuration
Click View/Edit Log Forwarding Options to open the Edit “Log Forwarding
Configuration” file... page which allows you to enable and configure log
forwarding for a selected ContentDirector.
Shutdown cluster
Click Shutdown all ContentDirectors to begin shutting down all the
ContentDirectors in the cluster. Once all ContentDirectors in the cluster are shut
down, the Shutdown all ContentBridges in cluster button, will be activated.
Once all ContentBridges are shut down, the Shutdown all ContentServers
button will be activated.
In the cluster section you can view information pertaining to elements within the
cluster.
For ContentDirectors, you can view the following.
Name (hyperlink)
Displays the assigned name for each ContentDirector in the cluster. Click the
hyperlink to access the ContentDirector Properties for the particular unit.
IP Address1
Displays one of the Director’s IP address.
IP Address2
Displays one of the Director’s IP address.
Network Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, authentication status, and security
access level, including “Connected,” “Not Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,”
“Starting Upgrade”; “Authenticated”, “Not Authenticated”; “Administrator”.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space in each ContentDirector.
Free Space(%)
Displays the free disk space available for each ContentDirector and as a
percentage of Total Disk Space.
Interface Out (MB/s)
Displays the rate at which data is transmitted and aggregated over all the
network interface cards on the device.
Interface In (MB/s)
Displays the rate at which data is received and aggregated over all the network
interface cards on the device.
CPU Load (over 5
mins)
Displays the system load average for the past 5 minutes for the unit.
Mem Free(%)
Displays the percentage of total free memory for the unit.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a unit in a rack. Click
the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select a ContentDirector.
Wink on/off (buttons) Click to change the wink status of all the selected units.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the ContentDirectors.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all ContentDirectors.
For ContentServers/ContentStores, you can view the following.
420
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Name
Displays the name assigned to the device. Note that for the ContentServer 3000
or 4000 series, ContentServer names begin with S and ContentStore names
begin with J. Click on the hyperlink to access the Properties page for each
device
IP Address1
Displays one of the Director’s IP address.
IP Address2
Displays one of the Director’s IP address.
Network Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” “Starting Upgrade” .
Total Disk Space
Displays the Total Disk Space for each ContentServer.
Free Space(%)
Displays the free disk space available in the ContentServer and as a
percentage of Total Disk Space in each ContentServer.
Reads (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read” requests
sent to the ContentServer.
Writes (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write” requests
received by the ContentServer.
Re-replications (MB/
s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication requests
received by the ContentServer.
Interface Out (MB/s)
Displays the rate at which data is transmitted and aggregated over all the
network interface cards on the device.
Interface In (MB/s)
Displays the rate at which data is received and aggregated over all the network
interface cards on the device.
CPU Load (over 5
mins)
Displays the system load average for the past 5 minutes for the unit.
Mem Free(%)
Displays the percentage of total free memory for the unit.
Vol/Grp/CS ID
Displays the volume number to which the ContentServer is assigned, the group
number to which the ContentServer is assigned and the ID number assigned to
the ContentServer.
CS Status
Displays the ContentServer’s current status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” “Starting Upgrade,” “ReadOnly,” “Evacuating,”
or “Evacuated.”
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a unit in a rack. Click
the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select a ContentServer.
Shut down (button)
Click to shut down a selected ContentServer or group of ContentServers. Note
that this does not completely power down the ContentServer.
Wink on/off (buttons) Click to change the wink status of all the selected units.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the ContentServers.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all ContentServers.
For ContentBridges, you can view the following.
421
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Name (hyperlink)
Displays the name assigned to the unit. Click on the hyperlink to access the
ContentBridge Properties page.
DNS Name
The DNS name of the ContentBridge.
IP Address1
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
IP Address2
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
Interface Out (MB/s)
Displays the rate at which data is received and aggregated over all the network
interface cards on the device.
Interface In (MB/s)
Displays the rate at which data is received and aggregated over all the network
interface cards on the device.
CPU Load (over 5
mins)
Displays the system load average for the past 5 minutes for the unit.
Mem Free(%)
Displays the percentage of total free memory for the unit.
Network Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” “Starting Upgrade,” etc.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a unit in a rack. Click
the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select a ContentBridge.
Wink on (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected units to On.
Wink off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected units to Off.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the ContentBridges.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all ContentBridges.
For Volumes, you can view the following.
Volume ID
Displays a numeric identifier for the volume in the cluster.
Filesystem
Displays the File System associated with the volume
#CS Groups
Displays the number of ContentServer groups in the volume.
#ContentServers
Displays the number of ContentServers across the volume.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space in TB across the volume.
Free Space(%)
Displays the percentage of disk storage available across the volume.
Reads (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read” requests
sent to the ContentServer.
Writes (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write” requests
received by the ContentServer.
Re-replications (MB/
s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication requests
received by the ContentServer.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the volume. When Wink is On,
front and back panel LEDs flash on all units within the volume allowing you
422
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
to quickly identify a volume in a rack. Click the Wink buttons at the end of the
section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select a volume.
Create Volume
(button)
Click to create a volume. If a volume already exists, this button will be disabled.
Delete Volume
(button)
Click to delete a volume.
Wink on (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the units in the selected volume to On.
Wink off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the units in the selected unit to Off.
Select All (button)
Click to select the volume.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect the volume.
For Groups, you can view the following.
Group ID
Displays a numeric identifier for the group within the cluster.
Volume ID
Displays a numeric identifier for the volume associated with the group.
#ContentServers
Displays the number of ContentServers across the group.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space across the group.
Free Space(%)
Displays the free disk space available across the group.
Reads (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read” requests
sent to the ContentServer.
Writes (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write” requests
received by the ContentServer.
Re-replications (MB/
s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication requests
received by the ContentServer.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled for the group. When Wink is On,
front and back panel LEDs flash on all units within the group allowing you
to quickly identify a group in a rack. Click the Wink buttons at the end of the
section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click the Select check box to select a group.
Create Group
(button)
Click to create a group. If a volume already exists, this button will be disabled.
Delete Group
(button)
Click to delete a group.
Shut Down Group
(button)
Click to shut down the selected group of ContentServers. Note that this does
not completely power down the ContentServers. .
Wink on/off (buttons) Click to change the wink status of all the units in the selected group.
Select All (button)
Click to select all groups.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all groups.
423
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Related information
Viewing statistics for clients in Clusters on page 449
Editing the slice size configuration file on page 380
Editing the ContentServer configuration file on page 381
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing on page 391
Editing the ContentBridge configuration file on page 386
Enabling and configuring log forwarding on page 392
Creating or deleting a volume on page 370
About re-replication (for ContentServer 1000 and 2000 Series only) on page 418
Creating or deleting groups on page 370
Powering down a single ContentServer 1000 series or 2000 series
Powering down a Harmonic MediaGrid system
Viewing properties for a single volume
You can view properties for a single volume
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters section, click the Name hyperlink of the cluster which contains the required volume.
3. Scroll down the page to the Volumes section and click the name hyperlink for the required volume ID
to access the Properties page. The following figure shows a sample Volume Properties page.
Figure 12-3: Volume Properties
424
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Properties for a single volume
The Volume Properties page includes detailed information about a volume.
Volume ID
Displays a numeric identifier for the volume within the cluster.
Cluster
Displays the cluster to which the volume is assigned.
Number of Groups
Displays the number of groups assigned to the volume.
Number of
ContentServers
Displays the number of ContentServers associated with the volume.
FileSystem
Displays the File System associated with the volume. This section allows you to
create a file system, change permissions to an existing file system, or delete a
file system.
Default FileSystem
Replication Factor
Displays the default replication factor for all File Systems within the volume. The
default replication factor is three. .
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space in TB across the volume.
Free Space
Displays the percentage of free disk space available across the volume.
•
Aggregate Network Bandwidth
◦
◦
◦
Reads (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per
second for drive requests sent to the ContentServers in the volume.
Writes (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per
second for drive requests received by the ContentServers in the volume.
Re-replications (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in
megabytes per second for re-replication requests received by the
ContentServers in the volume.
Volumes
In the Volume section you can view information pertaining to elements associated with the volume.
For File Systems, you can view the following properties.
Name
Displays the name of the File System.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space available for the File System.
Free Space(%)
Displays the free disk space available for the File System.
Current Default
Replication Factor
Displays the currently configured default File System replication factor.
Groups
For Groups, you can view the following properties.
Group ID
Displays a numeric identifier for the group within the volume.
#ContentServers
Displays the number of ContentServers across the group.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space across the group.
Free Space(%)
Displays the free disk space available across the group.
425
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Reads (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read” requests
sent to the group.
Writes (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write” requests
received by the group.
Re-replications (MB/
s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication requests
received by the group.
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled for the group. When Wink is On,
front and back panel LEDs flash on all units within the group allowing you
to quickly identify a group in a rack. Click the Wink buttons at the end of the
section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Check the Select check box to select a group.
Create Group
(button)
Click to create a new group in this volume.
Delete Group
(button)
Click to delete the selected group(s).
Add Group to
Volume... (button)
Click to attach the selected group(s) to this volume. If the selected group is
already attached to a volume, a message will appear indicating that you must
either create a new group, or free the selected group from its volume.
Remove Group from
Volume (button)
Click to remove the selected group(s) from the volume.
Delete Group
(button)
Click to delete the selected group(s).
Wink on/off (buttons) Click to change the wink status of all the units in the group.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the groups in the volume.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all groups.
ContentServer
For ContentServers you can view the following properties.
Name
Displays the assigned name for each device. Note that for the ContentServer
3000 or 4000 series, ContentServer names begin with S and ContentStore
names begin with J. Click on the hyperlink to access the Properties page for the
unit.
IP Address 1
Displays one of the Server’s IP addresses.
IP Address 2
Displays one of the Server’s IP addresses.
Network Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” “Starting Upgrade” etc.
Total Disk Space
Displays the Total Disk Space for each ContentServer.
Free Space(%)
Displays the free disk space available in the ContentServer and as a
percentage of Total Disk Space in each ContentServer.
Reads (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read” requests
sent to the ContentServer.
426
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Writes (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write” requests
received by the ContentServer.
Re-replications (MB/
s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication requests
received by the ContentServer.
Group
Displays the group number to which the ContentServer is assigned.
CS ID
Displays the ID number assigned to the ContentServer.
CS Status
Displays the ContentServer’s current status, such as “No Cluster,” “Initializing,”
“OK,” “Degraded,” “Storage Failure,” “ReadOnly,” “Evacuating,” or “Evacuated.”
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a unit in a rack. Click
the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Wink on/off (buttons) Click to change the wink status of all the ContentServers in the group.
Select all (button)
Click to select all the ContentServers in the volume.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all ContentServers.
Related information
Creating or deleting file systems from a volume on page 374
Setting or changing file system permissions on page 374
Setting replication factors for file systems on page 375
About re-replication (for ContentServer 1000 and 2000 Series only) on page 418
About ContentServer and Cluster bandwidth measurements on page 375
Viewing properties for a single group
You can view properties for a single Harmonic MediaGrid group.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches page.
2. In the Clusters section, click the Name hyperlink of the cluster which contains the required group.
3. Scroll down the page to the Groups section and click the name hyperlink for the required Group ID to
access the Properties page. The following figure shows a sample Group Properties page.
427
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Figure 12-4: Group Properties
Properties for a single group
The Group Properties page includes detailed information about a group.
Group ID
Displays a numeric identifier for the group within the volume.
Volume ID
Displays a numeric identifier for the Volume associated with the group.
Cluster
Displays the cluster to which this group belongs.
Number of
ContentServers
Displays the number of ContentServers across the group.
Total Disk Space
Displays the total disk space across the group.
Free Disk Space
Displays the percentage of free disk space available across the group.
•
Aggregate Network Bandwidth:
◦
◦
◦
Reads (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per
second for drive requests sent to the ContentServers in the group.
Writes (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per
second for drive requests received by the ContentServers in the group.
Re-replications (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in
megabytes per second for re-replication requests received by the
ContentServers in the group. .
ContentServers
In the ContentServers section you can view information pertaining to ContentServers within the group as
follows.
Name
Displays the assigned name for each device. Note that for the ContentServer
3000 or 4000 series, ContentServer names begin with S and ContentStore
428
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
names begin with J. Click on the hyperlink to access the Properties page for the
unit.
IP Address 1
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
IP Address 2
Displays one of the Server’s IP address.
Network Status
Displays the unit’s current network status, such as “Connected,” “Not
Responding,” “Error,” “Deleted,” “Starting Upgrade” etc.
Total Disk Space
Displays the Total Disk Space for each ContentServer.
Free Space(%)
Displays the free disk space available in the ContentServer and as a
percentage of Total Disk Space in each ContentServer.
Reads (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read” requests
sent to the ContentServer. .
Writes (MB/s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write” requests
received by the ContentServer..
Re-replications (MB/
s)
Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication requests
received by the ContentServer.
CS ID
Displays the ID number assigned to the ContentServer.
CS Status
Displays the ContentServer’s current status, such as “No Cluster,” “Initializing,”
“OK,” “Degraded,” “Storage Failure,” “ReadOnly,” “Evacuating,” or “Evacuated.”
Wink Status
Shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the unit. When Wink is On, front
and back panel LEDs flash allowing you to quickly identify a ContentServer in a
group. Click the Wink buttons at the end of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Add Servers to this
Group (button)
click to add a ContentServer to this Group. .
Remove Selected
Servers (button)
click to remove a ContentServer from this Group. .
Shut Down Selected
Servers (button)
click to shut down one or more selected ContentServers from this Group. Note
that this does not completely power down the ContentServer. .
Wink on/off (buttons) Click to change the wink status of all the ContentServers in the group.
Shut Down All
Servers (button)
click to shut down all ContentServers in this Group. Note that this does not
completely power down the ContentServer.
Select All (button)
Click to select all the ContentServers in the group.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all ContentServers in the group.
Related information
About re-replication (for ContentServer 1000 and 2000 Series only) on page 418
About ContentServer and Cluster bandwidth measurements on page 375
Adding or removing ContentServers from a group on page 371
Powering down a single ContentServer 1000 series or 2000 series
Powering down a single ContentServer 3000 or 4000 series
Powering down a Harmonic MediaGrid system
429
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Viewing properties for a ContentServer 1000 and 2000 series
You can view properties for an individual ContentServer 1000 or 2000 series.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required server to
access the Properties page. The following figure shows a portion of a ContentServer Properties
page.
Properties for a ContentServer 1000 and 2000 series
You can view properties for a single ContentServer 1000 or 2000 series.
In the General Information section, you can view the following.
Name
Displays the assigned name for the unit. Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid
Installation Guide for a discussion about naming conventions to follow.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds.
ContentServer ID
Displays the ID number assigned to the ContentServer.
Serial Number
Displays the manufacturer’s serial number assigned to the unit.
Cluster
Displays the Cluster name to which the unit is assigned.
Volume
Displays the volume to which the unit is assigned.
Group
Displays the group to which the ContentServer is assigned.
Interface Information •
displays the
•
following
•
•
Interface: Displays the available interfaces for the unit.
IP Address Displays the IP address assigned to each unit’s interface.
MAC Address Displays the unique hardware number for each unit’s
interface.
MTU Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater than
1500 bytes indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
Interface Statistics,
Transfer Rate
Shows the receive and transmit rate for each interface.
Interface Counters
(since agent boot)
Shows the raw interface counters since the SNMP agent was last booted.
Aggregate Network
Bandwidth displays
the following
•
•
•
Reads (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per
second for drive “read” requests received by the ContentServer.
Writes (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per
second for drive “write” requests received by the ContentServer.
Re-replications (MB/s): Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes
per second for re-replication requests received by the ContentServer.
Process Monitoring
Displays the name and state of the process running on the ContentServer.
Hardware Model
Displays the unit’s model number.
Firmware Version
Displays the version of firmware that resides in the unit’s memory.
430
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Status
Displays the current network status for the selected unit. This field is used
primarily for diagnostic troubleshooting.
Status Current At
Displays the most recent date and time that the page was refreshed. Note
that the page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds, unless configured
otherwise.
Total Disk Space
Displays the Total Disk Space available on the unit.
Free Disk Space
Displays the amount of free disk space available on the unit.
Number of Disks
Displays the total number of disk drives available in the ContentServer.
Number of Slots
Displays the total number of disk drive slots available in the ContentServer.
CPU Load Average
Displays the system load averages for the past 1, 5, and 15 minutes on the unit.
Memory Utilization
Displays the total real memory, the available real memory, and the percentage
of total free memory for the unit.
ContentServer
Description
Displays a scrollable multi-line description of the unit. This field is useful for
entering data that clarifies the specific unit’s role in the Harmonic MediaGrid.
Click Change Desc to edit the description.
Last Message
Displays the last message (of any type) associated with the unit.
Wink State
Displays the wink state of the unit’s light bar, either On or Off. To change the
Wink state, click the Wink button on this page.
In the Environment section, you can view the following.
Power Supply
Describes the state of the indicated power supply.
•
•
•
NORMAL = the power supply is OK
ABSENT = the power supply is not delivering power, or is not plugged in.
FAILED = the power supply has a hardware fault and is broken.
NOTE: This field does not appear for the ContentServer
1042-A or ContentServer 1042-B.
3.3V Line through
12.0V Line
Displays the combined voltages present on the power supply’s outputs. The
values are displayed in volts. The valid range is also displayed. Note that this
range is not user configurable.
CPU Temperature
Displays the ambient temperature of air entering the ContentServer. The value
is always displayed in degrees centigrade. The valid range is also displayed.
Note that this range is not user configurable.
Motherboard
Temperature
Displays the temperature of the air above the ContentServer’s motherboard.
The value is always displayed in degrees centigrade. The valid range is also
displayed. Note that this range is not user configurable.
Fan 1 through Fan 8
Displays the speed (in RPM) of each of the ContentServer’s fans. The valid
range is also displayed. Note that this range is not user configurable.
Wink on/off (button)
Click the Wink button to change the wink state of the ContentServer light bar.
Reboot (button)
Click to restart the ContentServer without removing the power supply. .
Shutdown (button)
Click to shut down the ContentServer. Note that this does not completely power
down the ContentServer.
431
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
In the Drive Information section, you can view the following.
Slot
Displays the slot ID, which is the numeric identifier that represents the physical
position for each disk drive in the ContentServer.
Drive Inserted
Displays whether a drive is present in a slot, either Yes, or No.
Serial #
Displays the manufacturer’s serial number for each disk drive in the
ContentServer.
Model
Displays the manufacturer’s model number for each disk drive.
FwRev
Displays the firmware level within this drive of a ContentServer. This information
is used primarily for debugging purposes.
Total Space
Displays the total space available for each drive in the ContentServer.
Total Used
Displays the total disk space in use for each disk drive in the ContentServer
Drive Status
Displays the current operational status for each disk drive in the ContentServer.
SMART Errors
Displays the number of SMART errors associated with each disk drive.
Total Slice
Displays the total number of slices in each disk drive.
Bad Slices
Displays the number of bad slices for each drive in a ContentServer.
NOTE: When the data integrity of a slice is compromised, it
is considered a “bad slice”. This could be due to corruption in
data content, missing data, or if the slice size is different from
expected value.In the unlikely event that the number of bad
slices is greater than 15 per SystemManager polling loop, or
greater than 128 per disk drive, an alarm will be generated.
Select all (button)
Click to select that disk drive.
Clear (button)
Click to clear all selections.
The Events section for ContentDirectors, ContentServers, and ContentBridges
displays the following information when an alarm event occurs:
Level
Displays the assigned severity level for an alarm event associated with a unit.
Time
Displays the date and time when the alarm event occurred.
Event
Displays the event which triggered the alarm on the unit.
Info
Provides information on each event.
Clear? (button)
Displays when the unit has an alarm condition. Resolve the cause of the alarm
condition and then click Clear to clear the alarm within the unit.
Delete (button)
Display when the unit has an alarm condition. Click to delete the event from the
list and clear that event’s Alarm icon.
Related information
Powering down a Harmonic MediaGrid system
Powering down a single ContentServer 1000 series or 2000 series
Powering down a single ContentServer 3000 or 4000 series
About ContentServer and Cluster bandwidth measurements on page 375
432
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
About re-replication (for ContentServer 1000 and 2000 Series only) on page 418
Viewing properties for a single ContentServer 3000 or 4000 series
You can view properties for a ContentServer 3000 or 4000.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer to access the Properties page. The following figure shows a portion of a
ContentServer Properties page.
Figure 12-5: ContentServer 3000 Properties
Properties for a ContentServer 3000 or 4000 series
You can view properties for a single ContentServer 3000 or 4000 series.
Associated IP
address
Displays the IP addresses of the slice server process in an active state for this
ContentServer.
Network Status
Shows the connection status of the ContentServer. Possible states include:
Connected and Not Connected.
CS Status
Displays the Server’s current status within the cluster, including “No Cluster,”
“Initializing,” “OK,” “Degraded,” “Storage Failure,” “ReadOnly,” “Evacuating,” or
“Evacuated.”
Status current at
Shows the day/time that applies to the status.
Model
Displays the manufacturer’s model number for this unit.
433
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Chassis
Identification
ESN: The ESN (Enclosure Serial Number) applies to the ContentServer chassis
and can be found on the rear panel of the chassis.
Cluster Info
•
•
•
•
Disk Space
Displays total disk space on the ContentServer.
Free Space
Displays percentage of free space on the ContentServer.
Memory Utilization
Displays the memory use for the unit.
Bandwidth
•
•
Cluster Name: Displays the Cluster name to which the unit is assigned.
SSID: Displays the numeric identifier for this ContentServer
Volume Id: Displays a numeric identifier for the group within the volume
Group Id: Displays a numeric identifier for the group within the volume
Reads (MB/s): Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive
“read” requests sent to the ContentServer..
Writes (MB/s): Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive
“write” requests received by the ContentServer.
Wink State
Displays the Wink state of the unit.
Shelf Evacuation
If the ContentServer is in the process of shelf evacuation or if writes have been
disabled on the ContentServer, this section appears.
•
•
Write Enable: Click to enable writes on the ContentServer.
Cancel Evacuation: Click to cancel the shelf evacuation process.
Wink On/Off (button) Click to change the wink state of the unit’s light bar.
In the ContentServer Controllers section, the following are shown for each
controller:
NOTE: When facing the rear panel of the ContentServer,
Controller 0 is on the left-hand side and Controller 1 is on the
right.
Failback (button)
Click to balance slice server processes across controllers.
Shutdown All
Enclosures (button)
Click to shutdown both controllers on the ContentServer. Note that this also
shuts down all managed ContentStores or ContentServers.
Name
Displays the factory default name for the controller.
Status
Displays the connection status for the controller.
Model
Displays the model number for the controller.
Serial
Displays the serial number for the controller
Firmware Version
Displays the version of firmware installed on the controller.
BMC IP
IP address of the BMC for this controller. The BMC is used by Harmonic
technical support for troubleshooting purposes only.
NOTE: The BMC IP address uses the NIC 0 connector.
Management IP
Address(es)
Displays the IP addresses that correspond to the indicated controller.
434
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Managed
ContentServers and
ContentStores
Displays a link to the ContentServer and ContentStore(s) being managed by
this controller.
Actions
•
•
NOTE: If this field shows many more ContentStores or
ContentServers being managed by one controller than the other,
it may indicate that the system needs to be balanced. Refer to
“Balancing the ContentServer 3000 or 4000 Controllers.”
Shutdown (button): Click to power down the controller.
Reboot (button): Click to reboot the controller.
In the RAID Sets section:
Figure 12-6: ContentServer 3000 Properties—RAID Sets
Name
Displays the name of the RAID set.
GUID
Displays the numeric identifier for the RAID set. Click this link to open the RAID
Utilities page this RAID set.
Type
Displays the RAID configuration for the corresponding RAID set.
Status
Displays the status of the RAID set. The status may include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Normal: The RAID set is usable and all drives are available.
Compromised: The RAID set is usable but one or two of the parity drives
may be missing or not responding.
Not Viable: The RAID set is not usable due to missing drives or drives not
responding.
Online: The RAID set is online and you may access the drives.
Offline. The RAID set is offline and you cannot access the drives.
Select
Click to select a RAID set.
Set Offline (button)
Click to take the selected RAID set offline, in which case the data on the drives
will not be accessible.
Set Online (button)
Click to move the selected RAID set online, in which case the data on the drives
will be accessible.
Destroy (button)
Click to delete a selected RAID set. Before destroying a RAID set, you must first
take the RAID set offline by clicking Set Offline.
NOTE: Clicking Destroy will destroy all data in a RAID set.
Select All
Click to select all RAID sets.
Clear
Click to clear the selections.
435
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
In the Drives section, you can view the following.
Slot
Displays the ContentServer slot number for each drive.
GUID
Displays the numeric identifier for the disk drive. Click this link to open the Drive
Properties page for this drive.
Model
Displays the drive model number.
Fw Version
Displays the drive firmware.
Status
Displays the drive status. The status may indicate one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alive: The drive is available.
Dead: The drive is not responding.
Missing: The drive is not part of the system.
Unavailable: The drive is not currently available.
Formatting: The drive is being formatted.
Repairing: The drive is being repaired.
Unknown: SystemManager cannot identify the drive state.
Alive, Hot Spare: The drive is available and assigned as a Hot Spare.
RAID set
Displays the GUID for the associated RAID set. Click this link to open the RAID
Utilities page for the associated RAID set. If the drive is not assigned to a RAID
set, this column will display, “Unraided.”
Select
Click to select a drive.
Create RAID Set
Click to open the Create RAID Set page where you can manually create a RAID
set.
Auto Create RAID
Set
Click to open the Auto Create RAID set page and use the Auto Create utility to
create a RAID set.
Wink On
Click to wink the selected drive(s).
Wink Off
Click to stop winking the selected drive(s).
Fail Drives
Click to remove the selected drive(s) from the RAID set.
Unfail Drives
Click to make the selected drive(s) available to be used in a RAID set.
Select All
Click to select all drives.
Clear
Click to clear the selections.
In the Environment section you can view environmental details for each
controller.
Back Fan 1-3 and
Front Fan 1-3
Displays the speed (in RPM) of each of the controller’s fans.
Back Temp UmemTemp2
Display the temperature of the air at different locations above the controller
motherboard.
Temperature Status
CPU1-2: Displays the status of the of the two CPUs’ temperatures:
•
•
•
NORMAL: Normal temperature
ABOVE_NORM: Above normal temperature.
HOT: Temperature is critically hot
436
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
•
OVERHEATED: CPU is overheated.
Power Supply Status PS Status 1-2: Displays the status of the of the two power supplies.
NOTE: The status may include any combination of the following
states other than OK.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OK: Power status is OK.
FAILED: Power has failed.
OVERVOLT: Over-voltage.
UNDERVOLT: Under-voltage.
OVERCURR: Over-current.
INPUTERR: Under-current.
CONFIGERR: Configuration error.
Battery
: Displays the percentage of available charge for each of the batteries on the
ChargeUmemCharge NVRAM cared.
0-2
VoltagesCPU1Vcore
through UmemVolt 2: Displays the voltages of the various components on the
controller. The values are displayed in volts.
Related information
About ContentServer and Cluster bandwidth measurements on page 375
Shelf evacuation for a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system
Balancing the ContentServer 3000 or 4000 controllers
Viewing RAID set information on page 150
Supported RAID configurations on page 400
Creating a RAID set on page 127
Creating a RAID set with Auto Create on page 403
Viewing drive properties on page 147
Viewing properties for a ContentStore 3160 or 4240
You can view properties for a ContentStore 3160 or 4240.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentStore to access the Properties page. The following figure shows a portion of a ContentStore
Properties page.
437
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Figure 12-7: ContentStore Properties
Properties for a ContentStore 3160 or 4240 series
You can view properties for a single ContentStore 3160 or 4240 series.
Associated IP
address
Displays the IP addresses of the slice server process in an active state for the
ContentServer controlling this ContentStore.
Network Status
Shows the connection status of the ContentStore.
CS Status
Displays the Server’s current status within the cluster, including “No Cluster,”
“Initializing,” “OK,” “Degraded,” “Storage Failure,” “ReadOnly,” “Evacuating,” or
“Evacuated.”
Status at time
Shows the day/time that applies to the status.
Model
Displays the manufacturer’s model number for this unit.
Chassis
Identification
ESN: The ESN (Enclosure Serial Number) applies to the ContentStore chassis
and can be found on the rear panel of the chassis.
Cluster Info
•
•
•
•
Wink State
Displays the Wink state of the unit.
Cluster Name: Displays the Cluster name to which the unit is assigned.
SSID: Displays the numeric identifier for this ContentStore
Volume Id: Displays a numeric identifier for the group within the volume
Group Id: Displays a numeric identifier for the group within the volume
Wink On/Off (button) Click to change the wink state of the unit’s light bar.
Associated
ContentServer
Displays the name of the ContentServer controlling this ContentStore. Click the
link to open the Properties page for the associated ContentServer.
Active ContentServer Displays the name of the active ContentServer controller for this ContentStore.
Controller
Disk Space
Displays total disk space on the ContentStore in Terabytes.
Free Space
Displays percentage of free space on the ContentStore.
Memory Utilization
Displays the memory use for the unit.
438
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Bandwidth
•
•
Shelf Evacuation
Reads (MB/s): Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive
“read” requests sent to the ContentStore.
Writes (MB/s): Displays bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive
“write” requests received by the ContentStore.
If the ContentStore is in the process of shelf evacuation or if writes have been
disabled on the ContentStore, this section appears.
•
•
Write Enable: Click to enable writes on the ContentStore.
Cancel Evacuation: Click to cancel the shelf evacuation process.
Shutdown (button)
Click to shut down the ContentStore.
Failback (button)
Click to balance slice server processes across controllers.
In the ContentStore Controllers section:
Serial
The serial number for each ContentStore controller.
World Wide Number
(WWN) (hex)
The world wide identification number for each ContentStore controller.
Name
Displays the name of the RAID set.
GUID
Displays the numeric identifier for the RAID set. Click this link to open the RAID
Utilities page this RAID set.
Type
Displays the RAID configuration for the corresponding RAID set.
Status
Displays the status of the RAID set. The status may include the following:
In the RAID Sets section, you can view the following.
•
•
•
•
•
Normal: The RAID set is usable and all drives are available.
Compromised: The RAID set is usable but one or two of the parity drives
may be missing or not responding.
Not Viable: The RAID set is not usable due to missing drives or drives not
responding.
Online: The RAID set is online and you may access the drives.
Offline. The RAID set is offline and you cannot access the drives.
Select
Click to select a RAID set.
Set Offline (button)
Click to take the selected RAID set offline, in which case the data on the drives
will not be accessible.
Set Online (button)
Click to move the selected RAID set online, in which case the data on the drives
will be accessible.
Destroy (button)
Click to delete a selected RAID set. Before destroying a RAID set, you must first
take the RAID set offline by clicking Set Offline.
CAUTION: Clicking Destroy will destroy all data in a RAID set.
Select All
Click to select all RAID sets.
Clear
Click to clear the selections.
In the Drives section, you can view the following.
439
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Slot
Displays the ContentStore slot number for each drive.
GUID
Displays the numeric identifier for the disk drive. Click this link to open the Drive
Properties page for this drive.
Model
Displays the drive model number.
Fw Version
Displays the drive firmware.
Status
Displays the drive status. The status may indicate one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alive: The drive is available.
Dead: The drive is not responding.
Missing: The drive is not part of the system.
Unavailable: The drive is not currently available.
Formatting: The drive is being formatted.
Repairing: The drive is being repaired.
Unknown: SystemManager cannot identify the drive state.
Alive, Hot Spare: The drive is available and assigned as a Hot Spare.
RAID set
Displays the GUID for the associated RAID set. Click this link to open the RAID
Utilities page for the associated RAID set.
Select
Click to select a drive.
Create RAID Set
Click to open the Create RAID Set page where you can manually create a RAID
set.
Auto Create RAID
Set
Click to open the Auto Create RAID set page and use the Auto Create utility to
create a RAID set. .
Wink On
Click to wink the selected drive(s).
Wink Off
Click to stop winking the selected drive(s).
Fail Drives
Click to remove the selected drive(s) from the RAID set.
Unfail Drives
Click to make the selected drive(s) available to be used in a RAID set.
Select All
Click to select all drives.
Clear
Click to clear the selections.
In the Environment section, you can view the following.
Fans
Displays the speed (in RPM) of each of the ContentStore controller’s fans.
Temperatures
Display the temperature of the air above the ContentStore controller
motherboard.
Voltages
Displays the voltages of the various components on the controller. The values
are displayed in volts.
Related information
About ContentServer and Cluster bandwidth measurements on page 375
Shelf evacuation for a Harmonic MediaGrid RAID system
Powering down a single ContentStore
Balancing the ContentServer 3000 or 4000 controllers
440
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Viewing RAID set information on page 150
Supported RAID configurations on page 400
Viewing drive properties on page 147
Creating a RAID set with Auto Create on page 403
Creating a RAID set on page 127
Viewing properties for ContentStores 5840/5840A
The ContentStore 5840/5840A appears as two virtual devices in SystemManager; each physical drawer is
represented by a separate entry on the Servers & Switches page, and has its own Properties page.
1. From the Configuration tab, click the Servers & Switches icon in the left-hand column to access the
Servers & Switches page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section:
•
•
Click the Name hyperlink for the first entry of the ContentStore 5840/5840A to access the
Properties page for Drawer 1.
Click the Name hyperlink for the second entry of the ContentStore 5840/5840A to access the
Properties page for Drawer 2.
For each drawer, the Properties page displays the same details as described in “Viewing
Properties for ContentStores 3160 or 4240.”
NOTE: The Shutdown and Failback buttons on the Properties page apply only to
the virtual device rather than the entire physical device.
Related information
Viewing properties for a ContentStore 3160 or 4240 on page 437
Powering down a single ContentStore
Balancing the ContentServer 3000 or 4000 controllers
Viewing properties for a ContentDirector
You can view properties for a single ContentDirector:
1. From the Configuration tab, click the Servers & Switches icon in the left-hand column to access the
Servers & Switches page.
2. In the ContentDirectors section, click the Name hyperlink for the required unit to access the
Properties page as shown in the following figure.
441
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Figure 12-8: ContentDirector Properties (Upper Section)
Properties for a ContentDirector
You can view properties for a single ContentDirector.
Name
Displays the assigned name for the unit. Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid
Installation Guide for a discussion about naming conventions to follow.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds.
Model Number
Displays the Harmonic model number for the unit.
Serial Number
Displays the manufacturer’s serial number assigned to the unit.
Cluster Name
Displays the cluster name to which the unit is assigned.
Firmware Version
Displays the version of firmware that resides in the unit’s memory.
•
Interface Information
◦
Interface Displays the available interfaces for the unit.
◦
◦
NOTE: If a VLAN port is disconnected, the associated IP
address will transfer to the remaining interface, which will
be displayed in the following format: eth 0:0.
IP Address: Displays the IP address assigned to each unit’s interface.
MAC Address: Displays the unique hardware number for each unit’s
interface.
MTU: Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater
than 1500 bytes indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
◦
442
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Interface Statistics,
Transfer Rate
Shows the receive and transmit rate for each interface.
Interface Counters
(since agent boot)
Shows the raw interface counters for each interface since the SNMP agent was
last booted.
•
Process Monitoring
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
•
Process: Displays the name of the process running on the
ContentDirector.
State: Displays the current state of the process running on the
ContentDirector. The states are: Running, Stopped, or N.A (Not
Applicable).
DHCP Failover Identifies the failover pool.
DHCP Name Displays the name of the failover pool.
DHCP State Displays the state of the DHCP server in the first or second
pool of addresses. The states are:
◦ Partner Down
◦ Normal
◦ Communications Interrupted
◦ Resolution Interrupted
◦ Potential Conflict
◦ Recover
◦ Recover Done
◦ Shutdown
◦ Paused
◦ Startup
◦ Recover Wait
◦ DHCP Relationship Displays the relationship of the server to the first
or second pool of addresses. Primary indicates that the DHCP server
is configured to provide primary service to the set of DHCP clients for
a particular set of subnet address pools. Secondary indicates that the
DHCP server is configured to act as backup to the primary server for a
particular set of subnet address pools.
Local Disk Storage
◦
◦
◦
◦
◦
FS (Partition) Name: The name of the local file system.
Total Space (KB): The total local storage space.
Used Space (KB): The amount of local storage space used.
Available Space (KB): The amount of local space available.
Used %: The percentage of local storage space used.
Status
Displays the current network status for the selected unit. This field is used
primarily for diagnostic troubleshooting.
Status Current At
Displays the most recent date and time that the page was refreshed. Note
that the page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds, unless configured
otherwise.
443
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Checkpoint History
(ContentDirectors
only)
Displays previous Checkpoint information and details for the next scheduled
Checkpoint.
Current Checkpoint
Schedule
(ContentDirectors
only)
Displays the configured Checkpoint schedule, if Checkpoint is enabled. Click
Change Checkpoint Schedule to configure a new schedule.
Total Disk Space
Displays the Total Disk Space available on the unit.
Free Disk Space
Displays the amount of free disk space available on the unit.
CPU Load Average
Displays the system load averages for the past 1, 5, and 15 minutes on the unit.
Memory Utilization
Displays the total real memory, the available real memory, and the percentage
of total free memory for the unit.
ContentDirector
Description
Displays a scrollable multi-line description of the unit. This field is useful for
entering data that clarifies the specific unit’s role in the Harmonic MediaGrid. To
change the description, click Change Desc.
Last Message
Displays the last message (of any type) associated with the unit.
Wink State
Displays the wink state of the unit’s light bar, either On or Off. To change the
Wink state, click the Wink button.
Wink on/off (button)
Click the Wink button to change the wink state of the ContentDirector light bar.
Reboot (button)
Click to restart the ContentDirector without removing the power supply.
Shutdown (button)
Click to shut down the ContentDirector.
NOTE: The Checkpoint schedule feature is OFF by default.
The Environment Data section appears only for the High Performance ContentDirector and displays the
following:
SSD Lifetime
Displays the percentage of wear of the solid-state drive (SSD). For a new SSD,
this will be 0% and, over time, as the SSD wears out this value will increase.
When the value reaches 95%, the SSD should be replaced.
The Events section displays the following information when an alarm event occurs:
Level
Displays the assigned severity level for an alarm event associated with a unit.
Time
Displays the date and time when the alarm event occurred.
Event
Displays the event which triggered the alarm on the unit.
Info
Provides information on each event.
Clear? (button)
Displays when the unit has an alarm condition. Resolve the cause of the alarm
condition and then click Clear to clear the alarm within the unit.
Delete (button)
Display when the unit has an alarm condition. Click to delete the event from the
list and clear that event’s Alarm icon.
Related information
Enabling and configuring scheduled balancing on page 391
Powering down a single ContentDirector
444
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
Viewing properties for a ContentBridge or High Bandwidth ContentBridge
You can view properties for a single ContentBridge or High Bandwidth ContentBridge.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentBridges section, click the Name hyperlink for the required unit to access the
Properties page.
Figure 12-9: ContentBridge Properties
Properties for a ContentBridge or High Bandwidth ContentBridge
You can view properties for a single ContentBridge or High Bandwidth ContentBridge.
In the General Information section, you can view the following.
Name
Displays the assigned name for the unit. Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid
Installation Guide for a discussion about naming conventions to follow.
Cluster Name
Displays the name assigned to this cluster.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds.
•
For a High Bandwidth ContentBridge in an HA Pair only:
◦
◦
◦
Shared IP: Displays the IP address shared by the two HA-paired High
Bandwidth ContentBridges.
Peer IP: Displays the IP address of the second High Bandwidth
ContentBridge in the HA pair.
HA State: Displays either active or shadow. If network connectivity,
power, or an essential process fails on the “active” node, the “shadow”
node then becomes “active” and takes over operations.
445
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Preferred: Displays the name of the HA-paired High Bandwidth
ContentBridge that is configured as the Preferred node. If both nodes
in an HA pair fail, in the event of recovery, the preferred node becomes
the “active” node first in order to avoid conflicts resulting from two active
nodes.
Interface Information
◦
•
◦
◦
◦
◦
Interface Displays the available interfaces for the unit.
IP Address Displays the IP address assigned to each unit’s interface.
MAC Address Displays the unique hardware number for each unit’s
interface.
MTU Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater than
1500 bytes indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
Interface Statistics,
Transfer Rate
Shows the receive and transmit rate for each interface.
Interface Counters
(since agent boot)
Shows the raw interface counters for each interface since the SNMP agent was
last booted.
•
Process Monitoring
◦
◦
Process: Displays the name of the process running on the
ContentBridge.
State: Displays the current state of the process. The states are: Running,
Stopped, or N.A (Not Applicable).
Mount Points
Displays the physical location in the directory structure where a computer puts
the files in a File System.
Status
Displays the current status of the process. States include Connected,
Connected -- Error Alarm, Connected -- Warning Alarm, or Not Responding.
Model Number
Displays the Harmonic model number for the unit.
Serial Number
Displays the manufacturer’s serial number assigned to the unit.
CPU Load Average
Displays the system load averages for the past 1, 5, and 15 minutes on the unit.
Memory Utilization
Displays the total real memory, the available real memory, and the percentage
of total free memory for the unit.
Firmware Version
Displays the version of firmware that resides in the unit’s memory.
Status Current At
Displays the most recent date and time that the page was refreshed. Note
that the page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds, unless configured
otherwise.
ContentBridge
Description
Displays a scrollable multi-line description of the unit. This field is useful for
entering data that identifies the specific unit’s role in the Harmonic MediaGrid.
Click Change Desc to edit the description.
Last Message
Displays the last message (of any type) associated with the unit.
Wink State
Displays the wink state of the unit’s light bar, either On or Off.
In the Environment section of the page, you can view the following.
446
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
3.3V Line through
5.0V Line
Displays the combined voltages present on the power supply’s outputs. The
values are displayed in volts. The valid range is also displayed. Note that
this range is not user configurable and voltage lines vary according across
ContentBridge models.
CPU Temperature
Displays the ambient temperature of air entering the ContentBridge. The value
is always displayed in degrees centigrade. The valid range is also displayed.
Note that this range is not user configurable.
Motherboard
Temperature
Displays the temperature of the air above the ContentBridge’s motherboard.
The value is always displayed in degrees centigrade. The valid range is also
displayed. Note that this range is not user configurable.
Fan 1 through Fan 6
Displays the speed (in RPM) of each of the ContentBridge’s fans. The valid
range is also displayed. Note that this range is not user configurable.
SMART Errors
Displays the number of SMART Errors associated with each disk drive.
Wink on/off (button)
Click the Wink button to change the wink state of the ContentBridge light bar.
Reboot (button)
Click to restart the ContentBridge without removing the power supply.
Shutdown (button)
Click to shut down the ContentBridge.
The Events section displays the following information when an alarm event
occurs:
Level
Displays the assigned severity level for an alarm event associated with a unit.
Time
Displays the date and time when the alarm event occurred.
Event
Displays the event which triggered the alarm on the unit.
Info
Provides information on each event.
Clear? (button)
Displays when the unit has an alarm condition. Resolve the cause of the alarm
condition and then click Clear to clear the alarm within the unit.
Delete (button)
Display when the unit has an alarm condition. Click to delete the event from the
list and clear that event’s Alarm icon.
Related information
Powering down a single ContentBridge
Viewing properties for a network switch
You can view properties for a single network switch.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Network Switches sections, click the IP Address hyperlink for the required unit to access the
Properties page.
447
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Figure 12-10: Network Switch Properties
Properties for a network switch
You can view properties for a single network switch.
In the General Information section, you can view the following.
Name
Displays the assigned name for the unit. Refer to the Harmonic MediaGrid
Installation Guide for a discussion about naming conventions to follow.
IP Address
Shows the assigned IP address for the unit.
System Up Time
Displays the time the unit has been “up and running” in days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and fractions of seconds.
Hardware Model
Displays the unit’s model number.
Vendor Model
Number
Displays the vendor name and model number.
Description
Displays a scrollable multi-line description of the unit. This field is useful for
entering data that clarifies the specific unit’s role in the Harmonic MediaGrid.
Firmware Version
Displays the version of firmware that resides in the unit’s memory.
•
Interface Information
◦
◦
◦
Interface: Displays the available interfaces for the unit.
IP Address: Displays the IP address assigned to each unit’s interface.
MAC Address: Displays the unique hardware number for each unit’s
interface.
448
Viewing properties for individual Harmonic MediaGrid components
◦
MTU Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater than
1500 bytes indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
Status
Displays the current network status for the selected unit. This field is used
primarily for diagnostic troubleshooting.
Status Current At
Displays the most recent date and time that the page was refreshed. Note
that the page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds, unless configured
otherwise.
Last Message
Displays the last message (of any type) associated with the unit.
The Events section displays the following information when an alarm event
occurs.
Level
Displays the assigned severity level for an alarm event associated with a unit.
Time
Displays the date and time when the alarm event occurred.
Event
Displays the event which triggered the alarm on the unit.
Info
Provides information on each event.
Clear? (button)
Displays when the unit has an alarm condition. Resolve the cause of the alarm
condition and then click Clear to clear the alarm within the unit.
Delete (button)
Display when the unit has an alarm condition. Click to delete the event from the
list and clear that event’s Alarm icon.
Viewing statistics for clients in Clusters
You can view statistics for all clients in a cluster.
The Client Statistics page enables the SystemManager to list all clients connected to a Harmonic
MediaGrid, and provides a snapshot of the current bandwidth usage on a per-client basis.
NOTE: Client Statistics shows metrics over a variable time interval.The default time
interval is two minutes, and the metrics show the rates over that period only. In some
situations, the general monitoring loop may be longer, which could make Client Statistics
cover four minutes or longer. This can occur in large Harmonic MediaGrid systems with
many down devices.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the Clusters sections, click the Name hyperlink for the required cluster to access the Properties
page.
3. Click View Client Statistics to access the Client Statistics page, a sample is displayed in the
following figure.
449
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Figure 12-11: Client Statistics
Client statistics
You can view data for all clients connected to all ContentServers in a cluster.
Client Name
Shows the name assigned to the client.
Client IP Address
Shows the IP address of the client communicating with the ContentDirector.
Client Port
Shows the client's source port. This field is filled in by the ContentDirector (by
querying the RPC transport for the client's source port).
Client Type
Shows the OS type running on the client.
Client Version
Shows the OS version running on the client.
ContentDirector
Shows the name of the ContentDirector.
User Name
Shows the name of the user authenticated with this session.
The remaining fields show the delta values for the last five minutes of sampling.
Received
Shows the data received from the client.
Transmitted
Shows the data transmitted to the client.
Received in Error
Shows the number of bytes received which contained an error.
Transmitted in Error
Shows the number of bytes transmitted which contained an error.
Transmit Timeouts
Shows the number of timeouts which occurred.
Connection Errors
Shows the number of connection errors during the connection process.
with ContentDirector
Connection Errors
with ContentServer
Shows the number of connection errors during the connection process.
Viewing drive properties
On the Drive Properties page for a ContentServer or ContentStore drive, you can view general
information about a specific drive as well as perform drive-related tasks.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
450
Viewing drive properties
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the Drives section of the page, identify the drive you wish to view and then click the link in the
GUID column. This opens the Drive Properties page, shown in the following figure.
Figure 12-12: Viewing Drive Properties
Properties for a drive
The Drive Properties page provides detailed information for a drive.
Status
Lists the status of the drive:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alive: The drive is available.
Dead: The drive is not responding.
Missing: The drive is not part of the system.
Unavailable: The drive is not currently available.
Formatting: The drive is being formatted.
Repairing: The drive is being repaired.
Rebuilding: The RAID set is being rebuilt.
Unknown: SystemManager cannot identify the drive state.
451
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
•
Alive, Hot Spare: The drive is available and assigned as a Hot Spare.
Last Message
This line displays the last error message (generated by the SystemManager)
relating to the drive.
Model
Lists the model number of the drive.
Manufacturer
Lists the name of the drive’s manufacturer.
Serial Number
Lists the serial number of the selected drive.
Firmware Rev. Level
Lists the firmware revision level of the selected drive.
Disk GUID
Lists the specific GUID (Global Unique Identifier) of the selected drive.
In the Disk Statistics section you can view:
Disk Size
Shows the disk size (in GB) of the selected drive.
Block Size
Displays the block size of the selected drive.
Blocks
Shows the number of blocks on the selected drive.
SMART Errors
Shows the number of SMART warnings. This value is not affected by bad block
repairs. If this value is greater than zero, the SystemManager displays a Critical
level alarm (red) and the drive should be replaced as soon as possible.
Hardware Errors
Shows the number of hardware errors reported. This value is not affected
by bad block repairs. If this value is greater than zero, the SystemManager
displays a Critical level alarm (red) and the drive should be replaced as soon as
possible. .
Login Failures
Shows the persistent number of login failures detected. This value is
not affected by bad block repairs. If this value is greater than zero, the
SystemManager displays a Failure level alarm (orange).
Bad Blocks
Shows the total number of bad blocks. This value increases whenever a new
bad block is detected and decreases when bad blocks are repaired. If this
value is greater than zero, the SystemManager displays a Failure level alarm
(orange).
Read Errors
Shows the total number of read errors that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks, but is reset by reformatting the
disk. If this value is greater than zero, the SystemManager displays a Failure
level alarm (orange).
Write Errors
Shows the total number of write errors that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks. If this value is greater than zero,
the SystemManager displays a Failure level alarm (orange).
Read Timeouts
Shows the total number of read timeouts that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks. If this value is greater than zero,
the SystemManager displays a Failure level alarm (orange).
Write Timeouts
Shows the total number of write timeouts that have occurred on this drive. This
number is not reset by repairing bad blocks. If this value is greater than zero,
the SystemManager displays a Failure level alarm (orange).
Blocks Repaired
Shows the number of bad blocks that have been repaired. This number
increases when bad blocks are repaired.
452
Viewing RAID set information
Aggregate Errors
Shows the number of errors represented by the current bad block list. This
number decreases if bad blocks are repaired.
In the Miscellaneous section you can view:
RAID set
Click the RAID Set hyperlink to access the RAID Utilities page.
Position in RAID set
Displays the location of the selected drive in relation to the RAID set. For
example, if there are eight drives in a RAID set, the first drive would be in
position 0 (zero).
Wink On (button)
Click to wink the drive.
Wink Off (button)
Click to turn off winking.
Fail Drive (button)
Click to remove the drive from the RAID set.
Make Hot Spare/
Clear Hot Spare
(button)
Click Make Hot Spare to assign the drive to be a Hot Spare. This changes the
status of the drive to “Alive, Hot Spare.” Note that when you make a hot spare,
a new Clear Hot Spare button appears. Click Clear Hot Spare to clear the
Hot Spare designation (for example, if you wish to use the selected drive as a
normal part of a RAID set).
Done (button)
Click to save any changes and return to the ContentServer/ContentStore
Properties page.
NOTE: Drives which report SMART warnings, hardware errors,
and some persistent login failures will be removed from the RAID
set provided that: A. The RAID set has a hot spare, B. No other
drives in the RAID set have bad blocks and C. The RAID set is
not already compromised or in the process of rebuilding.
Related information
Making a hot spare on page 406
Clearing a hot spare on page 407
Viewing RAID set information
On the RAID Utilities page you can view general information about a particular RAID set and also
perform a variety of tasks including changing the RAID set’s name, adding and removing drives from the
RAID set, manually starting a “rebuild.”
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentServers/ContentStores section, click the Name hyperlink for the required
ContentServer or ContentStore to access the Properties page.
3. In the RAID sets section of the page, click the link in the GUID column for the RAID set you wish to
view. The RAID Utilities page appears, as shown in the following figure.
453
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Figure 12-13: RAID Utilities Page
RAID Utilities fields
The RAID Utilities page provides detailed information about a RAID set.
Name
Displays the name of the RAID set.
Status
Displays the current status of the selected RAID set.
Last Message
This line displays the last error message (generated by the SystemManager)
that deals with the selected RAID set.
Type
Displays the RAID set type.
Rebuild Status
Displays the status of the RAID set rebuild.
GUID
Displays the GUID of the complete RAID set.
<X> Drives in this
RAID Set
Displays information on each drive in the RAID set. The left-hand column
displays the GUID for each drive, and a link to the Drive Properties page for
each
Wink On (button)
Click to wink all drives in the RAID set.
Wink Off (button)
Click to turn off winking for all drives in the RAID set.
Set Online/Offline
(button)
Click to set the RAID set either online or offline. When the RAID set is offline,
the drives cannot be accessed.
Start Rebuild
(button)
Click to manually start a “rebuild” after a drive failure has occurred, or after a
drive has been replaced.
Suspend Rebuild
(button)
Click to manually suspend a “rebuild” after the rebuild process has been started.
Continue Rebuild
(button)
Click to manually continue a “rebuild” after the rebuild process has been
suspended.
454
Viewing Harmonic MediaGrid performance statistics
Abort Rebuild
(button)
Click to manually abort a “rebuild” after the rebuild process has been started..
Done
Click to save any changes on the RAID Utilities page and return to the
ContentServer or ContentStore Properties page.
Related information
Restarting a RAID set rebuild on page 156
Stopping a RAID set rebuild in progress on page 156
Viewing Harmonic MediaGrid performance statistics
You can view performance statistics for your Harmonic MediaGrid system.
1. From the Configuration tab in SystemManager, click the Performance icon under the Harmonic
MediaGrid heading in the left-hand column.
NOTE: In order to view the Performance Monitoring feature of SystemManager from a
client PC, you must have Adobe Flash Player* installed.
Harmonic MediaGrid Performance statistics appear in a separate browser window.
2. View statistics for a component or group of components as follows.
•
•
•
•
•
Clusters: Click the All Clusters folder to view performance data for all the clusters in your
Harmonic MediaGrid System. For a statistics on a single cluster, in the left-hand column, click the
cluster that you wish to view.
ContentDirectors: Click the individual cluster in the left-hand column, and then click the
ContentDirectors folder. To view statistics for an individual ContentDirector, double-click the icon
for a single ContentDirector in the left-hand column.
ContentServers: Click the individual cluster in the left-hand column, and then click the
ContentServers folder. To view statistics for an individual ContentServer, double-click the icon for
the ContentServer you want to view.
ContentBridges: Click the individual cluster in the left-hand column, and then click the
ContentBridges folder. To view statistics for an individual ContentBridge, in the left-hand column,
double-click the icon for the ContentBridge you want to view.
Disk drives: To view statistics for all disk drives in a cluster, click the individual cluster in the lefthand column, and then click the Disk Drives icon. To view the details for an individual disk drive in
the preview pane, click that disk in the Content pane.
455
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Performance statistics user interface
The user interface for Harmonic MediaGrid Performance monitoring consists a number of elements.
Figure 12-14: Navigating the Harmonic MediaGrid Performance Statistics
Banner
includes the product name, the name of the user, and the following menus:
•
•
Tools: The Tools menu allows you to show or hide the Preview Pane and
clear cookies which may accumulate if the Performance Monitoring window
is opened frequently.
Help: The Help menu provides the following functions:
◦
◦
Help: Displays the SystemManager online help.
About: Displays the SystemManager version information.
Expandable
Directory
In the left-hand column, it allows you to view performance statistics
for all Clusters at the top level, individual clusters at the next level, all
ContentDirectors, ContentServers, ContentBridges, and disk drives within
a cluster at the next level, and at the lowest level, details for individual
ContentDirectors, ContentServers, ContentBridges, and disk drives. The
selected item is indicated with a light gray bar.
Content Pane
shows the performance data in graphs and/or tables for the selected item. The
Data Section is scroll-able both vertically and horizontally.
NOTE: The columns in the Content Pane can be resized.
456
Viewing Harmonic MediaGrid performance statistics
Data Point
appears when you move your cursor over an element in a performance graph
and shows details about a certain point in that graph.
Title Bar
shows details for the selected item from the directory in the left-hand column.
Toolbar
appears above the Content Pane, and depending on the selected component,
may contain buttons for basic tasks that can be performed on the current page
including refreshing the data. The following buttons and menus may appear in
the Toolbar:
•
•
•
•
The Refresh icon can be used to refresh your system information.
The Details menu provides different ways to display and identify the
information in the Content Pane. The available views are Details,
Thumbnails, Tile, Icons, and List.
The Details icon, next to the Details menu, provides a way to customize the
information shown in the Content Pane. Click the Details icon to open the
Choose Details dialog box. All details are selected by default. If you wish to
remove a detail from view, clear that option, and then click OK.
The Refresh Interval menu allows you to select the frequency with which
the browser refreshes. You can choose between Disabled, Every 30
seconds, Every 1 minute, or Every 5 minutes.
Preview Pane
appears when an individual ContentDirector, ContentServer, ContentBridge,
or disk drive is selected from the Content Pane. This pane shows detailed
information for the selected component.
Footer Information
at the bottom of the page, it displays the time date at which the page was last
refreshed, and in the right-hand corner, displays the total number of clusters in
your system.
Performance statistics for clusters
The All Clusters view provides performance data for all the clusters in your Harmonic MediaGrid System.
NOTE: You may need to scroll to the right to view all the graphs on this page, and scroll
down to view all the clusters.
Storage Utilization
This graph displays the following information:
•
•
•
The blue line indicates the total disk space in TB used for each cluster.
The orange line indicates the Warning level of storage usage for this cluster.
If this Warning level is reached, a corresponding Warning alarm will be
generated in SystemManager. If that occurs, Harmonic recommends that
you add more storage to your system.
The red line indicates the Critical level of storage usage for this cluster. If
this Critical level is reached, a corresponding Critical alarm will be generated
in SystemManager. If that occurs, Harmonic recommends that you add more
storage to your system.
Bandwidth Utilization This graph displays the following information:
•
•
•
The blue line indicates the average bandwidth in MB/s used for Reads.
The green line indicates the average bandwidth in MB/s used for Writes.
The pink line indicates the average bandwidth in MB/s used for ReReplication.
457
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
•
•
•
Client Statistics
The yellow line indicates the Total bandwidth used for reads, writes, and
replications in an active cluster.
The orange line indicates the Warning level of bandwidth usage for this
cluster. If this Warning level is reached, a corresponding Warning alarm will
be generated in SystemManager.
The red line indicates the Critical level of bandwidth usage for this cluster. If
this Critical level is reached, a corresponding Critical alarm will be generated
in SystemManager.
This graph displays the following information:
•
•
•
The blue line indicates the receive packets in MB/s of all clients accessing
the cluster.
The green line indicates the transmit packets in MB/s of all clients accessing
the cluster.
The pink line indicates the error packets in MB/s of all clients accessing the
cluster.
NOTE: To view specific data points in a graph, move your
cursor over the element you wish to view.
The All Clusters page refreshes automatically every three minutes.
Performance statistics for ContentDirectors
The ContentDirectors page provides statistics for all ContentDirectors in a cluster.
The following summary information is displayed for each ContentDirector:
Name
The assigned name of the ContentDirector.
IP Address1
Displays one of the ContentDirector’s IP addresses.
IP Address2
Displays one of the ContentDirector’s IP addresses.
Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit.
Status
Current network connection status.
Model Number
The manufacturer’s model number assigned to the unit.
Serial Number
The manufacturer’s serial number assigned to the unit.
CPU Load
This displays the system load average for the past 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 15
minutes.
Memory Util
The total memory of the ContentDirector, and the total available memory in KB.
When viewing statistics for an individual ContentDirector, you can view
additional values.
Under the Network Interfaces tab, the following information is displayed:
Name
Lists each Ethernet card in the ContentDirector.
IP Address
The IP address assigned to each Ethernet card.
MAC Address
The unique MAC address for each Ethernet card.
458
Viewing Harmonic MediaGrid performance statistics
MTU
Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater than 1500 bytes
indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
Receive Rate (MB/s)
The receive rate in megabytes per second for each interface.
Transmit Rate (MB/s) The transmit rate in megabytes per second for each interface.
Under the Local FileSystems tab, the following information is displayed:
Name
The name of the local file system.
Total Space
The total local storage space
Used Space
The amount of local storage space used.
Available Space
The amount of local space available.
Used Percent
Percentage of storage space used.
The Checkpoint tab provides the following information:
Last Successful
Checkpoint
The date and time of the last successful checkpoint.
Last Failed
Checkpoint
The date and time of the last failed checkpoint.
Last Attempted
Checkpoint
The date and time of the last attempted checkpoint.
Next Checkpoint
The date and time of the next scheduled checkpoint.
Start Day
The start day of the scheduled checkpoint.
Start Time
The start time of the scheduled checkpoint.
Interval
The interval between checkpoints.
State
Displays whether checkpoints are enabled or disabled.
Related information
About checkpoints and scheduling checkpoints on page 369
Performance statistics for ContentServers
The ContentServers page provides statistics for all ContentServers in a cluster.
The following summary information is displayed for each ContentServer:
Name
The assigned name of the ContentServer shown in the following format: <name
of cluster>:<name of ContentServer>.
Operational Status
Displays the current network connection status.
IP Address1
Displays one of the ContentServer’s IP addresses.
IP Address2
Displays one of the ContentServer’s IP addresses.
Version
Version of firmware currently installed.
Diskspace
The total disk space and total available disk space in TB.
459
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
CPU Load
Displays the system load average for the past 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 15
minutes.
Memory Util
The total memory of the ContentServer, and the total available memory in KB.
Reads
Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “read”
requests received by the ContentServer.
Writes
Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for drive “write”
requests received by the ContentServer
Re-Replications
Displays aggregate bandwidth usage in megabytes per second for re-replication
requests received by the ContentServer.
When viewing statistics for an individual ContentServer, you can view additional
values..
Under the Network Interfaces tab, the following information is displayed:
Name
Lists the name of each Ethernet card in the ContentServer.
IP Address
The IP address assigned to each Ethernet card.
MAC Address
The unique MAC address for each Ethernet card.
MTU
Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater than 1500 bytes
indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
Receive Rate (MB/s)
The receive rate in megabytes per second for each interface.
Transmit Rate (MB/s) The transmit rate in megabytes per second for each interface.
Under the Disk Drives tab, the following information is displayed:
Name
Displays the slot ID, which is the numeric identifier that represents the physical
position for each disk drive in the ContentServer.
Operational Status
Displays the current operational status for each disk drive.
Firmware Version
Displays the firmware version within this drive.
Total Space
Displays the total space available for each drive.
Used Space
Displays the total disk space in use for each disk drive.
Smart Errors
Displays the number of SMART Errors associated with each disk drive.
Slice Count
Displays the total number of slices in each disk drive.
Bad Slices
Displays the number of bad slices for each drive.
ContentServer Name Displays the name of the ContentServer.
Cluster Name
Displays the name of the Cluster.
Performance statistics for ContentBridges
The ContentBridges page provides statistics for all ContentBridges in a cluster.
The following summary information is displayed for each ContentBridge:
460
Viewing Harmonic MediaGrid performance statistics
Name
Displays the assigned name for the unit.
IP Address1
Displays one of the ContentBridge’s IP addresses.
IP Adress2
Displays one of the ContentBridge’s IP addresses.
Version
Version of firmware version currently installed on the unit.
Status
Current network connection status.
Model Number
The manufacturer’s model number assigned to the unit.
Serial Number
The manufacturer’s serial number assigned to the unit.
CPU Load
The system load average for the past 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 15 minutes.
Memory Util
The total memory of the ContentBridge, and the total available memory in KB.
When viewing statistics for an individual ContentBridge, you can view additional
values.
In the Network Interfaces section, the following information is displayed:
Name
Lists each Ethernet card in the ContentBridge.
IP Address
The IP address assigned to each Ethernet card.
MAC Address
The unique MAC address for each Ethernet card.
MTU
Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater than 1500 bytes
indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
Receive Rate (MB/s)
The receive rate in megabytes per second for each interface.
Transmit Rate (MB/s) The transmit rate in megabytes per second for each interface.
Mount Points
This section lists each of the mount points for the selected ContentBridge. A
mount point is the physical location in the directory structure where files are
stored in the file system.
Performance statistics for disk drives
The Disk Drives page provides statistics for all disk drives in a cluster.
The following summary information is displayed for each disk drive:
Name
displays the name of the disk drive in the following format: <name of
cluster>:<name of ContentServer>:<slot ID>
Operational Status
Displays the current operational status for each disk drive.
Firmware Version
Displays the firmware version for each disk drive. This information is used
primarily for debugging purposes.
Total Space
Displays the total space available for each drive.
Used Space
Displays the total disk space in use for each disk drive.
Smart Errors
Displays the number of SMART errors associated with each disk drive
Slice Count
Displays the total number of slices in each disk drive.
Bad Slices
Displays the number of bad slices for each drive.
461
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
NOTE: When the data integrity of a slice is compromised, it
is considered a “bad slice.”. This could be due to corruption in
data content, missing data, or if the slice size is different from
expected value.
ContentServer Name Name of the associated ContentServer for each disk drive.
•
Cluster Name. Name of the associated cluster for each disk drive.
Viewing and clearing alarms and events for Harmonic
MediaGrid components
You can view and/or clean alarms for Harmonic MediaGrid components.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches
page.
2. In the ContentDirectors, ContentServers, and/or ContentBridge section(s), click the Name hyperlink
to access the unit’s Properties page.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the page to view any alarms or events associated with the selected unit as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 12-15: Alarm or Event Properties
4. If desired, perform the following actions:
•
•
•
•
Click Clear All to clear all alarms in the list, but retain the individual events. This action also clears
the Alarm icon from the upper right corner of the user interface.
Click Delete All to remove all alarms from the list and clear the Alarm icon.
Click Clear to clear an individual event’s alarm and retain the event in the list. This action clears
the Alarm icon for that event, but the icon may continue to blink if other alarms are active.
Click Delete to delete the event from the list and clear that event’s Alarm icon. The icon may
continue to blink if other alarms are active.
To receive e-mailed logs displaying the status of a selected ContentDirector, enable and configure
log forwarding.
Related information
Enabling and configuring log forwarding on page 392
462
Performing management and troubleshooting on a Harmonic MediaGrid
Performing management and troubleshooting on a Harmonic
MediaGrid
SystemManager provides various ways to perform system management, troubleshooting, and monitoring
tasks on a Harmonic MediaGrid.
Before you begin
•
•
•
Use the Dell™ OpenManage™ utility (installed with SystemManager Release 5.1 and later) to perform
RAID and Disk maintenance.
Use the SystemManager to discover Harmonic MediaGrid units and to send alarms if communication
is lost between the units.
Use the HP ProCurve Switch utility for switch management.
Accessing the Dell OpenManage utility
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Accessing the network switch utility
Accessing the Dell OpenManage utility
You can access a the Dell OpenManage for some maintenance tasks.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches page.
2. In the ContentDirector section, click the System Management hyperlink.
NOTE: On some SystemManager Platforms, a warning dialog appears when
attempting to access the Dell™ OpenManage™ interface for Harmonic MediaGrid via
the System Management links. Ignore the warning and proceed to the OpenManage
GUI by clicking Continue.
The Dell OpenManage Log in page opens.
Figure 12-16: OpenManage Login
3. Log in with the following user name and password:
•
•
User name: ovnuser
Password: OVN@SvCaUsa
The Dell OpenManage window is displayed.
463
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 12: Harmonic MediaGrid monitoring and troubleshooting
Figure 12-17: Open Manage Health Window
4. On the left hand navigation column, navigate to the RAID Controller at:
System > Storage > PERC 4e/Di (Embedded) > Channel 0 (RAID) > Backplane > Array
Disks
and/or:
System > Storage > PERC 4e/Di (Embedded) > Channel 0 (RAID) > Virtual Disks
5. Click the Help tab at the top of each page to view information about the page and execute disk related
tasks.
Accessing the network switch utility
You can use the network switch utility to manage your network switch.
1. Click the Servers & Switches icon on the Configuration tab to access the Servers & Switches page.
2. In the Network Switches section, click the Switch Management hyperlink.
For certain switches the Log in page may open. If it does, enter the following information in the Log in
fields:
•
•
User name: ovnuser
Password: OVN@SvCaUsa
The Switch Management window is displayed.
464
Performing management and troubleshooting on a Harmonic MediaGrid
Figure 12-18: HP ProCurve Switch Window
The switch management window provides information such as system status details, basic
network details, alarms, and a device view showing active ports.
NOTE: The names and descriptions of alerts in the Alert Log section of the Status
tab may differ from the same alarms listed by SystemManager. To identify alerts
that may correspond to network switch alarms reported by SystemManager, search
the Alert Log for events occurring in the same time frame as the SystemManager
alarms.
Refer to the documentation that ships with the your network switch for additional information on the
functionality of this utility.
465
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Part IV
Media Application Server
Media Application Server
•
Media Application Server configuration
466
Chapter 13
Media Application Server configuration
This chapter provides procedures for managing, monitoring, and troubleshooting a Media Application
Server (MAS) system using the SystemManager application.
NOTE: Refer to the Media Application Server Installation and Configuration Guide for
detailed instructions on installing or upgrading an MAS System. For information on using
your MAS system, refer to the Media Application Server User Guide.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Viewing all MAS clusters and servers in a system
Viewing properties for a single MAS cluster
Viewing properties for a single MAS server
Opening the MAS portal
Viewing MAS log files
About management and troubleshooting on MAS systems
Accessing Dell OpenManage
Viewing all MAS clusters and servers in a system
View all MAS clusters in your system.
Click the Configuration Tab at the top of the SystemManager page, and then click the Servers icon
in the MAS section of the left-hand column to display the MAS Clusters page.
467
Chapter 13: Media Application Server configuration
Figure 13-1: Viewing MAS Clusters
Properties for all MAS clusters and servers
In the MAS Clusters section of the page, you can view details for all MAS clusters in your system.
Name (Alias)
Name assigned to the cluster.
#Nodes
Number MAS nodes in each cluster.
Notification Enabled
Indicates whether notifications regarding changes to devices and/or file systems
in your network are being sent from SystemManager to the MAS server.
Wink Status
Shows whether or not wink mode is on or off. Note that changing the wink
status for a cluster changes the wink status of all the nodes in that cluster.
Select
Click to select a cluster.
Wink On (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected clusters to On.
Wink Off (button)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected clusters to Off.
Select All (button)
Click to select all the clusters.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all the clusters.
In the MAS Servers section, you can view the following Server information.
Name
Displays the name of the MAS Server. Click the hyperlink to access the MAS
Server Properties page.
IP Address
Displays the IP address for the eth0 Ethernet interface.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the Server.
Network Status
Displays the MAS Server’s current network status, authentication status and
security access level, including “Connected,” and “Not Responding.”
468
Viewing properties for a single MAS cluster
System Up Time
Displays the time the MAS Server has been “up and running” in days, hours,
minutes, seconds and fractions of seconds.
Node Type
Displays the type of MAS node that applies to each server, including
“appnode” (application node) or “dbnode” (database node).
Node Status
Displays the status of the MAS node, including whether a node is configured in
standalone or HA (high availability) mode, and whether a node is configured as
an active or standby server.
Virtual IP
Displays the virtual IP address for each server.
Launch
For application nodes, you can click one of the following three icons (from left
to right). Note that for database nodes, only the System Management icon is
available.
•
•
•
MAS Portal: Click to launch the MAS Portal for your MAS system.
View Logs: Click to open the MAS log files.
System Management: Click to open the Dell™ OpenManage™ utility to
perform system management, troubleshooting, and monitoring tasks.
Wink Status
shows whether the Wink function is enabled on the MAS Server. When Wink is
On, front and back panel LEDs flash to identify an MAS Server. Click the Wink
buttons at the bottom of the section to turn Wink On/Off.
Select
Click to select the server.
Wink On/Off
(buttons)
Click to change the wink status of all the selected servers.
Select All (button)
Click to select all the servers.
Clear (button)
Click to deselect all the servers.
Viewing properties for a single MAS cluster
You can view properties of a single MAS cluster.
1. Click the Configuration tab at the top of the SystemManager page, and then click the MAS Servers
icon in the left-hand column to access the MAS Clusters page.
2. Click the name of the MAS Cluster that you wish to view. The MAS Cluster Properties page appears,
as shown in the following figure.
469
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 13: Media Application Server configuration
Figure 13-2: Viewing MAS Cluster Properties
The following cluster information is displayed.
◦
◦
◦
Name: shows the name assigned to the cluster. To change the name, type the new name in the
Alias field and click Change Alias.
Notification Enabled: Indicates whether notifications regarding changes to devices and/or file
systems in your network are being sent from SystemManager to the MAS server. To enable or
disable notification, click the Enable or Disable button.
NOTE: Harmonic recommends that you keep Notification enabled for your MAS
clusters.
#Nodes: Shows the number of MAS nodes in this cluster.
Viewing properties for a single MAS server
You can view the properties of a single MAS server.
1. Click the Configuration tab at the top of the SystemManager page, and then click the MAS Servers
icon in the left-hand column to access the MAS Servers page.
2. Click the name of the MAS Server that you wish to view. The MAS Server Properties page appears,
as shown in the following figure.
470
Viewing properties for a single MAS server
Figure 13-3: MAS Server Properties
Properties for a MAS server
The MAS Server Properties page displays details for a single MAS server.
Name
Displays the assigned name for the component.
Mode
Displays whether the server is configured in standalone or HA (high availability)
mode.
System Up Time
Displays the time the component has been “up and running” in days, hours,
minutes, seconds, and fractions of seconds.
Hardware Model
Displays the Harmonic model number for the component.
Serial Number
Displays the manufacturer’s serial number assigned to the component.
Firmware Version
Displays the version of firmware that resides in the component’s memory.
Interface Information •
•
Interface Displays the available interfaces for the unit.
IP Address: Displays the IP address assigned to each unit’s interface.
471
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 13: Media Application Server configuration
•
•
MAC Address: Displays the unique hardware number for each unit’s
interface.
MTU Shows the maximum size of Ethernet packets. An MTU greater than
1500 bytes indicates that Jumbo Frames are enabled.
Interface Statistics
Shows the receive and transmit rate for each interface
Interface Counters
Shows the raw interface counters since the SNMP agent was last booted.
Local Disk Storage
Shows the name of each file system (partition), as well as the Total Space,
Used Space, Available Space, and percentage of available space used, for
each file system.
Process Monitoring
Shows the state of each of the MAS services.
Status
Displays the current network status for the selected component. This field is
used primarily for diagnostic troubleshooting.
Status current at
Displays the most recent date and time that the page was refreshed. Note
that the page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds, unless configured
otherwise.
CPU Load Average
Displays the system load averages for the past 1, 5, and 15 minutes on the
component.
Memory Utilization
Displays the total real memory, the available real memory, and the percentage
of total free memory for the component.
MAS Server
Description
Displays a scrollable multi-line description of the component. This field is useful
for entering data that clarifies the specific component’s role in a MAS System.
Click Change Desc to enter or revise data.
Last Message
Displays the last message (of any type) associated with the component.
Wink State
Displays the wink state of the component’s light bar, either On or Off.
Wink On/Off (button) Click to change the wink state of the MAS Server.
Reboot (button)
Click to reboot the MAS Server without removing power from the unit.
Shutdown (button)
Click to shut down the MAS server. When the status of the MAS server changes
to Not Responding, you can power down the server. Refer to “Shutting down
the Server” in the Media Application Server User Guide.
The Events section displays the following information when an alarm event
occurs.
Level
Displays the assigned severity level for an alarm event associated with a unit.
Time
Displays the date and time when the alarm event occurred.
Event
Displays the event which triggered the alarm on the unit.
Info
Provides information on each event.
Clear? (button)
Displays when the unit has an alarm condition. Resolve the cause of the alarm
condition and then click Clear to clear the alarm within the unit.
Delete (button)
Display when the unit has an alarm condition. Click to delete the event from the
list and clear that event’s Alarm icon.
472
Opening the MAS portal
Opening the MAS portal
You can open the MAS portal from the clusters page.
1. From the MAS Clusters page, in the MAS Servers section of the page, in the Launch column, click
the MAS Portal icon, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 13-4: Launch the MAS Portal
A new browser window appears and prompts for a user name and password.
2. Enter the MAS user name and password in the dialog box.
3. Click OK to log in.
NOTE: If you are logging in for the first time, you will be required to enter the license
key. Enter the license key provided by Harmonic and click OK.
Viewing MAS log files
You can view the MAS log files from the clusters page.
•
From the MAS Clusters page, in the MAS Servers section of the page, in the Launch column, click
the View Logs icon, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 13-5: Viewing the MAS log files
A new browser window appears, which contains links to each of the log files, as shown in the following
figure.
473
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Chapter 13: Media Application Server configuration
Figure 13-6: MAS log files
About management and troubleshooting on MAS systems
SystemManager provides system management, troubleshooting, and monitoring for your MAS system.
•
•
Use the Dell™ OpenManage™ utility for RAID and Disk maintenance on MAS Systems. See
“Accessing Dell OpenManage” for additional information.
Use the SystemManager alarm function to get notification when environmental parameters, such as
temperature or fan speeds on MAS Servers reach threshold levels.
Accessing Dell OpenManage
You can use Dell OpenManage :
1. Click the Configuration Tab at the top of the SystemManager page, and then click the MAS Servers
icon in the left-hand column to open the MAS Clusters page.
Figure 13-7: Accessing Dell OpenManage
The first time you attempt to access the Log in page, you will see a security certificate warning. Click
Continue to this website (not recommended) to access the Log in page. You will not be presented
with this warning in future sessions
474
Accessing Dell OpenManage
Figure 13-8: OpenManage Log in
NOTE: On some SystemManager Platforms, a warning dialog appears when
attempting to access the Dell™ OpenManage™ interface for ProXchange via the
System Management links. Ignore the warning and proceed to the OpenManage GUI
by clicking Continue.
2. Log in with the user name and default password for the root account.
The Dell OpenManage window appears as shown in the following figure.
Figure 13-9: OpenManage Window
3. Click the Help tab at the top of each page to view information about the page and execute disk
related tasks.
Related information
Opening the MAS portal on page 473
475
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
Appendix A
Harmonic Technical Assistance Center contact information
A list of phone numbers, e-mail addresses, and important links for the Harmonic Technical Assistance
Center (TAC).
Table A-1: Harmonic Technical Assistance Center phone numbers and email addresses
Region
Telephone Technical
Support
Americas
888.673.4896
(888.MPEG.TWO)
408.490.6477
support@harmonicinc.com
Europe, the Middle East and
Africa (EMEA)
+44.1252.555.450
emeasupport@harmonicinc.com
India
+91.120.498.3199
apacsupport@harmonicinc.com
Russia
+7.495.926.4608
rusupport@harmonicinc.com
China
+86.10.6569.5580
chinasupport@harmonicinc.com
Japan
+81.3.5614.0524
japansupport@harmonicinc.com
Asia Pacific (APAC) – Other
Territories
+852.3184.0045
+65.6542.0050
apacsupport@harmonicinc.com
Report an issue online
https://www.harmonicinc.com/service-support/support/
Harmonic support website
http://www.harmonicinc.com/content/technical-support
Software download location for Cable Edge products
ftp://ftp.harmonicinc.com
Contact Harmonic Technical Publications
techdocs@harmonicinc.com
•
Email
Harmonic corporate contact information
476
Harmonic corporate contact information
Harmonic corporate contact information
Phone numbers and addresses for the corporate office.
Harmonic corporate address
4300 North First Street
San Jose, CA 95134
U.S.A.
Harmonic corporate telephone numbers
Tel. 1.800.788.1330 (from the U.S. and Canada)
Tel. +1.408.542.2500 (outside the U.S. and Canada)
Fax.+1.408.542.2511
477
SystemManager 6.7 User Guide
www.harmonicinc.com
Copyright © 2017 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.